JP7088054B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. For example, when a winner is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit that can change a pattern or the like that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine, and a directing means such as a light emitting unit that can change a single color or a light emitting color. By changing the display mode of the effect means, the effect of the effect during the game is enhanced (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-126296

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game by increasing the effect of the above-mentioned staging means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has a first staging means for performing a first staging with light emitted from at least a predetermined direction as the game progresses, and the first staging means. The second effect means, which is provided on the predetermined direction side and is different from the first effect as the game progresses, and which performs the second effect of emitting light, and the first effect by the first effect means. When the second effect is started by the second effect means during execution, the first effect reduction is performed by reducing the effect range of the first effect during a predetermined period during the execution of the second effect. A means and a reduction canceling means for canceling the reduction of the effect range of the first effect by the first effect reduction means after the end of the predetermined period are provided.

According to the game machine according to claim 1, a first effect means for performing a first effect by light emitted from at least a predetermined direction as the game progresses, and a first effect means provided on the predetermined direction side of the first effect means. The second effect means for performing the second effect of emitting light, which is different from the first effect as the game progresses, and the first effect being executed by the first effect means. When the second effect is started by the second effect means, the first effect reducing means for reducing the effect range of the first effect during a predetermined period during the execution of the second effect, and the predetermined effect. It is provided with a reduction release means for canceling the reduction of the effect range of the first effect by the first effect reduction means after the end of the period. This has the effect that the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram which showed the symbol arrangement arranged in each reel of a drum display device. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of the board back unit. It is a rear perspective view of a light guide unit. It is a front side exploded perspective view of a light guide unit. It is a rear side exploded perspective view of a light guide unit. It is a figure which showed the positional relationship of the drum display device 81, and the positional relationship of the confirmation lamp and the display area forming member with respect to the schematic side sectional view of the light guide unit 400 in the X-ray of FIG. 7. It is a schematic perspective view of the front side light guide plate and the rear side light guide plate. It is a schematic front view which showed the positional relationship between the 1st decorative symbol group which can be lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate, the rear upper LED of a rear upper LED unit, and the rear lower LED of a lower LED unit. .. It is a schematic enlarged view of the part A of FIG. 12, and shows the relationship between the posterior lower diffusing lens formed on the lower end surface of the posterior light guide plate and the posterior lower LED of the lower LED unit. It is a front view. It is a schematic enlarged view of the part B of FIG. 13, and is the figure which shows the optical path of the light by the diffuser lens for the rear lower side schematically. It is a figure which showed the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group which is lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate, (a) is the rear side upper LED corresponding to the right side region of a rear light guide plate, and the rear side lower part. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group when the LED is lit, and (b) is for rear side upper corresponding to the central region of the rear side light guide plate from the state of (a). It is a figure which schematically showed the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group when the LED and the rear side lower LED are additionally turned on. It is a figure which showed the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group which is lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate, and (a) is the rear corresponding to the left side region of the rear light guide plate from the state of FIG. 15 (b). It is a figure which schematically showed the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group when the LED for the side upper side and the LED for the rear side lower side are additionally turned on, and FIG. It is a figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group when the rear side upper LED and the rear side lower LED corresponding to the right side area of a light guide plate are turned off. It is a figure which showed the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group which is lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate when the confirmation lamp is lit, and (a) is the state which the confirmation lamp is not lit and is rear. It is a figure which schematically showed the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group when the rear side upper LED and the rear side lower LED corresponding to the right side area of a side light guide plate are turned on, and FIG. ), While the confirmation lamp is lit and the rear lower LED corresponding to the central area of the rear light guide plate is additionally lit, it corresponds to the central region and the right side region of the rear light guide plate. It is a figure which shows typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group when the rear side upper LED is turned off. It is a figure which showed the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group which is lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate with the lighting of the confirmation lamp, and (a) is a figure which the confirmation lamp 311 is from the state of FIG. 17 (b). While the LED is continuously lit and the rear lower LED corresponding to the left side region of the rear light guide plate is additionally lit, the rear LED corresponding to the left side region, the central region, and the right side region of the rear light guide plate is additionally lit. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group when the side upper LED is turned off, and (b) is the state which changed from the state of (a) to the state which the confirmation lamp is turned off, and , The rear upper LED corresponding to the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate is additionally lit, while the rear upper LED and the rear lower LED corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate are lit. It is a figure which shows typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group when it is turned off. Schematic showing the relationship between the second decorative symbol group, the third decorative symbol, and the fourth decorative symbol group that can be lit and displayed on the front light guide plate, and the front lower LED unit, the front right LED unit, and the front left LED unit. It is a front view. It is a figure which showed the optical path of the light by each condensing lens schematically. (A) is a diagram showing an uneven shape forming a second decorative symbol group of the front light guide plate and a direction of light in which the second decorative symbol group can be lit and displayed, and (b) is a diagram showing the direction of light of the front light guide plate. It is a figure which showed the concave-convex shape forming the 4th decorative pattern group, and the direction of the light which the 4th decorative pattern group can be lit and displayed. It is a figure which showed the lighting mode of the 2nd decorative symbol group, the 3rd decorative symbol and the 4th decorative symbol group which are lit and displayed on the front light guide plate, and (a) is for the front right side with respect to the front light guide plate. It is a figure which showed the lighting mode of the 4th decorative symbol group when the LED and the LED for the front left side are lit, and (b) is for the front lower side of the right end side and the left end side with respect to the front light guide plate. It is a figure which schematically showed the lighting mode of the 2nd decorative symbol group when the LED is lit. It is a figure which showed the lighting mode of the 2nd decorative symbol group, the 3rd decorative symbol and the 4th decorative symbol group which are lit and displayed on the front light guide plate, and (a) is the front side of the central part with respect to the front light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the lighting mode of the 3rd decorative symbol when the lower LED is turned on, and (b) is the 2nd decoration when all the front lower LED are turned on with respect to the front light guide plate. It is a figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the symbol group and the 3rd decorative symbol. It is a figure which showed the effect performed by the front side light guide plate, the rear side light guide plate, and a drum display device, and (a) is the 1st decorative symbol group, the 2nd decorative symbol group, the 3rd decorative symbol group, and the 4th decorative symbol group. It is a figure which shows the non-lighting state schematically, in (b), while the 4th decorative symbol group is a lighting state, the 1st decorative symbol group, the 2nd decorative symbol group and the 3rd decorative symbol are non-lighting. It is a figure which showed the state schematically. It is a figure which showed the effect performed by the front side light guide plate, the rear side light guide plate, and a drum display device, and (a) is the 1st decorative symbol group while the 2nd decorative symbol group and the 3rd decorative symbol are lit. It is a figure schematically showing the non-lighting state of the 4th decorative symbol group, and (b) is the figure which the 1st decorative symbol group is a lighting state, while the 2nd decorative symbol group, the 3rd decorative symbol and the 4th decorative symbol group. It is a figure which showed typically the non-lighting state of a decorative symbol group. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which showed the structure of various counters, each holding ball storage area, and holding ball execution area schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type table. It is a figure which showed the example of the hold number table schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the A table of the stop pattern table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table of the stop pattern table, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table of the stop pattern table. , Is a figure schematically showing an example of the C table of the stop pattern table. It is a figure which showed the example of the variation pattern table for loss schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the variation pattern table for a big hit schematically. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electric structure of a voice lamp control device. It is a figure which showed the example of the light guide plate lighting pattern table schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table schematically. It is a figure which showed schematically the structure of each holding information storage area and execution information storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation lamp lighting setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the light guide pattern setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a figure which shows typically the optical path of the light distributed by the rear side lower diffusing lens when the rear side lower side LED of 1 is turned on. It is a schematic side sectional view of the front side light guide plate which showed the light guide mode of the light which guides the inside of a front side light guide plate when the front side lower LED is lit, and (a) is above from the front side lower side LED. It is a figure which schematically showed the light-guiding mode in the front-side light guide plate of the light incident on the front-side light guide plate at an angle of 45 degrees, and (b) is from the front-side lower LED to the front-side light guide plate at a downward angle of 45 degrees. It is a figure which showed the light guide mode in the front light guide plate of the incident light schematically, and (c) is the figure in the front light guide plate of the light which was incident on the front light guide plate in the front direction from the front lower LED. It is a figure which showed the light guide mode schematically. It is a figure which showed the position of the switching point P in the front view of the front light guide plate shown in FIG. It is a perspective view schematically showing the light guide mode in the front light guide plate of the light incident on the front light guide plate at an upward angle of 45 degrees from the front right LED. It is a figure which showed the positional relationship of the drum display device with respect to the schematic side sectional view of the light guide unit in 2nd Embodiment. The positional relationship between the third upper decorative symbol group and the third upper LED, which can be lit and displayed on the third light guide plate in the third embodiment, and the third lower decorative symbol group and the third right LED unit. It is a schematic front view which showed the positional relationship with the right side LED, and the positional relationship between the 3rd lower decorative symbol group, and the 3rd left side LED of a 3rd left side LED unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the pattern of the pseudo stop symbol which can be stopped in the variation element of "pseudo variation" in the variation effect of the 3rd symbol in 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed the transition of the fluctuation element of the "pseudo-variation" performed by the drum display device in 4th Embodiment, and (a) is the state which the pseudo-stop symbol as "pseudo-stop 1" is stopped. It is a schematic diagram shown, (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the pseudo-stop symbol as "pseudo-stop 2" is stopped from the state of (a), and (c) is (b). ) Is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the “reach forming symbol” is stopped, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the “reach display” is performed from the state of (c). It is a figure. It is an exploded perspective view of the left reel unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the operating principle of the stepping motor in 5th Embodiment. It is a connection diagram which shows the drive system of the stepping motor in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the excitation data and the excitation order pointer in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drive characteristic of a stepping motor executed by a series of fluctuation effect in 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the drive characteristic of the stepping motor executed at the time of the effect of "full rotation" in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the excitation pattern of the normal acceleration processing in 5th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the excitation pattern of the special acceleration processing in 5th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the relationship between the driving mode of each reel and the output mode of a musical piece in the production of "full rotation" in the fifth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the production of "full rotation" performed by the drum display device in the fifth embodiment, and (a) shows the state that the provisional jackpot result by the "1" symbol is stopped. It is a schematic diagram, (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the middle reel and the right reel start to rotate by normal acceleration processing from the state of (a), and (c) is a schematic diagram of (b). From the state, it is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the middle reel and the right reel are rotating at high speed and constant speed, and the left reel has started to rotate by special acceleration processing, and (d) is (c). It is a schematic diagram showing the state that the left reel, the middle reel and the right reel are rotating at a high speed and a constant speed from the state, and (e) is the same as the state of (d), the left reel, the middle reel and the right. It is a schematic diagram which showed the state which the reel is rotating at a high speed and a constant speed, and (f) is a schematic diagram which showed the state which the provisional jackpot result by the "2" symbol stopped from the state of (e). Is. It is a flowchart which shows the motor control process which is executed by MPU in the display control apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the reel rotation start processing executed by MPU in the display control apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the relationship between the driving mode of each reel and the output mode of a musical piece in the production of "full rotation" in the sixth embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the relationship between the driving mode of each reel and the output mode of a musical piece in the production of "full rotation" in the seventh embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 46, a first embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64a, 64b, 65a, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 26) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a door opening switch (not shown) for detecting that either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is unlocked and opened (the door is opened). ..

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed and operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect executed by the drum display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later. The frame button 22 is also used as an operation button for allowing the player to select the effect content such as the type of so-called advance notice display and the execution timing, which is one aspect of the variable effect.

The variable effect is an effect displayed on the drum display device 81, and as described later, a ball fired on the front region of the game board 13 is a specific winning opening (first start opening 64a or second start described later). It is executed when the ball enters the mouth 64b (see FIG. 3) (starting prize), and the symbol (each third symbol printed on the drum display device 81 described later) is variablely displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped. It is an effect of presenting to the player the result (whether or not it is a big hit) of the lottery performed for the start winning prize by the combination of the displayed symbols.

The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the drum display device 81 are unified. In this pachinko machine 10, there are three stages, "city stage", "empty stage", and "island stage". Is provided. Various effects such as the above-mentioned variable effect and the reach effect executed during the variable effect are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player during a period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation in which the third symbol is displayed in a high-speed fluctuation invisible to the player. Every time the frame button 22 is operated, it is repeatedly changed in the order of "city stage"-> "empty stage"-> "island stage"-> "city stage"->. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

Further, when the effect element of "normal reach" described later is started in the variable effect performed by the drum display device 81, the effect element of "normal reach" is developed into the effect element of "super reach" described later. At this time, the selection screen of the effect element of "super reach" may be displayed on the drum display device 81 in the effect element of "normal reach".

On the selection screen, a plurality of staging element candidates that can be selected as the staging element of "super reach" are displayed, and one of the staging element candidates is selected. If the frame button 22 is pressed by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the selected effect element candidate is changed. Then, based on the effect element candidate selected when developing into the effect element of "super reach" (that is, at the end of the selection screen), the content of the effect element of "super reach" is determined, and the content of the effect element of "super reach" is determined according to the content. The effect element of "super reach" is executed by the drum display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, the player moves forward with respect to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, forward with respect to the pachinko machine 10). , Rear, right and left) may be configured with an operating lever that can be tilted. Then, the effect stage may be selected and changed, or the effect element of "super reach" may be selected based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, a full-color light emitting diode (“Light Emitting Dialog”; hereinafter, referred to as “LED”) capable of emitting light in seven colors (white, purple, blue, blue-green, green, yellow, and red) may be referred to. There are 29 to 33 illuminated units having a built-in light emitting means such as). In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in front view, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 3). ) Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launching unit 112a. A touch sensor 51a for this purpose, a push button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by the change in electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in.

When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. The firing interval of the balls in the ball launching unit 112a is set to be about 0.6 seconds. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 26) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 26). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid.

On the main board constituting the main control device 110, a setting key 501 used when a person concerned with the hall or the like changes a set probability setting value or confirms the set probability setting value, and When you want to initialize the setting change switch 502 and the pachinko machine 10 (main control device 110) used when updating the probability setting value by operating during the setting change, or when you want to initialize the probability setting value during the setting change. The RAM erase switch 503 used when confirming (determining) the probability setting value and the probability display device 504 capable of displaying the probability setting value are provided.

The setting key 501, the setting change switch 502, and the RAM erasing switch 503 are provided so as to project from the main board through the holes provided in the board box 100, and can be operated by a person related to the hall or the like without opening the board box 100. It is possible. On the other hand, the probability display device 504 is provided on the main substrate covered by the substrate box 100.

The setting key 501 is an off side indicated by "OFF" and an on side indicated by "ON" by inserting a dedicated key managed by a person involved in the hall into the keyhole provided in the setting key 501. It is configured to be rotatable between the two positions of and. The setting key 501 is turned off when it is located on the off side, turned on when it is located on the on side, and once it is rotated to each state, it is rotated again by the administrator or the like. Each state is configured to be maintained unless manipulated.

The setting change switch 502 is a switch for updating the probability setting value by being operated when the probability setting value is changed (that is, the “setting change mode” described later). The setting change switch 502 normally outputs an off signal, and outputs an on signal when pressed.

The RAM erase switch 503 is a switch for erasing (initial state) the backup data stored in the pachinko machine 10 by being operated when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Further, this RAM erase switch 503 is used when the update of the probability set value is terminated (that is, the "setting change mode" is terminated) when the probability set value is changed (that is, the "setting change mode" described later). Will be done.

In the first embodiment, when the RAM erasing switch 503 is pressed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on (that is, when the power switch is turned on), the main control device is provided on the condition that the setting key 501 is in the off state. A RAM erase signal for clearing the backup data to 110 is output. When the RAM erasing signal is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 also issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Further, the MPU 201 recognizes that when the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed in the updatable state of the probability set value (that is, the "setting change mode" described later), the MPU 201 recognizes that the update of the probability set value is terminated, and sets the probability. Exits the updatable state of the value and shifts to the normal gaming state.

The probability display device 504 displays the probability set value when the probability set value is confirmed (that is, the “setting confirmation mode” described later) or when the probability set value is changed (that is, the “setting change mode” described later). It is configured as follows. The probability display device 504 is turned off in a normal state (for example, in a game-enabled state or when the power is turned off), and the probability set value is hidden, while the probability set value should be displayed (that is, described later). In the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode"), the current probability setting value is lit and displayed.

Here, the start-up mode at the time of power-up of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the state of the RAM erasing switch 503 and the setting key 501. It is configured in.

The start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with four modes: "RAM clear mode", "setting change mode", "setting confirmation mode", and "normal mode".

The "RAM clear mode" is a mode for erasing (clearing) the data stored in the RAM 203 in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

The "setting change mode" is a mode for changing the set probability setting value. When the pachinko machine 10 starts up in this "setting change mode", the current probability setting value is displayed on the probability display device 504, and the probability setting value is updated every time the setting change switch 502 is operated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the probability setting value in the pachinko machine 10 is updated by pressing the setting change switch 502 during this "setting change mode", and the probability is updated with the update of the probability setting value. The display of the display device 504 is also changed.

The "setting confirmation mode" is a mode for confirming the set probability setting value. When the pachinko machine 10 starts up in this "setting confirmation mode", the current probability setting value is displayed on the probability display device 504.

The "normal mode" is a start-up mode other than these "RAM clear mode", "setting change mode", and "setting confirmation mode", and is stored in the RAM 203 when the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 or in the RAM 203. In the mode for restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before the power is turned off by executing various start-up processes while retaining the data stored in the RAM 203, except when the stored data is corrupted. be.

In the first embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erasing switch 503 (that is, in the off state) and with the setting key 501 in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 Start up in "normal mode". Further, when the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the "RAM clear mode".

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the "setting change mode". Further, when the setting key 501 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned off, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the "setting confirmation mode".

In addition, when the data is erased in the "RAM clear mode", when the update of the probability setting value is completed in the "setting change mode" and the setting key 501 is turned off, or in the "setting confirmation mode". When the setting key 501 is turned off, each mode is terminated and the mode shifts to the "normal mode" so that the game of the pachinko machine 10 can be started.

In this way, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, if the setting key 501 is turned off, the hall personnel and the like can use the pachinko machine 10 depending on whether or not the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned on. As the start-up mode, it is possible to select whether to use the "RAM clear mode" or the "normal mode", which is a start-up mode that is not related to the probability set value.

On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is turned on when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the hall personnel and the like start up the pachinko machine 10 depending on whether or not the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned on. As the mode, it is possible to select whether to set the "setting change mode" or the "setting confirmation mode" related to the probability setting value.

That is, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on, a start-up mode irrelevant to the probability set value and a start-up mode related to the probability set value can be selected. Then, when the startup mode is set to be irrelevant to the probability set value, whether the startup mode is set to "RAM clear mode" or "normal mode" depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. On the other hand, when the startup mode related to the probability setting value is set, the startup mode is set to "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode" depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. You can choose whether to.

Here, when the probability setting value is changed, the jackpot probability in the game is changed, so if the game is continued by taking over the game state before the power is turned off, for example, the jackpot probability in the pending fluctuation effect and The pachinko machine 10 has a predetermined game performance, such as a discrepancy with the jackpot probability of the variable effect to be acquired from now on, and the jackpots counted as the limit number of times described later are accumulated while the jackpot probabilities are different. May not be exhibited. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 changes the probability set value in the "setting change mode", the data stored in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared). On the other hand, since the "setting confirmation mode" is a start-up mode that only confirms the probability set value, the data stored in the RAM 203 is retained (cleared) so that the game can be continued by taking over the game state before the power is turned off. do not do).

Therefore, in the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode" in which the data of the RAM 203 is cleared, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erasing switch 503 while keeping the setting key 501 on. When starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the "setting confirmation mode" in which the data in the RAM 203 is not cleared, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned off. I decided to turn on the power.

In this way, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode" related to the probability setting value, the setting key 501 is turned on before turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10. .. Then, when starting the pachinko machine 10 in the "RAM clear mode" or the "setting change mode" that clears the data stored in the RAM 203, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is supplied while pressing (while turning on) the RAM erase switch 503. Turn on. That is, if the hall personnel and the like understand the meaning of each start-up mode, they can easily understand what kind of operation is required for the pachinko machine 10 required for the start-up mode to be started up from now on.

Further, in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the "setting change mode" or the "setting confirmation mode", a dedicated key that can be inserted into the setting key 501 is required, and the key is managed by the hall. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily checking the probability setting value and searching for the pachinko machine 10 having a high probability of jackpot, or arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability (high setting). Further, since the RAM erasing switch 503 is usually provided at a position that is not easily touched by the player, it is possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily changing the probability set value to a high probability in that respect as well.

Further, there are two switches and the like that should be operated at the same time even when they are started up in the "setting change mode", and they can be sufficiently operated with both hands, so that the operability is good. From the above, the hall personnel and the like can easily and easily select the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 by properly using the ON / OFF of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501.

When starting up in the "setting change mode" or "setting confirmation mode", a door opening switch (not shown) that detects whether or not the inner frame 12 is open when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. ) Is on, that is, the inner frame 12 may be open.

This is because, in order to change or confirm the probability setting value, it is necessary for the hall personnel and the like to visually recognize the probability setting value displayed on the probability display device 504 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. This is because 12 needs to be open. Therefore, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without opening the inner frame 12 even though the setting key 501 is in the ON state, the pachinko machine 10 is not started in the "setting change mode" or the "setting confirmation mode". As in the case where the setting key 501 is off, if the RAM erase switch 503 is off, the pachinko machine 10 is started in "normal mode", and if the RAM erase switch 503 is on, the pachinko machine is in "RAM clear mode". Launch 10 As a result, even though the inner frame 12 is closed while the setting key 501 is on, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the pachinko machine starts up in the "setting change mode" or the "setting confirmation mode". It is possible to prevent the game from not starting at 10. Further, in order to open the inner frame 12, a dedicated key managed by the hall side is required. Therefore, the player can open the inner frame 12 without permission, check the probability setting value to search for the pachinko machine 10 having a high probability of a big hit, or change the probability setting value to a high probability without permission. Can be suppressed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 13 has a resin base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, and a general winning opening 63. , The first starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the ordinary electric service 64c, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the fired ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 26) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is attenuated and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base between the lower right tip portion of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip portion of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

The general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the ordinary electric service 64c, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the game board 13 and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a wood screw or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.

In the game area of the game board 13, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 10 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize.

Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a ball entering the first starting port 64a (starting prize) or a ball entering the second starting port 64b (starting prize), and the first special symbol or the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 is used. A drum type that creates fluctuations in a plurality of reels (left reel LR, middle reel CR, and right reel RR (see FIG. 4) described later) on which the third symbol is printed while synchronizing with the dynamic display of the second special symbol. A normal symbol composed of a drum display device 81 composed of a rotating device and an LED that variablely displays a normal symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of a normal symbol is referred to as "variable display") triggered by the passage of a ball of a through gate 67. A display device 83 is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the drum display device 81.

The drum display device 81 is configured by being assembled to a backboard unit 300 (see FIG. 5) described later, and has a left reel unit 81a1 having a left reel LR, a middle reel unit 81a2 having a middle reel CR, and a right having a right reel RR. Each reel LR, CR, RR is variablely displayed by having a drum unit 81a integrally configured with the reel unit 81a3 and being variably driven by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 26) described later. As the effective line in the drum display device 81, a range visible from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 (see FIG. 10) of the light guide unit 400, which will be described later, is set as the effective line on the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Will be done.

A plurality of symbols are printed on each reel LR, CR, RR, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each reel LR, CR, RR, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the drum display device 81. ing. In the pachinko machine 10, the game state is displayed by the special symbol display device 37 in accordance with the control of the main control device 110, whereas the decorative display corresponding to the display of the special symbol display device 37 is a drum display. It is performed by the device 81. In addition, instead of the drum type rotating device, for example, a liquid crystal display or the like may be used to configure the display device of the third symbol.

In addition, instead of the drum type rotating device, for example, a dot matrix display device or a 7-segment display device may be used to configure a display device that performs variable display of the third symbol.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the symbol arrangement of each reel LR, CR, RR of the drum display device 81 will be described. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing a symbol arrangement arranged on each reel LR, CR, RR of the drum display device 81. As shown in FIG. 4, 16 symbol regions are formed in each of the reels LR, CR, and RR, and with some exceptions (that is, the “543” symbol of the middle reel CR), the third symbol and the third symbol are formed. It is configured so that blank areas are alternately arranged.

For example, on the left reel LR, in order from the top, "1" symbol, blank area, "2" symbol, blank area, "3" symbol, blank area, "5" symbol, blank area, "6" symbol, blank. Each symbol is arranged so as to be an area, a "7" symbol, a blank area, a "8" symbol, a blank area, a "chance" symbol, and a blank area. Therefore, when the left reel LR is rotated downward, the symbols are variably displayed so that the numbers are in descending order, such as "8" symbol → "7" symbol → "6" symbol → ...

Further, on the right reel RR, in order from the top, "8" symbol, blank area, "7" symbol, blank area, "6" symbol, blank area, "5" symbol, blank area, "3" symbol, blank. Each symbol is arranged so as to be an area, a "2" symbol, a blank area, a "1" symbol, a blank area, a "chance" symbol, and a blank area. Therefore, when the right reel RR is rotated downward, the symbols are variably displayed in ascending order such as "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → ...

Further, in the middle reel CR, in order from the top, "8" symbol, blank area, "7" symbol, blank area, "6" symbol, blank area, "543" symbol, blank area, "2" symbol, blank. Each symbol is arranged so as to be an area, a "1" symbol, a blank area, a "chance" symbol, and a blank area. Therefore, when the middle reel CR is rotated downward, the numbers are in ascending order, such as "1" symbol → "2" symbol → "3" symbol → ..., as in the case of the right reel RR. Variable display.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, three symbols of each reel LR, CR, and RR can be visually recognized from the central opening of the display area forming member 430 (see FIG. 10) described later. Therefore, when all the reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the central opening of the display area forming member 430. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as an effective line for the variation display of the third symbol, an upper parallel line formed by a symbol on the upper part of the left reel LR, a symbol on the upper part of the middle reel CR, and a symbol on the upper part of the right reel RR. , Middle parallel line formed by the design of the middle part of the left reel LR, the design of the middle part of the middle reel CR and the design of the middle part of the right reel RR, the design of the lower part of the left reel LR, the design of the lower part of the middle reel CR and the design of the lower part of the right reel RR Lower parallel line formed, left reel LR upper part symbol, middle reel CR middle part symbol and right reel RR lower part symbol formed right down line, left reel LR lower part symbol, middle reel CR middle part symbol and right A total of five effective lines are set, a rising line formed by the symbol on the upper part of the reel RR.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, each reel LR, CR, and RR has three numerical symbols (third symbol) from the central opening of the display area forming member 430 (see FIG. 10) described later. Hereinafter, it may be referred to as a "main symbol") and a blank area is configured to be visible. Therefore, when all the reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 numerical symbols and blank areas are visible through the central opening of the display area forming member 430. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the effective line of the variation display of the third symbol, the numerical symbol or blank area on the upper part of the left reel LR, the numerical symbol or blank area on the upper part of the middle reel CR, and the right reel RR. In the upper parallel line formed by the upper numerical symbol or blank area, the numerical symbol or blank area in the middle of the left reel LR, the numerical symbol or blank area in the middle of the middle reel CR, and the numerical symbol or blank area in the middle of the right reel RR. Middle parallel line formed, number symbol or blank area at the bottom of the left reel LR, number symbol or blank area at the bottom of the middle reel CR, and bottom parallel line formed at the number symbol or blank area at the bottom of the right reel RR, left reel A downward-sloping line formed by a numeric symbol or blank area at the top of the LR, a numeric symbol or blank area at the middle of the middle reel CR, and a numeric symbol or blank area at the bottom of the right reel RR, and a numeric symbol or blank area at the bottom of the left reel LR. , A number symbol or blank area in the middle of the middle reel CR, and a right-up line formed by the number symbol or blank area in the upper part of the right reel RR, a total of five effective lines are set.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 26) described later is a big hit, the same main symbol is aligned on one of the effective lines. ) Is performed, and the jackpot is configured to occur after the fluctuation display is finished. When shifting to the high probability state (probability change state) after the jackpot ends, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols with odd numbers (corresponding to the "high probability symbol") are aligned on one of the effective lines. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low probability state after the end of the big hit, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols with even numbers added (corresponding to the "low probability symbol") are aligned on one of the effective lines.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of left reel LR → right reel RR → middle reel CR at each variation effect. If the combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbol) is aligned on any of the effective lines when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot effect (for example, rainbow lighting display, etc.) is executed as a jackpot. Further, since the symbol arrangement of the left reel LR and the right reel RR is reversed (ascending order and descending order), when the left reel LR and the right reel RR are stopped, they are the same on the 1 or 2 effective lines, respectively. The symbol is configured to be able to stop. That is, a single reach in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed only on the effective line of 1 and a double reach in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line of 2 can occur.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The ball moves to the first starting port 64a while the drum display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variation effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When a ball is entered into, the number of times the ball is entered (the number of reserved balls) is held up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the special figure 1 of the first reserved symbol display unit Db1 corresponding to the first special symbol of the reserved display unit Db provided in the lower part of the front view of the drum display device 81. It is also shown in the 1st to 4th reserved symbol display units Db1a to Db1d. In the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display units Db1a to Db1d, one reserved symbol (“○” symbol in the normal display mode) for each reserved ball of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls is one). White circle symbols)) are displayed respectively, and the number of reserved balls for the variation effect of the first special symbol is displayed according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the special figures 1 1st to 4th reserved symbol display units Db1a to Db1d. Will be done.

That is, in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display units Db1a to Db1d, when one reserved symbol is displayed on the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display unit Db1a, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. Indicates that is once, and when a total of two reserved symbols are displayed on the special figure 1 first and second reserved symbol display units Db1a and Db1b, one for each, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed. Indicates that is twice, and when a total of three reserved symbols are displayed, one for each of the special figure 1 first to third reserved symbol display units Db1a to Db1c, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed. Indicates that is 3 times, and when a total of 4 reserved symbols are displayed, one for each of the special figures 1 1st to 4th reserved symbol display units Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the 1st special symbol is displayed. Indicates that is 4 times. Further, when the reserved symbols are not displayed on the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display units Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 and there is a holding variable effect. Indicates not to.

Further, the ball is second-started while the drum display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variation effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When a ball is entered into the mouth 64b, the number of times the ball is entered (the number of reserved balls) is reserved up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the special figure 2 of the second reserved symbol display unit Db2 corresponding to the second special symbol of the reserved display unit Db provided in the lower part of the front view of the drum display device 81. It is also shown in the 1st to 4th reserved symbol display units Db2a to Db2d. In the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display units Db2a to Db2d, one reserved symbol (“○” symbol in the normal display mode) for each reserved ball of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls is one). White circle symbols)) are displayed respectively, and the number of reserved balls for the variation effect of the second special symbol is displayed according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the special figures 2 1st to 4th reserved symbol display units Db2a to Db2d. Will be done.

That is, in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display units Db2a to Db2d, when one reserved symbol is displayed on the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display unit Db2a, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. Indicates that is once, and when a total of two reserved symbols are displayed on the special figure 2 first and second reserved symbol display units Db2a and Db2b, one for each, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed. 2 is the number of times, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed when a total of three reserved symbols are displayed, one for each of the special figures 2 1st to 3rd reserved symbol display units Db2a to Db2c. Indicates that is 3 times, and when a total of 4 reserved symbols are displayed in the special figures 2 1st to 4th reserved symbol display units Db2a to Db2d, one for each, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed. Indicates that is 4 times. Further, when the reserved symbols are not displayed on the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display units Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 and there is a holding variable effect. Indicates not to.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, and only one of the lottery games is executed. It is configured in. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when one of the running lottery games is completed, the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are stored respectively. Is configured to preferentially execute the second lottery game of the second special symbol over the first lottery game of the first special symbol (so-called special figure 2 priority change). The lottery game may be executed in the order of winning (so-called change in the order of winning), or the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol may be executed at the same time (so-called special symbol). It may be configured to change (Fig. 1 and Fig. 2 at the same time).

In the central portion of the hold display unit Db, an execution symbol display unit Db0 for displaying an execution symbol indicating that the variation effect is being executed by the drum display device 81 is provided. The execution symbol display unit Db0 is provided in the central portion of the hold display unit Db, that is, on the right side of the special figure 1 first hold symbol display unit Db1a and on the left side of the special figure 2 first hold symbol display unit Db2a. It is configured to display an execution symbol larger than each reserved symbol displayed on the reserved symbol display units Db1a to Db1d and Db2a to Db2d. Further, in the execution symbol display unit Db0, the reserved symbol displayed on the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display unit Db1a or the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display unit Db2a is moved (shifted) and displayed as an execution symbol. To.

The execution symbol displayed on the execution symbol display unit Db0 is deleted when the variation effect is completed, and along with the deletion of the execution symbol, the displayed reserved symbol is on the lower side (on the right side if it is the first special symbol, the first). 2 If it is a special symbol, it will be moved and displayed as a reserved symbol (on the left). Specifically, for example, in a situation where the reserved symbol of the second special symbol does not exist and there are four reserved symbols of the first special symbol, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends. When the execution symbol displayed on the execution symbol display unit Db0 is deleted, the reserved symbol displayed on the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display unit Db1a moves as the execution symbol on the execution symbol display unit Db0. (Shift) is displayed. Further, the reserved symbol displayed on the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display unit Db1b is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol on the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display unit Db1a. Further, the reserved symbol displayed on the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display unit Db1c is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol on the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display unit Db1b. Further, the reserved symbol displayed on the special figure 1 fourth reserved symbol display unit Db1d is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol on the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display unit Db1c.

Further, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved symbols of the second special symbol, the execution symbol displayed on the execution symbol display unit Db0 is deleted with the end of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If so, the reserved symbol displayed on the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display unit Db2a is moved (shifted) and displayed as an execution symbol on the execution symbol display unit Db0. Further, the reserved symbol displayed on the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display unit Db2b is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol on the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display unit Db2a. Further, the reserved symbol displayed on the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display unit Db2c is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol on the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display unit Db2b. Further, the reserved symbol displayed on the special figure 2 fourth reserved symbol display unit Db2d is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol on the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display unit Db2c.

In the first embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect based on the entry into the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is set. The number of balls is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbol on the reserved display unit Db, the number of reserved balls is divided into four or a part of a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device or the like) different from the reserved display unit Db. The area may be displayed in a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) different by the number of reserved balls. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls on the reserved display unit Db. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls, respectively, for the maximum number of hold lamps of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and hold balls are provided according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state. It may display a number.

The ordinary symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which a symbol of "◯" and a symbol of "x" as display symbols (ordinary symbols) are alternately lit each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the first embodiment), the ordinary electric service 64c above the front view of the second starting port 64b is predetermined. It is configured to be in operation (open) for a period of time.

The number of reserved balls in the through gate 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned special symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed by the normal symbol reservation lamp 84. Four ordinary symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically above the drum display device 81. Then, the number of holds is displayed according to the number of lights of the normal symbol hold lamp 84.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the normal symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, and the special symbol display device 37 or the drum display device 81. You may use a part of it. Similarly, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the drum display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and the passage of the through gate 67 may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the normal symbol reservation lamp 84.

More specifically, the variable display of the normal symbol may be performed by using a part other than the third symbol execution portion of the special symbol display device 37 or the drum display device 81. Similarly, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on in a part other than the third symbol execution portion of the drum display device 81.

On the front side of the variable display device unit 80 in front of the front view, a display area forming member 430, a front light guide plate 410, and a rear light guide plate 420 (see FIG. 8) are arranged in order from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. A light guide unit 400 is provided.

The display area forming member 430 is made of a transparent resin (for example, polycarbonate) and has a shape along (corresponding to) the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the light guide unit 400. It is also formed in a shape that follows (corresponds to) the shapes of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, which will be described later, which are assembled to the light guide unit 400. Further, the display area forming member 430 has a central opening 431 formed so that three symbols can be visually recognized on each reel LR, CR, and RR of the drum display device 81 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. .. A predetermined lens cut 432 is provided on the peripheral edge of the central opening 431 so that the rear side of the lens cut 432 cannot be seen or becomes difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the lens cut 432 on the periphery of the central opening 431 clearly shows the display area and the effective line of the symbol in the drum display device 81 to the player. The details of the display area forming member 430 will be described later.

The front light guide plate 410 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, acrylic), and is formed in a shape that follows (corresponds to) the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81, and is also guided, like the display area forming member 430. It is formed in a shape that follows (corresponds to) the shape of the display area forming member 430 and the rear light guide plate 420 that are assembled to the optical unit 400. Further, in the front light guide plate 410, a part of the drum display device 81 and the rear light guide plate 420 arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the front light guide plate 410 can be visually recognized from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430. It is configured in. Further, the back surface side of the front light guide plate 410 (that is, the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10) is provided with lens cuts having various uneven shapes, and the lower LED unit 414, the front right LED unit 415, or the front left LED, which will be described later, are provided. By lighting the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c of the unit 416 (see FIGS. 8 and 9), the second decorative design group 411, which is a design imitating a plurality of cherry blossom petals (so-called cherry blossom snowstorm design), imitates a sunfish. The third decorative symbol 412, which is the design, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 (see FIG. 17), which is a design imitating a plurality of bubbles (so-called bubble group design), are visually displayed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It is configured to be. The details of the front light guide plate 410 will be described later.

Like the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, acrylic), and like the display area forming member 430 and the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420 follows the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. In addition to being formed in a (corresponding) shape, it is also formed in a (corresponding) shape that follows the shapes of the display area forming member 430 and the front light guide plate 410 that are assembled to the light guide unit 400. Further, in the rear light guide plate 420, like the front light guide plate 410, the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the rear light guide plate 420 can be visually recognized from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430. It is configured in. Further, the back surface side of the rear light guide plate 420 (that is, the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10) is provided with lens cuts having various uneven shapes, and the rear upper LED unit 422 and / and the lower LED unit 414 (FIG. By turning on the LEDs 422c and 424 of 8 and 9), the first decorative design group 421 (see FIG. 12), which is a design imitating a plurality of types of fish (so-called fish school design), is in front of the pachinko machine 10. It is configured to be visible from the side. The details of the rear light guide plate 420 will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, according to the lottery result of the variation effect of the third symbol, the first decorative symbol group 421 and the second decorative symbol group are executed during the execution of the variation effect (for example, when the reach display is formed). It is configured to light and display 411, the third decorative symbol 412 and / or the fourth decorative symbol group 413. Specifically, when the jackpot result appears in the variable effect, only the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411 & the third decorative symbol 412, the third decorative symbol 412, and the second decorative symbol group 411. Only the 4th decorative symbol group 413 is easily lit and displayed in this order, but when a loss result appears in the variation effect, only the 4th decorative symbol group 413 and the 2nd decorative symbol group 411 are the first. Only the 3 decorative symbols 412 are configured so as to be easily lit and displayed in the order of the 2nd decorative symbol group 411 & the 3rd decorative symbol 412, and the 1st decorative symbol group 421.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, according to the lottery result of the variation effect of the third symbol, the first decorative symbol group 421, while the variation effect is being executed (for example, when the reach display is formed), Any one of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 or the fourth decorative symbol group 413, or the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 or the fourth. It is configured to light and display at least two or more combinations of the decorative symbol group 413. Specifically, when the jackpot result appears in the variable effect, only the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411 & the third decorative symbol 412, the third decorative symbol 412, and the second decorative symbol group 411. Only the 4th decorative symbol group 413 is easily lit and displayed in this order, but when a loss result appears in the variation effect, only the 4th decorative symbol group 413 and the 2nd decorative symbol group 411 are the first. Only the 3 decorative symbols 412 are configured so as to be easily lit and displayed in the order of the 2nd decorative symbol group 411 & the 3rd decorative symbol 412, and the 1st decorative symbol group 421.

That is, the jackpot reliability (expectation) of each decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413, 421 is determined by the first decorative symbol group 421> the second decorative symbol group 411 & No. 1 according to the above-mentioned appearance ratio accompanying the variation result of the variation effect. 3 Decorative symbols 412> 3rd decorative symbols 412 only> 2nd decorative symbols group 411 only> 4th decorative symbols group 413 are preset in this order.

More specifically, the jackpot reliability (expectation) of each decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413, 421 is determined by the fourth decorative symbol group 413 <second decorative symbol, depending on the above-mentioned appearance ratio accompanying the variation result of the variation effect. Only the group 411 is set in advance so as to be higher in the order of <third decorative symbol 412 only <second decorative symbol group 411 & third decorative symbol 412 <first decorative symbol group 421.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, by setting the appearance ratios at the time of big hit and at the time of loss, respectively, the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 and the fourth Although it is configured to set the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance of the decorative symbol group 413, instead of this, it may be configured to set the jackpot expectation of the decorative symbol regardless of the appearance frequency. .. For example, a decorative pattern may be provided in which the appearance ratio is low at the time of a big hit and the appearance ratio is low at the time of loss and the expectation of the big hit is low. A decorative pattern with a high degree may be provided.

As described above, each of the members 430, 410, and 420 of the light guide unit 400 is formed in a shape (corresponding to) along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 located on the rear side of the front view, and will be described later. The first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 can be lit (guided) and displayed. Therefore, by performing the variable effect of the third symbol on the drum display device 81 and the effect on the light guide unit 400 in a complex manner, various effects are executed and the effect of each of the devices 81 and 400 is enhanced. , It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game. Further, the light guide unit 400 is configured to have a shape along the outer peripheral shape of the staging device so that the staging device (that is, the drum display device 81) arranged on the rear side of the front view can be arranged in the back space. , It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the staging device arranged on the rear side of the front view of the light guide unit 400.

Further, at least the front light guide plate 410, the front lower LED 414c, the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c, and the rear light guide plate 420, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are included in the light guide unit 400. By unitizing and fixing the LEDs 414c and the like while positioning them with through holes and screws, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation between the LED 414c and the like and the light guide plates 410 and 420, so that the light from each LED 414c and the like is guided. It becomes possible to appropriately irradiate the light plates 410 and 420, and each decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413, 421 in the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 can be accurately expressed.

In addition, at the time of big hit or loss, the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411 & the third decorative symbol 412, the third decorative symbol 412 only, the second decorative symbol group 411 only, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 (hereinafter). , "Each decorative pattern 411, 421, 413, 421") will be described later in FIG. 34.

On the surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60) on the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80, a board surface first decorative symbol group having the same design as the first decorative symbol group 421 provided on the rear light guide plate 420. 60a is provided, and on the surface of the game board 13 (base plate 60) on the left side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80, the first decorative symbol group 421 and the board surface first decorative symbol group provided on the rear light guide plate 420 are provided. A board surface second decorative symbol group 60b, which is the same symbol as the 60a, is provided. The board surface first decorative symbol group 60a and the board surface second decorative symbol group 60b are configured to be lit and displayed in conjunction with the lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420. Specifically, when the effect relating to the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed in the variable effect of the third symbol, first, the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a on the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 is lit first. After that, the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit and displayed in order from the right side in the front view to the left side, and then the second decorative symbol group 60b on the left side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 is lit. With this configuration, in the production related to the first decorative symbol group 421, the production on the rear light guide plate 420 and the production on the game board 13 board are integrally executed, and the entire game board 13 board surface is used. It is possible to provide a powerful production and improve the interest of the game.

More specifically, in the variation effect of the third symbol, when the lighting lottery of the first decorative symbol group 421 is won and the timing to light the first decorative symbol group 421 arrives, first, the game board 13 or the drum The light emitting effect on the display device 81 is stopped or suppressed, and the entire game board 13 is darkened (darkened). Then, LEDs arranged on the back side of the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a as if the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a provided on the right side of the game board 13 board is moved from the right side to the left side in the front view (shown). ) Turns on. Then, at the timing when the leftmost end of the first decorative symbol group 60a on the board surface is lit, the first decorative symbol group 421 provided on the rear light guide plate 420 is provided in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420. By lighting the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 (see FIG. 8, hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "LED 422c, 424") corresponding to the rightmost end of the first decorative symbol group 421. The first decorative symbol group 421 at the rightmost end in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 becomes visible from the front side (front side; the same applies hereinafter) of the pachinko machine 10.

At this time, the front right base of the front right LED unit 415 so that the light emitted from the LED corresponding to the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a does not leak to the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410) side. 415a (see FIG. 8) is configured to block light from the LED corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 60a on the board surface to the rear light guide plate 420 side. With this configuration, the light emitted from the LED corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 60a on the board surface is guided to the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410), and the first decoration of the rear light guide plate 420 is provided. It is possible to prevent a problem that the symbol group 421 emits light at an earlier stage than the light emission timing.

Next, with the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a lit, the rightmost end of the rightmost region of the LEDs 422c, 424 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420. The LEDs 422c, 424 located on the left side of the front view from the LEDs 422c, 424 are sequentially turned on from the right side of the front view, and the LEDs 422c corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 located at the leftmost end in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420, By lighting the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the rightmost end of the first decorative symbol group 421 provided in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 at the timing when the 424 is turned on, in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420. The first decorative symbol group 421 on the far right is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, whether the series of integrated fish school symbols move from the right side to the left side of the pachinko machine 10 by the first decorative symbol group 60a on the board surface and the first decorative symbol group 421 in the right side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420. The production like this is executed.

More specifically, among the LEDs 422c and 424 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 in the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420, the rightmost LEDs 422c and 424 in the rightmost region to the rightmost LED 422c. , 424 When lighting the LEDs 422c, 424 located on the left side of the front view (that is, the center of the right side region), the emission color lit by the rightmost LEDs 422c, 424 is inherited, and further, the position is on the left side of the front view. When the left side of the front view (that is, the leftmost end of the right side region) is turned on, the LEDs 422c, 424 are turned on so as to take over the emission color lit by the LEDs 422c, 424 located on the left side of the front view. For example, when the rightmost LEDs 422c and 424 in the rightmost region emit red light, the rightmost LEDs 422c and 424 are turned on in red at the timing of turning on the LEDs 422c and 424 located on the left side of the front view. , The LEDs 422c, 424 located on the left side of the front view (that is, the leftmost end of the right side region) of the LEDs 422c, 424 located on the left side of the front view are turned on in red at the timing of turning on. With this configuration, it is possible to perform an effect as if the same fish symbol in the first decorative symbol group 421 is moved and displayed.

Next, among the LEDs 422c and 424 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420, the LEDs 422c and 424 located on the left side of the rightmost LED 422c and 424 in the central region are viewed from the front. Are sequentially lit from the right side, and at the timing when the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 located at the leftmost end in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit, the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit. By lighting the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the rightmost end of the first decorative symbol group 421 provided in the pachinko machine 10, the rightmost first decorative symbol group 421 in the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 is on the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes visible from. At this time, at the timing when the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 located at the leftmost end in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned on, the LEDs corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 60a on the board surface (shown). The lights are turned off sequentially from the right side of the front view. As a result, the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a and the first decorative symbol group 421 in the right side region, the central region, and the left side region of the rear light guide plate 420 are integrated in a series and have a constant width (that is, the rear light guide plate). The effect is performed as if the fish school symbol (the width obtained by combining the width of the central region and the right region of 420 and the display width of the first decorative symbol group 60a on the board) moves from the right side to the left side of the pachinko machine 10. ..

Next, among the LEDs 422c and 424 (see FIG. 8) corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 in the left side region of the rear light guide plate 420, the LEDs 422c and 424 located on the left side of the rightmost LED 422c and 424 in the left region are viewed from the front. Are sequentially lit from the right side, and are provided on the left side of the game board 13 at the timing when the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 located at the leftmost end in the leftmost region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit. By lighting the LED (not shown) corresponding to the rightmost end of the second decorative symbol group 60b on the board surface, the second decorative symbol group 60b on the board surface is lit and displayed. At this time, at the timing when the LED corresponding to the leftmost end of the second decorative symbol group 60b on the board surface is turned on, the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are displayed from the right side of the front view. It is configured to turn off sequentially. As a result, the second decorative symbol group 60b on the board surface and the first decorative symbol group 421 in the left side region, the central region, and the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 are integrated in a series and have a constant width (that is, the rear light guide plate). A school of fish in the width of the left side region, the center region and the right side region of the 420, or the width of the left side region and the center region of the rear light guide plate 420 and the display width of the second decorative symbol group 60b on the board surface). The effect as if the design moves from the right side to the left side of the pachinko machine 10 is executed.

After that, the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are sequentially turned off from the right side in the front view. Then, at the timing when the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 in the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off, then the LED 422c corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 in the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 is turned off. , 424 are turned off in sequence from the right side of the front view. Further, at the timing when the LEDs 422c and 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 in the left region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off, the LEDs (not shown) corresponding to the second decorative symbol group 60b on the board surface are turned off from the right side of the front view. Prepare to turn off the lights. With this configuration, the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a, the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420, and the board surface second decorative symbol group 60b make a series of integrated and constant-width fish school symbols pachinko. An effect as if moving from the right side to the left side of the machine 10 is executed.

At this time, the front left base of the front left LED unit 416 so that the light emitted from the LED corresponding to the second decorative symbol group 60b on the board surface does not leak to the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410) side. 416a (see FIG. 8) is configured to block light from the LED corresponding to the second decorative symbol group 60b on the board surface to the rear light guide plate 420 side. With this configuration, the light emitted from the LED corresponding to the second decorative symbol group 60b on the board surface is guided to the rear light guide plate 420 (front light guide plate 410), and the first decoration of the rear light guide plate 420 is provided. It is possible to prevent a problem that the symbol group 421 emits light at a stage later than the emission timing.

In this way, in the production related to the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a, the first decorative symbol group 421, and the board surface second decorative symbol group 60b, the production on the rear light guide plate 420 and the production on the game board 13 board are integrated. A series using the entire 13th board of the game board by solving the problem that when each LED is turned on in sequence, a symbol different from the lighting timing is turned on by the light generated by the other LEDs. It is possible to provide a powerful production and improve the interest of the game.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first starting port 64a into which a ball can enter is arranged. When the ball enters the first starting port 64a, the first starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main cause described later is due to the turning on of the first starting port switch. The control device 110 (see FIG. 26) draws a big hit for the first special symbol. Then, the display according to the lottery result is shown by the upper LED group 37b1 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the drum display device 81 displays the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Will be executed. The first starting port 64a is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

Below the first starting port 64a, a second starting port 64b is provided, which allows the ball to enter only when the normal electric service 64c is in the open state. When the ball enters the second starting port 64b, the second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main cause described later is due to the turning on of the second starting port switch. The control device 110 (see FIG. 26) draws a big hit for the second special symbol. Then, the display according to the lottery result is shown by the lower LED group 37b2 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the drum display device 81 displays the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. Will be executed. The second starting port 64b is also one of the winning openings in which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when a ball enters.

As described above, above the front view of the second starting port 64b, the second starting port 64b is provided by opening and closing two blade members covering the opening through which the ball enters the second starting port 64b. An ordinary electric service 64c that can be displaced to an open state (enlarged state) or a closed state (reduced state) is provided. In the normal electric service 64c, the blades are closed (the blades stand upright) in the normal state, and the ball cannot enter the second starting port 64b or is difficult to enter. There is.

On the other hand, when the variable display on the ordinary symbol display device 83 is stopped at the symbol of "◯", the ordinary electric service 64c is operated for a predetermined time. From the state where the blades of the ordinary electric service 64c stand upward while the ordinary electric service 64c is operated. It is in a state of being movable in a substantially V shape (inverted C shape), and the second starting port 64b is in an open state. When the second starting port 64b is in the open state, the ball can enter the second starting port 64b, or the ball is easier to enter than in the closed state. That is, as a result of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83, the ball stops at the symbol of "○" and hits, and when the second starting port 64b is in the open state, the ball enters the second starting port 64b. It is possible to make a lot of big hit lottery.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first starting opening 64a and the second starting opening 64b, and a horizontally long rectangular large winning opening (also referred to as a large opening opening or a specific winning opening) 65a is arranged in a substantially central portion thereof. Is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a stop symbol of the big hit. , The stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the drum display device 81, and the occurrence of the big hit is shown. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special gaming state, the large winning opening 65a, which is normally closed for a predetermined number of times (10 times or 5 times), is closed for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or 10 balls are won. (Until you do) will be released.

When the large winning opening 65a is opened, the large winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses from the opening or when a predetermined number of winnings are detected, and after the closing, the large winning opening 65a is opened again. The opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 10 times (10 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state (big hit state) that is advantageous for the player, and the player is allowed to win a ball in the big winning opening 65a in the game. As a value (game value), a larger amount of prize balls will be paid out than usual.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the large winning opening 65a, and a large winning opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The large winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the big winning opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state where the ball can easily win the big winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The variable winning device 65 is arranged at a position where the ball can win the big winning opening 65a in both the left-handed game and the right-handed game, and when the ball enters the big winning opening 65a, the back side of the game board 13 The large winning opening switch (not shown) is turned on, and by counting the number of times the large winning opening switch is turned on, the number of balls won in the large winning opening 65a is counted, and the large winning opening is counted. The closing condition of 65a is determined. In addition, 15 balls are paid out as prize balls due to the turning on of the big prize opening switch. Then, by repeating the open state and the closed state of the big winning opening 65a due to the big hit, many balls are in a state where it is easy to win the big winning opening 65a, and the player has a game value (game value). As a grant, a larger amount of prize balls will be paid out than usual. This state is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A specific winning opening and a large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening are provided in the game area, and when the special LED group 37b corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the special symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening is set for a predetermined time. A gaming state in which the large opening is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state when the ball is opened and the specific winning opening is opened and the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening. ..

Through gates 67 are provided on the left side and the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80, respectively. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) for the ball to pass through in the vertical direction. When the ball launched into the game area passes through the through gate 67, the through gate switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and due to the on, the main control device 110 hits a normal symbol. A lottery will be held.

As a result of the lottery of the normal symbol performed on the ball passing through the through gate 67, if it is determined to be a hit, the symbol of "○" is stopped and displayed through the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 83. After that, the ordinary electric service 64c provided above the front view of the second starting port 64b is activated. As a result, the ball enters the second starting port 64b for a predetermined time from the state in which the plate of the ordinary electric function 64c, which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b, closes the second starting port 64b. The ball is in a state where it can be balled or a state in which the ball is easier to enter than in a closed state.

In the upper right side of the front view (upper right side of FIG. 3) of the game area, a special symbol display device 37 provided with a state LED group 37a composed of a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a special LED group 37b is arranged. Has been done. The special symbol display device 37 includes a first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol 1”) and a second special symbol corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 2). Each variation display of the special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol may be referred to as "special diagram 2") (hereinafter, the variation display of both special symbols may be referred to as "dynamic display") is made. , The gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

The state LED group 37a determines the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation display has not been executed, among the balls that have won (winned) in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, which will be described later. It is indicated by the lighting state. Further, the number of rounds of the jackpot and the error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the state LED group 37a corresponding to the state. The state LED group 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and the combination of the emission colors suggests various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

The "round" in the jackpot means from the opening to the closing of the jackpot 65a, which will be described later, in order to divide the number of prize balls in the jackpot. It is configured so that one "round" is executed by "30 seconds" after the opening of the winning opening 65a is started or by winning 10 balls while the winning opening 65a is open.

The special LED group 37b is composed of a total of 12 LEDs, that is, an upper LED group 37b1 composed of 6 LEDs and a lower LED group 37b2 also composed of 6 LEDs. In the upper LED group 37b1, the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is dynamically displayed. Further, in the lower LED group 37b2, the second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is dynamically displayed.

Specifically, the upper LED group 37b1 is dynamically operated until a variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning of the first starting port 64a provided in the center of the board surface of the game board 13 elapses. After the display (in the first embodiment, the lower LEDs are sequentially lit one by one from the uppermost LED of the upper LED group 37b1 and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), a symbol showing the determination result (first embodiment). Then, the stop display is performed with any of a total of 64 types of stop symbols) depending on the combination of each lighting pattern of the six LEDs.

Further, the lower LED group 37b2 is dynamically displayed until a variation time (dynamic display time) determined based on the winning of the second starting port 64b provided on the right side side of the game board 13 elapses (dynamic display time). In the first embodiment, the lower LEDs are turned on one by one in order from the uppermost LED of the lower LED group 37b2, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), and then a symbol showing the determination result (in the first embodiment, Depending on the combination of each lighting pattern of the 6 LEDs, the stop display is performed with one of a total of 64 types of stop symbols).

In any of the LED groups 37b1 and 37b2, when the judgment result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the judgment result is a big hit, it corresponds to the type (type) of the big hit. Each LED group is lit and displayed in the lighting pattern. The details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not a ball enters the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b is determined to be a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, the jackpot type is determined. Is also determined.

The jackpot types determined here include "probability variation A" corresponding to "10 rounds (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as" R ") probability variation jackpot", "probability variation B" corresponding to "5R probability variation jackpot", and "probability variation B". "Time saving A" corresponding to "10R time saving big hit" is prepared (see FIG. 24 (b)).

Here, the jackpot type of "probability variation A" corresponding to "10R probability variation jackpot" is that after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, the jackpot probability of each special symbol is one of the following jackpots (hereinafter, "" It will be in a higher probability state than in the "normal game state" until the occurrence of "next jackpot"), and the probability of hitting a normal symbol will be higher than that in the "normal game state" until the occurrence of the next jackpot. It is a big hit that shifts to the "probability fluctuation state".

In addition, the jackpot type of "probability variation B" corresponding to "5R probability variation jackpot" is that after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds, the jackpot probability of each special symbol is one of the following jackpots (hereinafter, "next time"). It will be in a higher probability state than in the "normal game state" until the occurrence of "big hit"), and the probability of hitting the normal symbol will also be in a higher probability state than in the "normal game state" until the next big hit occurs. It is a big hit that shifts to the "probability fluctuation state".

In addition, the jackpot type of "time reduction A" corresponding to "10R time reduction with jackpot" is a low probability that the jackpot probability of each special symbol becomes equivalent to the "normal game state" after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds. On the other hand, the jackpot that shifts to the gaming state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "time reduction state") in which the hit probability of the normal symbol becomes a high probability state until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. That is.

Here, each gaming state will be described in more detail. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "normal gaming state" refers to a gaming state that is not a "probability fluctuation state" or a "time shortening state", and is a jackpot probability of each special symbol and a hit of a normal symbol. It refers to a state in which the probability is normal (that is, a low probability state) and the opening of the ordinary electric service 64c is short-time (so-called non-open extension state). That is, in the "normal game state", the jackpot probability of each special symbol is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state", and the hit probability of the normal symbol is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state". Since the opening time of the normal electric service 64c is also short, the game state in which the ball is easy to win in the second starting port 64b (hereinafter, the state in which the ball is easy to win in the second starting port 64b). It is not the "winning assistance state"), but the most disadvantageous (low advantage) gaming state for the player.

Next, in the "time shortened state", the jackpot probability of each special symbol becomes a low probability state as in the "normal game state", but the hit probability of the normal symbol increases, and the opening time of the normal electric service 64c is increased. A state in which it is easy to win a ball to the second starting port 64b for a long time (hereinafter, the winning probability is increased and the opening time of the normal electric service 64c is long. In addition, a state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol is increased and the opening time of the normal electric function 64c is long and it is easy to win a ball in the second starting port 64b is referred to as ". It may be referred to as "a state in which the winning assist function is activated".) That is, the "time shortened state" is a state in which the jackpot by the special symbol is equivalent to the "normal game state", but the hit by the ordinary symbol is easily derived, and the open state of the ordinary electric service 64c becomes long. Therefore, in the "time shortened state", since it is easy to win the fired ball to the second starting port 64b, it is possible to continuously execute the dynamic display of the special figure 2 and to the second starting port 64b. It is possible to obtain a prize ball (for example, 1 piece / prize) based on the prize of the player and play the game while suppressing the decrease of the number of balls held.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as described above, the “time reduction state” is the predetermined number of times for each jackpot after the jackpot of the jackpot type “time saving A” (see FIG. 24 (b)). It is maintained until the dynamic display of the special symbol (100 times in the first embodiment) is executed. Then, after the dynamic display of the special symbol of the specified number of times is executed (that is, after the "electric support end"), the "time reduction state" is configured to shift to the "normal game state". (See FIG. 10).

Next, in the "probability fluctuation state", after the end of the jackpot, the jackpot probability of each special symbol after that is increased as an added value, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol is increased, and the ordinary electric service 64c is won. The auxiliary function is activated. That is, the "probability fluctuation state" is a state in which the jackpot result by the special symbol is easily derived, the hit result by the ordinary symbol is easily derived, and the open state of the ordinary electric service 64c becomes long. Therefore, in the "probability fluctuation state", the prize-winning assist function is activated, and the fired ball can easily win a prize in the second starting port 64b. A prize ball (for example, 1 piece / prize) based on a prize in the second starting port 64b can be obtained to play a game while suppressing a decrease in the number of balls held, and a jackpot game based on the dynamic display of Special Figure 2 It is possible to play a game in a state where (special game state) is likely to occur.

Here, the display mode of the special LED group 37b for each jackpot type will be described. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group 37b1 and the lower LED group 37b2 for the first special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "probability change A", and the jackpot. There are 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the type "probability variation B" and 21 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving A", for a total of 64 types of display patterns. Then, each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2, it can recognize that the stop display of the loss has been stopped, while the jackpot types "probability change A" and "probability change B" can be recognized. It is difficult to identify which stop display is "Time saving A".

With this configuration, even if each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, if all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display are not grasped. , It becomes difficult for the player to recognize the winning jackpot type. Therefore, for example, even if the "probability variation A" is won in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the jackpot result corresponding to the "time saving A" is displayed as a provisional display on the drum display device 81. By displaying it, it is possible to make it difficult to determine which gaming state it is in. As a result, it is possible to create a playability that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, to improve the interest of the game, and to perform promotion production during the big hit or after the big hit is over. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected game and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the normal symbol, the time during which the ordinary electric service 64c, which will be described later, attached to the second starting port 64b is opened, or once by the ordinary symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The number of times that the ordinary electric service 64c is released may be changed by hitting. Specifically, in the "time shortened state" or the like, the time for opening the normal electric service 64c attached to the second starting port 64b may be longer than in the "normal gaming state", or it is normal for each hit. The number of times that the electric service 64c is released may be larger than in the case of the "normal gaming state". In addition, in the "time shortened state", at least two things are performed at the same time: increasing the hit probability of the normal symbol, prolonging the opening time of the normal electric function 64c, and increasing the number of times of opening the ordinary electric function 64c at the same time. You may do so.

At the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64a, 64b, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. Further, the balls that have entered the winning openings 63, 64a, 64b, and 65a are guided to the ball discharge path after passing through the switch for detecting the entry of the balls provided for each winning opening. The ball guided to the ball discharge path passes through an out switch (not shown) for detecting the guided ball, and then is discharged to the island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (roles) such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6, the base plate 60 constituting the game board 13, the board back unit 300 also constituting the game board 13 and arranged behind the pachinko machine 10 of the base plate 60, and , The light guide unit 400 assembled to the board back unit 300, and the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the light guide unit 400 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the board back unit 300.

First, as shown in FIG. 5, the game board 13 is composed of a base plate 60, a board back unit 300, and a drum display device 81, with respect to the back side of the pachinko machine 10 of the base plate 60 forming the game area. , The back board unit 300 is assembled, and the drum display device 81 is attached to the back board unit 300.

Next, as shown in FIG. 6, the board back unit 300 includes a board back unit base 301, a light guide unit 400, a right side notification lamp LED board 302, a right side notification lamp member 303, a left side notification lamp LED board 304, and a left side notification. It is composed of a lamp member 305, a notification lamp assembly unit 306, and a confirmation lamp unit 310. First, the light guide unit 400, the LED board 302 for the right side notification lamp, the LED board 304 for the left side notification lamp, and the confirmation lamp unit 310 are fixed to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the board back unit base 301 by screwing. After being assembled, the right side notification lamp member 303 is assembled so as to correspond to the LED board 302 for the right side notification lamp, and the left side notification lamp member 305 is assembled so as to correspond to the LED board 304 for the left side notification lamp. The backboard unit 300 is formed by fixing the lamp assembly portion 306 to the backboard unit base 301 with screws.

The right side notification lamp member 303 and the left side notification lamp member 305 are lamps for suggesting various game situations and the like in the variation effect of the third symbol to the player. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, various information regarding the variation effect of the third symbol and information regarding the game state can be suggested to the player by the lighting patterns and lighting colors of the right side notification lamp member 303 and the left side notification lamp member 305. It is configured in.

The confirmation lamp unit 310 is a drive-type lamp for suggesting that the jackpot occurs by lighting and driving the confirmation lamp 311 when the jackpot occurs in the fluctuation effect. The confirmation lamp unit 310 includes a confirmation lamp 311, a confirmation lamp LED (not shown) for lighting the confirmation lamp 311 and a rotary drive motor (not shown) for rotationally driving the confirmation lamp 311. And, it is composed of. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the variation effect of the third symbol, the player turns on and rotates the confirmation lamp 311 at the timing determined by the lottery to indicate that the big hit has occurred. It is structured to clearly suggest. Further, when the confirmation lamp 311 wins a jackpot that generates a "probability fluctuation state", the confirmation lamp 311 lights up in a long lighting pattern with a long lighting time (for example, "10 seconds"), and the "probability fluctuation state" is generated. If a jackpot that is not a jackpot that causes "" is won, the confirmation lamp 311 is configured to light in a short lighting pattern with a short lighting time (for example, "2 seconds"). The lighting timing and the like of the confirmation lamp 311 will be described later.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 7 to 10, the detailed configuration of the light guide unit 400 and the positional relationship between the light guide unit 400 and the drum display device 81 will be described. 7 is a rear perspective view of the light guide unit 400, FIG. 8 is a front side exploded perspective view of the light guide unit 400, and FIG. 9 is a rear side exploded perspective view of the light guide unit 400. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the positional relationship of the drum display device 81 with respect to the schematic side sectional view of the light guide unit 400 in the XX line of FIG. 7.

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the light guide unit 400 includes a front light guide plate 410, a lower LED unit 414, a front right LED unit 415, a front left LED unit 416, an upper spacer 417, a lower spacer 418, and a rear side. It is composed of a light guide plate 420, a rear upper LED unit 422, and a display area forming member 430.

The front light guide plate 410 is configured such that upper and lower flat plate portions extending in a direction parallel to the surface of the base plate 60 are continuously formed with respect to a regular R-shaped portion along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. There is. More specifically, an upward inverted R-shaped portion bent toward the front side of the game board 13 having a size of about R32 is formed from the flat plate portion above the front light guide plate 410, and a drum display device 81 (rear side) is continuously formed from the upper inverted R-shaped portion. A regular R-shaped portion bulging in the front direction of the game board 13 is formed along the outer peripheral shape of the light guide plate 420) with a size of about R80, and further, the game board 13 is continuously formed with a size of about R32. A bent downward inverted R-shaped portion is formed on the front side, and a flat plate portion below is continuously formed from the downward inverted R-shaped portion.

As described above, a plurality of cherry blossom petals are guided to the back surface side of the front light guide plate 410 (the front surface in the back direction of the pachinko machine 10) by guiding light incident on the front light guide plate 410 from various directions. A second decorative pattern group 411 that imitates a cherry blossom snowstorm, a third decorative pattern 412 that imitates one sunfish, and a fourth decorative pattern group 413 that imitates a bubble group composed of a plurality of bubbles. Various patterns of the above are provided with various uneven lens cuts so that they can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The second decorative symbol group 411 is formed in the front left and right end regions of the regular R shape portion, the third decorative symbol is formed in the front view center region of the regular R shape portion, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is downward. The inverted R-shaped portion and the lower flat plate portion are formed evenly as a whole.

The concave-convex lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the design of the second decorative symbol group 411 is located below the front light guide plate 410 from the front lower LED 414c at both left and right ends mounted on the lower LED substrate 414b of the lower LED unit 414. When light is incident upward from the lower end surface of the flat plate portion of the above, the guided light is configured to be emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the second decorative symbol group 411 emits light from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and becomes visible due to the light incident upward from both ends of the lower end surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410.

The concave-convex lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the design of the second decorative design group 411 emits only the light incident on the upper side of the light guided to the flat plate portion to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Light incident from another direction (for example, the lateral direction) is configured so as not to be emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the concave-convex lens cut corresponding to the second decorative symbol group 411. In other words, the second decorative symbol group 411 emits only the light incident from the lower end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light incident from the other direction is pachinko. It is configured so that it does not emit light to the front side of the machine 10 and does not emit light (invisible or difficult to see) by passing through the portion where the second decorative symbol group 411 is formed as it is.

More specifically, the concave-convex-shaped lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the symbol of the second decorative symbol group 411 was incident from the front-viewing upward direction and the front-viewing downward direction among the light guided to the flat plate portion. The light (light guided in the front view upward direction and the front view downward direction) is configured to be emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, while the light incident from the front view lateral direction (front view left direction and front view left direction). The light guided to the right in the front view) is configured so as not to be emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 depending on the concave-convex shape lens cut corresponding to the second decorative symbol group 411. Here, among the light guided to the flat plate portion, the light incident from the front view upward direction or the front view downward direction (light guided in the front view upward direction and the front view downward direction) is used. Only, the lens cut may have a shape that emits the light radiated to the uneven lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the design of the second decorative design group 411 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The shape of the lens cut is required to be elaborate, and the processing cost of the lens cut may increase. Therefore, among the light guided to the flat plate portion, the light incident from the front-viewing upward direction and the front-viewing downward direction (light guided in the front-viewing upward direction and the front-viewing downward direction) is the case. However, by making the lens cut having an uneven shape such that the light emitted to the second decorative symbol group 411 is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing cost of the lens cut.

On the other hand, as described above, among the light guided to the flat plate portion, the light incident from the front-viewing upward direction or the front-viewing downward direction (light guided in the front-viewing upward direction and the front-viewing downward direction). A lens cut may be configured such that the light radiated to the second decorative symbol group 411 is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 only by either one.

Further, since the front light guide plate 410 is arranged on the front side (front direction side) of the pachinko machine 10 from the rear light guide plate 420, it is irradiated from the confirmation lamp 311 arranged above the front light guide plate 410. It is more susceptible to the effects of light and the light emitted from the indoor lighting provided on the ceiling of the game hall than the rear light guide plate 420. Therefore, the second decorative symbol group 411 (the same applies to the third decorative symbol 412 and the fourth decorative symbol group 413) formed on the front light guide plate 410 does not react as much as possible to the light from above the front view (mislights). However, it is preferable to use a lens cut having an uneven shape such that the lens is lit (emitted) only by light from below the front view (or in the lateral direction of the front view). Then, the LED for guiding light is not arranged above the front view of the light guide plate 410, but the LED 414c for lower front is arranged below the front view, and the second decorative symbol group 411 can be lit by the LED 414c for lower front. By configuring the above, it is possible to suppress the erroneous lighting of the second decorative symbol group 411 due to the lighting of the confirmation lamp 311 and the indoor lighting of the game hall.

In the first embodiment, the second decorative symbol group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 is lit only by the front lower side LED 414c arranged below the front view of the front light guide plate 410. Instead of the display, the front side upper LED is arranged above the front view of the front light guide plate 410, and the lighting display of the second decorative symbol group 411 is performed only by the front side upper LED. It may be configured, or may be configured to display the lighting of the second decorative symbol group 411 by the front side upper LED and the front side lower LED 414c. Further, the third decorative symbol 412 may also be configured to be lit by the front side upper LED and / or the front side lower LED 414c.

The concave-convex lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the design of the third decorative symbol 412 is located below the front light guide plate 410 from the front lower LED 414c other than the left and right ends mounted on the lower LED board 414b of the lower LED unit 414. When light is incident upward from the lower end surface of the flat plate portion of the above, the guided light is configured to be emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the light incident upward from both ends of the lower end surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 (that is, the central portion of the lower end surface) causes the third decorative symbol 412 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Lights up and becomes visible.

The concave-convex shape lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the design of the third decorative symbol 412 is the light guided to the flat plate portion as in the case of the concave-convex shape lens cut corresponding to the design of the second decorative symbol group 411. , Only the light incident above is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light incident from another direction (for example, the lateral direction) is emitted from the pachinko machine by the concave-convex lens cut corresponding to the third decorative symbol 412. 10 It is configured so that it is not emitted to the front side. In other words, the third decorative symbol 412 emits only the light incident from the lower end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light incident from the other direction is the pachinko machine. 10 It is configured so that it does not emit light to the front side, passes through the portion where the second decorative symbol group 411 is formed, and does not emit light (not visible or difficult to see).

The concave-convex lens cut (vertical groove) corresponding to the design of the fourth decorative design group 413 is the front right LED 415c (see FIG. 19) mounted on the front right LED substrate 415b of the front right LED unit 415. And / or from the front left LED 416c (see FIG. 19) mounted on the front left LED board 416b of the front left LED unit 416, the left end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 and / or. When light is incident from the right end surface in the lateral direction, the guided light is configured to be emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 emits light from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and is visible due to the light incident laterally from the left end surface and / or the right end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410. Become.

The concave-convex-shaped lens cut (vertical groove) corresponding to the design of the fourth decorative design group 413 emits only the light incident in the lateral direction to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 among the light guided to the flat plate portion. However, the light incident from another direction (for example, from the lower side to the upper side) is configured so as not to be emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the concave-convex shape lens cut corresponding to the fourth decorative symbol group 413. In other words, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 emits only the light incident from the left end surface or the right end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the light incident from another direction. Is configured so that it does not emit light to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and does not emit light (invisible or difficult to see) as it passes through the portion where the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is formed. The details of the light emitting modes of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 will be described later.

Similar to the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420 has a continuous upper and lower flat plate portion extending in a direction parallel to the surface of the base plate 60 with respect to a regular R-shaped portion along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. It is formed and configured in. More specifically, an upward inverted R-shaped portion bent toward the front side of the game board 13 having a size of about R30 is formed from the flat plate portion above the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81 (front side) is continuously formed from the upper inverted R-shaped portion. A regular R-shaped portion bulging in the front direction of the game board 13 is formed along the outer peripheral shape of the light guide plate 410) with a size of about R75, and further, the game board 13 is continuously formed with a size of about R30. A bent downward inverted R-shaped portion is formed on the front side, and a flat plate portion below is continuously formed from the downward inverted R-shaped portion.

Further, on the upper end portion (plane) of the rear light guide plate 420 in front view, from a plurality of rear upper LEDs 422c (see FIG. 12) mounted on the rear upper LED board 422b of the rear upper LED unit 422. A rear upper diffuser lens 423 that diffuses the emitted light in a plurality of directions inside the rear light guide plate 420 is provided. Further, on the lower end (plane) of the rear light guide plate 420 in front view, the light emitted from the plurality of rear lower LEDs 424 mounted on the lower LED substrate 414b of the lower LED unit 414 is emitted from the rear side. A rear lower diffusing lens 425 that diffuses in a plurality of directions inside the light guide plate 420 is provided. The details of the light irradiation (passing) mode by the rear upper diffusing lens 423 and the rear lower diffusing lens 425 will be described later.

As described above, light incident on the rear light guide plate 420 from above and / or from below is guided to the back surface side of the rear light guide plate 420 (the surface in the back surface direction of the pachinko machine 10). The first decorative pattern group 421 that imitates a school of fish composed of a plurality of types of fish is provided with various uneven lens cuts so that the first decorative pattern group 421 can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The first decorative pattern group 421 is formed evenly on the entire regular R-shaped portion.

The concave-convex lens cut corresponding to the design of the first decorative symbol group 421 is formed after the rear lower LED 424 mounted on the lower LED substrate 414b of the lower LED unit 414 and / or the rear upper LED unit 422. When light is incident from a plurality of rear upper LEDs 422c (see FIG. 12) mounted on the side upper LED substrate 422b toward the lower flat plate portion and / or the upper flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420. In addition, it is configured to emit the guided light to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the light incident from the lower end (face) of the lower flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420 and / or the upper end (face) of the upper flat plate portion causes the first decoration from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The symbol group 421 emits light and becomes visible.

The concave-convex-shaped lens cut corresponding to the design of the first decorative design group 421 is configured to emit light incident from various directions among the light guided to the flat plate portion to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. ing. The details of the light emitting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 will be described later.

More specifically, the concave-convex shape lens cut corresponding to the symbol of the first decorative symbol group 421 is the front view upward direction, the front view downward direction, the front view right direction, and the front of the light guided to the flat plate portion. It is configured to emit light incident from a direction parallel to the flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420, such as the left viewing direction, to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. When light is incident from the non-flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420, that is, the upward inverted R shape portion, the normal R shape portion, or the downward inverted R shape portion, the light repeatedly reflected in the rear light guide plate 420 is upwardly inverted. When reflected by the R-shaped portion of the R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, or the downward inverted R-shaped portion, the light is guided while the incident angle and the reflection angle are slightly different between the front surface and the back surface. Therefore, even if light is incident from the front view lateral direction of the upward inverted R shape portion, the normal R shape portion, or the downward inverted R shape portion, the light is not guided in the front view lateral direction and is obliquely upward in the front view. Light is guided in the direction or diagonally downward in the front view, and the light is guided unevenly (unequally) to the first decorative symbol group 421 provided on the back surface side of the rear light guide plate 420, respectively. Depending on the lighting, the lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421 may be strong or weak, resulting in sparse lighting. Therefore, by incident light from the end faces of the upper flat plate portion and the lower flat plate portion of the rear light guide plate 420, the light can be evenly incident on the first decorative symbol group 421, and the first decorative symbol group can be incident. The lighting of 421 can be kept uniform.

In the first embodiment, when light is incident (light-guided) on the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, light is incident from the end surface (part) of any of the flat plate portions of the light guide plates 410 and 420. It is configured so that light is not incident from the R-shaped portion (that is, the normal R-shaped portion, the upward inverted R-shaped portion, or the downward inverted R-shaped portion). This is because when light is attempted to be incident from the R-shaped portion, the traveling direction of the incident light changes depending on the R-shaped portion, and there is a possibility that the desired symbol may not be properly lit or it may be difficult to light the desired pattern. Further, the LED or the like must be arranged along the shape of the end surface of the R-shaped portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Further, the R-shaped portion is formed along the outer shape of the effect member such as the drum display device 81 and the movable accessory, and when the LED substrate or the like is arranged on the side of the R-shaped portion, the design of the effect member is performed. It may limit the degree of freedom. Therefore, in each of the light guide plates 410 and 420 having the R-shaped portion, by incident light from the end face (part) of any of the flat plate portions, the above-mentioned problems can be suitably solved and the degree of freedom in designing each member can be increased. Can be done.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the upper flat plate portion (upper flat plate portion), the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the normal R-shaped portion constituting the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, respectively. Of the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the lower flat plate portion (lower flat plate portion), the upper flat plate portion and the lower flat plate portion are on the upper side of the front view, the right side of the front view, the left side of the front view, and the lower side of the front view. It is configured to inject the light of each LED 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 from the end face (side surface).

This is because, as the first reason, each decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413, 421 of each light guide plate 410, 420 is appropriately lit. The non-flat plate portion of each light guide plate 410, 420, that is, the upward inverted R shape portion, the normal R shape portion, or the downward inverted R shape portion is R-shaped on the front surface and the back surface by the thickness of each light guide plate 410, 420. The radii are formed slightly differently. Therefore, when light is incident from the end surface (side surface) of the upward inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, or the downward inverted R-shaped portion of the light guide plates 410, 420, the light repeatedly reflected in the light guide plates 410, 420 is emitted. When reflected by the R-shaped portion of the upward inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, or the downward inverted R-shaped portion, the light is guided while the incident angle and the reflection angle are slightly different between the front surface and the back surface. Therefore, light is guided unevenly (inhomogeneously) to each decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413, 421 applied to the back surface side of each light guide plate 410, 420, and each decorative symbol is distributed depending on the part. There is a risk that the lighting of the groups 411, 421, 413, 421 will be sparsely lit due to the strength and weakness of the lighting.

Therefore, by incident light from the end faces (side surfaces) of the upper flat plate portion and the lower flat plate portion of the light guide plates 410 and 420, the light repeatedly reflected in the light guide plates 410 and 420 is at least the upper flat plate portion and the lower flat plate portion. In the state of guiding the inside of the portion, the light is repeatedly reflected from the front surface or the back surface of each of the planar light guide plates 410 and 420, and the light is guided while the incident angle and the reflection angle are always equal. As a result, first, light is stably guided in the upper flat plate portion and the lower flat plate portion of each light guide plate 410, 420, and each decorative symbol group 411, 421, provided on the back surface side of each light guide plate 410, 420, respectively. By guiding light evenly (homogeneously) to 413 and 421, it is possible to appropriately light each decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413 and 421.

The second reason is to improve the degree of freedom in design regarding the arrangement of the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424. Since the front view side end faces of the R-shaped portions (that is, the upward inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, and the downward inverted R-shaped portion) of the light guide plates 410 and 420 are shaped along the R-shaped portions. When light is to be incident from the side end surface of the R-shaped portion, the arrangement of each LED on the LED substrate must also be arranged along the side end surface of the R-shaped portion. In particular, when the LEDs are arranged in consideration of the arrangement of each decorative symbol group 411,421,413,421, the adjustment regarding the position and spacing of each LED on the LED substrate becomes complicated, and the degree of freedom in design is reduced. There is a risk.

Therefore, the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 on the LED substrates 414b, 415b, 416b, 422b are arranged so that light is incident from the end faces (side surfaces) of the upper flat plate portion and the lower flat plate portion of the light guide plates 410, 420. The LED substrate and the LED are arranged so as not to be arranged on the end surface (side surface) of the R-shaped portion of each of the light guide plates 410 and 420. With this configuration, the arrangement of the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 on each LED substrate 414b, 415b, 416b, 422b can be easily arranged along the shapes of the end faces of the upper flat plate portion and the lower flat plate portion. (That is, they are arranged on a straight line and at equal intervals), and the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

Further, the third reason is to improve the degree of freedom in designing the staging device (drum display device 81, movable accessory, etc.) on the back side and the side side of each of the light guide plates 410 and 420. On the back side and side side of each R-shaped portion of each of the light guide plates 410 and 420, there is an effect device (drum display device 81 that performs the variation effect itself, and a drum display device 81 that performs the variation effect itself) related to the variation effect of the third symbol, which is the main game in the pachinko machine 10. Movable accessories, etc. that perform various effects in the variable effect) are arranged. Here, when the LED substrate is arranged on the front view side portion of each R-shaped portion of each of the light guide plates 410 and 420, the degree of freedom in design of each staging device may be restricted by the amount of installation of the LED substrate. ..

Therefore, in order to inject light from the end faces (side surfaces) of the upper flat plate portion and the lower flat plate portion of the light guide plates 410 and 420, the upper side of the upper flat plate portion in front view, the lower side of the lower flat plate portion in front view, and the front view. The LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 of the LED boards 414b, 415b, 416b, and 422b are arranged on the right side and the left side of the front view, and the LED boards are located at the front view side positions of the R-shaped portions of the light guide plates 410 and 420. And LED is not arranged. With this configuration, when the staging device is installed on the back side and the side side of each of the light guide plates 410 and 420, the LED substrate and the like are not obstructed by the arrangement of the staging device. The degree of freedom in designing can be improved.

The lower LED unit 414 is provided at a lower position in the front view of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, and has a lower base 414a and a lower LED substrate 414b on which the front lower LED 414c and the rear lower LED 424 are mounted. It is composed of a front side lower condensing lens 414d.

The lower base 414a is configured so that the lower LED substrate 414b can be held by screws or the like, and the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the front lower condensing lens 414d are formed by positioning bosses (ribs) or the like. The front right LED unit 415, the front left LED unit 416, and the display area forming member 430 are connected and fixed with screws or the like while being held at predetermined positions, so that they can be positioned and fixed.

Further, the lower base 414a emits light emitted from the front lower LED 414c mounted on the lower LED substrate 414b to only the front light guide plate 410 via the front lower condensing lens 414d, and rear. A predetermined partition rib is formed so that the light emitted from the lower side LED 424 is emitted only to the lower rear diffuser lens 425 formed on the lower end (plane) of the rear light guide plate 420. There is. As a result, the light emitted from each of the LEDs 414c and 424 can be accurately emitted to the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, so that the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third can be accurately emitted. The decorative symbol 412 can be turned on accurately at an appropriate timing, and display abnormalities such as unintended lighting of the decorative symbol can be suppressed. The details of the light irradiation (passing) mode by the front lower condensing lens 414d and the light irradiation (diffusion) mode by the rear lower diffusing lens 425 will be described later.

The front right LED unit 415 is provided at the front right position of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, and is equipped with a front right base 415a and a plurality of front right LEDs 415c (see FIG. 19). It is composed of a front right LED substrate 415b and a front right condensing lens 415d.

The front right base portion 415a is configured so that the front right LED substrate 415b can be held by screws or the like, and the shapes of the right end faces of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 (upper flat plate portion, upper portion). Positioning ribs are provided along the outer shape of each end of the inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and the lower flat plate portion). Then, while holding the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the front right condensing lens 415d at predetermined positions by the positioning bosses and positioning ribs, the lower LED unit 414, the rear upper LED unit 422, and the display are displayed. By connecting and fixing to the region forming member 430 with screws or the like, each of them can be positioned and fixed.

Further, the front right base portion 415a receives light emitted from the front right LED 415c (see FIG. 19) mounted on the front right LED substrate 415b via the front right condensing lens 415d. A predetermined partition rib is formed so as to emit light only to the flat plate portion below the light guide plate 410. As a result, the light emitted from the front right LED 415c can be accurately emitted to the front light guide plate 410, so that the fourth decorative symbol group 413 can be turned on accurately at an appropriate timing, and an unintended symbol can be turned on. It is possible to suppress display abnormalities such as lighting of. The details of the light irradiation (passing) mode by the front right condenser lens 415d will be described later.

The front left LED unit 416 is provided at the front left position of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, and is equipped with a front left base 416a and a plurality of front left LEDs 416c (see FIG. 19). It is composed of the front left LED substrate 416b and the front left condensing lens 416d.

The front left base portion 416a is configured so that the front left LED substrate 416b can be held by screws or the like, and the shapes of the left end faces of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 (upper flat plate portion, upper portion). Positioning ribs are provided along the outer shape of each end of the inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and the lower flat plate portion). Then, while holding the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the front left condensing lens 416d at predetermined positions by the positioning bosses and positioning ribs, the lower LED unit 414, the rear upper LED unit 422, and the display are displayed. By connecting and fixing to the region forming member 430 with screws or the like, each of them can be positioned and fixed.

Further, the front left base portion 416a receives light emitted from the front left LED 416c (see FIG. 19) mounted on the front left LED substrate 416b via the front left condensing lens 416d. A predetermined partition rib is formed so as to emit light only to the flat plate portion below the light guide plate 410. As a result, the light emitted from the front left LED 416c can be accurately emitted to the front light guide plate 410, so that the fourth decorative symbol group 413 can be turned on accurately at an appropriate timing, and an unintended symbol can be turned on. It is possible to suppress display abnormalities such as lighting of. The details of the light irradiation (passing) mode by the front left condensing lens 416d will be described later.

The rear upper LED unit 422 is provided at a position above the front view of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, and is equipped with a rear upper base 422a and a rear upper LED 422c (see FIG. 12). It is composed of an upper LED substrate 422b.

The rear upper base 422a is configured so that the rear upper LED substrate 422b can be held by screws or the like, and the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are respectively positioned at predetermined positions by positioning bosses (ribs) or the like. By connecting and fixing the front right LED unit 415, the front left LED unit 416, and the display area forming member 430 with screws or the like while holding them, each of them can be positioned and fixed.

Further, in the rear upper base portion 422a, the light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c (see FIG. 12) is formed on the upper end (plane) of the rear light guide plate 420, and the rear upper diffuser lens 423 is formed. A predetermined partition rib is formed so as to emit light only to the lens. As a result, the light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c can be accurately emitted to the rear light guide plate 420, so that the first decorative symbol group 421 can be turned on accurately at an appropriate timing, which is not intended. It is possible to suppress display abnormalities such as lighting of symbols. The details of the light irradiation (diffusion) mode by the rear upper diffuser lens 423 will be described later.

The upper spacer 417 and the lower spacer 418 have a predetermined thickness (for example, 5 mm) and are formed in a flat plate shape extending in the longitudinal direction. The upper spacer 417 and the lower spacer 418 are arranged between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 in order to provide a predetermined space between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. By providing a space between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 in this way, it is difficult for the light incident on one light guide plate 410, 420 to be incident on the other light guide plates 420, 410. It is possible to prevent unintended lighting of decorative symbols 411, 421, 413, 421 and the like.

As described above, the display area forming member 430 is arranged on the front side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 (drum display device 81) in front of the front view, and the drum display device 81 (front light guide plate 410 and rear guide) is arranged. A central opening 431 is formed so that the regular R-shaped portion of the light plate 420) can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and a lens cut 432 is formed on the outer edge portion of the central opening 431.

The lens cut 432 is provided for clarifying the display area (effective line) of the display symbol in the drum display device 81, and the confirmation lamp 311 located in the upper portion of the display area forming member 430 in front view is provided. It is provided to suppress (prevent) the light emitted from the confirmation lamp 311 from being emitted to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 (drum display device 81) when the lamp is turned on.

Here, with reference to FIG. 10, the positional relationship between the display area forming member 430, the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, the drum display device 81, and the confirmation lamp 311 will be described. FIG. 10 shows the positional relationship of the drum display device 81 and the positional relationship of the determination lamp 311 and the display area forming member 430 with respect to the schematic side sectional view of the light guide unit 400 in the XX line of FIG. It is a figure shown. In FIG. 10, for convenience of explanation, the distance between the display area forming member 430, the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81 is enlarged and expressed.

As shown in FIG. 10, when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front side, the display area forming member 430, the front light guide plate 410, and the rear light guide plate 420 are arranged in order from the outside (front side of the pachinko machine 10 (left side in the drawing)). The drum display devices 81 are arranged in this order. Then, from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430, a total of nine symbol display areas of each of the three reels LR, CR, and RR of the drum display device 81 can be visually recognized, and the other symbol areas (the first). Since the 3 symbols) are covered with the lens cut 432, they are invisible or difficult to see. Further, from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430, the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit and displayed. It is configured to be visible when Further, since the lower side of the lens cut 432 on the lower side of the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 is transparent, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 formed on the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 is lit. When this is done, it is configured to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the display area forming member 430 clarifies the effective line of the variation effect in the drum display device 81, and the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group. When 413 is lit and displayed, they can be visually recognized while avoiding the lens cut 432 portion of the display area forming member 430.

Further, the lens cut 432 is provided so that when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit and displayed, the light emitted from the confirmation lamp 311 is not guided to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, that is, it is difficult to be guided. It is located in the upper portion (lower portion, both side portions) of the regular R-shaped portion of each of the light guide plates 410 and 420 so as to block the light of the confirmation lamp 311.

More specifically, the lens cut 432 has a rib shape in which a plurality of ribs are continuously erected on the back side thereof (the back side of the pachinko machine 10), and is incident on the lens cut 432. It is configured to disperse the light and reduce the amount of light transmitted at the lens cut 432 portion.

In the lens cut 432, instead of the plurality of rib shapes, the lens cut 432 may be configured by knurling or mirror surface processing to reduce the amount of light transmitted through the lens cut 432.

Further, the lens cut 432 may be applied to the inner surface of the upright wall (entire bulging portion) on the front side of the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430. With this configuration, the display area showing the effective line of the variation effect is clarified in a square shape, and the light that can be incident from the front view side of the light guide unit 400 is dispersed by the lens cut 432. , It is configured to reduce the amount of light transmitted at the lens cut 432 portion.

Further, the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 located above the front view of the light guide unit 400 is an effect of suggesting (notifying) that a big hit occurs in the variable display, and the first decorative symbol group 421 of the light guide unit 400, Since the effect is more important in the game than the effect of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 (that is, the suggestion of the jackpot expectation), the first decorative symbol group 421, the first. The lighting brightness is configured to be stronger than that of the effect of the 2 decorative symbol group 411, the 3rd decorative symbol 412, or the 4th decorative symbol group 413. This is to make it easier for the player to recognize the effect of the definite lamp 311 having a high importance when these effects are combined.

The front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are formed in a shape (regular R shape portion) along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81, and lamps and the like are lit at positions above and below the regular R shape portion. In this case, when the light of the lamp is incident on the regular R-shaped portion and each decorative symbol group 411,421,413,421 is abnormally lit, the lighting mode and variation of the decorative symbol group 411,421,413,421 are changed. There may be a discrepancy with the result of fluctuations in the production.

Therefore, the light incident by the lens cut 432 is provided by arranging the lens cut 432 between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 in the vertical direction of the positive R-shaped portion and between the front light guide plate 410 and the confirmation lamp 311. Can be diffused (weakened). Therefore, light other than the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 due to the lighting of the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 is directed to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. By suppressing the incident, it is possible to suppress the abnormal lighting of each decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413, 421. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an effect discrepancy such that each decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413, 421 is abnormally lit.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, since the front light guide plate 410 is arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the first decorative symbol group 421 having the highest jackpot reliability (expectation), it is incident from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The light incident on the rear light guide plate 420 can also be suppressed by the front light guide plate 410 with respect to the light. Therefore, by arranging the front light guide plate 410 as a noise cover on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the rear light guide plate 420, the light incident by the front light guide plate 410 is diffused (weakened) to some extent, thereby erroneously. It is possible to prevent the first decorative symbol group 421, which has a large effect discrepancy, from being abnormally lit when the lighting is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an effect discrepancy such that each decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413, 421 is abnormally lit.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 25, the traveling direction of light from the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the rear lower diffuser lens 425 with respect to the rear light guide plate 420 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "optical path"). The rear light guide plate 420, explaining the light path from the front lower light condenser lens 414d, the front right condenser lens 415d, and the front left condenser lens 416d with respect to the front light guide plate 410. The light emitting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 in the above, the light emitting mode of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 in the front light guide plate 410, and the confirmation lamp 311 and the front light guide plate. The effect mode of the 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81 will be described.

First, with reference to FIG. 11, the positional relationship between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 will be described. FIG. 11 is a schematic perspective view of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. In FIG. 11, for convenience of explanation, the second decorative symbol group 411 provided on the front light guide plate 410, the third decorative symbol 412 and the fourth decorative symbol group 413, and the rear light guide plate 420 are provided. 1 The arrangement of the decorative symbol group 421 is expressed by arranging it differently from FIG. 12 and the like described later.

As shown in FIG. 11, the front light guide plate 410 is located on the front side (left side of the drawing) of the pachinko machine 10, and the rear light guide plate 420 is located on the back side (right side of the drawing) of the pachinko machine 10. As described above, in the front light guide plate 410, a third decorative symbol 412 imitating a sunfish was formed in the central portion of the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the third decorative symbol 412 was formed. A second decorative pattern group 411 imitating cherry blossom petals is formed on both the left and right sides of the regular R-shaped portion, and further, a bubble symbol is formed over the entire region of the lower inverted R-shaped portion continuous from the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410. A fourth decorative pattern group 413 imitating the above is formed.

Further, as described above, in the rear light guide plate 420, a first decorative symbol group 421 that imitates a fish school symbol is formed in the entire region of the regular R-shaped portion of the rear light guide plate 420.

Therefore, when the light guide unit 400 is formed by connecting the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are formed. The display area with the first decorative symbol group 421 of the above is configured to overlap (superimpose). As described above, in the effect of the light guide unit 400, various effects can be executed in the display area of 1, the effect of the effect of the light guide unit 400 can be enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Then, referring to FIGS. 12 to 16, the optical path of the light from the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the rear lower diffuser lens 425 with respect to the rear light guide plate 420, and the first decorative symbol on the rear light guide plate 420. The light emitting mode (lighting mode or display mode; the same applies hereinafter) of the group 421 will be described. FIG. 12 shows the positional relationship between the first decorative symbol group 421 that can be lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate 420, the rear upper LED 422c of the rear upper LED unit 422, and the rear lower LED 424 of the lower LED unit 414. It is a schematic front view shown. FIG. 13 is a schematic enlarged view of the A portion of FIG. 12, in which the rear lower diffusing lens 425 formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 and the posterior lower LED 424 of the lower LED unit 414 are shown. It is a schematic front view which showed the relationship. FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing an optical path of light by the rear lower diffusing lens. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a lighting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate 420, and FIG. 15 (a) shows the rear side corresponding to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420. It is a figure which schematically showed the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group 421 when the upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are turned on, and FIG. 15 (b) shows the rear from the state of FIG. 15 (a). It is a figure which shows typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group 421 when the rear side upper LED 422c and the rear side lower LED 424 corresponding to the central region of a side light guide plate 420 are additionally lit. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a lighting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate 420, and FIG. 16 (a) shows the rear light guide plate from the state of FIG. 15 (b). FIG. 16B is a diagram schematically showing a lighting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the left side region of 420 are additionally lit. 16 (a) schematically illustrates the lighting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off. It is a figure shown in. In FIGS. 12, 15 and 16, each LED 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 and each diffusion lens 423, 425 are omitted or schematically represented for convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIG. 12, on the rear light guide plate 420, a first decorative symbol group 421 is formed on the entire regular R-shaped portion as a fish school symbol which is a symbol imitating a school of a plurality of types of fish. Further, a rear upper diffuser lens 423 and a rear upper diffuser lens 423 formed on the upper end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 by the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 provided above and below the rear light guide plate 420. When light is applied to the rear lower diffusing lens 425 formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420, a plurality of directions (in the first embodiment, the left side) from each of the diffusing lenses 423 and 425 of 1. It is configured to diffuse light in three directions (center and right side).

Further, the positions of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are arranged so that the rear upper LED 422c of 1 and the rear lower LED 424 of 1 are paired in the vertical direction (vertical direction). ing.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, a mode of light diffusion by the rear lower diffusing lens 425 (rear upper diffusing lens 423) will be described. FIG. 13 is a schematic enlarged view of the A portion of FIG. 12, in which the rear lower diffusing lens 425 formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 and the rear lower LED 424 of the lower LED unit 414 are shown. It is a schematic front view which showed the relationship of. FIG. 14 is a schematic enlarged view of the portion B of FIG. 13, which is a diagram schematically showing the optical path of the light by the rear lower diffusing lens 425. Since the configuration of the rear upper diffusing lens 423 is the same as the configuration of the rear lower diffusing lens 425, the description thereof will be omitted.

More specifically, in the configuration of the rear upper diffusing lens 423 and the rear lower diffusing lens 425, the positions where the rear light guide plate 420 is arranged are the end face of the upper front view and the end face of the lower front view of the rear light guide plate 420. They are composed of exactly the same shape, only different. Therefore, at the time of molding the rear upper diffusing lens 423 and the rear lower diffusing lens 425, the rear upper diffusing lens 423 and the rear lower diffusing lens are subjected to the same forming process (manufacturing process, same type, etc.). It can be molded as 425, and an increase in the manufacturing cost of the rear light guide plate 420 can be suppressed.

Further, since the shape of the rear upper diffusing lens 423 and the rear lower diffusing lens 425 are the same, the optical path of the light diffused from the rear upper diffusing lens 423 and the diffused light from the rear lower diffusing lens 425. The optical path of the light to be diffused becomes the same, and it is possible to easily set (understand) the arrival point of the optical path of the diffused light and the overlapping portion of the optical path of the light at the design stage. Specifically, in the case of the first embodiment, the optical path of the light emitted from the rear upper diffusing lens 423 and the optical path of the light emitted from the rear lower diffusing lens 425 are the rear light guide plate 420. One or more may overlap in the positive R shape portion of. More specifically, for example, in the optical path of light emitted from the front-direction diffusing portion 425b of 1 of the rear-side lower diffusing lens 425, the front direction facing the rear-side upper diffusing lens 423 in all the optical path portions. It overlaps with the optical path of the light emitted from the diffuser (without the number). Further, in the optical path of the light emitted from the left diffusing portion 425a of the rear lower diffusing lens 425, the left diffusing portion (no number) of the concave portion facing the rear upper diffusing lens 423 of the rear upper diffusing lens 423. It overlaps with the optical path of the light emitted from, and also overlaps with the optical path of the light emitted from the front-direction diffusing portion (without the number) of the concave portion on the left side of the concave portion facing the opposite surface. Further, in the optical path of the light emitted from the right diffusing portion 425c of the rear lower diffusing lens 425, the right diffusing portion (no number) of the concave portion facing the rear upper diffusing lens 423 of the rear upper diffusing lens 423. It overlaps with the optical path of the light emitted from, and also overlaps with the optical path of the light emitted from the front-direction diffusing portion (without the number) of the concave portion to the right of the concave portion facing the opposite surface. As a result, it becomes easy to arrange the decorative design on the rear light guide plate 420, the decorative design on the rear light guide plate 420 is accurately lit, and the decorative design to be highlighted is arranged in the overlapping portion to emphasize the decorative design. Can be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13, a rear lower diffusing lens 425 is formed on the lower end surface of the rear light guide plate 420 so as to correspond to a plurality of rear lower LED 424s of the lower LED unit 414. Then, as shown in FIG. 14, the rear lower diffusing lens 425 is formed so that a plurality of recesses are continuous, and one recess has the same side length of the left diffusing portion 425a and the front diffusing portion. It is composed of 425b and a rightward diffusion portion 425c.

The front diffusion portion 425b is formed in a planar shape so as to be perpendicular to the irradiation direction of the light from the rear lower LED 424. Further, the left-direction diffusion portion 425a is formed in a planar shape inclined by about 50 degrees (θ1 = 50 °) to the left side with respect to the front-direction diffusion portion 425b. The right-direction diffusion portion 425c is formed in a planar shape inclined by about 50 degrees (θ1 = 50 °) to the right with respect to the front-direction diffusion portion 425b. Then, the recess formed by the left-direction diffusion portion 425a, the front-direction diffusion portion 425b, and the right-direction diffusion portion 425c is continuously provided with the rear light guide plate 420 by the width of the light emitting surface of the rear lower LED 424 of at least 1. It is formed on the lower end face.

The rear light guide plate 420 in the first embodiment is made of acrylic resin (PMMA), and when the refractive index of the acrylic resin is 1.49 to 1.53, the front diffusing portion from the rear lower LED 424 The optical path of the light incident on the 425b is emitted straight into the rear light guide plate 420 (upper side in the drawing of FIG. 14), and the light incident on the left diffusing portion 425a from the rear lower LED 424 is generated. It is refracted in a direction inclined to the left by about 20 degrees (θ2 = 20 °) with respect to the light emitted from the front diffuser 425b, and is emitted inside the rear light guide plate 420, and is emitted to the right from the rear lower LED 424. The light incident on the diffuser 425c is refracted in a direction inclined to the right by about 20 degrees (θ3 = 20 °) with respect to the light emitted from the front diffuser 425b and emitted into the rear light guide plate 420. Will be done.

In the rear lower diffusing lens 425, one recess formed by the left diffusing portion 425a, the front diffusing portion 425b, and the right diffusing portion 425c has at least the width of the light emitting surface of the rear lower diffusing portion LED424. , Multiple are provided. Therefore, the light emitted from the rear lower side LED 424 of 1 is directed to three directions (that is, the front direction and the front direction) inside the rear light guide plate 420 due to the plurality of recesses of the rear side lower diffusing lens 425. It is diffused in three directions (three directions, a direction tilted 20 degrees to the left and a direction tilted 20 degrees to the right with respect to the front direction). Further, since the left-direction diffusion portion 425a, the front-direction diffusion portion 425b, and the right-direction diffusion portion 425c are each configured to have the same side length, the width of the optical path of the diffused light is also the same. It is composed. As a result, by lighting one LED, a plurality of first decorative symbols group 421 formed at positions corresponding to each diffused optical path can be made to emit light in the same color, and even if the number of LEDs is small, the number of LEDs is various. By executing the effect, the effect of the rear light guide plate 420 can be enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Here, the rear lower diffusing lens 425 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a schematic enlarged view of FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing a mode of light distribution by the left-direction diffusion portion 425a, the front-direction diffusion portion 425b, and the right-direction diffusion portion 425c.

As shown in FIG. 51, the rear lower diffusing lens 425 has a predetermined side length (for example, the side that irradiates light in the front direction is 50 micrometers, and the side that irradiates light in the left-right direction) in the recess of 1. Is 62.5 micrometers. Hereinafter, the micrometer may be referred to as “μm”), and is composed of a left-direction diffusion portion 425a, a front-direction diffusion portion 425b, and a right-direction diffusion portion 425c. Each of the diffusing portions 425a to 425c is configured so that the optical path widths of the light emitted from the diffusing portions 425a to 425c are the same. Specifically, in each recess, the side lengths that irradiate light in the front direction are the same length (for example, 50 μm), and the side lengths that irradiate light in the left direction and the right direction are the same, respectively. It is configured to have the same length (for example, 62.5 μm), and the optical path widths of the light emitted from the diffusing portions 425a to 425c are all the same. Then, a plurality of the recesses are continuously arranged in a row. That is, the lateral width of the recess of 1 is the lateral width X (cos50 ° = x / 62.) Of the left diffusion portion 425a and the right diffusion portion 425c with respect to the length 50 μm of the front diffusion portion 425b. 5. x = 40.175. X = 2x = 80.35 μm) is added to obtain 130.35 μm. Therefore, for example, when the light emitting surface (irradiation width) of the LED 424 of 1 has a width of 3 mm, about 23 rear lower diffusing lenses 425 with respect to the LED 424 of 1 are formed.

Here, when the rear lower LED 424 of 1 emits light and the light is irradiated to each recess, the width of the light distributed in the front direction by the front diffusion portion 425b in the recess of 1 is 50 μm. The width of the light that is irradiated and distributed to the left by the left diffusing portion 425a in the concave portion 1 is also irradiated at 50 μm, and is further distributed to the right by the right diffusing portion 425c in the concave portion 1. The width of the light is also 50 μm. Then, the light distributed in the front direction, the left direction, and the right direction by each recess is collected for several minutes in each recess to form an optical path having at least a predetermined width (for example, 50 μm × 26 = 1300 μm). In this case, for example, the front diffusion portion 425b constituting the concave portion and the front diffusion portion 425b constituting the concave portion to the right of the concave portion are the right diffusion portion 425c constituting the concave portion 1. Since it is separated by the lateral distance from the left diffusion portion 425a constituting the right adjacent recess, the front diffusion portion 425b constituting the one recess and the front direction constituting the right adjacent recess are formed. The light paths in the front direction distributed from the diffuser 425b are also separated by the lateral distance, but the light distributed from the right diffuser 425c and the left diffuser 425a and the frontal diffusion are also separated. Due to the diffusion action of the light distributed from the unit 425b itself, the light is comprehensively distributed to the inside of the front light guide plate 410.

As a result, when the rear lower LED 424 of 1 is emitted, the light diffused by the rear lower diffusing lens 425 composed of a plurality of recesses causes the diffused light in each optical path and the optical path. A plurality of first decorative symbols group 421 formed (arranged) at positions corresponding to the periphery can be made to emit light in the same color, and the first decorative symbol group 421 in a wider range than the light emitting surface of the rear lower LED 424 of 1 can be emitted. Can be turned on. As a result, it is possible to execute a wide variety of effects even with a small number of LEDs, enhance the effect of the rear light guide plate 420, and increase the degree of attention to the game. Further, by configuring the side lengths of the diffusing portions 425a to 425c so that the optical path widths of the light emitted from the diffusing portions 425a to 425c are the same, the light emitted from the diffusing portions 425a to 425c can be used. The optical path width is the same, and it is easy to set (grasp) the optical path of the light guided in the rear light guide plate 420, and it is easy to grasp the symbol arrangement in which the first decorative symbol group 421 can accurately emit light at the setting stage. It becomes possible to do.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, nine rear upper LED 422c and nine rear lower LED 424 are provided, and one rear upper LED 422c and one rear lower LED 424 are provided. They are arranged so as to overlap in the vertical direction. Therefore, the light radiated from the rear upper LED 422c of 1 to the lower side of the front view (lower side of the drawing) through the front diffuser portion (not shown) of the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the rear lower side of 1. The light emitted from the LED 424 to the upper side of the front view (upper side of the drawing) via the front diffusing portion 425b (see FIG. 14) of the rear lower diffusing lens 425 is configured to overlap (superimpose). .. Further, the light emitted (diffused) from the rear upper LED 422c of 1 to the left or right through the left diffusing portion or the right diffusing portion (both not shown) of the rear upper diffusing lens 423 is emitted. , Light radiated in each direction from the other rear upper LED 422c through each diffuser (not shown) of the rear upper diffuser 423, and the rear lower diffuser from the rear lower LED 424. It is configured so that the light radiated in each direction via the diffusion portions 425a, 425b, 425c of the 425 and the light at the intersection of the respective optical paths overlap (superimpose).

Specifically, for example, each LED of the rear upper LED 422c is sequentially changed from the right side to "red", "blue", "green", "red", "blue", "green", "red", and "blue". , "Green", and the rear lower LED 424 LEDs are turned on in order from the right side, "red", "blue", "green", "red", "blue", "blue". When lit in a total of three colors of "green", "red", "blue", and "green", the diffuser lenses 423 and 425 corresponding to the rightmost LED of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 The "red" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width from each diffuser lens 423, 425 corresponding to the second (ie, eighth from left) LED from the right of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. Is a diffuser lens 423,425 in which "blue" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width and corresponds to the third LED from the right (that is, the seventh from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. From there, "green" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, and each diffuser lens 423 corresponding to the fourth LED from the right (that is, the sixth from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. From 425, "red" light is diffused in an optical path having a predetermined width, and corresponds to the fifth LED from the right (that is, the fifth from the left, the center) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. From the diffuser lenses 423 and 425, "blue" light is diffused by an optical path having a predetermined width, and corresponds to the sixth LED from the right (that is, the fourth from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. From each diffuser lens 423, 425, "green" light is diffused by an optical path having a predetermined width, and corresponds to the seventh LED from the right (that is, the third from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. From each of the diffuser lenses 423 and 425, "red" light is diffused in an optical path having a predetermined width, and becomes the eighth LED from the right (that is, the second from the left) of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. From each corresponding diffuser lens 423, 425, "blue" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, corresponding to the ninth (that is, leftmost) LED from the right of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424. From each of the diffuser lenses 423 and 425, "green" light is diffused in an optical path having a predetermined width.

In this case, the first decorative symbol group 421 formed on the rear light guide plate 420 is a portion (“dark red”) in which the “red” light path and the “red” light path overlap each other. , The part displayed only by the "red" light path ("light red"), the part where the "red" light path and the "blue" light path overlap ("purple") , The part where the "red" light path and the "green" light path overlap ("yellow"), the "red" light path, the "blue" light path, and the "green" The part where the light path of "blue" is displayed overlapping ("white"), the part where the light path of "blue" and the light path of "blue" are displayed overlapping ("dark blue"), The part displayed only by the "blue" light path ("light blue"), the part where the "blue" light path and the "green" light path overlap ("blue-green") , The part where the "green" light path and the "green" light path overlap ("dark green"), and the part displayed only by the "green" light path ("light green") ), And each of the symbols of the first decorative symbol group 421 is displayed in a total of 10 kinds of display colors. Then, each symbol of the first decorative symbol group 421 is arranged so as to be arranged in each overlapping portion.

As a result, even if the lighting pattern has a small number of colors (for example, 3 colors), the light is diffused by the diffuser lenses 423 and 425 arranged above and below, and the optical paths of the diffused lights overlap. The emission colors that occur in the non-overlapping part and the overlapping part are different, and a larger number of colors than the color scheme can be displayed. Therefore, by realizing a variety of display colors even with a small number of emission colors, it is possible to further simplify the emission control of the LED and reduce the control burden on the emission control of the LED. In particular, when a plurality of types of monochromatic light emitting diodes are arranged and the above control is performed without adopting a full color LED, cost reduction can be realized by adopting a monochromatic light emitting diode whose cost is lower than that of a full color LED. The light emission control of the LED is further simplified, and the control load on the light emission control of the LED can be reduced.

Further, with respect to one symbol of the first decorative symbol group 421, the predetermined portion is arranged so as to overlap the optical path of the light of one color, and the portion other than the predetermined portion is arranged so as to overlap the optical path of the light of another color. Place in. That is, by forming one symbol of the first decorative symbol group 421 so as to fit within a range of a plurality of optical path widths, the emission color of each part is made different from one symbol, and one symbol is diversified. It can be expressed in various colors.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, a lighting (staging) mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a lighting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate 420, and FIG. 15 (a) shows the rear corresponding to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420. It is a figure which schematically showed the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group 421 when the side upper LED 422c and the rear lower side LED 424 are turned on, and FIG. 15 (b) shows from the state of FIG. 15 (a). It is a figure which shows typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group 421 when the rear side upper LED 422c and the rear side lower LED 424 corresponding to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 are additionally lit. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a lighting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate 420, and FIG. 16 (a) shows the rear side guide from the state of FIG. 15 (b). FIG. 16B is a diagram schematically showing a lighting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the left side region of the light plate 420 are additionally lit. ) Illustrate the lighting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off from the state of FIG. 16 (a). It is a figure shown as a target.

First, as shown in FIG. 15A, when the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is sequentially lit and displayed from the right side, the right side of the rear light guide plate 420 is displayed. The light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the region passes through the inside of the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (that is, the lower right direction, the lower front direction, and the lower) according to the shape of the rear upper diffuser lens 423. It is diffused with a predetermined optical path width (to the left). Similarly, when the rear lower side LED 424 provided so as to correspond to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is sequentially lit and displayed from the right side, the rear lower side corresponding to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is displayed. The light emitted from the LED 424 diffuses inside the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) according to the shape of the rear lower diffuser lens 425. It is diffused with a predetermined optical path width according to the lens side width of the lenses 423 and 425.

Then, for example, in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear upper LED 422c is "red", the center rear upper LED 422c is "blue", and the left rear upper LED 422c is "green". In addition to lighting, the right rear lower LED 424 is "red", the center rear lower LED 424 is "blue", and the left rear lower LED 424 is "green", for a total of three emission colors. In this case, the part where the "red" light path and the "red" light path overlap (intersect. The same applies hereinafter) is "dark red", and the part where the "red" light path and the "blue" light path overlap is "purple". , The part where the "red" light path overlaps with the "green" light path is "yellow", and the part where the "red" light path overlaps with the "blue" light path and the "green" light path overlaps with "white", The part where the "blue" light path and the "blue" light path overlap is "dark blue", and the part where the "blue" light path and the "green" light path overlap is the "blue green" and "green" light paths. The part that overlaps with the "green" light path is "dark green", the part with only the "red" light path is "red", and the part with only the "blue" light path is only the part of the "blue" and "green" light paths. Is "green", and each first decorative symbol group 421 is lit and displayed in a total of 10 colors.

More specifically, among the plurality of fish symbols constituting the first decorative symbol group 421, each fish symbol is "dark red", "purple", "yellow", "white", "dark blue", "blue". It is lit and displayed in any of a total of 10 colors of "green", "dark green", "red", "blue", and "green".

The first decorative symbol group 421 is a small symbol formed in a size within the range of the optical path width of 1 light, and a medium symbol formed in a size within the range of the optical path width of 2 light. There is a large symbol formed in a size that fits within the range of the optical path width of the above light. Then, with respect to the first decorative symbol group 421 of 1, the small symbols formed in the range of the optical path width of the display color of 1 are lit and displayed in a single display color, and the optical path widths of the plurality of display colors are displayed. When each part of the medium symbol or the large symbol is located in the range, each part of the medium symbol or the large symbol is lit and displayed in the emission color of the overlapping optical path. Therefore, in the first decorative symbol group 421 composed of a plurality of symbols, each symbol is expressed in a different color, or one symbol is expressed in a plurality of colors to provide a variety of various effects. Can be done.

In this case, the first decorative symbol group 421 formed in the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 includes the rear upper LED 422c and the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420. Since the light from the rear lower side LED 424 does not reach, the light is not lit, and it is difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 15B, from the state of FIG. 15A, with the rear side upper LED 422c provided corresponding to the right side region of the rear side light guide plate 420 lit, further. When the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is sequentially lit and displayed from the right side, the rear upper LED corresponding to the central region and the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is displayed. The light emitted from the LED 422c has a predetermined optical path width in three directions (that is, the lower right direction, the lower front direction, and the lower left direction) inside the rear light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear upper diffuser lens 423. Is diffused in. Similarly, the rear lower side LED 424 provided so as to correspond to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit, and further provided so as to correspond to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420. When the rear lower LED 424 is sequentially lit from the right side, the light emitted from the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the central region and the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 is the shape of the rear lower diffuser lens 425. The inside of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused in three directions (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) with a predetermined optical path width according to the lens side width of each diffuser lens 423,425. To.

Then, for example, in each of the right side region and the center region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear upper LED 422c is "red", the center rear upper LED 422c is "blue", and the left rear upper LED 422c. Is lit in "green", the right rear lower LED 424 is "red", the center rear lower LED 424 is "blue", and the left rear lower LED 424 is "green", for a total of three colors. When lit in the emission color, the part where the "red" light path and the "red" light path overlap is "dark red", and the part where the "red" light path and the "blue" light path overlap is "purple". The part where the "red" light path overlaps with the "green" light path is "yellow", and the part where the "red" light path overlaps with the "blue" light path and the "green" light path overlaps with "white" and "blue". The part where the "blue" light path overlaps with "dark blue", the part where the "blue" light path overlaps with the "green" light path is "blue green", and the part where the "green" light path overlaps with "green". The part that overlaps with the "dark green" is "dark green", the part with only the "red" light path is "red", the part with only the "blue" light path is "blue", and only the part with the "green" light path is "" Each first decorative symbol group 421 is lit and displayed in a total of 10 colors of "green".

More specifically, among the plurality of fish symbols constituting the first decorative symbol group 421, each fish symbol is "dark red", "purple", "yellow", "white", "dark blue", "blue". It is lit and displayed in any of a total of 10 colors of "green", "dark green", "red", "blue", and "green".

In this case, the first decorative symbol group 421 formed in the left side region of the rear light guide plate 420 includes the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the central region and the right region of the rear light guide plate 420. Since the light from the rear lower side LED 424 does not reach, the light is not lit, and it is difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16A, from the state of FIG. 15B, the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the right side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit. Further, when the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the left side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is sequentially lit and displayed from the right side, the left side region, the central region, and the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 ( That is, the light emitted from the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the entire region) passes through the inside of the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (that is, the lower right direction and the lower side) according to the shape of the rear upper diffuser lens 423. It is diffused with a predetermined optical path width in the front direction and the lower left direction). Similarly, in a state where the rear lower lens 424 provided so as to correspond to the right side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit, the rear light guide plate 420 further corresponds to the left region. When the provided rear lower side LED 424 is sequentially lit from the right side, the light emitted from the rear side lower side LED 424 corresponding to the left side region, the center region, and the right side region of the rear side light guide plate 420 is the rear side lower side. The inside of the rear light guide plate 420 is determined in three directions (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) according to the shape of the diffuser lens 425, according to the lens side width of each diffuser lens 423, 425. It is diffused by the optical path width of.

Then, for example, in each of the entire regions of the rear light guide plate 420 (that is, the left region, the central region, and the right region), the right rear upper LED 422c is “red” and the central rear upper LED 422c is “blue”. The left rear upper LED 422c lights up in "green", the right rear lower LED 424 is "red", the center rear lower LED 424 is "blue", and the left rear lower LED 424 is When lighting with a total of three emission colors of "green", the part where the "red" optical path and the "red" optical path overlap is the "dark red", "red" optical path and the "blue" optical path. The overlapping part is "purple", the overlapping part of the "red" optical path and the overlapping "green" optical path is the overlapping part of the "yellow", "red" optical path, the "blue" optical path, and the "green" optical path. The part that overlaps is "white", the part where the "blue" optical path overlaps with "dark blue", and the part where the "blue" optical path overlaps with the "green" optical path is "blue-green". , The part where the "green" light path overlaps with the "green" light path is "dark green", the part with only the "red" light path is "red", and the part with only the "blue" light path is "blue", " Only the portion of the optical path of "green" is "green", and each first decorative symbol group 421 is lit and displayed in a total of 10 colors.

More specifically, among the plurality of fish symbols constituting the first decorative symbol group 421, each fish symbol is "dark red", "purple", "yellow", "white", "dark blue", "blue". It is lit and displayed in any of a total of 10 colors of "green", "dark green", "red", "blue", and "green".

Next, as shown in FIG. 16B, from the state of FIG. 16A, the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit. When the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is turned off sequentially from the right side, the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is turned off. The light emitted from the LED 422c has a predetermined optical path width in three directions (that is, the lower right direction, the lower front direction, and the lower left direction) inside the rear light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear upper diffuser lens 423. Is diffused in. Similarly, the rear lower side LED 424 provided so as to correspond to the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is provided so as to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 while the rear lower LED 424 is lit. When the rear lower side LED 424 is turned off sequentially from the right side, the light emitted from the rear side lower side LED 424 corresponding to the left side region and the center region of the rear side light guide plate 420 is the shape of the rear side lower side diffuser lens 425. The inside of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused in three directions (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) with a predetermined optical path width according to the lens side width of each diffuser lens 423,425. To.

Then, for example, in each of the left side region and the center region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear upper LED 422c is "red", the center rear upper LED 422c is "blue", and the left rear upper LED 422c. Is lit in "green", the right rear lower LED 424 is "red", the center rear lower LED 424 is "blue", and the left rear lower LED 424 is "green", for a total of three colors. When lit in the emission color, the part where the "red" light path and the "red" light path overlap is "dark red", and the part where the "red" light path and the "blue" light path overlap is "purple". The part where the "red" light path overlaps with the "green" light path is "yellow", and the part where the "red" light path overlaps with the "blue" light path and the "green" light path overlaps with "white" and "blue". The part where the "blue" light path overlaps with "dark blue", the part where the "blue" light path overlaps with the "green" light path is "blue green", and the part where the "green" light path overlaps with "green". The part that overlaps with the "dark green" is "dark green", the part with only the "red" light path is "red", the part with only the "blue" light path is "blue", and only the part with the "green" light path is "" Each first decorative symbol group 421 is lit and displayed in a total of 10 colors of "green".

More specifically, among the plurality of fish symbols constituting the first decorative symbol group 421, each fish symbol is "dark red", "purple", "yellow", "white", "dark blue", "blue". It is lit and displayed in any of a total of 10 colors of "green", "dark green", "red", "blue", and "green".

In this case, the first decorative symbol group 421 formed in the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 includes the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420. Since the light from the rear lower LED 424 does not reach, it is in a non-lighting state, and it is difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

In this way, even when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are controlled to emit light with as few emission colors as three colors, the rear side is caused by the overlap of the light diffused by each diffusion lens 423 and 425. The first decorative symbol group 421 formed on the light guide plate 420 can be represented by a lighting color equal to or higher than the emission color. Therefore, since it is possible to perform colorful expression even with light emission control using a small number of light emission patterns, various effects can be performed while reducing the control burden on the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424, and the game can be played. It is possible to improve the interest of.

Further, among the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 arranged three each in the right side region, the central region, and the left side region of the rear light guide plate 420, the rear upper LED located on the rightmost side is used. The LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are turned on in the order of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 located in the center, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 located on the left side, and so on. The effect is performed as if the school of fish, which is one decorative pattern group 421, swims from the right side to the left side.

Further, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are placed on the right side in conjunction with the lighting of the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a and the board surface second decorative symbol group 60b (see FIG. 3) of the base plate 60 of the game board 13. By turning on the lights in sequence from the beginning, the effect on the rear light guide plate 420 and the effect on the 13 board of the game board are integrally executed to provide a powerful effect using the entire 13 board of the game board, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be planned.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, the optical path of the light from the rear upper diffusing lens 423 and the rear lower diffusing lens 425 with respect to the rear light guide plate 420 when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit and displayed. The light emitting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 in the rear light guide plate 420 will be described.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a lighting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate 420 when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, and FIG. 17A is a diagram showing the lighting mode of the confirmation lamp 311. The lighting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 is schematically shown when the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 are lit in the non-lighting state. In FIG. 17B, from the state of FIG. 17A, the rear lower side lower LED 424 corresponding to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is added while the confirmation lamp 311 is lit. It is a figure schematically showing the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group 421 when the rear side upper LED 422c corresponding to the central region and the right side region of the rear side light guide plate 420 is turned off. .. FIG. 18 is a diagram schematically showing a lighting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 lit and displayed on the rear light guide plate 420 when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, and FIG. 18A is a diagram. From the state of FIG. 17B, the confirmation lamp 311 is continuously lit, and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the left side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is additionally lit, while the rear guide is turned on. FIG. 18B is a diagram schematically showing a lighting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 when the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the left side region, the center region, and the right side region of the light plate 420 is turned off. In the state shown in FIG. 18A, the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off, and the rear upper LED 422c corresponding to the left side region and the center region of the rear light guide plate 420 is additionally turned on, while the rear side is reared. It is a figure which showed typically the lighting mode of the 1st decorative symbol group 421 when the rear side upper LED 422c and the rear side lower LED 424 corresponding to the right side area of the side light guide plate 420 are turned off.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a big hit occurs in the variable effect, the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on at any timing of the variable effect, clearly suggesting to the player that the big hit occurs. .. Further, in order to suggest the reliability of the jackpot in the variation effect to the player, the first decorative symbol group 421 formed on the rear light guide plate 420 may be lit and displayed.

Here, the notification by lighting the confirmation lamp 311 is an effect suggesting that a big hit occurs, and is a so-called big hit confirmation effect. On the other hand, the notification by lighting the first decorative symbol group 421 is an effect suggesting whether or not a big hit occurs, and does not definitely suggest that a big hit will occur. Therefore, as for the importance of the game effect in the pachinko machine 10, the notification by the confirmation lamp 311 is positioned as a more important effect than the notification by the first decorative symbol group 421.

However, when the effect of the fixed lamp 311 is executed during the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421, the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 hinders the effect of the confirmed lamp 311 which is more important as a game (duplicate effect). There is a risk of low visibility, low recognition, etc.). Further, when the notification by the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, it is conceivable that the effect by the first decorative symbol group 421 is not executed, or the notification by the confirmation lamp 311 is not executed while the first decorative symbol group 421 is being executed. However, there is a risk that the production will be restricted, the control load will increase, and the production variation will decrease.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the effect by the confirmation lamp 311 is executed (at the time of execution), the scale of the effect by the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed, which is important as a game. It is configured to make the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 stand out. Specifically, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed at the timing when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, the effect width in the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed. In particular, in the first decorative symbol group 421, the side on which the confirmation lamp 311 is arranged (that is, the upper side in the front view of the rear light guide plate 420) is turned off or turned on slightly to be the first decoration. The effect of the symbol group 421 and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be divided so that they do not overlap or are difficult to overlap, and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more conspicuous. Therefore, it can be configured so as not to interfere with the production of the fixed lamp 311 which is important as a game. In addition, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 and the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 without performing complicated control, and it is possible to increase the variation of the effect.

From here, a specific production mode by the fixed lamp 311 and the first decorative symbol group 421 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 17A, when the confirmation lamp 311 is not lit (turned off), the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420. Is displayed sequentially from the right side, the light emitted from the rear upper side LED 422c corresponding to the right side region of the rear side light guide plate 420 is emitted from the rear side upper light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear side upper diffuser lens 423. The inside of the lens is diffused in three directions (that is, the lower right direction, the lower front direction, and the lower left direction) with a predetermined optical path width. Similarly, when the rear lower side LED 424 provided so as to correspond to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is sequentially lit and displayed from the right side, the rear lower side corresponding to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is displayed. The light emitted from the LED 424 diffuses inside the rear light guide plate 420 in three directions (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) according to the shape of the rear lower diffuser lens 425. It is diffused with a predetermined optical path width according to the lens side width of the lenses 423 and 425.

Then, for example, when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off, in the right region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear upper LED 422c is "red", the center rear upper LED 422c is "blue", and the left side is left. The rear upper LED 422c lights up in "green", the right rear lower LED 424 is "red", the center rear lower LED 424 is "blue", and the left rear lower LED 424 is "green". When lighting with a total of three emission colors, the part where the "red" light path and the "red" light path overlap (intersect. The same applies hereinafter) is "dark red", and the "red" light path and "blue". The part where the light path overlaps with "purple", the part where the light path of "red" and the light path of "green" overlap is "yellow", the light path of "red" and the light path of "blue" and the light path of "green" The part where the light path overlaps with "white", the part where the light path of "blue" and the light path of "blue" overlap is "dark blue", and the part where the light path of "blue" and the light path of "green" overlap is "" The part where the "blue-green" and "green" light paths overlap is "dark green", the part where only the "red" light path is "red", and the part where only the "blue" light path is "blue". , And only the portion of the optical path of "green" is "green", and each first decorative symbol group 421 is lit and displayed in a total of 10 colors.

In this case, the first decorative symbol group 421 formed in the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 includes the rear upper LED 422c and the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420. Since the light from the rear lower side LED 424 does not reach, the light is not lit, and it is difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 17 (b), when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on from the state of FIG. 17 (a), the rear lower lens 424 provided so as to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420. When the rear lower lens 424 provided so as to correspond to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is sequentially lit and displayed from the right side in the state of being lit, the central region and the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 are displayed. The light emitted from the rear lower side LED 424 corresponding to the rear side lower side diffuser lens 425 passes through the inside of the rear side light guide plate 420 in three directions (that is, the upper right side direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left side) according to the shape of the rear side lower side diffuser lens 425. In the direction), it is diffused with a predetermined optical path width according to the lens side width of the rear lower diffusing lens 425. On the other hand, when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on from the state of FIG. 17A, the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is switched from the turned state to the turned off state, and is rearward. The rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the central region of the side light guide plate 420 is also not lit (turned off).

That is, of the rear lower side LED 424 arranged at a position far from the confirmation lamp 311, only the rear side lower side LED 424 provided in the central region and the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is lit, and the confirmation lamp is lit. The rear upper LED 422c arranged at a position close to 311 is configured to be turned off.

In this case, the first decorative symbol group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each optical path) emitted from the rear lower lower LED 424 and diffused by the rear lower diffusing lens 425 is lit and displayed, while the rear side is displayed. The first decorative symbol group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each optical path) that will be diffused by the rear upper diffuser lens 423 when the upper LED 422c emits light is not turned on (turned off).

Here, the first decorative symbol group 421 arranged in the upper portion of the rear light guide plate 420 near the confirmation lamp 311 in front view is not provided at a position where the rear lower LED 424 is lit (provided). (The number is small), and many are formed at the positions where the rear upper LED 422c is lit by light emission.

On the other hand, the first decorative symbol group 421 arranged in the lower portion of the rear light guide plate 420 far from the confirmation lamp 311 in the front view is provided at least at a position where the rear lower LED 424 is lit (provided). There are many). The first decorative symbol group 421 arranged in the lower portion of the rear light guide plate 420 far from the confirmation lamp 311 in the front view may be provided at a position where the rear upper LED 422c is lit by light emission. It may be provided at a position where it is not lit depending on the light emission of the side upper LED 422c.

Therefore, in the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420, when the rear upper LED 422c is lit, the first decorative symbol group 421 formed in the upper portion of the rear light guide plate 420 in front view is lit. When it can be displayed (easily) and the rear lower LED 424 is turned on, the first decorative symbol group 421 formed in the lower portion of the rear light guide plate 420 in front view can be displayed (easily). ). On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420, the first decorative symbol group 421 formed in the upper portion of the rear light guide plate 420 in front view is when the rear lower LED 424 is turned on. Even if it is present, it is not turned on (difficult to turn on), and if the rear upper LED 422c is off, it is not turned on (difficult to turn on. It is thinned out and turned on).

With this configuration, it is possible to switch the lighting or extinguishing of the first decorative symbol group 421 in the front view upper portion of the rear light guide plate 420, which is in the vicinity of the confirmation lamp 311, depending on whether the rear upper LED 422c is lit. can. Then, when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit and displayed, even if the first decorative symbol group 421 is being executed, by turning off the rear upper LED 422c, the confirmation lamp 311 emits light and the first decorative symbol group It is possible to perform an effect that does not interfere with the lighting of 421.

Then, for example, in each of the right side region and the center region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear lower LED 424 is "red", the center rear lower LED 424 is "blue", and the left rear lower LED 424. When is lit with a total of three emission colors of "green", the part where the "red" optical path and the "blue" optical path overlap is the "purple", "red" optical path and the "green" optical path. The overlapping part is "yellow", the overlapping part of the "red" optical path, the "blue" optical path and the "green" optical path is the overlapping part of the "white", "blue" optical path and the "green" optical path. The part to be used is "blue-green", the part with only the "red" light path is "red", the part with only the "blue" light path is "blue", and the part with only the "green" light path is "green", for a total of 7 Each first decorative symbol group 421 is lit and displayed in color.

In this case, the first decorative symbol group 421 formed in the left side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is from the rear lower side LED 424 provided so as to correspond to the central region and the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420. Since the light does not reach the pachinko machine, it remains unlit and is difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the confirmation lamp 311 continues to light from the state of FIG. 17B, it is provided so as to correspond to the central region and the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420. When the rear lower side LED 424 is lit and the rear lower side LED 424 provided so as to correspond to the left side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is sequentially lit from the right side, the rear light guide plate 420 The light emitted from the rear lower side LED 424 corresponding to the left side region, the center region, and the right side region (that is, the entire region) is 3 inside the rear side light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear side lower side diffuser lens 425. It is diffused in the direction (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) with a predetermined optical path width corresponding to the lens side width of the rear lower diffusing lens 425. On the other hand, when the confirmation lamp 311 continues to be lit from the state of FIG. 17B, it is provided so as to correspond to the left side region, the center region, and the right side region (that is, the entire region) of the rear light guide plate 420. The upper side LED 422c is not lit (turned off).

That is, only the rear lower side LED 424 arranged at a position far from the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, and the rear side upper LED 422c arranged at a position closer to the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off.

In this case, as in FIG. 17B, the first decorative symbol group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each optical path) emitted from the rear lower lower LED 424 and diffused by the rear lower diffusing lens 425 is On the other hand, the first decorative symbol group 421 arranged at the position of each light (each optical path) that will be diffused by the rear upper diffuser lens 423 when the rear upper LED 422c emits light is lit. Not done (turned off).

Then, for example, in each of the left side region, the central region, and the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear lower LED 424 is “red”, the central rear lower LED 424 is “blue”, and the left rear LED 424 is “blue”. When the lower LED 424 is lit with a total of three emission colors of "green", the part where the "red" optical path and the "blue" optical path overlap is "purple", and the "red" optical path and "green". The part where the light path of The part that overlaps with is "blue-green", the part with only the "red" light path is "red", the part with only the "blue" light path is "blue", and the part with only the "green" light path is "green", Each of the first decorative symbol group 421 is lit and displayed in a total of seven colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 18B, when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned off from the state of FIG. 18A, the rear side provided so as to correspond to the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420. When the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 is turned off sequentially from the right side while the upper LED 422c is lit, the left side region and the center region of the rear light guide plate 420 are turned off. The light emitted from the rear upper side LED 422c corresponding to the rear side upper side diffuser lens 423 has three directions (that is, the lower right side direction, the lower front side direction, and the lower left side) inside the rear side light guide plate 420 according to the shape of the rear side upper side diffuser lens 423. It is diffused in the direction) with a predetermined optical path width. Similarly, the rear lower side LED 424 provided so as to correspond to the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 is provided so as to correspond to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420 while the rear lower LED 424 is lit. When the rear lower side LED 424 is turned off sequentially from the right side, the light emitted from the rear side lower side LED 424 corresponding to the left side region and the center region of the rear side light guide plate 420 is the shape of the rear side lower side diffuser lens 425. The inside of the rear light guide plate 420 is diffused in three directions (that is, the upper right direction, the upper front direction, and the upper left direction) with a predetermined optical path width according to the lens side width of each diffuser lens 423,425. To.

Then, for example, in each of the left side region and the center region of the rear light guide plate 420, the right rear upper LED 422c is "red", the center rear upper LED 422c is "blue", and the left rear upper LED 422c. Is lit in "green", the right rear lower LED 424 is "red", the center rear lower LED 424 is "blue", and the left rear lower LED 424 is "green", for a total of three colors. When lit in the emission color, the part where the "red" light path and the "red" light path overlap is "dark red", and the part where the "red" light path and the "blue" light path overlap is "purple". The part where the "red" light path overlaps with the "green" light path is "yellow", and the part where the "red" light path overlaps with the "blue" light path and the "green" light path overlaps with "white" and "blue". The part where the "blue" light path overlaps with "dark blue", the part where the "blue" light path overlaps with the "green" light path is "blue green", and the part where the "green" light path overlaps with "green". The part that overlaps with the "dark green" is "dark green", the part with only the "red" light path is "red", the part with only the "blue" light path is "blue", and only the part with the "green" light path is "" Each first decorative symbol group 421 is lit and displayed in a total of 10 colors of "green".

In this case, the first decorative symbol group 421 formed in the right side region of the rear light guide plate 420 includes the rear upper LED 422c provided so as to correspond to the left side region and the central region of the rear light guide plate 420. Since the light from the rear lower LED 424 does not reach, it is in a non-lighting state, and it is difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

In this way, when the effect by the confirmation lamp 311 is executed (at the time of execution), the scale of the effect by the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed, and the effect by the confirmation lamp 311 which is important as a game is conspicuous. It is configured as follows. Specifically, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed at the timing when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, the effect width in the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed. In particular, in the first decorative symbol group 421, the side on which the confirmation lamp 311 is arranged (that is, the upper side in the front view of the rear light guide plate 420) is turned off or turned on slightly to be the first decoration. The effect of the symbol group 421 and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be divided so that they do not overlap or are difficult to overlap, and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more conspicuous. Therefore, it can be configured so as not to interfere with the production of the fixed lamp 311 which is important as a game. In addition, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 and the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 without performing complicated control, and it is possible to increase the variation of the effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 21, the front downward condensing lens 414d with respect to the front light guide plate 410, the front right condensing lens 415d, and the front left condensing lens 416d (hereinafter, “each condensing”. The light path from the lens 414d, 415d, 416d) and the light emission of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 that can be lit and displayed on the front light guide plate 410. Aspects will be described. FIG. 19 shows a second decorative symbol group 411, a third decorative symbol 412, and a fourth decorative symbol group 413 that can be lit and displayed on the front light guide plate 410, a lower LED unit 414, a front right LED unit 415, and a front left LED. It is a schematic front view which showed the relationship with a unit 416. FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing an optical path of light by each condenser lens 414d, 415d, 416d. FIG. 21 (a) is a diagram showing the uneven shape forming the second decorative symbol group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 and the direction of light in which the second decorative symbol group 411 can be lit and displayed, and is shown in FIG. 21 (b). ) Is a diagram showing the uneven shape forming the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 and the direction of light in which the fourth decorative symbol group 413 can be lit and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 19, on the front light guide plate 410, a second decorative pattern group 411 as a cherry blossom snowstorm pattern imitating a plurality of cherry blossom petals is formed in the left and right end regions excluding the central portion of the regular R shape portion. The third decorative pattern 412 as a sunfish pattern imitating a fish sunfish is formed in the central portion of the regular R shape portion, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 as a bubble group pattern imitating a plurality of bubbles is a lower flat plate portion. And is formed in the entire region of the downward inverted R-shaped portion.

Further, when the lower end surface of the front lower condensing lens 414d arranged on the lower side of the front light guide plate 410 is irradiated with light by the front lower LED 414c provided below the front light guide plate 410. The light is not diffused from the upper end surface of the front lower condensing lens 414d and is configured to travel straight (upward) as it is. Further, the front right side LED 415c provided on the right side of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 causes the front right light condensing arrangement to be arranged on the right side of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410. When the right end surface of the lens 415d is irradiated with light, the light is not diffused from the left end surface of the front right condensing lens 415d and is configured to travel straight (to the left). Further, the front left side condensing is arranged on the left side of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front left left LED 416c provided on the left side of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410. When the left end surface of the lens 416d is irradiated with light, the light is not diffused from the right end surface of the front left condensing lens 416d and travels straight (to the right).

Further, the positions of the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c are arranged so that the front right LED 415c of 1 and the front left LED 416c of 1 are paired in the left-right direction (horizontal direction). ing.

In the front light guide plate 410, each decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413 is arranged in the normal R shape portion, the lower flat plate portion, and the lower inverted R shape portion, but the lower inverted R shape portion and the lower inverted R shape portion. At the switching point (region) with the regular R-shaped portion, none of the decorative symbol groups 411, 421, 413 is arranged. This is arranged in the portion arranged in the normal R shape portion and the downward inverted R shape portion when the decorative symbol for displaying the light guide is arranged at the switching point (region) between the downward inverted R shape portion and the normal R shape portion. It is difficult for the light reflected (guided) inside the front light guide plate 410 to properly reach the portion, and the appearance may be unintended depending on the position of the player's line of sight. Therefore, by configuring so that neither the decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413 is arranged at the switching point (region) between the downward inverted R shape portion and the normal R shape portion, the symbol to be displayed as a light guide can be expressed. It is possible to make it appropriate and perform a production that does not cause any inconsistency.

The arrangement of the decorative symbol at the switching point (hereinafter referred to as “switching point P”) of the front light guide plate 410 will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 52, 53 and 54. FIG. 52 is a schematic side sectional view of the front light guide plate 410 showing a light guide mode of light that guides the inside of the front light guide plate 410 when the front lower LED 414c is turned on. FIG. 52 (a). Is a diagram schematically showing a light guide mode in the front light guide plate 410 of light incident on the front light guide plate 410 at an upward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10) from the front lower LED 414c. 52 (b) schematically shows a light guide mode in the front light guide plate 410 of light incident on the front light guide plate 410 at a downward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the rear direction of the pachinko machine 10) from the front lower LED 414c. 52 (c) is a light guide mode in the front light guide plate 410 of the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 in the front direction (vertically upward direction of the pachinko machine 10) from the front lower LED 414c. Is a diagram schematically showing. Further, FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the position of the switching point P in the front view of the front light guide plate 410 shown in FIG. Further, FIG. 54 schematically shows a light guide mode in the front light guide plate 410 of light incident on the front light guide plate 410 at an upward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10) from the front right LED 415c. It is a perspective view shown. The fourth decorative pattern group 413 described with reference to FIG. 52 is, for convenience of explanation, the light incident laterally from the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c, as well as the upward direction from the front lower LED 414c. The case where it is configured to be able to emit light by the light incident on it will be described. Further, in FIG. 54, a case where the fourth decorative symbol group 413 can be turned on by the light incident on the left side from the front right LED 415c will be described, and the light incident on the right side from the front left LED 416c will be described. Although the description is omitted, the light incident on the right side from the front left LED 416c has the same effect and effect as the light incident on the left side from the front right LED 415c.

First, as shown in FIG. 52, the front light guide plate 410 is formed continuously from the flat plate portion below the front view (hereinafter, may be referred to as “front lower flat plate portion 410a”) and the front lower flat plate portion 410a. The downward inverted R-shaped portion (hereinafter, may be referred to as "front-side downward inverted R-shaped portion 410b") and the regular R-shaped portion (hereinafter, "". It may be referred to as "front side regular R-shaped portion 410c") and an upward inverted R-shaped portion (hereinafter, may be referred to as "front side upward inverted R-shaped portion") continuously formed from the front side regular R-shaped portion 410c. ), And an upper flat plate portion (hereinafter, may be referred to as "front side upper flat plate portion") continuously formed from the front side upper inverted R-shaped portion.

Further, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is formed on the back surface side (lower side of FIG. 52) of the front lower flat plate portion 410a and the front lower inverted R shape portion 410b, and the second decoration is formed on the back surface side of the front front regular R shape portion 410c. The symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 are formed. When the front lower side LED 414c is turned on, the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412 becomes visible from the front direction (upper side in FIG. 52) of the pachinko machine 10, and the front right side LED 415c becomes visible. When the front left LED 416c is turned on, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is configured to be visible from the front direction of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (c), an upward angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10; 45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10) with respect to the front light guide plate 410 from the front lower LED 414c. ), Downward angle 45 degrees (45 degrees in the back direction of the pachinko machine 10. See FIG. 52 (b)), and in the front direction (vertically upward side of the pachinko machine 10; see FIG. 52 (c)). Each light incident on the front light guide plate 410 repeatedly reflects while guiding the inside of the front lower flat plate portion 410a, but the fourth decorative symbol group provided on the back surface side of the front lower flat plate portion 410a. As described above, the 413 is configured so as not to reflect or hardly reflect the light in the front direction (upper side of FIG. 52) of the pachinko machine 10 depending on the light from the front lower side LED 414c. Depending on the light emitted (guided), the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is configured to be difficult or impossible to see from the front direction of the pachinko machine 10.

Then, each light incident on the front light guide plate 410 at an upward angle of 45 degrees, a downward angle of 45 degrees, and in the front direction is repeatedly reflected in the front lower flat plate portion 410a, or directly, the front lower reverse R. It reaches the shape portion 410b. In this case, the light that collides with the surface of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10 is an angle smaller than the reflection angle (for example, 45 degrees) when it collides with the front lower flat plate portion 410a (for example, 40 degrees). ) Is reflected in the front light guide plate 410. On the other hand, the light that collides with the surface of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 has an angle (for example, 50 degrees) larger than the reflection angle (for example, 45 degrees) when it collides with the front lower flat plate portion 410a. Is reflected in the front light guide plate 410.

Then, the light guided in the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b then reaches the front positive R-shaped portion 410c, which has an R shape in the direction opposite to the front lower inverted R-shaped portion. In this case, the light that collides with the surface on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 of the front positive R-shaped portion 410c has an angle (for example, 50 degrees) larger than the reflection angle (for example, 40 degrees) when colliding with the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b. It is reflected in the front light guide plate 410. On the other hand, the light that collides with the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 of the front positive R-shaped portion 410c is an angle smaller than the reflection angle (for example, 50 degrees) when colliding with the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b (for example, 40 degrees). ) Is reflected in the front light guide plate 410.

That is, the light guided to the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front positive R-shaped portion 410c via the front lower lower flat plate portion 410a is a switching point between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front positive R-shaped portion 410c. (Hereinafter, the switching point between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front positive R-shaped portion 410c may be referred to as a "switching point P"), where the front surface of the front light guide plate 410 collides. While the amount of light emitted becomes dense, the amount of light colliding with the front surface of the light guide plate 410 on the back surface side becomes sparse (coarse).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 52 (a) to 52 (c) and 53, the fourth decorative symbol group is at the switching point (part) between the front lower flat plate portion 410a and the front lower lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b. While the 413 is arranged, none of the decorative symbols 411, 421, 413 are arranged at the switching point P between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front positive R-shaped portion 410c.

This is because, as described above, the amount of light colliding on the back surface of the front light guide plate 410 at the switching point P between the front downward inverted R shape portion 410b and the front positive R shape portion 410c becomes sparse (coarse). Even if the decorative symbol group 411,421,413 is arranged at the point P, the decorative symbol group 411,421,413 does not emit light properly, and the decorative symbol group 411 is displayed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. , 421 and 413 may not be visible at the appropriate timing. Further, each decorative symbol group 411,421,413 is configured to be lit (visible) only by light from a predetermined direction, whereas the decorative symbol group 411,421,413 is configured at the above point P. If is arranged, each decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413 may be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by irradiation of light in a direction that would not normally light, and by lighting at an unintended timing. There is a risk that the content of the production will be inconsistent. Therefore, by not arranging any of the decorative symbol groups 411,421,413 at the switching point P between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front positive R-shaped portion 410c, each decorative symbol group 411,421,413 is appropriate. It is possible to make it visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 at various timings, and to make it difficult for discrepancies in the contents of the production to occur, so that an appropriate game can be provided.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54, the light emitted from the front right LED 415c is upward from the front right end surface of the front lower flat plate portion 410a of the front light guide plate 410 via the front right condenser lens 415d. When the light is incident at an angle of 45 degrees (45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10, see FIG. 54), the front side surface and the back surface side surface of the front side light guide plate 410 are guided while the inside of the front side lower flat plate portion 410a is guided. The light is repeatedly reflected at, and is guided straight to the left in the front view, and reaches the left side of the front light guide plate 410. Then, as described above, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 formed on the back surface side surface of the front light guide plate 410 is configured to reflect the light in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 by the light from the front right LED 415c. Therefore, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is configured to be accurately visible from the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 by the light emitted (guided) from the front right LED 415c.

On the other hand, tentatively, an LED and a condenser lens are provided on the right side of the front-side downward inverted R-shaped portion 410b of the front-side light guide plate 410 in front view, and an upward angle of 45 degrees from the front-view right-side end surface of the front-side downward inverted R-shaped portion 410b ( When light is incident at 45 degrees in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 54), the light guided in the front light guide plate 410 collides with the front side surface of the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b. Depending on the R shape, the light is not reflected straight to the left in the front view, but is reflected to the upper side in the front view of the front light guide plate 410. Then, when the reflected light then collides with the back surface side surface of the front lower inverted R shape portion 410b, the reflected light is not reflected straight to the left in the front view according to the R shape, and is further upward side of the front light guide plate 410. Is reflected to. Then, while repeating the above reflection a plurality of times, the light is guided to the left side of the front view of the front light guide plate. In such a case, if a decorative pattern is placed near the switching point P between the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b and the front positive R-shaped portion 410c of the front light guide plate 410, a portion where light is not guided may occur. , It is not possible to accurately guide light to the decorative pattern, and it becomes difficult to realize a desired light emitting mode. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the LED and the condenser lens are not arranged from the front-view lateral direction of the front-side downward inverted R-shaped portion 410b, and the light is emitted from the front-view lateral direction of the front-side downward inverted R-shaped portion 410b. By not irradiating the decorative symbols and not arranging the decorative symbols near the switching point P, each decorative symbol 411, 421, 413 can be appropriately lit and displayed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, even if each decorative symbol 411, 421, 413 is not arranged at the switching point (part) between the front side normal R shape portion and the front side upper reverse R shape portion. good. With this configuration, the same effect as the above effect can be obtained.

In addition, each decorative symbol group 411 is also at a switching point (part) between the front lower flat plate portion 410a and the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b, or a switching point (part) between the front upper inverted R-shaped portion and the front upper upper flat plate portion. , 421, 413 may be configured not to be arranged. The back surface of the front light guide plate 410 is also at the switching point (part) between the front lower flat plate portion 410a and the front lower inverted R-shaped portion 410b, or the switching point (part) between the front upper inverted R-shaped portion and the front upper flat plate portion. Since the amount of colliding light may be sparse (coarse) on the side surface, each decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413 is also located at the switching point (part) between the front upper inverted R-shaped portion and the front upper flat plate portion. By configuring so as not to arrange, the same effect as the above effect can be obtained.

Here, with reference to FIG. 20, a mode of condensing light by the front lower condensing lens 414d, the front right condensing lens 415d, and the front left condensing lens 416d will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in each of the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d, one first end surface (lower end surface in FIG. 20) is formed in a linear shape (or a substantially linear shape), while the above-mentioned first end surface is formed. The other second end face (upper end face in FIG. 20) formed on the opposite side of one end face is formed into a plurality of semicircular convex shapes having a continuous semicircular shape.

Like the rear light guide plate 420, the front light guide plate 410 in the first embodiment is made of an acrylic resin (PMMA), and when the refractive index of the acrylic resin is 1.49 to 1.53, each light condensing plate is used. The light incident from the first end surface of the lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d is emitted in a straight direction (or almost straight, on the upper side of the drawing in FIG. 20) from the second end surface. As a result, the light incident from the first end face of each condensing lens 414d, 415d, 416d is condensed without being diffusely emitted from the second end face side formed in a plurality of semicircular convex shapes. Since it can be emitted in the direction, when the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c corresponding to the decorative symbols 411, 421, 413 to be lit are lit, the other decorative symbols 411, 421, 413 are not lit, and the decoration to be lit and displayed. Only the symbols 411, 421, and 413 can be appropriately lit and displayed. In particular, when the fourth decorative symbol group 413 having the lowest jackpot reliability is to be turned on, the second decorative symbol group 411 formed on the same front light guide plate 410 and has a higher jackpot reliability than the fourth decorative symbol group 413. Alternatively, if the third decorative symbol 412 is turned on, there is a risk that the content of the effect will be inconsistent and the playability according to the game specifications cannot be realized. Therefore, at least, by configuring the condenser lenses 415d and 416d not to diffuse the light for the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a low expectation of a big hit, only the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is displayed at an appropriate timing. It is possible to prevent discrepancies in the content of the production.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d are provided for each decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413 of the front light guide plate 410, and the condensed light is irradiated. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, for the decorative design group with high expectation of big hit, that is, the third decorative design 412 and the like, a diffusion lens used for lighting the first decorative design group 421 is adopted instead of the condenser lens. It may be configured to do so. The third decorative symbol 412 has a higher expectation of a big hit than at least the fourth decorative symbol group 413, and is located in front of the drum display device 81 that the player is paying attention to during the game. It is necessary to comprehensively irradiate the 3 decorative symbols 412 with light by a diffuser lens so that the player can clearly recognize the 3rd decorative symbols 412. Further, when the 4th decorative symbol group 413 is turned on, if the 3rd decorative symbol 412, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the 4th decorative symbol group 413, is turned on, an effect discrepancy occurs, but the 3rd decorative symbol When the 412 is turned on, even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a lower jackpot expectation than the third decorative symbol 412, is turned on, the player can execute the third decorative symbol 412, which has a higher jackpot expectation. Since we pay less attention to the execution of the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a low expectation of a big hit, it is unlikely that a staging discrepancy will occur. Therefore, by adopting the condenser lenses 415d and 416d for the 4th decorative symbol group 413 with a low jackpot expectation, and by adopting a diffusion lens for the 3rd decorative symbol 412 with a high jackpot expectation, the front side is used. It is possible to enhance the effect of the light guide plate 410 and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 21, decorative symbols 411, 421, 413 that are lit and displayed with respect to the direction of the light guided in the front light guide plate 410 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is configured to light and display the light in the lateral direction (left-right direction) of the front light guide plate 410, and the front view of the front light guide plate 410. The second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 are configured to be lit and displayed with respect to light in the vertical direction (vertical direction). Since the third decorative symbol 412 that can be lit and displayed with respect to the light in the vertical direction in the front view is lit and displayed by the light in the same direction as the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 is related to the third decorative symbol 412 for convenience of explanation. The description is omitted, and only the second decorative symbol group 411 will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), the bubble symbol 1 forming the fourth decorative symbol group 413 has a vertical groove (concavo-convex) in the front view vertical direction with respect to the front light guide plate 410. By forming a plurality of bubbles continuously along the above, one bubble pattern can be expressed. With this configuration, the light guided in the front side light guide plate 410 in the lateral direction (left and right direction) in the front view (for example, the light emitted from the front left left LED 416c) collides with the vertical groove. By reflecting (exiting) to the front side of the front light guide plate 410, the bubble pattern is visually displayed by emitting light from the front side of the front light guide plate 410 (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 10). On the other hand, the light guided in the vertical direction (vertical direction) in the front view (for example, the light emitted from the front lower LED 414c) inside the front light guide plate 410 is on the front side even when it collides with the vertical groove. It is not reflected or is difficult to be reflected to the front side of the light guide plate 410, and is not visible or difficult to see as a bubble pattern from the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), the cherry blossom symbol 1 forming the second decorative symbol group 411 has a lateral groove (unevenness) in the front view with respect to the front light guide plate 410 in the pattern of the cherry blossom symbol. By forming a plurality of them continuously along the line, one cherry blossom pattern can be expressed. With this configuration, the light guided in the vertical direction (vertical direction) of the front view inside the front light guide plate 410 (for example, the light emitted from the front lower LED 414c) collides with the horizontal groove and collides with the front side. By reflecting (exiting) to the front side of the light guide plate 410, the cherry blossom pattern is visually displayed by emitting light from the front side of the front light guide plate 410 (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 10). On the other hand, the light guided in the lateral direction (left-right direction) in the front view (for example, the light emitted from the front left LED 416c) inside the front light guide plate 410 is on the front side even when it collides with the lateral groove. It is not reflected or is difficult to be reflected to the front side of the light guide plate 410, and is not visible or difficult to see as a bubble pattern from the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

As described above, in the front light guide plate 410 of 1, the decorative symbols 411, 421, and 413 that can be lit and displayed with respect to the direction (incident direction) of the light guided in the front light guide plate 410 are configured to be different. As a result, a plurality of decorative symbols 411, 421, and 413 can be individually lit and displayed on the front light guide plate 410 of 1, the expressive power of the light guide plate of 1 can be improved, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased. can.

Further, by using the entire front light guide plate 410 of 1 to perform an effect by each decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413 on the front side and the periphery of the drum display device 81, the area is expanded from the arrangement portion of the drum display device 81. It is possible to execute the production within the specified range. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing a powerful effect by the drum display device 81 and the front light guide plate 410.

In the front light guide plate 410, the two decorative symbols (for example, the third decorative symbols 412 and the fourth) are in the same portion (for example, the portion on the front side of the drum display device 81 (that is, the front positive R-shaped portion)). The decorative symbol group 413) is formed in an expressible manner, and one decorative symbol (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) is lit with respect to the light incident from the lateral direction to the front light guide plate 410, and the front light guide plate is lit. The other decorative symbol (for example, the third decorative symbol 412) may be lit with respect to the light incident from the vertical direction with respect to the 410. However, in order to illuminate different decorative patterns in one part in response to light from a plurality of directions, the unevenness in the part must be formed in a complicated shape. It is necessary to pay attention to the fact that the design becomes more difficult than the case where one decorative pattern is expressed in the portion.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23, lighting (directing) modes of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 will be described. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a lighting mode of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 that are lit and displayed on the front light guide plate 410, and FIG. 22A is a diagram. FIG. 22B is a diagram schematically showing a lighting mode of the fourth decorative symbol group 413 when the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c are lit with respect to the front light guide plate 410, and FIG. 22 (b) is a front side. It is a figure which shows typically the lighting mode of the 2nd decorative symbol group 411 when the front lower side LED 414c of the right end side and the left end side are lit with respect to a light guide plate 410. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a lighting mode of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 that are lit and displayed on the front light guide plate 410, and FIG. 23 (a) is a diagram showing the lighting mode. FIG. 23 (b) is a diagram schematically showing a lighting mode of the third decorative symbol 412 when the front lower side LED 414c of the central portion excluding the right end and the left end is turned on with respect to the front light guide plate 410, and FIG. 23 (b) is a front side. It is a figure which shows typically the lighting mode of the 2nd decorative symbol group 411 and the 3rd decorative symbol 412 when all the front side lower LED 414c are lit with respect to a light guide plate 410.

First, as shown in FIG. 22A, when the front right LED 415c located on the right side of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 is lit in "light blue", it is emitted from the front right LED 415c. The collected light is focused by the front right condensing lens 415d, and the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 is straight to the left with an optical path width in the same range as the vertical width of the front right condensing lens 415d. Is irradiated to. Further, when the front left LED 416c located on the left side of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 is lit and displayed in "light blue", the light emitted from the front left LED 416c is collected for the front left. The light is focused by the optical lens 416d, and the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 is irradiated straight to the right with an optical path width in the same range as the vertical width of the front left focusing lens 416d.

In this case, the light radiated straight to the left and right on the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 by the front right condensing lens 415d and the front left condensing lens 416d is below the front light guide plate 410. The front light guide plate 410 is caused by colliding with the vertical groove of the fourth decorative symbol group 413 formed in the flat plate portion and the downward inverted R shape portion, and the lateral light is emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410. On the front side of the lens, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is lit and displayed in "light blue" so as to be visible. At this time, the light focused by the condenser lenses 415d and 416d does not reach the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 formed in the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410. The second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 are invisible or difficult to see on the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

More specifically, the light incident from the side surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front right condensing lens 415d and the front left condensing lens 416d straight to the left and right of the lower flat plate portion. While being guided, it diffuses slightly upward in the front view on the lower flat plate portion and reaches the lower inverted R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, while the normal R-shaped portion, the upward inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper inverted R-shaped portion. It is difficult or difficult to reach the upper flat plate. As a result, the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front right condensing lens 415d and the front left condensing lens 416d causes the player's line of sight (for example, drum display) on the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Only the 4th decorative symbol group 413 arranged in the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 and the downward inverted R shape portion from the horizontal position where the device 81 is arranged) is lit and displayed so as to be visible, and the regular R shape is displayed. The second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 arranged in the portion are invisible or difficult to see from the player's line of sight on the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

By sequentially lighting and displaying the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c from the lower side to the upper side, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 emits light in such a manner that the fourth decorative symbol group 413 floats from the lower side to the upper side of the front light guide plate 410. You may control it.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), among the front lower side LEDs 414c provided below the front side light guide plate 410, the front side lower side LEDs 414c located at the right end and the left end are lit and displayed in "pink". The light emitted from the front lower lower LED 414c is focused by the right end and the left end 1 semicircular portion of the front lower condenser lens 414d, respectively, and has the same width as the 1 semicircular portion. The lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upward inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 are irradiated straight upward with an optical path width in the range.

In this case, the front lower light condenser lens 414d irradiates the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R shape portion, the normal R shape portion, the upper inverted R shape portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 in a straight upward direction. The light collides with the lateral groove of the second decorative symbol group 411 formed in the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the vertical light is emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410 to guide the front side. On the front side of the light plate 410, the second decorative symbol group 411 is lit and displayed in "pink" so as to be visible. At this time, when the light emitted from the front lower lower LED 414c located at the right end and the left end is focused by the front lower condenser lens 414d, the focused light reaches the third decorative symbol 412. However, the third decorative symbol 412 is invisible or difficult to see on the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

More specifically, the light incident from the lower side surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower condensing lens 414d is the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and the positive. The R-shaped portion, the upward inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion are guided straight upward, and the lower flat plate portion, the downward inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upward inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion are guided. Although it diffuses slightly in the left-right direction in the front view on the flat plate portion, the position of the second decorative symbol group 411 arranged in the regular R-shaped portion and the position of the third decorative symbol 412 are provided at a predetermined distance. , Does not reach the arrangement position of the third decorative symbol 412 in the regular R shape portion. As a result, only the second decorative symbol group 411 arranged on the right side portion and the left side portion of the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower light condenser lens 414d. Is lit and displayed so as to be visible, and the third decorative symbol 412 arranged in the central portion of the regular R-shaped portion becomes invisible or difficult to see.

Further, the lower flat plate portion which is an optical path of light that irradiates the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 in a straight upward direction. A fourth decorative symbol group 413 formed by a vertical groove is formed in the downward inverted R-shaped portion, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the vertical groove is vertically formed from the front lower LED 414c at the right end and the left end. It is configured so that the light emitted in the direction is not emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410 or is difficult to emit. Therefore, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is not lit and displayed on the front side of the front light guide plate 410, and is invisible or difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23 (a), among the front lower side LEDs 414c provided below the front side light guide plate 410, the front side lower side LEDs 414c located outside the right end and the left end are lit and displayed in "green". The light emitted from the front lower lower LED 414c is collected by the semicircular parts other than the right end and the left end of the front lower condensing lens 414d, respectively, and emits light corresponding to the front lower LED 414c. Irradiates the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R shape portion, the normal R shape portion, the upper inverted R shape portion, and the upper flat plate portion straight upward with an optical path width in the same range as the width of the circular portion. Will be done.

In this case, the front lower light condenser lens 414d irradiates the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R shape portion, the normal R shape portion, the upper inverted R shape portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 in a straight upward direction. The light collides with the lateral groove of the third decorative symbol 412 formed in the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the vertical light is emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410, so that the front light guide plate On the front side of the 410, the third decorative symbol 412 is lit and displayed in "green" so as to be visible. At this time, when the light emitted from the front lower lower LED 414c located at a place other than the right end and the left end is focused by the front lower condenser lens 414d, the light is focused on the second decorative symbol group 411. The light does not reach, and the second decorative symbol group 411 is invisible or difficult to see on the front side of the front light guide plate 410.

More specifically, the light incident from the lower side surface of the central portion of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower condensing lens 414d is the lower flat plate portion, the downward inverted R-shaped portion, and the normal R-shaped portion. In addition to guiding the upper inverted R-shaped portion and the upper flat plate portion straight upward, in the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the regular R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion. Although it is slightly diffused in the left-right direction in the front view, the position of the second decorative symbol group 411 arranged in the regular R shape portion and the position of the third decorative symbol 412 are provided at a predetermined distance, so that the positive R is present. It does not reach the arrangement position of the second decorative symbol group 411 in the shape portion. As a result, only the third decorative symbol 412 arranged in the central portion of the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 can be visually recognized by the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower light condenser lens 414d. The lighting is displayed, and the second decorative symbol group 411 arranged on the right side portion and the left side portion of the regular R shape portion becomes invisible or difficult to see.

Further, the lower flat plate portion which is an optical path of light that irradiates the lower flat plate portion, the downward inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upward inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 in a straight upward direction. A fourth decorative symbol group 413 formed by a vertical groove is formed in the downward inverted R-shaped portion, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the vertical groove is from the front lower LED 414c other than the right end and the left end. It is configured so that the light emitted in the vertical direction is not emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410 or is difficult to emit. Therefore, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is not lit and displayed on the front side of the front light guide plate 410, and is invisible or difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), among the front lower side LEDs 414c provided below the front side light guide plate 410, the front side lower side LEDs 414c located at the right end and the left end are lit and displayed in "pink". The light emitted from the front lower lower LED 414c is focused by the right end and the left end 1 semicircular portion of the front lower condenser lens 414d, respectively, and has the same width as the 1 semicircular portion. The lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 are irradiated straight upward with an optical path width in the range. Further, among the front lower side LEDs 414c provided below the front side light guide plate 410, when the front side lower side LED 414c located other than the right end and the left end is lit in "green", it is emitted from the front side lower side LED 414c. Light is focused in the semicircular portion other than the right end portion and the left end portion of the front lower downward condensing lens 414d, respectively, and has a range equivalent to the width of the semicircular portion corresponding to the front lower lower condensing lens 414c that emits light. With the optical path width, the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 are irradiated straight upward.

In this case, the front lower light condenser lens 414d irradiates the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R shape portion, the normal R shape portion, the upper inverted R shape portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 in a straight upward direction. The light collides with the lateral groove of the second decorative symbol group 411 formed in the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410, and the vertical light is emitted to the front side of the front light guide plate 410 to guide the front side. On the front side of the light plate 410, the second decorative symbol group 411 is "pink" and the third decorative symbol 412 is "green" so that they can be visually displayed.

More specifically, the "green" light incident from the lower side surface of the central portion of the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower condensing lens 414d is the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and the lower flat plate portion. The normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion are guided straight upward, and the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper plate portion are guided. Although it diffuses slightly in the left-right direction in the front view, the position of the second decorative symbol group 411 and the position of the third decorative symbol 412 arranged in the regular R-shaped portion are provided at a predetermined distance from each other. Therefore, it does not reach the arrangement position of the second decorative symbol 411 in the regular R shape portion. Further, the "pink" light incidented from the lower side surface of the lower flat plate portion of the front side light guide plate 410 by the front lower side condensing lens 414d is the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, and the lower flat plate portion. The normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion are guided straight upward, and the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper plate portion are guided. Although it diffuses slightly in the left-right direction in the front view, the position of the second decorative symbol group 411 and the position of the third decorative symbol 412 arranged in the regular R-shaped portion are provided at a predetermined distance from each other. Therefore, it does not reach the arrangement position of the third decorative symbol 412 in the regular R shape portion. As a result, different decorative symbols 411 and 412 arranged in the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 are lit by the light guided into the front light guide plate 410 by the front lower light condenser lens 414d. Even if the light is guided to each of the decorative symbols 411 and 412 by the lighting color, the light can be lit in an individual display color without being mixed.

On the other hand, the lower flat plate portion, which is an optical path of light that irradiates the lower flat plate portion, the lower inverted R-shaped portion, the normal R-shaped portion, the upper inverted R-shaped portion, and the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 in a straight upward direction. A fourth decorative symbol group 413 formed by a vertical groove is formed in the downward inverted R-shaped portion, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the vertical groove is irradiated in the vertical direction from the front lower side LED 414c. It is configured in a shape that does not emit light to the front side of the front light guide plate 410 or is difficult to emit. Therefore, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is not lit and displayed on the front side of the front light guide plate 410, and is invisible or difficult to see.

In this way, when a plurality of decorative symbols 411,421,413 are formed on the front light guide plate 410 of 1, the light emitted from each LED 414c, 415c, 416c is condensed and irradiated, and the decorative symbols 411, It is configured so that whether or not it is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 differs depending on the incident direction of the light for each 421 and 413. By configuring in this way, the decorative symbols 411, 421 and 413 that are to be lit and displayed according to the game result are lit at an appropriate timing, and the decorative symbols 411, 421 and 413 that are not lit and displayed are surely not lit. By configuring the above, it is possible to perform an effect utilizing the entire (entire surface) of the front light guide plate 410 while preventing the effect inconsistency, enrich the variation of the effect, and increase the attention to the game.

Further, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 having the lowest expectation of big hit is formed in the portion where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal direction overlap (that is, the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion). , The fourth decorative symbol group 413 is configured to be visible only by the light in the horizontal direction. In addition, the second, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the fourth decorative symbol group 413, in the portion where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal direction do not overlap (that is, the normal R-shaped portion and the upward inverted R-shaped portion). The decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 are formed so that the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 can be visually recognized only by the light in the vertical direction. Here, even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413 becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the light in the vertical direction, the light in the vertical direction is a big hit than the fourth decorative symbol group 413. It is lit when the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412, which has a high degree of expectation, is lit and displayed, and when the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412 is lit and displayed, the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412 is lit. Even when the 4 decorative symbol group 413 is lit and displayed, the discrepancy in the production is small. Therefore, by forming the fourth decorative symbol group 413 with the lowest jackpot expectation in the portion where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal direction overlap, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is generated at an unintended timing. Even when it becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to minimize the discrepancy in the production and provide the player with a comfortable game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25, an effect mode by the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81 of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the effects performed by the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81, and FIG. 24 (a) shows the first decorative symbol group 421 and the second decorative symbol group 411. , The third decorative symbol 412 and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are schematically shown in the non-lighting state, and FIG. 24 (b) shows the first decoration while the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is in the lit state. It is a figure which shows typically the non-lighting state of the symbol group 421, the 2nd decorative symbol group 411, and the 3rd decorative symbol 412. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an effect performed by the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81, and FIG. 25 (a) shows the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412. While it is in the lit state, it is a diagram schematically showing the non-lit state of the first decorative symbol group 421 and the fourth decorative symbol group 413, and FIG. 25 (b) shows the first decorative symbol group 421 in the lit state. On the other hand, it is a figure which shows typically the non-lighting state of the 2nd decorative symbol group 411, the 3rd decorative symbol 412, and the 4th decorative symbol group 413. In FIGS. 24 and 25, the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424, and the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d are omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 24A, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the front light guide plate 410, and the first decorative symbol group of the rear light guide plate 420. Each LED 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, 424 corresponding to 421 is in a non-lighting (off) state. Therefore, the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are invisible or difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the state of FIG. 24A, the third decorative symbol 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are arranged on the back side of the position where the first decorative symbol group 421 is formed. The display content (stop mode) of the drum display device 81 is in a visible state. Specifically, "7" is displayed on the left reel LR, "blank symbol" is displayed on the middle row, and "8" is displayed on the lower row. , "Blank symbol" in the middle row, and "8" in the lower row can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot expectation is the lowest in the portion of the front light guide plate 410 where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light overlap (that is, the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion). The fourth decorative symbol group 413 is formed so that the fourth decorative symbol group 413 can be visually recognized only by the light in the lateral direction. Further, in the front light guide plate 410, the jackpot expectation degree is 4th decorative symbol group 413 in the portion where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal direction do not overlap (that is, the normal R-shaped portion and the upward inverted R-shaped portion). The second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412, which are higher than the above, are formed, and the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 can be visually recognized only by the light in the vertical direction. Further, on the back side of the portion of the front light guide plate 410 where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light do not overlap (that is, the normal R-shaped portion and the upward inverted R-shaped portion), the rear light guide plate 420 is provided. A drum display device 81 for forming the first decorative symbol group 421 and executing the variable effect of the third symbol, which is the main effect of the game, is arranged. In this way, the portion of the front light guide plate 410 where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light do not overlap (that is, the normal R-shaped portion and the upward inverted R-shaped portion) is the main effect of the game. By arranging the drum display device 81 that executes the variation effect of the three symbols and configuring the first decorative symbol group 421, which is the effect with the highest expectation of a big hit in the variation effect, to be able to display, the variation effect that is important as a game. The effect of the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81 can be enhanced so as not to hinder the display result and the effect of high expectation of big hit, respectively, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased. can.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24 (b), the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c corresponding to the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 are both lit in "light blue", while the front left LED 415c is lit. The LEDs 414c, 422c, and 424 corresponding to the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are not lit (turned off). ing. Therefore, while the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, and the third decorative symbol 412 are the pachinko machine 10. It is invisible or difficult to see from the front side of the machine.

Further, in the state of FIG. 24 (b), as in FIG. 24 (a), the position where the third decorative symbol 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are formed. The display content (stop mode) of the drum display device 81 arranged on the back side of the above is in a visible state. Specifically, "7" is displayed on the left reel LR, "blank symbol" is displayed on the middle row, and "8" is displayed on the lower row. , "Blank symbol" in the middle row, and "8" in the lower row can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, when the variation effect of the third symbol is executed in the drum display device 81 arranged on the back side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the flat plate portion and the downward inverted R-shaped portion below the front light guide plate 410 are executed. By executing the effect by the fourth decorative pattern group 413 formed in the above, the effect of each device 81, 410 is performed by the integrated and three-dimensional powerful effect by the drum display device 81 and the front light guide plate 410. It is possible to increase the effect and increase the attention to the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), the front lower side LED 414c corresponding to the second decorative symbol group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 is lit in "pink" at the right end and the left end, and the front light guide plate 410. The front lower LED 414c other than the right end and the left end corresponding to the third decorative symbol 412 is lit in "green", while the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. The LEDs 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 are not lit (turned off). Therefore, the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 are visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, while the first decorative symbol group 421 and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are the pachinko machine 10. It is invisible or difficult to see from the front side of the machine.

Further, in the state of FIG. 25 (a), similarly to FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b), the third decorative symbol 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420. The display content (stop mode) of the drum display device 81 arranged on the back side of the position where is formed is in a visible state. Specifically, "7" is displayed on the left reel LR, "blank symbol" is displayed on the middle row, and "8" is displayed on the lower row. , "Blank symbol" in the middle row, and "8" in the lower row can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, when the variation effect of the third symbol is executed in the drum display device 81 arranged on the back side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the second light guide plate 410 is formed in the regular R-shaped portion. By executing the effect of the decorative pattern group 411 and the third decorative pattern 412, the drum display device 81 and the front light guide plate 410 perform an integrated and three-dimensional powerful effect, and the effects of the respective devices 81 and 410 are produced. It is possible to increase the effect and increase the attention to the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 are "red", "blue" and "green". The LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c corresponding to the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 are not lit (turned off). It has become. Therefore, the first decorative symbol group 421 is visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, while the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are the pachinko machine 10. It is invisible or difficult to see from the front side of the machine.

Further, in the state of FIG. 25 (b), similarly to FIGS. 24 (a), 24 (b) and 25 (a), the third decorative symbol 412 of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 The display content (stop mode) of the drum display device 81 arranged on the back side of the position where the first decorative symbol group 421 is formed is in a visible state. Specifically, "7" is displayed on the left reel LR, "blank symbol" is displayed on the middle row, and "8" is displayed on the lower row. , "Blank symbol" in the middle row, and "8" in the lower row can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, when the variation effect of the third symbol is executed in the drum display device 81 arranged on the back side of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, the first R-shaped portion formed on the rear light guide plate 420 is formed. By executing the effect by 1 decorative symbol group 421, the effect of each device 81 and 420 is enhanced by performing an integrated and three-dimensional powerful effect by the drum display device 81 and the rear light guide plate 420, respectively. , It is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In this way, various effects can be achieved by performing the variable effect of the third symbol on the drum display device 81 and the effect on the light guide unit 400 having the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 in a complex manner. By executing this, the effect of the drum display device 81, the front light guide plate 410, and the rear light guide plate 420 can be enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

More specifically, in the front side (front side of the pachinko machine 10) of the drum display device 81 that executes the variation effect of the third symbol and its peripheral area (front view up / down / left / right area of the display area of the drum display device 81). By executing an effect related to the variation effect (for example, the jackpot expectation), the effect area of the variation effect of the third symbol is expanded two-dimensionally and three-dimensionally, and the powerful variation of the third symbol is performed. You can perform the production.

Further, when a plurality of patterns of the effect indicating the jackpot expectation in the variable effect are configured to be executable, the effect having a low jackpot expectation (that is, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413). Is integrated into one light guide plate (that is, the front light guide plate 410), while the effect with high expectation of big hit (that is, the first decorative symbol group 421) is provided to the other light guide plate (that is, the rear light guide plate 420). By providing it in, when performing an effect with a low expectation of a big hit, it is possible to prevent the effect with a high expectation of a big hit from being lit and displayed to the player due to noise or the viewing angle, etc. Can be done.

More specifically, tentatively, an effect having a high jackpot expectation (that is, a first decorative symbol group 421) and an effect having a low jackpot expectation (that is, a second decorative symbol group 411, a third decorative symbol 412, and a fourth decoration). When the symbol group 413) is provided on the same light guide plate, when the effect with low expectation of big hit is turned on, if the visual recognition position with respect to the light guide plate is different depending on the height and posture of the player, the visual recognition is performed. Depending on the angle, the light for lighting the effect with a low expectation of a big hit may make it appear as if the effect with a high expectation of a big hit is lit. When such an event occurs, the player expects a jackpot to be performed with a high jackpot expectation despite the low jackpot expectation of the variable effect of the third symbol. Since no big hit is generated in the variable effect, there is a possibility that the effect having a high expectation of a big hit may be mistaken for a low expectation of a big hit.

Therefore, when a plurality of patterns of the effect indicating the jackpot expectation in the variable effect are configured to be executable, the effect with a low jackpot expectation (that is, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413). Is integrated into one light guide plate (that is, the front light guide plate 410), while the effect with high expectation of big hit (that is, the first decorative symbol group 421) is provided to the other light guide plate (that is, the rear light guide plate 420). By providing this, it is possible to prevent misidentification due to noise and the difference in the visual position depending on the height or posture of the player when performing an effect with a low expectation of a big hit, and to provide the player with an effect as designed. can.

Further, when a plurality of light guide plates 410 and 420 are used to enable a plurality of patterns of an effect indicating a jackpot expectation in a variable effect, one light guide plate 410 (that is, the front light guide plate 410) has a condenser lens 414d. By utilizing 415d and 416d, a plurality of types of effects (that is, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol group 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413) can be individually executed, and other guidance can be performed. By adopting the diffuser lenses 423 and 425 in the light plate (that is, the rear light guide plate 420), the effect of 1 (that is, the first decorative pattern group 421) can be executed in various expressions. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an effect of more than the number of a plurality of light guide plates 410 and 420, and it is possible to increase the variation of the effect and increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10, and is mainly a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device 110.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in.

The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. Then, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 32) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is on the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol display device 83, the normal symbol hold lamp 84, and the large winning opening 65a as an axis. Various solenoids 209 including a large winning opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening and closing and a normal electric service solenoid for driving the normal electric service 64c are connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Various commands and control signals are sent to.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, a big hit lottery for each special symbol, a dynamic display setting in the special symbol display device 37, a variable effect setting in the drum display device 81, a lottery for the display result of the variable display in the normal symbol display device 83, The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting the jackpot probability of each special symbol is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Further, the ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a hold number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, and a variation pattern table 202e. The main control device 110 executes the above-mentioned main control by various counters and the like stored in the RAM 203 and various tables stored in the ROM 202.

Here, with reference to FIG. 27, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the first embodiment will be described. These counters and the like are used to perform a big hit lottery, a dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 37, a variable effect setting of the drum display device 81, a lottery of the variable display display result of the normal symbol display device 83, and the like. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Further, in the description of the various counters, the various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 32.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the jackpot symbol are used for the jackpot lottery, the setting of the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variable effect of the drum display device 81. The jackpot type counter C2 used for selecting the stop type, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the effect mode of the variation effect, and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern is used.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 39). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203c set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 includes a first reserved ball storage area 203d consisting of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) related to the first special symbol, and four reserved areas related to the second special symbol. A second reserved ball storage area 203e composed of an area (second reserved first to fourth areas) is provided. In the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball into the first starting port 64a. Will be done. Further, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are set in accordance with the timing of entering the second starting port 64b. Each is stored.

Here, with reference to FIG. 28 (a), the details of the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 28A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a commonly used in the jackpot lottery in the first special symbol and the second special symbol stored in the ROM 202.

The jackpot random number table 202a of the first embodiment is for a low-probability state used when the game state is a "normal game state" or a "time shortened state" in the low-probability state of a special symbol for each set value. It is divided into two types, one for the high probability state and the other for the high probability state used in the case of the "probability fluctuation state", which is the high probability state of the special symbol having a higher probability that the gaming state becomes a big hit than the low probability state of the special symbol.

Then, the number of jackpot random numbers included in each of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set differently for each set value. Further, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers required for displacing from the low-probability state to the high-probability state is compensated from the number of lost random numbers corresponding to the lost. In this way, by making the number of jackpot random numbers different according to the game state, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 28A, in the jackpot random number table 202a of the first embodiment, when the set value is "1", the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 (big hit) that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a. The number of random numbers) is 50, and the values "0 to 49" are defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "1" is 50/10000 = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5). %) Is set.

On the other hand, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 500, and the value "0 to 499" is the jackpot random number. It is specified (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol of the set value "1" is 500/10000 = 5/100 (that is, 5%), and the high probability state of the special symbol. Is set so that it is easy to hit a jackpot 10 times from a low probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9950 other than the jackpot random number value, and the value is "50". ~ 9999 "is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 9,500 other than the jackpot random number value, and the value "500 to 9999" is specified in the jackpot random number table 202a ( It has been set). That is, the loss probability in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" and the "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "1" is 9950/10000 = 99.5 / 100 (that is, 99.5). %), And the loss probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol is set to 9500/10000 = 95/100 (that is, 95%). There is.

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 52, and the values "0 to 51" are It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "2" is 52/10000 = 0.52 / 100 (that is, 0.52). %) Is set.

On the other hand, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the big hit random number table 202a is 520, and the value "0 to 519" is the big hit random number. It is specified (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol of the set value "2" is 520/10000 = 5.2 / 100 (that is, 5.2%), and the special symbol. The high-probability state of is set so that it is easy to hit a jackpot 10 times from the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9948 pieces other than the jackpot random number value, and the value is "52". ~ 9999 "is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 9480 other than the jackpot random number value, and the value "520 to 9999" is specified in the jackpot random number table 202a ( It has been set). That is, the loss probability in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" and the "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "2" is 9948/10000 = 99.48 / 100 (that is, 99.48). %), And the loss probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol is 9480/10000 = 94.8/100 (that is, 94.8%). Is set to.

Therefore, the set value "2" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly improved jackpot probability as compared with the set value "1" (low probability state: 0.5% → 0.52%, high probability state: 5% → 5.2%), which is a setting in which a big hit game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value "1".

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 54, and the values "0 to 53" are It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "3" is 54/10000 = 0.54 / 100 (that is, 0.54). %) Is set.

On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the number of random numbers (big hit random numbers) that become big hits in the high probability state in the big hit random number table 202a is 540, and the values "0 to 539" are the big hit random numbers. It is specified (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol of the set value "3" is 540/10000 = 5.4 / 100 (that is, 5.4%), and the special symbol. The high-probability state of is set so that it is easy to hit a jackpot 10 times from the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9946 other than the jackpot random number value, and the value is "54". ~ 9999 "is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 9460 other than the jackpot random number value, and the value "540 to 9999" is specified in the jackpot random number table 202a ( It has been set). That is, the loss probability in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" and the "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "3" is 9946/10000 = 99.46 / 100 (that is, 99.46). %), And the loss probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol is 9460/10000 = 94.6/100 (that is, 94.6%). Is set to.

Therefore, the set value "3" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly improved jackpot probability as compared with the set value "2" (low probability state: 0.52% → 0.54%, high probability state: 5.2% → 5.4%), which is a setting in which a big hit game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value "2".

Next, when the set value is "4", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 56, and the values "0 to 55" are set. It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "4" is 56/10000 = 0.56 / 100 (that is, 0.56). %) Is set.

On the other hand, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the big hit random number table 202a is 560, and the value "0 to 559" is the big hit random number. It is specified (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol of the set value "4" is 560/10000 = 5.6 / 100 (that is, 5.6%), and the special symbol. The high-probability state of is set so that it is easy to hit a jackpot 10 times from the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9944 other than the jackpot random number value, and the value is "56". ~ 9999 "is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 9440 other than the jackpot random number value, and the value "560 to 9999" is specified in the jackpot random number table 202a ( It has been set). That is, the loss probability in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" and the "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "4" is 9944/10000 = 99.44 / 100 (that is, 99.44). %), And the loss probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol is 9440/10000 = 94.4 / 100 (that is, 94.4%). Is set to.

Therefore, the set value "4" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly improved jackpot probability as compared with the set value "3" (low probability state: 0.54% → 0.56%, high probability state: 5.4% → 5.6%), which is a setting in which a big hit game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “3”.

Next, when the set value is "5", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 58, and the values "0 to 57" are It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "5" is 58/10000 = 0.58 / 100 (that is, 0.58). %) Is set.

On the other hand, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the big hit random number table 202a is 580, and the value "0 to 579" is the big hit random number. It is specified (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol of the set value "5" is 580/10000 = 5.8 / 100 (that is, 5.8%), and the special symbol. The high-probability state of is set so that it is easy to hit a jackpot 10 times from the low-probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9942 other than the jackpot random number value, and the value is "58". ~ 9999 "is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 9420 other than the jackpot random number value, and the value "580 to 9999" is specified in the jackpot random number table 202a ( It has been set). That is, the loss probability in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" and the "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "5" is 9942/10000 = 99.42 / 100 (that is, 99.42). %), And the loss probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol is 9420/10000 = 94.2 / 100 (that is, 94.2%). Is set to.

Therefore, the set value "5" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly improved jackpot probability as compared with the set value "4" (low probability state: 0.56% → 0.58%, high probability state: 5.6% → 5.8%), which is a setting in which a big hit game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “4”.

Next, when the set value is "6", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is 60, and the values "0 to 59" are set. It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the low probability state (that is, "normal game state" and "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "6" is 60/10000 = 0.6 / 100 (that is, 0.6). %) Is set.

On the other hand, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that become big hits in the high probability state in the big hit random number table 202a is 600, and the value "0 to 599" is the big hit random number. It is specified (set) in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol of the set value "6" is 600/10000 = 6/100 (that is, 6%), and the high probability state of the special symbol. Is set so that it is easy to hit a jackpot 10 times from a low probability state.

Therefore, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (missing random number values) that are lost in the low probability state in the jackpot random number table 202a is the remaining 9940 other than the jackpot random number value, and the value is "60". ~ 9999 "is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a. In addition, the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the high probability state is the remaining 9400 other than the jackpot random number value, and the value "600 to 9999" is specified in the jackpot random number table 202a ( It has been set). That is, the loss probability in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" and the "time reduction state") of each special symbol of the set value "6" is 9940/10000 = 99.4/100 (that is, 99.4). %), And the loss probability in the high probability state (that is, "probability fluctuation state") of each special symbol is set to 9400/10000 = 94/100 (that is, 94%). There is.

Therefore, the set value "6" in the jackpot random number table 202a has a slightly higher jackpot probability than the set value "5" (low probability state: 0.58% → 0.6%, high probability state: 5.8% → 6%), which is a setting in which a big hit game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “5”.

In this way, by changing the jackpot winning probability for each probability set value and changing the jackpot winning ease, it is possible to change the ball output rate for each probability set value, which is given to the player. You can change the amount of game value you get. Therefore, it is possible to enrich the variation of the playability of the game performed in the pachinko machine 10 and improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99"), and the maximum value (for example, "0 to 99") is added. In the case of a counter that can take the value of "", it is configured to return to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40)).

Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a, a hit is made among the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64a. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first holding area as the first holding area in which the random number counter C1 is stored. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b, a hit is made among the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting opening 64b. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 in the same second holding area as the second holding area in which the random number counter C1 is stored.

Here, for example, unless the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved area 1 in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number (big hit random number value) that is a jackpot. That is, if it is a random number that is lost (lost random number value), the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect and the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are those at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved area 1 in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number (big hit random number value), the variation effect is produced. The fluctuation pattern and stop type in are the ones at the time of big hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99", and the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type stored in the ROM 202 are stored. The jackpot type is determined based on the table 202b. The jackpot type table 202b is commonly referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol.

Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 28 (b). FIG. 28B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol (common) stored in the ROM 202.

As shown in FIG. 28B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are associated with each other.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a jackpot type, after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, until the next jackpot, both the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are in a high probability state. The "10R probability variation jackpot" corresponding to the "variable state" and the "probability fluctuation" in which both the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are in a high probability state after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds until the next jackpot. After the "5R probability variation jackpot" corresponding to the "state" and the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is a low probability state, but until the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed 100 times. , There is a "10R normal jackpot" corresponding to a "time shortening state" in which the hit probability of a normal symbol is a high probability state.

In the jackpot type table 202b, possible values of the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type are associated with each jackpot type.

In the example of the jackpot type table 202b shown in FIG. 28 (b), the value "0 to 39" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "10R probability variation jackpot", and the jackpot type counter is associated with "5R probability variation jackpot". The values "40 to 59" of C2 are associated with each other, and the values "60 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 are associated with "10R normal jackpot".

That is, in the winning / failing lottery of each special symbol, the first holding area of either the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first holding area of the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e. When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 is a value that becomes a jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, 203e2 of the same first holding area. The jackpot type associated with the value of is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", "10R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and the jackpot type counter C2. If the value of is "45", "5R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "78", "10R normal jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

Therefore, when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of each special symbol, the jackpot type of "10R probability variation jackpot" is 40%, the jackpot type of "5R probability variation jackpot" is 20%, and the jackpot type of "10R normal jackpot" is. You will win at a rate of 40%.

The probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b according to the set probability.

Further, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each game state may be prepared, and the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table 202b.

Returning to FIG. 27, the description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to, for example, add "1" in order within the range of "0 to 99", reach the maximum value (that is, "99"), and then return to "0".

In the first embodiment, a rough effect mode of the variation effect at the time of big hit and loss displayed on the drum display device 81 is selected by the number of pending variation effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. To. Specifically, only the "non-reach (long)" effect mode or the "non-reach (short)" effect mode in which the "reach display" does not occur, and the "normal reach" variable element as the "reach display" are executed. The "normal reach" effect mode and the "super reach" effect mode in which the "super reach" variable element is executed by developing from the "normal reach" variable element, and the "special reach" effect developed from the "normal reach" variable element. 5 effects modes are selected with the "special reach" effect mode in which the variable element of "" is executed.

Here, each effect mode will be described in detail. Among the production modes, the "non-reach (long)" production mode and the "non-reach (short)" production mode (hereinafter, the "non-reach (long)" production mode and the "non-reach (short)" production mode are collectively referred to. (Sometimes referred to as a "non-reach" effect mode ") is a drum display device 81 in which three reels LR, CR, and RR (see FIG. 4) are varied as a variation effect of a special symbol. Effective of any of the two reels (eg, left reel LR and right reel RR) that stop first after the variable element of "high speed fluctuation" that rotates (shuffles) the reels LR, CR, RR at high speed is performed. This is an effect mode in which the same third symbol does not stop even on the line and "reach display" does not occur.

The fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is, for example, in the fluctuation effect of the third symbol performed by the drum display device 81, the third symbol displayed on each reel LR, CR, RR is downward in the vertical direction of the display screen. A variable element that is rotated and scrolled at high speed. In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third symbol is changed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the display content of the third symbol, and the stop result of the fluctuation effect displayed last time is irregularly mixed (shuffled). Is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" is performed except for a specific effect mode ("non-reach (short)" effect mode). It is configured to be used.

The "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element means that in the variation effect of the third symbol performed by the drum display device 81, after the above-mentioned "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element, the third symbol is scrolled at a low speed at a speed visible to the player. It is a variable element that is being used. In the fluctuation element of this "low speed fluctuation", each reel LR, CR, and RR are stopped and displayed in order while the player is made to recognize the display content of the third symbol. If the same third symbol stops in the two symbol rows (for example, left reel LR and right reel RR) that are stopped and displayed first, it is considered that "reach display" has occurred and it develops into a variable element of "normal reach". When a different third symbol is stopped in the reels LR and RR of 2 which are stopped and displayed first, the remaining reel CRs are stopped and displayed, and the variation effect is terminated. The details of the variable elements of "high-speed fluctuation" or each variable element including the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" will be described later.

Therefore, in the "non-reach (long)" staging mode, the variable element of "high speed fluctuation" is performed, then the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" is performed, and each reel LR, CR, RR is stopped in order. , The different third symbols stop on the two reels LR and RR that stop first, the remaining 1 reel CR stops, and the variation effect of 1 ends. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" is not performed after the "high speed fluctuation" is performed, and after the end of the variable element of the "high speed fluctuation", each reel LR, CR , RR stop at the same time, 2 reels LR, CR, RR (for example, 2 reels LR, RR that stop first in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode), and the other The reel CR of 1 is also stopped, and the fluctuation effect of 1 is completed.

Among the effect modes, the "normal reach" effect mode is "in the variation effect of the third symbol in the drum display device 81, immediately after the same third symbol on the two reels LR and RR that are stopped and displayed first stops. It is one of the staging modes of "reach display" in which the variable element of "normal reach" is executed and does not develop into other "reach display", that is, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach".

More specifically, in the fluctuation element of "normal reach", the middle reel CR is scrolled and displayed at a low speed, and the movement is changed by the low speed scroll to a predetermined stop symbol at the start of the fluctuation, and when the stop symbol is reached. It is a production to stop and display.

Among the production modes, the "super reach" production mode is one of the "reach display" production modes in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed by developing from the variable element of "normal reach".

More specifically, in the variable element of "super reach", the scroll is displayed at a lower speed (for example, ultra-slow scroll, frame-by-frame scroll, etc.) than the low-speed scroll in the variable element of "normal reach", and is predetermined at the start of the fluctuation. It is an effect that the stop symbol is changed by the low-speed scroll, and the stop display is displayed when the stop symbol is reached.

Among the production modes, the "special reach" production mode is one of the "reach display" production modes in which the variable element of "special reach" is executed by developing from the variable element of "normal reach".

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a, the jackpot random number counter C1 in the first reserved first to fourth areas provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first starting port 64a is set. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first hold area to be stored. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b, the jackpot random number counter C1 in the second reserved first to fourth areas provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second starting port 64b is set. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second hold area to be stored.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 has a stop pattern selection counter C3 according to whether or not the variation effect is correct, the current game state, and the number of variation effects (number of reserved balls) of both special symbols currently pending. The stop pattern table 202d that refers to the value is configured differently. That is, a plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are provided, and are configured to be selected according to the number of fluctuation effects (number of reserved balls) of both special symbols in standby.

Further, in the first embodiment, when determining the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the hold number table 202c provided in the ROM 202, the appropriateness of the variation effect, the current gaming state, and the current game state. One of the stop pattern tables 202d corresponding to the number of variable effects (number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, the effect mode, which is a rough mode of the variation effect, is selected based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. After that, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variation effect is determined based on the selected effect mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1 described later.

The stop pattern table 202d provided with a plurality of types is set so that the range of random values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 in which the effect mode is selected for each stop pattern table 202d is different. The reason why a plurality of the stop pattern tables 202d are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variation effect according to the propriety of the variation effect, the game state, and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) a big hit occurs in the fluctuation effect of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "normal gaming state". This is because the selection ratio of the effect mode is changed according to whether or not there is (3) how many balls are reserved for the variable effect.

This is because, as the first reason, the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit is changed for each production mode. That is, depending on whether the jackpot lottery is won or lost, the stop pattern, that is, the "non-reach" production mode, the "normal reach" production mode, the "super reach" production mode, and the "special reach" production mode. By configuring the mode so that the selection ratio is different, the degree of expectation of a big hit is changed for each staging mode. Specifically, for example, if the jackpot lottery is won, the "super reach" effect mode or the "special reach" effect mode can be easily selected, and if the jackpot lottery is not won, the "non-reach" effect is produced. It is easy to select the mode and the "normal reach" production mode.

With this configuration, the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode can be easily hit, and the "normal reach" production mode and the "non-reach" production mode are difficult to hit. It can be a production or a production that does not make a big hit, and the degree of expectation of a big hit can be differentiated for each production mode. Therefore, when a production that is easy to hit the jackpot appears in the variable production, it is suggested to the player that the jackpot is likely to occur while the production that is easy to hit the jackpot is performed, and the interest of the game is enhanced. There is.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, specifically, when the acquired lottery result is a big hit, it is easy to select an effect that is easy to make a big hit, and it is difficult to select an effect that is hard to make a big hit. The effect mode (stop pattern), which is a rough content of the variable effect, is selected based on the above. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is a loss, the effect mode (stop pattern) of the variable effect is determined based on the stop pattern table 202d, which makes it difficult to select the effect that is easy to hit the jackpot and makes it easy to select the effect that is difficult to hit the jackpot. Configure to select. As a result, when the player is notified of the lottery result of the third symbol in the variable effect, if an effect that is easy to hit is executed, a big hit is likely to occur in the variable effect, and an effect that is difficult to hit is executed. If this is the case, it is difficult for a big hit to occur in the variable effect, and by providing a difference in the expected value of the big hit for each effect mode (stop pattern), it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the execution of the variable effect.

The second reason is that the number of times of waiting for the first special symbol variation effect has reached the upper limit, and the number of times of entering the first starting port 64a or waiting for the second special symbol variation effect is the upper limit. This is to reduce as much as possible waste balls (so-called no lottery of special symbols due to overflow winning) based on the entry into the second starting port 64b in the state of reaching.

Specifically, the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to a maximum of 4 times, respectively, and the variation effect is executed for at least a certain period of time. Therefore, "probability". In the gaming state in which the ball easily enters the second starting port 64b in the "variable state" and the "time shortened state", it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. In these gaming states, if a fluctuation effect with a long fluctuation time is selected, balls are frequently entered into the second starting port 64b when the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reached, and the second starting port is bent. Despite entering 64b, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol cannot be obtained. In addition, even in the "normal game state", if a variation effect with a long fluctuation time is selected while the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has been reached, the first special symbol is reserved while the variation effect is being executed. Since the number of balls is not digested, even if a ball enters the first starting port 64a during that time, the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol cannot be obtained. In such a state, the player determines that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is inserted into the first starting port 64a, and the variable effect is digested so that the number of reserved balls can be obtained again. The ball will stop firing until the game is interrupted. If the game is interrupted, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 will decrease, which will affect the management of the game hall.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the gaming state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or the second special symbol) is easily reached, or the game state is close to (or matches with) the maximum number of reserved balls. The number of reserved balls is configured to select the effect mode of the variation effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a short variation time is easily selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of balls into the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b when the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has been reached. can.

Further, the third reason is to maintain the state in which the variable effect is being executed for a long time by setting the execution time to be long and delaying the end of the variable effect. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is small (not present), a new ball is inserted into either the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b within the variable time of the variable effect being executed. If the ball is not made, the next variation effect cannot be started, and the demo screen or the like must be displayed on the drum display device 81. If the player does not perform the variable effect on the drum display device 81 even though the ball is fired and the game is played, the player cannot obtain the interest related to the jackpot lottery that the player wants. I am awakened to the game. Further, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is difficult for the ball to enter the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b because the drum display device 81 does not perform the fluctuation effect, and the game value. There is a risk that the pachinko machine 10 will stop playing on the pachinko machine 10 because it is determined that the platform is difficult to obtain.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the effect mode of the variation effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a long variation time is easily selected when the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is small. There is. As a result, it is possible to configure the drum display device 81 from a situation in which the variation effect is not performed, and to maintain the execution state of the variation effect on the drum display device 81 for a long time.

Here, the details of the hold number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a diagram schematically showing the hold number table 202c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variation effect is performed based on the ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, whether or not the variation effect is correct and not. Refer to the hold number table 202c based on the game state at that time and the total number of hold of the variable effect of special figure 1 and special figure 2 at that time, and select one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3. It is configured in. Then, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is determined based on any one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3.

Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 202c of FIG. 29, when the total number of reserved balls is "1 to 3" at the time of extracting the loss in the "normal game state", or in the "probability fluctuation state". Or, when the total number of reserved balls is "1" at the time of loss extraction in the "time reduction state", A table 202d1 (see FIG. 30A) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

In addition, when the number of reserved balls is "4 to 8" at the time of extracting the loss in the "normal game state", or when the loss is extracted in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time shortening state", the reserved balls are held. When the number is "2 to 8", the B table 202d2 (see FIG. 30B) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

Furthermore, at the time of winning the jackpot, in any game state (that is, "normal game state", "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state"), and in any number of reserved balls (that is, 1 to 8). Even if there is, the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 30C) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

That is, if any of the jackpots is won, the stop pattern table 202d (C table 202d3) is selected based only on the type of jackpot regardless of the number of reserved balls and the game state at that time, and the jackpot is won. Only when there is no such (that is, at the time of loss), the stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1 or B table 202d2) is selected based on the number of reserved balls and the gaming state at that time.

Even when a big hit is won, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to be different depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, when the number of reserved balls is large when a big hit is won, a relatively short fluctuation pattern is easily selected. Stop pattern table 202d (For example, a "super reach" effect mode in which the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is 5 seconds or " It may be configured so that the "special reach" effect mode, etc.) can be selected.

In this case, in each effect mode in which the "reach display" is executed, it is configured to select an effect mode in which only the time of the variable element portion of the "high-speed fluctuation" is changed from 10 seconds to 5 seconds. With this configuration, for example, when the fluctuation effect is started with the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol being four times, even if the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed in 5 seconds. At the time when the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds ends (when it is recognized as the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds), "reach display" may occur in the fluctuation effect. Therefore, even when the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds is performed, the effect mode in which the "reach display" is executed other than the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is executed. By doing so, it is possible to know whether the fluctuation effect is a big hit or a loss at the time of executing the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds.

Here, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 30. FIG. 30A is a diagram schematically showing an example of A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 30B schematically shows an example of B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 30 (c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 30A, in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each “non-reach (long)” effect mode is set to “0” to “74”. , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is "95" to "95". It is set to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98" and "99". In the A table 202d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is set not to be selected. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30B, in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is “0” to “74”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is "95". The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98,99". In the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, and the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is set not to be selected. ing.

That is, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" production mode is 75%, the "normal reach" production mode is 20%, the "super reach" production mode is 3%, and the "special reach" production mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio. Further, in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (short)" production mode is 75%, the "normal reach" production mode is 20%, the "super reach" production mode is 3%, and the "special reach" production mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio.

Therefore, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected, and in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode. It is configured as follows.

Therefore, it can be said that the A table 202d1 tends to have a relatively long variation time of the selected variation effect as compared with the B table 202d2. In other words, it can be said that the B table 202d2 tends to have a shorter variation time of the selected variation effect than the A table 202d1.

The selection ratios of the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, and the "special reach" effect mode with the A table 202d1 and the B table 202d2 are set to be the same.

In this way, when the lottery result of the loss is extracted, it is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect based on the number of reserved balls of the pending variable effect. For example, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is large, the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is short is selected. As a result, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is large, the execution time of the variable effect to be executed is shortened and the number of times the variable effect is executed is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable effect can be improved.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is small, the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is used to secure the ball entry time into the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b. Select a "non-reach (long)" effect mode with a long variable effect time. As a result, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, which has a longer variable effect time than when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected, can be performed, so that the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b can be performed. By making it easier to secure the time for the ball to enter the ball and increasing the possibility that a new start prize will be generated during the execution time of the variation effect in the drum display device 81, the situation in which the variation effect is executed is maintained. can do.

In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variation effect is configured to be different in the effect mode in the variation effect of the loss, but the first start port 64a is configured. Alternatively, substantially the same effect mode is selected between the determination of the variation effect based on the ball entering the second starting port 64b and the determination of the variation effect based on the start of the variation effect based on the entry. It is configured in.

Specifically, in the case of the variable effect of loss, either the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2 is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect, but the A table 202d1 And the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern counter C3 assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode or the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is the same, and is allocated to another effect mode. The values of the stop pattern counters C3 are also set to be the same.

That is, the only difference is whether the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected or the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect. The same production mode is selected. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the start winning and the effect mode selected at the start of the fluctuation are substantially the same even when the gaming state changes (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). Is selected. As a result, even if the pre-reading notice is given based on the staging mode selected at the time of the start winning, the staging that is the target of the pre-reading notice does not cause a discrepancy with the content of the pre-reading notice. Can be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 30C, in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “0” to “4”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is "40" to "40". It is set to "99". In the C table 202d3, the stop pattern table 202d is selected at the time of a big hit, and the "reach display" always occurs, so that each "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

That is, in the C table 202d3, the selection ratio is set so that the "normal reach" effect mode is 5%, the "super reach" effect mode is 35%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 60%.

Therefore, in the variable production at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is high in the order of "special reach" production mode> "super reach" production mode> "normal reach" production mode, and in the variable production at the time of loss, the "normal reach" production mode> The selection ratio is set to be higher in the order of "super reach" effect mode> "special reach" effect mode. Therefore, as for the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance of each "reach display", there is a high possibility that the jackpot display result will appear in the order of "special reach" production mode> "super reach" production mode> "normal reach" production mode. It is configured to be. As a result, the player can be shown the degree of expectation for the jackpot depending on the type of the effect mode of the variable effect, and the player can enjoy the uplifting feeling of the jackpot according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed by the player.

From the above, the situation in which the game is performed by determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed based on the success or failure of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of reserved balls of the variable effect at that time. By shortening the execution time of the variation effect and increasing the number of executions of the variation effect based on the above, it is possible to select an effect mode that enhances the execution efficiency of the variation effect.

When "reach display" is selected when the number of reserved balls for variable effect is large (for example, "4"), the stop pattern in which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" of each "reach display" is shortened. A table 202d may be provided. Further, when the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is large, the stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the effect element of "low speed variation" is omitted in each effect mode. Further, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the selection rate of each effect mode is completely different depending on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect. However, if the selection rate of each effect mode differs depending on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect, the number of reserved balls at the time of the pre-reading notice execution decision and the pre-reading notice are the targets of the pre-reading notice. The number of reserved balls at the time of executing the variable effect may be different. In such a case, a process for maintaining consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable staging is required, which makes the process complicated.

Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to, for example, add "1" in order within the range of "0 to 9", reach the maximum value (that is, "9"), and then return to "0". The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main processing (see FIG. 39). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64a, the first holding first to fourth areas provided in the first holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting opening 64a. Of these, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203d4 of the first holding area. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b, the second holding first to fourth areas provided in the second holding ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting opening 64b. Of these, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203e4 in the second holding area.

This variation type counter CS1 is used to determine a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is detailed by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the variation pattern. The determination of the variation pattern is specifically the determination of the variation time of the variation effect. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 have a reach type and a fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the drum display device 81 based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1. Is determined, and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the execution mode of the advance notice effect are determined.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect and determines only the fluctuation time. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to control the detailed advance notice lottery or the like necessary for executing the variation effect in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, so that the processing of the MPU 201 related to the variation effect can be reduced. can. Further, it is not necessary to prepare a command for all fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation effect in the main control device 110, and the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the variation effect is performed by determining the detailed variation pattern in the variation effect based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110. You can increase the degree of freedom in choosing. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the gaming state changes from moment to moment, it is possible to select or change the effect content of the variable effect at any time in response to the change, and it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. can.

Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. In the pachinko machine 10, as the variation pattern table 202e, the variation pattern table 202e1 for loss, which is commonly used in all gaming states when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are lost, and the first special symbol and the first special symbol A variable pattern table 202e2 for big hits, which is commonly used in all gaming states at the time of big hits of the second special symbol, is prepared.

FIG. 31 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern table 202e1 for loss stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 32 schematically shows an example of the variation pattern table 202e2 for jackpots stored in the ROM 202. It is a figure. As shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the variation pattern tables 202e1 and 202e2 are grouped according to the selected staging mode.

Specifically, as the effect mode at the time of loss, the "E0: non-reach (long)" effect and the "non-reach (short)" effect, which are referred to when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is determined, are used. "E1: Non-reach (short)" referred to when the aspect is determined, "E2: Normal reach" referred to when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and "super reach" effect mode. It is divided into "E3: Super Reach", which is referred to when is determined, and "E4: Special Reach", which is referred to when the "Special Reach" production mode is determined. Further, as the effect mode at the time of a big hit, "E5: for normal reach" referred to when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and "E6: super" referred to when the "super reach" effect mode is determined. It is divided into one for "reach" and one for "E7: special reach" which is referred to when the "special reach" production mode is determined. Then, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area having the first holding ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is not a value (big hit random number value) that becomes a jackpot, or When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area of the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a jackpot value (big hit random number value), that is, in any case, the value is lost. If the value is, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of balls held at that time with reference to the holding number table 202c, and stored in the same holding area. The effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the loss variation pattern table 202e1 is determined based on the selected staging mode. In the group (group) of the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is held in the holding area in the fluctuation effect. Determined as a variation pattern.

Here, each fluctuation element constituting the fluctuation pattern will be described. The variable element constitutes a part of the variable effect of 1, and each variable element is combined to form the variable effect of 1. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable elements include "high-speed fluctuation", "low-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", "super reach", and "special reach". Variable elements and “re-variable” variable elements are provided.

As described above, the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is a fluctuation element that scrolls at high speed (rotationally driven) so that the player cannot clearly recognize the content of the third symbol. When the "non-reach (short)" effect mode or the like is selected, the variable element of this "high-speed fluctuation" is performed for "5 seconds" at the beginning of the variation effect (hereinafter referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (short)"). (In some cases), when a "non-reach (long)" effect mode or the like is selected, "10 seconds" is performed at the beginning of the variation effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as "high-speed variation (long)"). When the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation" ends, the variable element of the "low-speed fluctuation" described later is started (executed), or the variation effect is configured to end as it is.

The "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is started after the execution of the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element of "5 seconds" or "10 seconds", and the third symbol is scrolled so as to be visible to generate "reach display". It is a variable factor that shows whether or not to do it. This "low-speed fluctuation" variation element is not executed when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected, and the effect mode other than the "non-reach (short)" effect mode (for example, "non-reach (long)" effect mode is not executed. ) "Production mode) is selected," 5 seconds "is performed after the variable element of" high-speed fluctuation ".

That is, in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" is performed, so that the final stop reel of the drum display device 81 (in the first embodiment, the middle reel CR (see FIG. 4)). On the other hand, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, after the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation" is performed, each reel LR, CR, RR of the drum display device 81 is "low speed fluctuation". It is configured to stop rapidly (so-called bita stop) without going through a variable element. When the fluctuation element of this "low speed fluctuation" ends, the fluctuation effect is configured to end as it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (long)" staging mode has a variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" of "10 seconds" and a variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" of "5 seconds". The fluctuation effect is composed of the fluctuation pattern including. Further, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, the variation effect is configured by the variation pattern of only the variation element of the "high-speed variation" of "5 seconds".

The "pseudo-variation" fluctuation element is a fluctuation element that executes the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element again when a predetermined stop mark is provisionally displayed in the above-mentioned "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element. Say. That is, in the fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation", when the right reel RR is stopped, the third symbol having a number "+1" larger than the third symbol stopped and displayed on the left reel LR on one of the effective lines is stopped and displayed. (For example, the third symbol of "7" on the left reel LR and "8" on the right reel RR is stopped and displayed), and then the same as the third symbol stopped and displayed on the left reel LR when the middle reel CR is stopped. 3rd symbol is stop display (for example, "7" is displayed on the left reel LR and middle reel CR, and "8" is stop display on the right reel RR (that is, the stop mark is "778"). Hereinafter, when the combination is referred to as a "chance pattern"), the variable element of the "low-speed knitting" becomes a variable element of the "pseudo-variation", and the execution symbol displayed on the hold display unit Db (. The pending symbols) will not be digested, and the variable production will continue.

The fluctuation element of this "pseudo fluctuation" is performed for "5 seconds" in the same manner as the fluctuation element of "slow fluctuation". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the fluctuation element of "pseudo fluctuation" is executed, the symbol that always generates "reach display" (for example, the third symbol stopped and displayed on the left reel LR and the right reel RR). Is the same, and the fluctuation of the middle reel CR is continuing. Hereinafter, it is configured to be displayed so as to develop into a fluctuation element of "normal reach" described later. There is. In addition, in the fluctuation element of this "pseudo fluctuation", the "reach formation symbol" may not be displayed, and the "loss display" may be displayed to end the fluctuation effect.

Therefore, as the variable element of this "pseudo-variation", the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is again displayed from the chance symbol by stopping and displaying the variable element equivalent to the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation". Once started, the effect is performed as if the variable effect had been started once again.

In the first embodiment, a maximum of one "pseudo-ream" effect can be executed in the variable effect. It should be noted that the variation element of "pseudo variation" may be executed a plurality of times in the variation effect of 1.

The variable element of "normal reach" may be referred to as the same symbol (hereinafter, "reach forming symbol") on the effective line of any of the two reels LR and RR that stop first in the variable element of "low speed fluctuation". ) Is a variable element that indicates whether or not a big hit occurs depending on the fluctuation result of the remaining reel CRs when the stop display is displayed. This "normal reach" variable element is performed "5 seconds" after the "low speed variation" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of the "normal reach" is executed, the pattern of directly displaying the "loss display", the pattern of directly displaying the "big hit display", and the "super reach" There are two patterns: a pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a variable element of "special reach", and a pattern that once makes a temporary "missing display" appear and then executes the variable element of "re-variation". Has been done.

The variable element of "super reach" is developed and executed when the variable element of "normal reach" does not stop the "loss display" and the fluctuation of the remaining reel CRs is continued, and the predetermined effect is performed on the drum display device 81. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit occurs by performing (for example, "battle production"). This "super reach" variable element is performed "10 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "super reach" is executed, a pattern that directly displays "missing display" and a pattern that directly displays "big hit display" are temporarily provided. A pattern is prepared in which the variable element of "re-variation" is executed after the "loss display" is displayed.

The variable element of "special reach" is developed and executed when the variable element of "normal reach" does not stop the "loss display" and the fluctuation of the remaining reel CRs is continued, and the above-mentioned predetermined state is performed in the drum display device 81. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit occurs by performing a special effect (for example, "competitive effect") different from the effect. This "special reach" variable element is performed "20 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of the "special reach" is executed, a pattern that directly displays the "loss display" and a pattern that directly displays the "big hit display" are temporarily provided. There is a pattern that "re-changes" after the "missing display" appears.

It should be noted that, after the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", it is configured to develop into the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach". When the symbol stops, it may be configured to suddenly develop into a "super reach" variable element or a "special reach" variable element without going through the "normal reach" variable element. Further, the variable element of "special reach" may be configured to be performed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that develops and is executed after the "missing display" appears once in any of the "reach display", and the "big hit display" appears. The variable element of this "re-variation" is performed "5 seconds" after any "reach display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern in which the “big hit display” appears after the execution of the variable element of the “re-variation” is prepared.

Further, the variable element of this "re-variation" is configured to occur only when the jackpot game is won. That is, in the case of "loss display", the variable element of "re-variation" is configured not to be executed. This is because the variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that changes the temporarily stopped "missing display" to one of the "big hit display", so in the case of "missing display" that has not won the big hit. If you go to, there will be a discrepancy in the production. Therefore, the fluctuation element of this "re-variation" is configured so as to be selected only in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 32) and not in the loss fluctuation pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 31).

As shown in FIG. 31, in the loss variation pattern table 202e1 referred to when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are lost, the total variation time is "15 seconds" for "E0: non-reach (long)". "Fluctuating element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "" (variation time. Hereinafter, "variation pattern" can be replaced with "variation time". There is.) Is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach (long)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". It is set to "0 to 9" for "element", and only "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the loss pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in any of the gaming states, the variation type counter. A "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ a variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "" is associated with all possible values ("0 to 9") of CS1. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode in the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern is always "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation. Element ”is selected.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss, one fluctuation pattern of "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "" in which the total fluctuation time is "5 seconds" in "E1: non-reach (short)". Is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in “E1: non-reach (short)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0” for “only the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ””. It is set to "~ 9", and only "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the loss pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in any of the gaming states, the variation type counter. "Only the variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "" are associated with all the values ("0 to 9") that CS1 can take. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" effect mode in the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, "only the variation element of" high speed variation (short) "is always selected as the variation pattern".

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss, "E2: normal reach" includes the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" with the total fluctuation time of "20 seconds". "Variation element" and "Fluctuation element of" High-speed fluctuation (long) "with total fluctuation time of" 30 seconds "+" Pseudo-variation "+" High-speed fluctuation (short) "+ Fluctuation element of" Low-speed fluctuation "+ Two fluctuation patterns with "variable elements of" normal reach "" are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach". "Variation element" is "0-6", "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" It is "7-9" for "variable element + variable element of" normal reach "".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the loss pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in any of the gaming states, "" high-speed variation (long)) "Variation element of" + "Slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element "variation pattern is 70%," High speed fluctuation (long) "variation element +" Pseudo fluctuation "variation element +" High speed fluctuation " The variation pattern of "(short)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element "is set to be selected at a ratio of 30%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" staging mode selected at the time of loss, the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element is easily selected (overall). 70%). In addition, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo-variation" fluctuation element + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element "variation By being configured so that the pattern is also selected, it is possible to provide playability in which a loss can occur from any fluctuation pattern.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss, in "E3: Super Reach", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" of the total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" + " Fluctuation element of "super reach" and fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high speed fluctuation (short)" + fluctuation of "low speed fluctuation" with total fluctuation time of "40 seconds" Two fluctuation patterns of "element + fluctuation element of" super reach "" are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + " "0-7", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "pseudo-variation" fluctuation factor + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" for "super reach" fluctuation factor "Variable element of" + "Variable element of" super reach "" is "8,9".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the loss pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in any of the gaming states, "" High-speed variation (long) ". ) ”Variable element +“ Low speed fluctuation ”variable element +“ Super reach ”variable element” 80%, “High speed fluctuation (long)” variable element + “Pseudo fluctuation” variable element + “Pseudo fluctuation” variable element The fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element "is set to be selected at a ratio of 20%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" staging mode selected at the time of loss, it is easy to select the fluctuation pattern of "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element. (80% of the total). In addition, "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable elements of" pseudo-variation "+ variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "+ variable elements of" super reach "" By being configured so that the fluctuation pattern is also selected, it is possible to provide playability in which a loss can occur from any fluctuation pattern.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss, in "E4: Special reach", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" of the total fluctuation time of "40 seconds" + " Fluctuation element of "special reach" and fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high speed fluctuation (short)" + fluctuation of "low speed fluctuation" with total fluctuation time of "50 seconds" Two fluctuation patterns of "element + fluctuation element of" special reach "" are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 31, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: special reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + " "0-8", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "pseudo-variation" fluctuation factor + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" for "special reach" fluctuation factor It is "9" for "variable element of" + variable element of "special reach".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the loss pattern table 202e1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in any of the gaming states, "" High-speed variation (long) ". ) ”Variable element +“ Low speed fluctuation ”variable element +“ Special reach ”variable element” 90%, “High speed fluctuation (long)” variable element + “Pseudo fluctuation” variable element + “Pseudo fluctuation” variable element The fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element "is set to be selected at a ratio of 10%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" staging mode selected at the time of loss, it is easy to select the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element. (90% of the total). In addition, "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable elements of" pseudo-variation "+ variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "+ variable elements of" special reach "" By being configured so that the fluctuation pattern is also selected, it is possible to provide playability in which a loss can occur from any fluctuation pattern.

As for the predetermined fluctuation pattern at the time of loss (for example, "non-reach (long)" effect mode and "non-reach (short)" effect mode), the effect mode is determined as the variation pattern as it is, so that the variation type counter CS1 May be configured to determine the variation pattern without using. Further, although the selection is made using only the variation type counter CS1, a plurality of variation type counters may be used in combination for selection (selection of presence / absence of notice display, etc.).

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to at the time of jackpot of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area having the first holding ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that becomes a jackpot, and in the second special symbol. When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area having the corresponding second holding ball storage area 203e is a value that becomes a jackpot, the game state at that time and the game state at that time are referred to with reference to the holding number table 202c. The stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the number of reserved balls at that time, and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is held in the holding area in the fluctuation effect. Determined as a variation pattern.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E5: normal reach" includes "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" with a total fluctuation time of "20 seconds". "Fluctuating element" and "Fluctuating element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ variable element of" normal reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "" with the total fluctuation time of "25 seconds" And, the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "pseudo fluctuation" + the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (short)" + the fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "30 seconds" + "Normal reach" fluctuation element "and" High-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element with total fluctuation time of" 35 seconds "+" Pseudo-variation "variable element +" High-speed fluctuation (short) "variable element + Four fluctuation patterns of "slow fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element "are prepared so that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be selected for each fluctuation pattern. It is associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 32, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach". For "variable elements", "0", for "high-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "low-speed fluctuation" variable element + "normal reach" variable element + "re-variable" variable element " "1,2", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "pseudo-variation" fluctuation factor + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation For "elements", "3-5", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo-variation" fluctuation element + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + It is "6-9" for "variable element of" normal reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed in any of the gaming states, the "high-speed fluctuation (long)" Fluctuation element of "Fluctuating element +" Low speed fluctuation "+ Fluctuation pattern of" Normal reach "is 10%, Fluctuation element of" High speed fluctuation (long) "+ Fluctuation factor of" Low speed fluctuation "+ Fluctuation of" Normal reach " 20% of the fluctuation pattern of "element +" fluctuation element of "re-variation" "," fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation element of "pseudo-variation" + fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "low speed" 30% of the fluctuation pattern of "variation" + "normal reach" fluctuation element, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo-variation" fluctuation element + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + The fluctuation pattern of "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element "is set to be selected at a ratio of 40%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" staging mode selected at the time of a big hit, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo-variation" fluctuation element + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" The fluctuation pattern of "variable element + variable element of" normal reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "" is easily selected (40% of the total). In addition, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element "," high-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element + "Normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element "," high-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" pseudo-variation "variable element +" high-speed fluctuation (short) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation " By configuring the fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" + "variable element of" normal reach "" to be selected, it is possible to provide playability in which a big hit can be expected from any fluctuation pattern.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E6: Super Reach" includes the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + "super reach" with the total fluctuation time of "30 seconds". "Fluctuating element" and "Fluctuating element of" High-speed fluctuation (long) "with total fluctuation time of" 35 seconds "+ Variable element of" Low-speed fluctuation "+ Variable element of" Super reach "+" Re-variation " "Fluctuating element" and "Fluctuating element" of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" with total fluctuation time of "40 seconds" + Variable element of "Pseudo-variation" + Variable element of "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Low-speed fluctuation" Fluctuation element of "Super Reach" + Fluctuation factor of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" with total fluctuation time of "45 seconds" + Fluctuation factor of "Pseudo-variation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" 4 fluctuation patterns of "variable element" + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "super reach" variable element + "re-variable" variable element "are prepared to be selectable, and the variable type is prepared for each variable pattern. The value of the counter CS1 is associated with it.

In the example shown in FIG. 32, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" + " "0,1", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor + "re-variation" fluctuation for "super reach" fluctuation factor " For "elements", "2-4", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo-variation" fluctuation element + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "5, 6" for "Variable elements of" Super Reach "", "Variable elements of" High-speed fluctuation (long) "+ Variable elements of" Pseudo-variation "+ Variable elements of" High-speed fluctuation (short) "+" Low speed " It is "7-9" for the variable element of "variation" + the variable element of "super reach" + the variable element of "re-variation".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed in any of the gaming states, "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "". Fluctuation element of "Slow fluctuation" + Fluctuation element of "Super reach" 20%, Fluctuation pattern of "High speed fluctuation (long)" + Fluctuation factor of "Low speed fluctuation" + "Super reach" "Variable element of" + "Variable element of" re-variation "" 30%, "Frequent element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ Variable element of" Pseudo-variation "+ Variable element of" High-speed fluctuation (short) " + Fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "super reach" is 20%, fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation factor of "pseudo fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "high speed fluctuation (short)" The fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" + "variable element of" low speed "+ variable element of" super reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "" is set to be selected at a ratio of 30%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" effect mode selected at the time of big hit, the variable element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" + the variable element of "super reach" + the variable element of "re-variation" Or "High-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo-variation" fluctuation element + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element + The fluctuation pattern of "variable elements of" re-variation "" is easy to select (both 30% of the total). In addition, "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ variable element of" super reach "" or "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" pseudo-variation " Fluctuation elements + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation elements + "low-speed fluctuations" fluctuation elements + "super reach" fluctuation elements " It is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit even from the pattern.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E7: Special reach" includes the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + "special reach" with the total fluctuation time of "40 seconds". "Fluctuating element" and "Fluctuating element of" High-speed fluctuation (long) "with the total fluctuation time of" 45 seconds "+ Variable element of" Low-speed fluctuation "+ Variable element of" Special reach "+" Re-variation " "Fluctuating element" and "Fluctuating element" of "High-speed fluctuation (long)" with total fluctuation time of "50 seconds" + Variable element of "Pseudo-variation" + Variable element of "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Low-speed fluctuation" Fluctuation element of "Special reach" and "Variation factor of" High-speed fluctuation (long) "with total fluctuation time of" 55 seconds "+ Variation factor of" Pseudo-variation "+" High-speed fluctuation (short) 4 fluctuation patterns of "variable element" + "low speed fluctuation" variable element + "special reach" variable element + "re-variable" variable element "are prepared to be selectable, and the variable type is prepared for each variable pattern. The value of the counter CS1 is associated with it.

In the example shown in FIG. 32, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E7: Special Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ the fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "+" "0-2", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "special reach" fluctuation factor + "re-variation" fluctuation for "special reach" fluctuation factor " For "elements", "3, 4", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo-variation" fluctuation element + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "5-7" for "special reach" fluctuation element, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "pseudo fluctuation" fluctuation element + "high speed fluctuation (short)" fluctuation element + "low speed" It is "8, 9" for the "variation" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element.

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed in any game state, "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "". Fluctuation element of "Slow fluctuation" + Fluctuation element of "Special reach" is 30%, Fluctuation pattern of "High speed fluctuation (long)" + Fluctuation factor of "Slow fluctuation" + "Special reach" 20% of the fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" + "variable element of" re-variation "", "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element of" pseudo-variation "+ variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) " + Fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "special reach" is 30%, fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation factor of "pseudo fluctuation" + fluctuation factor of "high speed fluctuation (short)" The fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" + "variable element of low speed" + variable element of "special reach" + variable element of "re-variation" is set to be selected at a ratio of 20%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode selected at the time of a big hit, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element "or" high-speed fluctuation " (Long) ”variable element +“ Pseudo-variable ”variable element +“ High-speed fluctuation (short) ”variable element +“ Low-speed fluctuation ”variable element +“ Special reach ”variable element” (Both are 30% of the total). In addition, "variable element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable element of" low-speed fluctuation "+ variable element of" special reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "" or "high-speed fluctuation (long)" Fluctuation elements of "variable elements" + "pseudo-variable" variable elements + "high-speed variable (short)" variable elements + "low-speed variable" variable elements + "special reach" variable elements + "re-variable" variable elements " By being configured to be selected individually, it is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit from any fluctuation pattern.

In this way, when a big hit is won, by configuring it so that a relatively long fluctuation pattern can be easily selected, the entertainment of the game is improved by enhancing the production content of the fluctuation production in which the big hit occurs. be able to. In addition, if the jackpot is not won, that is, if there is a loss, by configuring the configuration so that a relatively short fluctuation pattern can be easily selected, the effect content of the variation effect at the time of loss can be shortened and the variation effect can be achieved. It can be digested efficiently.

Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. The random number counter C4 per normal figure is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0 to 99", reaches the maximum value (that is, "99"), and then returns to "0". Further, when the random number counter C4 per normal figure makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the random number counter C4 per normal figure (value = "0 to 99"), and is used for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 40). It is updated once and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 39).

The value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40)), and it is detected that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67. At the timing, it is stored in any of the normal map holding areas 1 to 4 provided in the normal map holding ball storage area (not shown) of the RAM 203. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area (not shown) in the order of being stored in the normal figure holding ball storage area, and the random number counter C4 per normal figure stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area. Collision detection is performed on the value.

The value of the random number that hits the normal symbol is set by the random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 for each game state (for example, 1/100 in the low probability state, high probability). The value of the counter C4 per normal figure stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area (not shown) of the RAM 203 is the hit set by the random number table per normal figure. If it matches the value of the random number, it is determined to be a hit. Then, the variable display time of the normal symbol is set (for example, 30 seconds when the prize assist function is not activated and 3 seconds when the prize assist function is activated) by referring to the normal figure fluctuation table (not shown) according to the game state. Etc.), and after the lapse of the variable display time on the normal symbol display device 83, the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (ordinary symbol). After that, the electric service opening table (not shown) is referred to according to the game state, and the opening time of the normal electric service 64c is set (for example, 0.1 seconds when the winning assist function is not activated, and when the winning assist function is activated). During the opening time, the normal electric service 64c is opened, and during that time, the ball can be awarded to the second starting port 64b.

On the other hand, if the value of the counter C4 per normal figure stored in the normal figure holding area does not match the value of the random number to be a hit set by the random number table per normal figure (not shown), it is determined to be lost. Will be done. Then, the variable display time is set with reference to the normal symbol variation table (not shown) according to the game state, and after the variable display time elapses in the normal symbol display device 83, the stop symbol (ordinary symbol) is set to "x". Is displayed lit.

Returning to FIG. 26, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 27, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and inputs / outputs. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as outputs (Input / Output; hereinafter abbreviated as "I / O") are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 39) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 37) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the power failure signal SG1 is input. The NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 further has at least a first reserved ball number counter 203a, a second reserved ball number counter 203b, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, and a reserved ball execution area 203f.

The first reserved ball number counter 203a enters the first starting port 64a (hereinafter referred to as the first starting) detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) which is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. Dynamic display of the first special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 (on the drum display device 81) based on the entry of the ball into the opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b is sometimes referred to as “starting prize”). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the third symbol (variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol) up to four times.

The first reserved ball number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 37). Then, every time the starting prize to the first starting port 64a is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) related to the first special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (FIG. 41). See S303). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S408 in FIG. 42).

Like the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is a second starting port 64b detected in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) that is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. Number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 (variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed by the drum display device 81) based on the start winning prize. It is a counter that counts (wait count) up to 4 times.

Similar to the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 37). Then, every time the starting prize to the second starting port 64b is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) related to the second special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (FIG. 41). See S307). On the other hand, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed (see S405 in FIG. 42).

The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (that is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is the reserved ball number command. Notifies the voice lamp control device 113 (see S310 in FIG. 41). This hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first hold ball number counter 203a or the second hold ball number counter 203b is incremented by 1. It is a command to be executed, and includes data regarding the value of the first reserved ball count counter 203a and data regarding the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 may acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself in the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command. can. Thereby, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of times of holding the dynamic display (variation effect) of each special symbol can be managed without accessing the main control device 110. Further, each time a start winning is detected, the main control device 110 sends a hold ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113 to dynamically display (variate) each special symbol managed by the voice lamp control device 113. Even if the number of reserved balls in the effect) deviates from the actual number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the next hold to be received is received. The deviation can be corrected by the ball number command.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a hold ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113, the first hold ball number counter 203a or the first hold ball number counter 203a is added by 1 in the hold ball number command. 2 Counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 27) due to the start winning that triggered the addition of not only the value of the reserved ball number counter 203b but also the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b. Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the above is also included.

That is, when there is a start winning, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the main control device 110 is a reserved ball. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by several commands.

In the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation effect of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the hold ball number command is executed. Before the execution of the variable effect, it is determined what will happen to the variable effect (whether it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.). Then, based on the judgment result by the look-ahead, the effect content of the "hold change notice" that decides the execution of various effects and changes the hold symbol (execution symbol) displayed on the hold display unit Db of the drum display device 81. And the execution time (timing) can be determined.

It should be noted that the reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls in the variable effect and the command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like may be configured to be transmitted separately. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like, which is different from the hold ball number command, the hold ball number command is generated at the timing of the ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, and the hold ball number command is generated. It may be configured to generate a command similar to the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command based on the incoming ball (pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) and send them to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, with respect to the program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and the pre-stop type command, the program can be easily created by diverting the program of the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d has a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203c in connection with the detection of the start winning to the first starting port 64a. , It is a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64a in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40), the value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is input from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. In the first holding ball storage area 203d, four holdings are made so that the data corresponding to the start winning of one of the first special symbols (counters C1 to C3, each value of CS1) can be stored (held) up to four times. It has an area (first reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 27).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e includes the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 acquired from the counter buffer 203c in connection with the detection of the start winning prize in the second starting port 64b. , It is a memory for storing each value of the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second starting port 64b in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40), the value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is input from the counter buffer 203c. It is acquired and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. In the second holding ball storage area 203e, four holdings are made so that the data corresponding to the start winning of one of the second special symbols (counters C1 to C3, each value of CS1) can be stored (held) up to four times. It has an area (second reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 27).

As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203f is used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which has started or is being executed, and the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81. It is a memory for storing data (counters C1 to C3, each value of CS1) to be referred to in processing such as setting of variation effect.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first special symbol or the second special symbol jackpot lottery, the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81 are detected. Data (counter C1) corresponding to each start winning prize stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e described above in order to execute processing such as dynamic display and setting of variation effect. When the data corresponding to the start winning prize related to the second special symbol is stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e among the respective values of C3 and CS1), the data corresponding to one start winning prize of the data is stored. , Shift to this reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, the data corresponding to the start winning prize related to the second special symbol is not stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the data corresponding to the starting winning prize related to the first special symbol is stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. If so, the data corresponding to one of the starting prizes of the data is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display (variable effect) relating to the second special symbol is preferentially executed, and the dynamic display (variable effect) relating to the first special symbol relates to the second special symbol. It is configured to be executed on condition that the dynamic display (variable effect) is not held. The shift in the first embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 27 again, the details of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f will be described. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f are dynamically displayed by the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special symbol display device 37, and the drum display device 81. And, it is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to set the variation effect and the like.

As described above, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery is used for setting the dynamic display and the variable effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol jackpot lottery and the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81. , The jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the effect mode of the variation effect, and the variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern are used. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the first starting port 64a (starting winning). The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the second starting port 64b (starting winning).

The first reserved ball storage area 203d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). In each of the four holding areas (first holding first to fourth areas), the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are stored. 203d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

Further, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved ball first to fourth areas) like the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Similar to the first holding ball storage area 203d, the four holding areas (second holding first to fourth areas) have a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 for storing the value of, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter storage area 203e4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. Has been done.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1, 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2, 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3, 203e3, and the variation type counter storage areas 203d4, 203e4 are set to 1. Although they are collectively provided in each of the reserved ball storage areas 203d and 203e, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

As described above, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in any of the first starting ports 64a is stored. Up to 4 times are stored, but in that case, among the vacant areas of the 4 hold areas (1st hold 1st to 4th areas), the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) is ordered first. Data is stored in. That is, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the start winning to the old first starting port 64a is stored, and in the first reserved first area, the oldest first starting port 64a is stored. The data corresponding to the start winning prize will be stored.

Further, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 64b (starting winning) is stored up to four times. However, in that case, the data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 holding areas (2nd holding 1st to 4th areas). To. That is, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the start winning to the second start port 64b, which is older in time, is stored, and in the second reserved first area, the second start port 64b, which is the oldest in time, is stored. The data corresponding to the start winning prize will be stored.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f is composed of only one area. Similar to the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the reserved ball execution area 203f includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2. A jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 for storing values, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203f4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. There is.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. In this case, the data stored in the second reserved first area is shifted to the respective areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f, respectively. On the other hand, in the MPU 201, when the execution start timing of the variation effect is reached, the data is not stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the first of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. When the data is stored in the reserved first area, the data stored in the first reserved first area is shifted to the respective areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f, respectively.

Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f is referred to in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 43), the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data and the game state, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the lottery result is performed. And determine the stop type. In the special symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the drum display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect has been reached, the MPU 201 determines whether or not the data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. As a result of the judgment, when it is determined that the data is stored in the second reserved first area, the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 in the second reserved first area is used as the jackpot random number in the reserved ball execution area 203f. Shift to the counter storage area 203f1. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 in the second reserved first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 in the second reserved first area is changed. The stop pattern selection counter is shifted to the storage area 203f3, and the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203e4 in the second reserved first area is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the data shift to the reserved ball execution area 203f is completed, the second reserved ball first area becomes vacant, so that the data is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. ) Is performed a shift process for packing the data in the area (1st to 3rd) having the smaller area number. In the first embodiment, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the data is shifted only in the second reserved area (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (held).

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the second holding ball storage area 203e will be described. For example, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when the start determination of the variation effect is made is "4", and the data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. It is assumed that it has been done. In this state, when the data in the second reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f and the second reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 has data in other areas (second to fourth). Are shifted to the area (1st to 3rd) which is one smaller than the area number. That is, the data in the second reserved second area is shifted to the second reserved first area, the data in the second reserved third area is shifted to the second reserved second area, and the data in the second reserved fourth area. To the second hold third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when the start determination of the variation effect is made is "2", the MPU 201 uses only the data in the second reserved second area for the second reserved ball. Shifts to one area and ends the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed in the second hold area (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the second holding area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area where the area number is one smaller. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the second holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the data is not stored in the second hold first area of the second hold ball storage area 203e when the execution start timing of the variation effect is reached, the MPU 201 is then held first. It is determined whether or not data is stored in the first reserved first area of the sphere storage area 203d. As a result of the determination, if the data is stored in the first reserved first area, the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved first area is used as the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. Shift to. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 in the first hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 in the first hold first area is changed. The stop pattern selection counter is shifted to the storage area 203f3, and the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203d4 in the first hold first area is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the data shift to the reserved ball execution area 203f is completed, the first reserved ball first area becomes empty, so that the data is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. ) Is performed a shift process for packing the data in the area (1st to 3rd) having the smaller area number. In the first embodiment, the data is shifted only in the first holding area (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (held) in the first holding ball storage area 203d.

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variation effect is made is "4", and the data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. It is assumed that it has been done. In this state, when the data in the first reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f and the first reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 has data in other areas (second to fourth). Are shifted to the area (1st to 3rd) which is one smaller than the area number. That is, the data in the first reserved second area is shifted to the first reserved first area, the data in the first reserved third area is shifted to the first reserved second area, and the data in the first reserved fourth area. To the first hold third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a at the time when the start determination of the variation effect is made is "2", the MPU 201 uses only the data of the first reserved second area to be the first reserved ball. Shifts to one area and ends the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the first hold area (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first holding area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area where the area number is one smaller. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the first holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

Returning to FIG. 26, the description will be continued. The input / output port 205 includes, as an input side, a switch for detecting a ball that has won a prize in each of the winning ports 63, 64a, 64b, 65a and a ball that has been guided to the ball discharging path through the out port 66. Various switches 208 consisting of a group of switches and a group of sensors, a setting key 501 for setting the start-up mode when the power is turned on, and a setting for updating the probability setting value by being pressed during the "setting change mode". The change switch 502 and the RAM erase switch 503 for erasing the data stored in the RAM 203 are connected. Further, various solenoids 209 including a large winning opening solenoid (not shown), a special symbol display device 37, a normal symbol display device 83, and a normal symbol hold lamp 84 are connected to the input / output port 205 as an output side. ing. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208, 502, 503 and the state of the setting key 501.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return destination address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 44) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired at intervals of about 0.6 seconds with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 is an output of voice in a voice output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, a display lamp 34, a confirmation lamp 311, each notification lamp 303a, 305a, front lower side). LED 414c, front right LED 415c, front left LED 416c, rear upper LED 422c, rear lower LED 424, etc.) It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect.

The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like. Details of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 will be described later.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. In the first embodiment, the command is configured to be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in only one direction, and the command cannot be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110. ing. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be capable of transmitting and receiving commands to each other.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage of the effect displayed on the drum display device 81 can be changed or "super". The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the rear image such as the "reach" effect mode, and the content based on the pressing of the frame button 22 is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the drum display device 81. Instruct it to run.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the drum display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the drum display device 81 performs a variation effect of the third symbol and a continuous advance notice effect. It controls.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, and a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure or the like. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 44). The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

Here, a detailed electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113. In ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, in addition to various control programs executed by MPU221, as fixed value data, a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a variation pattern table 222d, and a light guide plate are lit. At least the pattern table 222e, the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f, and the reel control table 222g are stored.

Of these tables 222a to 222g, the tables 222a to 222d are all the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot type table 202b, the stop pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. be.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type, which are acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 and transmitted by the hold ball number command. The look-ahead process can be executed based on each value of the counter CS1 and the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the variation pattern table 222d.

Then, what kind of effect will the pending variable effect that is the target of the look-ahead process be as a result of this look-ahead processing (whether or not it will be a big hit, whether or not it will be a "reach display", etc.). Is determined before the execution of the variable effect, and the effect content (and execution time) of the "hold change notice" that determines the execution of various effects and changes the display mode of the hold symbol displayed on the hold display unit Db. (Timing)) is executed.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 suggests a jackpot probability setting value to the player based on the fluctuation pattern and the probability setting value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110, “setting suggestion effect”. It is configured to draw the execution lottery of the above and the contents (type and timing) of the "setting suggestion effect".

The light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e has a first decorative symbol group 421 of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 based on the propriety of the fluctuation effect, the fluctuation pattern, and the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d described later. , The second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are the tables referred to for determining whether or not to execute and the contents. The details of the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e will be described later.

Further, the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f is referred to for determining the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 during the execution of the variation effect, based on the validity of the variation effect and the value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e described later. It is a table to be done. The details of the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f will be described later.

Further, the reel control table 222g is referred to for determining the drive patterns of the left reel LR, the middle reel CR, the right reel RR, etc. of the drum display device 81 according to the variation pattern and the stop symbol of the variation effect of the third symbol. It is a table to be reeled.

The RAM 223 has a fluctuation start flag 223a, a sub first reserved ball number counter 223b, a sub second reserved ball number counter 223c, a light guide pattern lottery counter 223d, a confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e, a first holding information storage area 223f, and a third. 2 The hold information storage area 223g and the execution information storage area 223h are provided at least.

The variation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the variation effect should be started in the ON state. This fluctuation start flag 223a is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1206 in FIG. 47). Then, it is turned off when the variation effect is set in the drum display device 81 (see S1402 in FIG. 48).

The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 triggers that the variation start flag 223a is turned on, and when there is a standby variation effect, the variation effect setting process for executing the standby variation effect is performed. (See S1402 to S1415 in FIG. 48).

The sub first reserved ball number counter 223b, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, is a variation effect (dynamic) of the first special symbol performed by the drum display device 81 (special symbol display device 37). (Display), which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command (held ball soot command) transmitted from the main control device 110, and the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b displays the reserved balls. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is added by entering the ball into the first starting port 64a, and the number of reserved balls counter 203a in the main control device 110. When a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received when the value is added, the value after addition of the first hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command ( That is, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol held in the main control device 110) is stored in the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1211 in FIG. 47).

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110. And when the stop type command is received and the mode of the variation effect of the first special symbol in the drum display device 81 is set in accordance with the reception, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is subtracted (updated) by 1. (See S1406 in FIG. 48). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b, so that the main control The value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b can be updated while synchronizing with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the device 110.

The sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is a variation effect (dynamic) of the second special symbol performed by the drum display device 81 (special symbol display device 37), similarly to the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. (Display), which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c manages the number of reserved balls. It has become.

Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls for the variation effect of the second special symbol is added by entering the ball into the second starting port 64b, and the number of reserved balls counter 203b in the main control device 110. When a hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received when the value is added, the value after addition of the second hold ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command ( That is, the number of reserved balls for the variation effect of the second special symbol held in the main control device 110) is stored in the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c (see S1211 in FIG. 47).

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b is subtracted in the main control device 110. And when the stop type command is received and the mode of the variation effect of the second special symbol in the drum display device 81 is set in accordance with the reception, the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is subtracted (updated) by 1. (See S1409 in FIG. 48). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the second reserved ball number counter 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c, so that the main control The value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c can be updated while synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the device 110.

The values of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved symbol and the executed symbol in the drum display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c (FIG. FIG. (See S1211 of 47), at the timing of updating the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223b or the sub second reserved ball counter 223c in response to the reception of the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command (S1406 or S1406 in FIG. 48). (Refer to S1409), in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c after storage or updating, the display control device 114 issues a display hold ball number command. Send to.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the sub first hold ball number counter 223b and the sub second hold ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved symbol corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c and the executed symbol indicating the variation effect during execution are displayed on the reserved display unit Db (see FIG. 3) of the drum display device 81.

As described above, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c is changed. The value is changed while synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the reserved display unit Db (see FIG. 3) of the drum display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the first reserved ball number counter 203a and the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. You can change it while letting it change. Therefore, the drum display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variation effect is reserved.

Whether the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d lights and displays the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 in the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. It is a counter used to draw a lottery.

The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on, and then in a counter update process (see S1112 in FIG. 46) of the main process of the voice lamp control device 113, a predetermined range is set. (For example, "0 to 99") is incremented by 1 in order, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, "99" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 99"), it returns to "0". It has become. The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is updated once (for example, 1 addition) for each loop of the main process.

As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command (variation pattern command and display type command) related to the variation effect of the third symbol, the content of the variation effect (for example, correctness, effect mode, variation element, etc.) ), The first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, and the third decorative symbol group 421 in the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 with reference to the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e. Whether or not to display the decorative symbol 412 or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 by lighting is drawn (see FIG. 50).

Here, the details of the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e stored in the ROM 222. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e based on the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d at that time. The lighting mode of the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the front light guide plate 410, or the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the variation effect of each special symbol is classified into a case of “missing” and a case of “big hit”. Then, the divided groups are further divided according to the effect mode, in which the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 or the fourth decorative symbol group 413, or the rear side of the front light guide plate 410 is divided. The values of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d corresponding to the lighting mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 of the light guide plate 420 are assigned respectively.

Specifically, at the time of "loss" of the variable effect, for the "non-reach" effect mode, for the "normal reach" effect mode, for the "super reach" effect mode, and "super reach" effect mode, which can be selected at the time of the "loss". It is divided into groups for "special reach" production mode. Further, at the time of a big hit, it is divided into a group for a "normal reach" production mode, a "super reach" production mode, and a "special reach" production mode. Then, in the divided groups, "foam" indicating the fourth decorative symbol group 413, "sakura" indicating the second decorative symbol group 411, "sunfish" indicating the third decorative symbol 412, the second decorative symbol group 411, and the like. Possible values of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d are associated with each of the lighting symbols of "Sakura & Sunfish" indicating the third decorative symbol 412 and "Fish school" indicating the first decorative symbol group 421.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, in the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of "loss", any of the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 (Hereinafter, the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 may be collectively referred to as "each decorative symbol 411,421,413,421". The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is associated only with "No" that does not light up, and the light guide for "Bubble", "Sakura", "Manbow", "Sakura & Manbow" and "Fish school". The value of the pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned.

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting symbol in the “non-reach” effect mode at the time of “loss” is “0 to 99” with respect to “none”. ing. Since values are not assigned to "bubble", "sakura", "sunfish", "sakura & sunfish", and "fish school", they are described as "-".

That is, when the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of "loss" is selected, the "none" lighting (non-lighting) mode in which none of the decorative symbols 411,421,413,421 is lit and displayed is 100%. It is set to be selected by the ratio, and the lighting mode of "bubble", "cherry blossom", "sunfish", "cherry blossom & sunfish" and "fish school" is set to be selected by the ratio of 0%. ..

Therefore, in the lighting mode of each decorative symbol 411, 421, 413, 421 selected in the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of "loss", the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "none" is completely selected (100%). The other decorative symbols 411,421,413,421 are not lit.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is associated with "none", "bubble", "cherry blossom" and "sunfish" in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "loss". The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned to "Sakura & Sunfish" and "Fish school".

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting symbol in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of “loss” is “0 to 39” and “bubble” with respect to “none”. It is "40-69" for "Sakura", "70-89" for "Sakura", and "90-99" for "Sunfish". Since values are not assigned to "Sakura & Sunfish" and "Fish school", they are written as "-".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "loss" is selected, the lighting mode of "none" is 40%, the lighting mode of "bubble" is 30%, and the lighting mode of "sakura" is. 20%, the lighting mode of "Sunfish" is set to be selected at a rate of 10%, and the lighting mode of "Sakura & Sunfish" and "Fish school" is set to be selected at a rate of 0%. There is.

Therefore, in the lighting mode of each decorative symbol 411, 421, 413, 421 selected in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "loss", the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "none" is easily selected (40%). , "Foam", "Sakura" or "Sunfish" can also be selected.

It should be noted that the lighting mode of "Sakura & Sunfish" and "Fish school" is not selected for the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of "loss" and the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "loss" described later. The value of the optical pattern lottery counter 223d is not associated. This is because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the "cherry blossom & sunfish" or the "fish school" is turned on, the "super reach" production mode or the "special reach" production mode (hereinafter, "special reach" production mode) is used in the variable effect. This is to confirm that the "super reach or higher" effect mode ") is executed. Therefore, in the "non-reach" production mode in which "super reach or higher" does not appear and the "normal reach" production mode, the lighting modes of "Sakura & Sunfish" and "Fish School" are not selected.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is set to "foam", "cherry blossom", "sunfish", "cherry blossom & sunfish" and "fish school" as the "super reach" production mode at the time of "loss". Is associated with the value of, and the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned to "None".

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting symbol in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of “loss” is “0 to 39” for “foam” and “sakura”. "40-69", "70-89" for "Sunfish", "90-97" for "Sakura & Sunfish", and "98,99" for "Fish School". There is. Since no value is assigned to "None", it is expressed as "-".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "loss" is selected, the lighting mode of "bubble" is 40%, the lighting mode of "sakura" is 30%, and the lighting mode of "sunfish" is 20%. The lighting mode of "Sakura & Sunfish" is set to be selected at a rate of 8%, the lighting mode of "Fish school" is selected at a rate of 2%, and the lighting mode of "None" is selected at a rate of 0%. Is set to be done.

Therefore, in the lighting mode of each decorative symbol 411, 421, 413, 421 selected in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "loss", the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "bubble" is easily selected (40%). However, "Sakura", "Sunfish", "Sakura & Sunfish" or "Fish School" can also be selected.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is set to "foam", "cherry blossom", "sunfish", "cherry blossom & sunfish" and "fish school" as the "special reach" production mode at the time of "loss". Is associated with the value of, and the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned to "None".

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting symbol in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of “loss” is “0 to 49” for “foam” and “sakura”. Is "50-79", "Sunfish" is "80-94", "Sakura & Sunfish" is "95-98", and "Fish school" is "99". Since no value is assigned to "None", it is expressed as "-".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "loss" is selected, the lighting mode of "bubble" is 50%, the lighting mode of "sakura" is 30%, and the lighting mode of "sunfish" is 15%. The lighting mode of "Sakura & Sunfish" is set to be selected at a rate of 4%, the lighting mode of "Fish school" is selected at a rate of 1%, and the lighting mode of "None" is selected at a rate of 0%. Is set to be done.

Therefore, in the lighting mode of each decorative symbol 411, 421, 413, 421 selected in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "loss", the lighting (non-lighting) mode of "bubble" is easily selected (50%). However, "Sakura", "Sunfish", "Sakura & Sunfish" or "Fish School" can also be selected.

The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not associated with the "super reach" effect mode and the "special reach" effect mode so that the "none" lighting mode is not selected. This is to confirm that in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the "super reach or higher" effect mode is executed, some effect is executed on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. be. As a result, when the "super reach or higher" effect mode is executed, some effect is always executed on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, and the "reach display" effect and the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate are executed. By combining with the 420 production, the jackpot expectation in the variable production can be suggested to the player in a complex manner.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of "big hit", the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is set to "none", "bubble", "cherry blossom" and "sunfish" as in the case of "loss". Is associated with the value of, and the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned to "Sakura & Sunfish" and "Fish school".

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting symbol in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of “big hit” is “0 to 9” and “bubble” with respect to “none”. It is "10-29" for "Sakura", "30-59" for "Sakura", and "60-99" for "Sunfish". Since values are not assigned to "Sakura & Sunfish" and "Fish school", they are written as "-".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is selected, the lighting mode of "none" is 10%, the lighting mode of "bubble" is 20%, and the lighting mode of "sakura" is. 30%, the lighting mode of "Sunfish" is set to be selected at a rate of 40%, and the lighting mode of "Sakura & Sunfish" and "Fish school" is set to be selected at a rate of 0%. There is.

Therefore, in the lighting mode of each decorative symbol 411,421,413,421 selected in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit", the lighting mode of "sunfish" is easily selected (40%), but "none". , "Foam", "Sakura" or "Sunfish" can also be selected.

It should be noted that the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not associated with the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" so that the lighting mode of "sakura & sunfish" and "fish school" is not selected. This is because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the "cherry blossom & sunfish" or the "fish school" is turned on, the "super reach" production mode or the "special reach" production mode (hereinafter, "special reach" production mode) is used in the variable effect. This is to confirm that the "super reach or higher" effect mode ") is executed. Therefore, even if a big hit occurs, the lighting mode of "Sakura & Sunfish" and "Fish school" is not selected in the "Normal reach" production mode at the time of "Big hit" where "Super reach or higher" does not appear. ing.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the "super reach" production mode at the time of "big hit" is the same as at the time of "loss", "bubble", "cherry blossom", "sunfish", "cherry blossom & manbow" and "fish school". The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is associated with the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d, and the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned to "None".

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting symbol in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of “big hit” is “0,1” for “bubble” and “sakura”. Is "2-9", "10-19" is for "Sunfish", "20-49" is for "Sakura & Sunfish", and "50-99" is for "Fish School". There is. Since no value is assigned to "None", it is expressed as "-".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is selected, the lighting mode of "bubble" is 2%, the lighting mode of "sakura" is 8%, and the lighting mode of "sunfish" is 10%. The lighting mode of "Sakura & Sunfish" is set to be selected at a rate of 30%, the lighting mode of "Fish school" is selected at a rate of 50%, and the lighting mode of "None" is selected at a rate of 0%. Is set to be done.

Therefore, in the lighting mode of each decorative symbol 411,421,413,421 selected in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit", the lighting mode of "fish school" is easily selected (50%), but "foam". , "Sakura", "Sunfish" or "Sakura & Sunfish" can also be selected.

In the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e, the "special reach" production mode at the time of "big hit" is the same as at the time of "loss", "bubble", "cherry", "sunfish", "cherry & sunfish" and "fish school". The value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is associated with the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d, and the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d is not assigned to "None".

In the example shown in FIG. 34, the correspondence between the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the lighting symbol in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of “big hit” is “0 to 4” for “foam” and “sakura”. Is "5-19", "Sunfish" is "20-39", "Sakura & Sunfish" is "40-59", and "Fish school" is "60-99". There is. Since no value is assigned to "None", it is expressed as "-".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is selected, the lighting mode of "bubble" is 5%, the lighting mode of "sakura" is 15%, and the lighting mode of "sunfish" is 20%. The lighting mode of "Sakura & Sunfish" is set to be selected at a rate of 20%, the lighting mode of "Fish school" is selected at a rate of 40%, and the lighting mode of "None" is selected at a rate of 0%. Is set to be done.

Therefore, in the lighting mode of each decorative symbol 411,421,413,421 selected in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit", the lighting mode of "fish school" is easily selected (40%), but "foam". , "Sakura", "Sunfish" or "Sakura & Sunfish" can also be selected.

In this way, by combining the effect of the "reach display" and the effect of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420, the jackpot expectation degree in the variable effect can be complexly suggested to the player, and a plurality of them can be suggested. By executing a variable effect on the effect device, it is possible to enrich the variation of the effect and improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 33, the description will be continued. The confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e is a counter used for drawing the lighting presence / absence and lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 in the variation effect of the third symbol.

The value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on, and then in a counter update process (see S1112 in FIG. 46) of the main process of the voice lamp control device 113, a predetermined range is set. (For example, "0 to 99") is incremented by 1 in order, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, "99" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 99"), it returns to "0". It has become. The value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e is updated once (for example, 1 addition) every time the main process loops once.

As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command (variation pattern command and display type command) related to the variation effect of the third symbol, the content of the variation effect (for example, correctness, effect mode, variation element, etc.) ), The confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e and the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f are referred to, and the presence / absence of lighting and the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 in the variation effect are drawn (see FIG. 49).

Here, with reference to FIG. 35, the details of the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f stored in the ROM 222. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110 and a "big hit" occurs in the fluctuation effect, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e at that time. Based on this, the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 is determined with reference to the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f. In the first embodiment, when the variation effect is lost, the confirmation lamp 311 is configured not to light at any timing, while when the jackpot is won in the variation effect, any timing in the variation effect. The confirmation lamp 311 is configured to always light up. Even if the jackpot is won, there may be a pattern in which the confirmation lamp 311 is not turned on.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the variation effect of each special symbol is classified into a case of “missing” and a case of “big hit”. Then, the divided groups are further divided according to the production mode, and in that, the timing of "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation" in which the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is being executed, "pseudo-variation" From the variable element of "normal reach" to the variable element of "normal reach", the timing of "from reach formation to before development", the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" The value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e corresponding to the timing of "after development-before re-variation" during execution, the timing of "re-variation-confirmation" during execution of the variable element of "re-variation" or at the time of symbol confirmation. Are assigned to each.

Specifically, at the time of a big hit, it is divided into a group for a "normal reach" production mode, a "super reach" production mode, and a "special reach" production mode. Then, in the divided groups, for each lighting timing of "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation", "from reach formation to before development", "after development to before re-variation", and "re-variation to confirmation". Possible values of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e are associated with each other. Since the confirmation lamp 311 is configured so that it cannot be turned on during the "loss" of the variable effect, the lighting timing "none" is used for all the effect modes that can be selected at the time of the "loss". All possible values of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e are associated with each other.

In the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e is associated only with "revariation-confirmation" in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit", and "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation". , "Reach formation-before development", and "after development-before re-variation", the value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e is not assigned.

In the example shown in FIG. 35, the correspondence between the value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e and the lighting timing in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of “big hit” is “0 to 99” for “revariation to confirmation”. It has become. Since values are not assigned to "start of fluctuation to end of high-speed fluctuation", "reach formation to before development", and "after development to before re-variation", they are expressed as "-".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is selected, the lighting timing of "re-variation-confirmed", which is just before the end of the variation effect, is set to be selected at a ratio of 100%. , "From the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation", "From reach formation to before development" and "After development to before re-variation" lighting timing is set to be selected at a ratio of 0%. Has been done.

Therefore, in the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 selected in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit", the lighting timing of "revariation-confirmation" is completely selected (100%), and in other lighting timings. The confirmation lamp 311 is set not to be turned on.

In the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" includes "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation", "from reach formation to before development", "after development to before re-variation", and The value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e is associated with "revariation-confirmation".

In the example shown in FIG. 35, the correspondence between the value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e and the lighting timing in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of “big hit” is “0” with respect to “from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation”. ~ 9 ”,“ 10-29 ”for“ reach formation-before development ”,“ 30-59 ”for“ after development-before re-variation ”,“ 60-29 ”for“ re-variation-confirmed ” It is 99 ".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is selected, the lighting timing of "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation" is 10%, and the lighting timing of "from reach formation to before development" is 20%. , The lighting timing of "after development-before re-variation" is set to be selected at a ratio of 30%, and the lighting timing of "re-variation-confirmed" is set to be selected at a ratio of 40%.

Therefore, in the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 selected in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit", the lighting timing of "re-variation-confirmed" which is the last part of the variation effect is easily selected (40%). However, "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation", "from reach formation to before development", or "after development to before re-variation" can also be selected.

In the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f, the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" includes "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation", "from reach formation to before development", "after development to before re-variation", and The value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e is associated with "revariation-confirmation".

In the example shown in FIG. 35, the correspondence between the value of the fixed lamp timing lottery counter 223e and the lighting timing in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of “big hit” is “0” with respect to “from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation”. ~ 19 "," 20-39 "for" reach formation-before development "," 40-69 "for" after development-before re-change "," 70-69 "for" re-change-confirmed " It is 99 ".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit" is selected, the lighting timing of "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation" is 20%, and the lighting timing of "from reach formation to before development" is 20%. , The lighting timing of "after development-before re-variation" is set to be selected at a ratio of 30%, and the lighting timing of "re-variation-confirmed" is selected at a ratio of 30%.

Therefore, in the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 selected in the "special reach" effect mode at the time of "big hit", the lighting timing of "after development-before re-variation" or "re-variation-confirmed" which is the latter half of the variation effect. Is easy to select (30%), but "from the start of fluctuation to the end of high-speed fluctuation" or "from the formation of reach to before development", which is the first half of the fluctuation production, is also configured to be easier to select than the "super reach" production mode. Will be done.

In this way, when the jackpot is won in the variable production, the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on at various timings to suggest to the player that the jackpot will occur, thereby creating an unexpected game and playing the game. It is possible to improve the interest.

Further, the lottery for lighting the confirmation lamp 311 and the lottery for lighting the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are performed separately. Therefore, according to each lottery result, the pattern in which the confirmation lamp 311 is lit and the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is lit, is the confirmation lamp. A pattern in which 311 and the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are both lit, the confirmation lamp 311 is not lit and the first decorative symbol group 421, It is configured so that there is a pattern in which the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is lit. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily calculate the jackpot expectation degree for each effect and facilitate the design of the game specifications.

Returning to FIG. 33, the description will be continued. The first reserved information storage area 223f is information for performing a fluctuation effect of the first special symbol on hold, that is, is acquired from the counter buffer 203c with the start winning in the main control device 110, and is a hold ball number command. This is an area for storing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 related to the variation effect of the first special symbol transmitted by.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first hold information storage area 223f and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to change the first special symbol. It is configured to perform the production.

The second reserved information storage area 223 g is information for performing a fluctuation effect of the second special symbol on hold, that is, is acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 with a start winning prize, and is a hold ball number command. This is an area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 related to the variation effect of the second separate symbol transmitted by.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second hold information storage area 223g and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to change the second special symbol. It is configured to perform the production.

The execution information storage area 223h is acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 with the start winning, and is held. It is an area for storing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the ball number command.

When the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, the above-mentioned first hold information storage is performed in order to execute the setting of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Information for performing a variation effect stored in the first reserved information storage first area of the area 223f or the second reserved information storage second area of the second reserved information storage area 223g (counters C1 to C3, CS1 and the like). Each value of) is shifted to this execution information storage area 223h.

Here, with reference to FIG. 36, the details of the first reserved information storage area 223f, the second reserved information storage area 223g, and the execution information storage area 223h will be described. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configurations of the first reserved information storage area 223f, the second reserved information storage area 223g, and the execution information storage area 223h.

The first reserved information storage area 223f has four areas of the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas. In each of the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4, the jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored and the jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored, respectively. At least 223f2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223f4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored are provided.

Further, the second reserved information storage area 223g has four areas of the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas, similarly to the first reserved information storage area 223f. In each of the second hold information storage first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter storage area 223g1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored and the jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored, respectively. At least 223 g2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223 g3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variable type counter storage area 223 g4 in which the value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored are provided.

Further, in the execution information storage area 223h, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223h1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being executed is stored, and a jackpot type counter. The jackpot type counter storage area 223h2 in which the value of C2 is stored, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223h3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and the variation type counter storage area in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored. At least 223h4 is provided.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223h is an area corresponding to the variable effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being executed. Further, the first reserved information storage first area is an area corresponding to the first reserved variable effect of the first special symbol among the reserved variable effects of the first special symbol, and is the first reserved area. The information storage second area is an area corresponding to the second oldest reserved first special symbol variation effect among the reserved first special symbol variation effects, and the first reserved information storage third area. The area is the area corresponding to the first special symbol variation effect that has been reserved for the third oldest time among the reserved first special symbol variation effects, and the first hold information storage fourth area is reserved. This is the area corresponding to the variational effect of the first special symbol, which is the fourth oldest reserved in terms of time, among the variable effects of the first special symbol. Further, the second reserved information storage first area is an area corresponding to the second special symbol variation effect that is first reserved in time among the reserved second special symbol variation effects, and is the second reserved area. The information storage second area is an area corresponding to the second special symbol variation effect, which is the second oldest in time among the reserved second special symbol variation effects, and is the second reserved information storage third area. The area is the area corresponding to the second special symbol variation effect that has been reserved for the third oldest time among the reserved second special symbol variation effects, and the second hold information storage fourth area is reserved. This is the area corresponding to the second special symbol variation effect, which is the fourth oldest in time among the variation effects of the second special symbol.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 includes the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 and the corresponding special symbols. Is extracted from the reserved ball count command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the extracted values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the corresponding first reserved information storage first to fourth areas or the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas, respectively. Jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1,223g1, jackpot type counter storage area 223f2,223g2, stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3,223g3, variable type counter storage area 223f4 in the area corresponding to the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command. , 223 g4.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4) and corresponds to the first special symbol, the first special held at that time is held. The number of fluctuation effects of the symbol is X, and the values of the counters C1 to C3, CS1 included in the reserved ball number command are held at the Xth position in time among the reserved first special symbol variation effects. Since it corresponds to the variation effect of the first special symbol, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the counter storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 in the first hold information storage X area are stored. At this time, the main control device 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the hold ball number command in the first hold X area of the first hold ball storage area 203d. That is, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved X area of the main control device 110 are stored in the first reserved information storage X area.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command indicating the start of the fluctuation effect from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 is stored in the first hold information storage area 223f or the second hold information storage area 223g. The process of shifting the received information to the execution information storage area 223h is executed. That is, when the reserved information regarding the second special symbol exists, the execution of the variation effect of the second special symbol reserved first in time is started, so that the second special symbol reserved first is started. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second reserved information storage 1st area corresponding to the variation effect of the current execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the variation effect currently being executed. It is moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of. On the other hand, when the reserved information regarding the second special symbol does not exist and only the reserved information regarding the first special symbol exists, the execution of the variation effect of the first special symbol reserved first in time is started. Therefore, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first reserved information storage 1st area corresponding to the variation effect of the first reserved first special symbol are currently set. It is moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the variation effect during execution.

Further, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second hold information storage 1st area are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second hold information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second hold information storage first area, and the second is 2 The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second holding information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second holding information storage second area, and the second The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the hold information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second hold information storage third area.

Further, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first hold information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the execution information storage area 223h, The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first hold information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first hold information storage first area, and the first is 1 The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the holding information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first holding information storage second area, and the first The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the hold information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first hold information storage third area.

As a result, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223h. Further, in the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas and the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas, respectively, the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the main control device 110 is the first reserved first to first. The same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the 4 areas and the 2nd reserved 1st to 4th areas of the 2nd reserved ball storage area 203e are stored. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol being executed and suspended by the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area. It is stored in the 223h, the first reserved information storage area 223f, and the second reserved information storage area 223g.

In the voice lamp control device 113, the first special symbol and the second special symbol reserved from the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c when the look-ahead processing (not shown) is performed. Grasp the number of variable effects (number of reserved balls). Then, based on the number of reserved balls, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol among the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas and the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas is suspended. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the area are pre-read, and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect is a big hit, the fluctuation time and the like. For example, if the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223b is "1" and the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223c is "0", the number of reserved balls in the variation effect of the first special symbol is Since the number of reserved balls for the variation effect of the second special symbol is 0 times, the values of the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are pre-read and determined for the first reserved information storage first area. I do. If the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223b is "0" and the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223c is "4", the number of reserved balls in the variation effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 0 times and the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the 2nd special symbol is 4 times, the values of the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are pre-read and determined for the 4th area for storing the 2nd reserved information. I do.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in only one direction, and the voice lamp control device 113 accesses RAM 203 or the like of the main control device 110. Can't. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a first hold information storage area 223f and a second hold information storage area 223g, and changes in the first special symbol and the second special symbol held by the main control device 110. Since the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the effect are also stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first hold information storage area 223f and the second hold information storage area 223g are also stored. By referring to, the look-ahead process can be executed by the voice lamp control device 113. That is, what happens to the result of the variable effect of the reserved first special symbol and / and the second special symbol when the variable effect is executed (whether or not it becomes a big hit, what happens to the variable time). Etc.) can be determined before the execution of the variable effect to determine the execution of various effects.

The shift process described above in the first hold information storage area 223f or the second hold information storage area 223g and the execution information storage area 223h is the number of hold balls (variation pattern) when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received. The first to fourth areas for storing the first hold information based on the values of the sub first hold ball count counter 223b and the sub second hold ball count counter 223c before the update based on the reception of the command and the stop type command is performed. The data is moved (shifted) only in the areas corresponding to the reserved variable effects among the first to fourth areas for storing the second reserved information.

For example, the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223b before the update when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received is "4", and the entire area of the first reserved information storage area 223f (first reserved information storage). It is assumed that the data is stored in the 1st to 4th areas). In this case, the data in the first hold information storage area 1 is shifted to the execution information storage area 223h, the data in the second hold information storage second area is shifted to the first hold information storage first area, and the first hold information is stored. The data in the storage third area is shifted to the first hold information storage second area, and the data in the first hold information storage fourth area is shifted to the first hold information storage third area.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub 1st reserved ball count counter 223b before the update when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received is "2", the data in the 1st reserved information storage 1st area is executed in the information storage area. It shifts to 223h, shifts the data in the first reserved information storage second area to the first reserved information storage first area, and ends the data shift. As described above, in the present embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the first hold information storage third and fourth areas where the fluctuation effect is not held, so that the number of data shifts can be reduced. , The control burden can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas or the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas is stored in an area where the area number is one smaller (execution information storage area 223h or. It may be configured to shift to the first reserved information storage first to third areas or the second reserved information storage first to third areas), respectively. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in each of the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas or the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas. Therefore, it is possible to easily create a program.

Returning to FIG. 33, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 47) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the drum display device 81, and controls the variation effect and the continuous advance notice effect of the special symbol on the drum display device 81 based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113. Alternatively, lighting control of various lamps 311 and the like in the lamp display device 227 is executed during the execution of the variation effect, and further, audio output control from the audio output device 226 is executed according to the progress of the variation effect. ..

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 37 to 44. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There is a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

In this start-up process, first, the initial value setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S101). For example, the access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as voice lamp control device 113, payout control device 111, etc.) to be in an operable state, weight processing (“1 second” in this embodiment). Is executed (S102). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 (see FIG. 26) provided in the main control device 110 is turned on (S104). As a result of the determination, if the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If it is not stored (S105: No), there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally. In this case, the processing is shifted to S116 in order to initialize the RAM 203. do.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S116.

As will be described later in the process of S156 in FIG. 39, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S109).

When it is determined in the process of S109 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S109: Yes), the RAM erase switch 503: is turned off and the setting key 501: is turned on when the power is turned on, so that the user stands up. In order to start the raising mode in the "setting confirmation mode", first, the probability setting value is started to be displayed on the probability display device (not shown) (S110), and then it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off. (S111), the "setting confirmation mode" is maintained until the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: No). On the other hand, when the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: Yes), the display of the probability setting value in the probability display device is terminated (S112), the "setting confirmation mode" is terminated, and the process is shifted to S113. .. If the setting key 501 is not turned on in the processing of S109 (S109: No), the processing of S110 to S112 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S113 in order to start the startup mode in the "normal mode". do.

In the process of S113, a set value command is generated based on the probability set value, set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S113), and then interrupt is permitted (S114). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 39) described later.

The set value command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S201 of FIG. 40) of the timer interrupt process described later. Upon receiving this set value command, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to store (store) the probability set value indicated by the set value command in the memory provided in the RAM 223 for storing the probability set value.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S104 that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S104: Yes), it is determined whether to start the startup mode in the "RAM clear mode" or the "setting change mode". In order to determine, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S115).

If it is determined in the process of S115 that the setting key 501 is not turned on (S115: No), the process is shifted to S116 in order to set the start mode to the "RAM clear mode".

In the process of S116, the initialization process (S116, S117) of the RAM 203 is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on regardless of the setting change, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 503. To. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S116, S117) is executed. Similarly, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set (S105: No) or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) (S107: No), the initial RAM 203 is also performed. The conversion process (S116, S117) is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116, S117), that is, in the "RAM clear mode", the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S116), and then the initial value (for example, the first reserved ball count counter 203a) is set in the RAM 203. "0" clear, etc.) is set (S117). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S113.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S115 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S115: Yes), the setting change process is performed so that the start-up mode is set to the "setting change mode" (S118).

Here, the setting change process (S118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this setting change process (S118). This setting change process (S118) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the "setting change mode", and is to accept and confirm the change (update) of the probability setting value from the hall related persons and the like. It is the processing of.

In this setting change process (S118), first, the probability display device (not shown) sets the start of display of the current probability set value (S121), and the process shifts to S122. By the start setting of the display of the probability set value, the display of the probability set value is started on the probability display device.

The probability setting value displayed here may not be the probability setting value set before the power is turned off, but may be fixed to a specific value without fail. That is, when the start-up mode is set to the "setting change mode", the probability display device may always start the display with a specific probability setting value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting value ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "3" which is an intermediate value of the probability setting value. It may be "4" or "6" which is the maximum value of the probability set value. As a result, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off, the hall personnel and the like can change the probability setting value from the specific probability setting value.

On the other hand, when the start-up mode is set to the "setting change mode", the probability display device may start displaying the probability setting value set before the power is turned off. As a result, the hall personnel and the like can change the probability setting value while considering the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off.

Further, when the start-up mode is set to the "setting change mode", if the probability setting value set in the probability display device before the power is turned off is "3" or more, the probability setting value is set to "3". If the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is less than "3", the display is started with the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. You may do so. For example, when the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high, such as "5" or "6", there may be many cases where the probability setting value is to be slightly reduced (for example, by 1). In such a case, if the display of the probability set value is started with the probability set value set before the power is turned off as it is, the following problem occurs. That is, the update of the probability set value is incremented by 1 each time the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on, and when the probability set value is "6" and the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on, the probability set value is set to "". It is done by returning to "1". Therefore, for example, when it is desired to change the probability set value from "6" to "5", it is necessary to make almost one round of the probability set value while repeatedly turning on the RAM erase switch 503. On the other hand, when the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high, by starting the display of the probability setting value at "3", the probability setting is performed while suppressing the number of times the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. You can update the value.

Next, in the process of S122, it is determined whether or not the probability set value is in the range of "1" to "6" (S122), and it is not within the predetermined range, that is, an abnormal probability set value is obtained. If so (S122: No), the probability setting value is changed to the initial value (S123), and the process proceeds to S124. The initial value may be "1", which is the minimum value of the probability set values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "4", which is an intermediate value of the probability set values. It may be "6" which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "6" as a result of the processing of S122 (S122: Yes), the probability setting value is a normal value, so that the processing of S123 Is skipped and the process proceeds to S124.

In the process of S124, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S124: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125).

As a result of S125, if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is not turned on (S125: No), the process returns to S122, while if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125: Yes), the probability The set value is updated (S126), and the process returns to S122.

To update the probability setting value, which is the process of S126, if the probability setting value up to that point is "1" to "5", 1 is added to the probability setting value, and the probability setting value up to that point is "6". If it is, it is performed by returning the probability set value to "1". The probability set value updated by the process of S126 is displayed on the probability display device.

The loop processing of S122 → S123 → S124: No → S125 (and S126) → S122 continues to be executed until it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on in the processing of S124 (S124: Yes). Then, when it is determined by the process of S124 that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124: Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the probability display device 504 is used as the probability setting value to be used in the future game. (S127), and the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the probability set value is set (S128).

After the processing of S128, it is nextly determined whether or not the setting key 501 is in the off state (S129). In the process of S129, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the on state to the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state, and the setting key 501 may be determined. By detecting that the level of the signal output from is in the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state.

As a result of the processing of S129, while it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S129: No), the processing of S129 is repeatedly executed. Then, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned off as a result of the processing of S129 (S129: Yes), the end of the display of the probability setting value in the probability display device is set (S130), and this setting change processing is performed. (S118) is terminated.

After the setting change process is completed, the process returns to the start-up process (see FIG. 37), the process is transferred to S116, the RAM 203 initialization process is executed (S116, S117), and the data in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared). .. In this way, in the process of S124, by turning on the RAM erase switch 503 to the hall related person or the like to determine the probability set value, the hall related person or the like strongly recognizes that the data of the RAM 203 is subsequently erased. Can be made to.

Further, in the process of S124, the probability set value is determined by the ON detection of the RAM erase switch 503, but the probability set value may be determined by the OFF detection of the setting key 501.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power cutoff process are roughly executed.

In the main process, first, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S151). If the information on the occurrence of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S151: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S152, S153).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S152). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and the counter value reaches the maximum value (“9999”, “99” in this embodiment), Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S207 (see FIG. 40) of the timer interrupt processing described later (S153), and the process proceeds to the processing of S151.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), which will be described later, is started and executed at predetermined time intervals (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during the big hit, the execution of controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening 65a is performed, and if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the display control of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 83 is performed. Further, in the jackpot lottery executed when the variable display on the special symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether it is in the high probability state or the low probability state. come. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant and changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The above-mentioned processes S152 and S153, which are one of the main processes, are executed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, since the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number are used. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the initial value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated at random. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the jackpot random number counter C1 and the normal number random number counter C4 that use these as the initial value of the update can be updated. It can have randomness.

In the process of S151, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S151: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. Since the NMI interrupt processing described later is executed in FIG. 44, the processing at the time of power cutoff after S154 is executed.

In the processing of S154, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited (S154), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to another control device (a peripheral control device such as a payout control device 111 or a voice lamp control device 113). ) (S155). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S156), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S157), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S151 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S152 and S153, which is performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), ends. As a result, in the main processing of the main control device 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing are completed, and the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when the update of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is completed. .. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process can be started from the process of S151 after the start-up process is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S151 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is set in the initial setting process (S101). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S151. As a result, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S201). In the timer interrupt process and the main process (see FIG. 39), commands or signals to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the hall computer (not shown), etc. are generated based on various processes. When a command is generated, it is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and when a signal is generated, a device corresponding to the signal (for example, a hall computer and a pachinko machine 10 are connected). Outputs a signal to an external output terminal board (not shown) for the purpose. In the external output process of S201, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side, and the signal is output to various devices.

After the processing of S201, next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S202), and then the hitting process for executing the processing at the time of hitting each special symbol is executed (s). S203).

After S203, next, the ordinary electric service control process for executing the drive control process of the ordinary electric service 64c is executed (S204). Briefly, on the condition that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display of the normal symbol, and as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol, the winning symbol of the normal symbol (for example, " When the "○" symbol) appears and becomes a hit state, the normal electric service 64c is opened for a predetermined time, while when the normal symbol lost symbol (for example, the "x" symbol) appears, the normal electric service 64c is displayed. Keep closed.

After the processing of S204, the reading processing of various winning switches is then executed (S205). That is, the state of various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110 is read, and the state of the switch 208 is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the prize detection information is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203. As a result, a predetermined prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S206). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“9999” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0”. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“99” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0” and the second initial value is cleared. The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the normal figure per random number counter C4 are updated (S207). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the random number counter C4 per normal figure are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (first implementation). In the form, when it reaches "9999", "99", "99", "9", "99", respectively, it is cleared to "0", respectively. When the jackpot random number counter C1 or the random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the random number per normal figure. It is read as the initial value of the counter C4, and the initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal number per figure counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Next, the start winning process associated with winning the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b is executed (S208). The details of this start winning process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

Next, a gate passing process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is executed (S209). When it is determined in the gate passage process (S209) that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 per normal figure is acquired from the counter buffer 203c, and the value of the counter C4 per normal figure is the normal figure. It is stored in the holding ball storage area (not shown), and the holding number of the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol holding lamp 84.

After the gate passage process (S209) is executed, a process for dynamically displaying the special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 and a third process by the drum display device 81 based on the process content of the start winning process (S208). The special figure variation process for setting the symbol variation pattern and the like is executed (S210). The details of the special figure variation processing (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

Next, it is a setting process for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct or not based on the processing content of the gate passing process (S209), and for performing variable display of the normal symbol based on the determination result on the normal symbol display device 83. Figure variation processing is executed (S211). In this normal map variation processing (S211), the hit probability of a normal symbol is performed with either a high probability (for example, 9/10) or a low probability (1/10). Then, the normal symbol is variably displayed based on the hit / fail result, and the display result according to the hit / fail result is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83.

After executing the normal figure fluctuation process (S211), the launch control process is executed (S212), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S213), and this timer interrupt process is terminated. ..

The launch control process (S212) is provided on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining whether to turn on / off the firing of a ball. Then, when the ball launch is on, the information of the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process executed next.

Further, in the present embodiment, the process to be executed periodically is executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40), and in the main process, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated in the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. Although the case of performing the timer interrupt processing has been described, a part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) in the main processing. .. For example, the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal reading process (S202), the hit process (S203), the ordinary electric service control process (S204), and the switch read process (S205), which were executed in the timer interrupt process in the present embodiment. ) May be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed is provided in the main process, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process to be executed every predetermined time is executed, and each of them is executed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals, but the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed according to the state of the game. Since the time required for the operation changes, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated at random even in such a configuration.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41, a start winning process (S208), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S208).

The start winning process (S208) determines whether or not the ball has won the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, and if there is a winning, the winning value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 is won. The process of storing (holding) in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the mouths 64a and 64b is executed. Further, a process for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

In this start winning process (S208), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting opening 64a (S301). Here, based on the output signal of the special figure 1 entry port switch (not shown) for detecting the entry (winning) into the first start port 64a, which was read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 40). , The entry into the first starting port 64a is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 40).

When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64a (there was a starting winning prize) (S301: Yes), then the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the first held in the main control device 110). 1 It is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation of the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol N1) is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the first embodiment) (S302). Then, even if there is a prize in the first start opening 64a, if the number of operation pending balls N1 <4 (S302: No), this start prize process (S208) is terminated and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). Return to.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls N1 <4 (S302: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (number of reserved balls N1) is added by 1 (S303). Then, since it is a prize to the first starting port 64a corresponding to the first special symbol this time, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination of each random number values C1 to C3 and CS1 (S304) and processed. To S309.

In the process of S301, when it is determined that the ball has not won the first starting port 64a (S301: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second starting port 64b (starting winning). (S305). Here, as in the case of the first start port 64a, the special figure 2 entry port switch (shown) for detecting the entry (winning) into the second start opening 64b read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 40). Based on the output signal of (1), the ball entering the second starting port 64b is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 40).

When it is determined that the ball has won a prize in the second starting port 64b (there was a starting prize) (S305: Yes), then the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (holding in the main control device 110). 2 It is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation of the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol N2) is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the first embodiment) (S306). Then, if there is no winning in the second starting port 64b (S305: No), or if there is a winning in the second starting port 64b but the number of pending balls N2 <4 (S306: No), this The start winning process (S208) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls N2 <4 (S306: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (number of reserved balls N2) is added by 1 (S307). Then, since it is a prize to the second starting port 64b corresponding to the second special symbol this time, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination of each random number values C1 to C3 and CS1 (S308) and processed. To S309.

In the process of S309, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 27) and set as the storage destination in S304 or S308. Of the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the first reserved ball storage area 203e provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the first reserved ball storage area 203d When specified as the storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, and the variation type counter in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball number counter 203a. Each is held (stored) in the storage area 203d4 (S309). When the second reserved ball storage area 203e is designated as the storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 and the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball counter 203b are stopped. It is held (stored) in the pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 and the variation type counter storage area 203e4, respectively (S309).

Specifically, for example, in the processing of S304 based on the winning of the first starting port 64a, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination, and the first reserved ball number counter after addition by the processing of S303. If the value of 203a is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the first reserved first area. If the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "2", the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reserved second area. If there is, the counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the first reserved third area, and if the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "4", the counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the first reserved fourth area. , The value of CS1 is reserved.

Further, for example, in the processing of S308 based on the winning of the second starting port 64b, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination, and the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b after the addition by the processing of S307. If is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved first area. If the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reserved second area. If there is, counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the second reserved third area, and if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "4", counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the second reserved fourth area. , The value of CS1 is reserved.

Next, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b after the addition by the processing of S303 or S307 (the number of operating reserved balls N1 or the number of operating reserved balls N2) and the first by the processing of S309. Voice the hold ball number command including each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored (held) in the hold ball storage area 203d or the second hold ball storage area 203e. In order to transmit to the lamp control device 113, the reserved ball number command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S310). As a result, the hold ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 40) that is executed next. When the process of S310 is completed, the start winning process (S208) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

As the value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the hold ball number command in the processing of S310, the value itself read from the counter buffer 203c in the processing of S309 may be used, or the first holding in the processing of S309. The value stored (held) in the ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e may be read out.

Further, in the processing of S301 and S305, when a ball wins at the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b at the same time, the winning processing of the ball to the first starting port 64a is preferentially executed and the second starting is performed. Wait for the ball winning process to enter the mouth 64b, and execute the ball winning process to the waiting second starting port 64b in the start winning process (S208) in the next timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). It may be configured as.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the special figure variation processing (S210), which is one of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this special figure variation processing (S210).

This special symbol variation processing (S210) controls the dynamic display in the special symbol display device 37 regarding the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the variation effect performed by the drum display device 81.

In this special symbol variation processing (S210), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is currently a big hit (S401). The jackpot is during the jackpot game displayed on the drum display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, during the predetermined time before the start of the jackpot game (that is, the jackpot opening), and the jackpot game. It includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end (that is, the jackpot ending). As a result of the determination in S401, if any of the special symbols is in the jackpot (S401: Yes), the special figure fluctuation process (S210) is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

In the process of S401, if it is determined that the jackpot is not hit (S401: No), then it is determined whether or not the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is dynamically displaying (S402), and the special symbol is displayed. If the display mode of the display device 37 is not during dynamic display (S402: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 is stopped (S403). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed after the dynamic display is stopped (S403: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). As a result, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (variation effect) is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S403, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display is stopped (S403: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b (the second special reserved in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for operation (N2) of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the symbol is larger than “0” (S404). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operation reserved ball number N2) is not "0" (S404: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the second special symbol. First, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operation reserved ball number N2) is subtracted by 1 (S405). This is because the execution of the dynamic display (variation effect) of one of the pending dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the second special symbol is started by the variation start process (S410) described later. This is because the number of reserved balls related to the special symbol is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is shifted (S406). This data shift process (S406) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e toward the reserved ball execution area 203f. 2 Hold 1st area → Hold ball execution area 203f, 2nd hold 2nd area → 2nd hold 1st area, 2nd hold 3rd area → 2nd hold 2nd area, 2nd hold 4th area → 2nd hold The data in each area is shifted, such as in the third area.

On the other hand, in the process of S404, when it is determined that the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operation reserved ball number N2) is "0" (S404: No), then the first reserved ball number counter 203a (S407), it is determined whether or not the value of (the number of operation-holding balls N1 of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the first special symbol held in the main control device 110) is larger than "0". As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operation reserved ball number N1) is not "0" (S407: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the first special symbol. First, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operating reserved ball number N1) is subtracted by 1 (S408). This is because the variable start processing (S410), which will be described later, starts the execution of the dynamic display (variable effect) of one of the reserved dynamic displays (variable effect) related to the first special symbol. This is because the number is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S409). This data shift process (S409) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d toward the reserved ball execution area 203f. 1 Hold 1st area → Hold ball execution area 203f, 1st hold 2nd area → 1st hold 1st area, 1st hold 3rd area → 1st hold 2nd area, 1st hold 4th area → 1st hold The data in each area is shifted, such as in the third area.

After the data shift processing of S406 or S409, the fluctuation start processing for the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the data shift processing ( S410), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). The fluctuation start processing (S410) will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

In the process of S407, when it is determined that the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operating reserved ball number N1) is "0" (S407: No), a demonstration effect is performed on the drum display device 81 or the like. It is determined whether or not the state is present, that is, whether or not the demo is in progress (S411). In this determination process, after transmitting a demo command to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the first hold ball number counter 203a or the second hold ball number counter 203b (operation hold ball number N1 or operation). It is determined that the demonstration is in progress until it is determined that any value of the number of reserved balls N2) is larger than "0".

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S411: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S412), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S411: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) as it is. The demo command set in the process of S412 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed next in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 40). It is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, the display control device 113 transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 demo-produces the display demo command to the drum display device 81 or the like based on the reception of the display demo command. Is controlled to display.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is no reserved ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped. Therefore, if the fluctuation effect is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped, the demo effect is displayed on the drum display device 81.

When it is determined in the process of S411 that the demonstration is not in progress (S411: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped is further performed. The demo command may be set by executing the process of S412 when the second predetermined time has elapsed after the execution and the fluctuation stop. As a result, if there is no reserved ball after the fluctuation is stopped, the player can see the stopped symbol of the stopped fluctuation effect for a relatively long time without starting the demonstration effect immediately.

In the process of S402, when it is determined that the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is being dynamically displayed (S402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the dynamic display time (variation time) has elapsed (S413). ). The display time during dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this dynamic display time is determined. If (variation time) has not elapsed (S413: No), the display of the special symbol display device 37 is updated (S414), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

In the first embodiment, in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, for example, from the start of the dynamic display until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, the special LED group 37b corresponding to the fluctuating special symbol ( That is, a display mode in which the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2) is turned on or off in a predetermined lighting pattern is set.

On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (variable time) of the dynamic display in the special symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S413: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol is set for the special symbol display device 37. (S415). The stop symbol is preset by the fluctuation start process (S410) described later with reference to FIG. 43. In the fluctuation start processing (S410), whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined according to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the processing of S406 or S409, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type counter. The symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is determined by the value of C2.

In the first embodiment, when the determination result is a loss, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the determination result is a big hit, each lighting pattern corresponds to the type (type) of the big hit. The LED group is lit and displayed.

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S415, the stop symbol of the variation effect in the drum display device 81 is synchronized with the display of the special LED group 37b in the special symbol display device 37. In order to display the confirmation, a confirmation command is set (S416), and the process shifts to S417. The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed by the drum display device 81.

Upon receiving this confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variation effect of the third symbol in the drum display device 81 and display the stopped symbol in a definite manner by receiving the display confirmation command.

In the process of S417, in order to determine whether or not it is in the “time reduction state”, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is larger than “0” (S417).

In the processing of S417, if the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (S417: Yes), it is in the "time reduction state", and in that state, one of the special symbols is dynamically displayed (variable effect) once. Since the process is completed, the value of the time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 (S418), the special figure variation process (S210) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40).

On the other hand, in the processing of S417, if the value of the time reduction counter is "0" (S417: No), it is not the "time shortening state" but the "normal game state" or the "probability fluctuation state", so the processing of S418. Is skipped, this special figure variation processing (S210) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 40).

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a variation start process (S410), which is one process of the special figure variation process (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing (S410). This fluctuation start processing (S410) performs a big hit or a loss lottery (big hit lottery) according to the game state based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f according to the game state, and also has a special symbol. The dynamic pattern (variation pattern and stop type) of the dynamic display and the variation effect performed by the display device 37 and the drum display device 81 is determined.

In the fluctuation start processing (S410), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the “probability fluctuation state” (S501). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the game is not in the "probability fluctuation state" (S501: No), the game state is the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state", and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is the low probability state. Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state (see FIG. 28A) is set (S502), and the process is transferred to S504. On the other hand, when it is determined to be in the "probability fluctuation state" (S451: Yes), the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in the high probability state, so the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S503). The process is transferred to S504.

In the process of S504, a jackpot lottery (win / fail determination) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a set in S502 or S503. ) Process (S504).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a set based on the probability set value and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. It is determined based on the relationship between the game state (mode) and the game state (mode) at that time. As described above, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal low probability state (“normal gaming state” or “time reduction state”), the jackpot probability is set in the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number value is defined so that the value "1" is 50/10000 and the set value "6" is 60/10000. Further, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state (“probability fluctuation state”), the jackpot probability is set to 500/10000 at the set value “1” in the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number value is specified so that the value "6" becomes 600/10000.

In the process of S504, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in these jackpot random number tables 202a, and when they match, the jackpot is hit. It is determined that it is. When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot as a result of the processing of S504 (S504: Yes), then the jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 28B) and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. The display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on the value of (S505).

In this process, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the jackpot type table 202b, that is, after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, is special until the next jackpot. "10R probability variation jackpot" that shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" where the winning assistance function continues as the symbol becomes a high probability state, or after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds, the special symbol becomes a high probability state until the next jackpot. With "5R probability variation jackpot" where the winning assistance function continues, or after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 10 rounds, the special symbol is in a low probability state, but the winning assistance function is effective until the special symbol fluctuates 100 times. Whether it is a big hit or not is determined. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (display mode of the special LED group 37b) at the time of the jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 is set.

Specifically, whether the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is the data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e is determined by the reserved ball execution area 203f. If the data is stored in the shift source buffer (not shown) and shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. Further, when the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is the data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot The jackpot type is determined based on the type table 202b.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S506), and the process proceeds to S509. Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81, the effect is produced based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of a big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. A mode is selected, and the dynamic time (variable time) of the dynamic display (variable effect) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected effect mode. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 30) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot.

Specifically, in the process of S457, in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d provided for the jackpot, the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. Select. Then, in the variation pattern table 202e provided for each selected effect mode, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S504 that it is not a big hit (S504: No), the display mode at the time of loss is set (S507). In the process of S507, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f and the first hold ball number counter. Based on the value of 203a or (and) the second reserved ball counter 203b and the current gaming state, as the effect mode to be displayed on the drum display device 81, a "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode and a "non-reach (normal)" effect mode are displayed. ) ”Direction mode,“ Normal reach ”production mode,“ Super reach ”production mode, and“ Special reach ”production mode are set. In the first embodiment, the stop pattern corresponding to each effect mode is determined depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the “normal gaming state”, the “probability fluctuation state”, or the “time shortening state”. The stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of values of the selection counter C3 is different.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S508), and the process proceeds to S509. In the process of S508, in the special symbol display device 37 and the drum display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed with the lost symbol is determined. Specifically, it corresponds to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f in the fluctuation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of loss determined in the processing of S507. Select the attached variation pattern. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

In this way, the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the time of big hit and the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the time of loss are determined and determined by the same determination program using the same random number values C3 and CS1. Therefore, the program can be standardized and the development man-hours at the time of development can be reduced.

In the processing of S509, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is notified to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined by the processing of S506 and S508. Set the pattern command (S509). Specifically, for example, if the jackpot lottery is won, the jackpot is "10R probability variation jackpot", and the fluctuation pattern of "super reach" of "25 seconds" is selected, the jackpot / " A fluctuation pattern command indicating "super reach" of "10R probability variation jackpot" and "25 seconds" is set. In addition, if the jackpot lottery is lost and the fluctuation pattern of "super reach" of "25 seconds" is selected, the fluctuation pattern command indicating the loss and "super reach" of "25 seconds" is set. ..

In this way, even if the variation effect has the same variation time, by setting the variation pattern command together with the propriety of the variation effect and the content of the rough variation pattern, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform the effect mode including the result. It is possible to grasp the content and the fluctuation time of the above, and to determine the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation production in detail based on the information.

Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S505 or S507 via the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S510), and the special figure variation processing (see FIG. 42). ) Return.

Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "10R probability variation jackpot", the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "7" symbol, etc.) is not specified. Set a stop type command indicating that it is a "10R probability variation jackpot". If the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "10R normal jackpot", the "10R normal jackpot" is not specified and the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "4" symbol etc.) is not specified. Set the stop type command indicating that.

On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won and the "super reach" effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "787") is not specified, and the "super reach" effect mode is not specified. Set a stop type command indicating that it is a "super reach" effect mode. Further, if the jackpot is not won and the "normal reach" effect mode is selected, the "normal reach" mode at the time of loss is not specified without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "737"). "Set a stop type command indicating that it is an effect mode. Further, if the jackpot is not won and the "non-reach" effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "258") is not specified, and the "non-reach" effect mode is "" at the time of loss. Set a stop type command indicating that it is a "non-reach" effect mode.

In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on the success or failure of the variation effect in the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the success or failure and makes them. It is possible to determine the stop result of the fluctuation effect in detail based on the information of.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are executed in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 40). The command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display fluctuation pattern command or a display type command based on the fluctuation pattern command, and transmits the display type command to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the NMI interrupt process executed in the main control device 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110.

The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S601) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 45 to 50, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process (see FIG. 45) that is started when the power is turned on and a main process (see FIG. 46) that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 45, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with turning on the power is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S1116 is performed by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") (see FIG. 46). ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 46, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1113 in FIG. 46), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1116. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S1116 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1116 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S1116 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

Further, in the process of S1002, if the power cutoff processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the power cutoff process of S1116 is being executed. The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to "0".

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the drum display device 81 or the like. You may.

In the process of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1116 is executed (see S1115 in FIG. 46). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1116 is executed, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1116 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1011), and the process is transferred to S1012. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S1008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after, for example, the power supply is completely cut off, so that the processing of S1004 to S1006 is performed in S1008. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the clearing process of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1010, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S1010), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1011), the process is transferred to S1012.

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S1009 is that when the processing of S1008 is reached via the processing of S1004 to S1006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

In the process of S1012, it is determined whether or not the set value command is received from the main control device 110 (S1012), and the process of S1012 is repeatedly executed and waits until the set value command is received (S1012: No). Then, when the set value command is received from the main control device 110 (S1012: Yes), the probability set value indicated by the set value command is stored in the RAM 223, and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 46).

As described above, in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113, the main process (see FIG. 46) continues until the set value command generated at the end of the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 37) is received. By waiting for the transition, the probability set value set by the main control device 110 can be reliably grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the processes after the main process can be executed based on the probability set value. Further, when the set value command is not received from the main control device 110, the start-up process of the main control device 110 has not been reached until the end of the start-up process, and the start-up process of the main control device 110 has not been completed normally. The start-up process of the lamp control device 113 is not normally completed, and the process does not shift to the main process. With this configuration, it is possible to grasp whether or not the start-up process of the main control device 110 is normally executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the main control device 110 is normally started up. It is possible to prevent the runaway of the voice lamp control device 113 in the absence state.

In the process of S1012, the process of waiting until the set value command is received from the main control device 110 is performed, but in this case, due to a momentary power failure (so-called momentary power failure), only the voice lamp control device 113 is performed. If the power is turned off and the main control device 110 continues to keep the power on, the voice lamp control device 113 may repeatedly execute the process of S1012 and may not be able to return to normal control. Therefore, in the process of S1012, for example, when the set value command is not received from the main control device 110 for a predetermined period, the voice lamp control device 113 is in the safe mode in which the control related to the set value is not executed and other control is started. May be configured to launch.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this main process.

When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the previous process of S1101 was executed (S1101), and if 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1101: No). , The process shifts to the process of S1110 without performing the process of S1102 to S1109. In the processing of S1101, it is not necessary to process S1102 to S1109 in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond) to determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas the variation effect processing of S1110 This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1111 or S1111 in a short cycle. Specifically, by executing the processing of S1111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command omission of reception of a command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1110 in a short cycle, a command determination process is performed. Based on the command received by, the setting related to the fluctuation effect can be made without delay.

In the process of S1101, if it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1102. When the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 45, the process directly proceeds to the process of S1102.

In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1103 to S1112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1107 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the drum display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S1105 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

Next, in the process of S1105, the jackpot effect process for executing the effect related to the jackpot set by the command determination process of S1111 described later is performed (S1105), and the process proceeds to the process of S1106.

Next, in the process of S1106, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the fluctuation effect is not executed or during the period of the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation", the stage is changed and the display control is performed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the stage change command for the device 114. By including the information regarding the effect mode corresponding to the changed stage in this stage change command, the display control device 114 performs a process of changing to the effect mode according to the stage executed by the drum display device 81. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation effect, the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation can be displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expected value of the jackpot can be displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during the "reach display". The effect may be changed to give a feeling, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of a plurality of reach effects. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1106 is omitted (skip).

After the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106) is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1107), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the lighting units 29 to 33, the lighting patterns of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, or the lighting processing of the confirmation lamp 311 so as to correspond to the display performed by the drum display device 81. Etc. are set. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the drum display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1108, the liquid crystal display execution management processing is executed (S1109), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1110. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation effect performed by the drum display device 81 is set based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing / output process of S1108 is also performed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the drum display device 81. Will be executed.

In the process of S1110, in order to display the variation effect on the drum display device 81, the variation effect process, which is the process for starting the variation effect based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110, is executed. do. The details of this variation effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. Then, after the variation effect process, a command determination process (S1111) is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110, and the process proceeds to the process of S1112. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

In S1112, a counter update process for updating various counters such as the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S1112). Specifically, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment, the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d and the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter). When both 223e reach "99"), they clear "0" respectively.

The light guide pattern lottery counter 223d updated here is used to select whether or not to execute the effect (lighting) on the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 during the fluctuation effect, and the confirmed lamp timing lottery counter 223e is used. It is used to select whether or not the confirmation lamp 311 is lit (lighting timing) during the fluctuation effect.

When the processing of S1112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1115), and the power-off process is executed (S1116). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S1117), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to the process of S1101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the drum display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1111). This command determination process (S1111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not a command from the main control device 110 is received in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). As a result of the determination, if a command is received from the main control device 110 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the command varies from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a pattern command has been received (S1202). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1202: Yes), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1203).

The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 48) described later, the display variation pattern for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type. Used when setting commands. After that, this command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1202: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1204). Then, when it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1204: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1205).

The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 48) described later, when a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect is set. Used for. After that, the variation start flag 223a indicating that the variation effect is started is set to ON (S1206), the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46).

The stop type command indicates the stop type of the variation effect in which the variation pattern is indicated by the variation pattern command after the main control device 110 transmits the variation pattern command when the variation effect is started. This command is always sent from 110. By setting the fluctuation start flag 223a to ON by the processing of S1206, in the fluctuation effect processing (see FIG. 48) executed later, it is first extracted based on the value of each counter C1 or the like included in the reserved ball number command. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation effect and the variation pattern type of the variation effect extracted from the received variation pattern command match. Also, whether or not the stop type of the variation effect extracted based on the value of each counter C1 or the like previously included in the reserved ball count command matches the stop type of the variation effect extracted from the received stop type command. Judgment is made. As a result of those judgments, in the variation effect of 1, when the variation pattern based on the hold ball number command and the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command do not match, or the stop type and stop type command based on the hold ball number command. If the stop type does not match, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and error processing is performed to indicate the abnormality.

When it is determined that the stop type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1204 (S1204: No), then it is determined whether or not the confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1207). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed by the drum display device 81. If it is determined that this confirmation command has been received (S1207: Yes), a display confirmation command is set (S1208), this command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46). ..

The display confirmation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 46). To. The display control device 114 performs display control so as to confirm and display the variation display of the third symbol on the drum display device 81 at the confirmation timing indicated by the display confirmation pattern command.

When it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1207 (S1207: No), then it is determined whether or not the reserved ball count command has been received (S1209). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S1209: Yes), the first hold ball number counter 203a and / or the second hold ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command (S1209: Yes). The value of (see FIG. 26) (that is, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol and / or the second special symbol held in the main control device 110) is extracted, and this is used as the sub-number of the voice lamp control device 113. It is stored in one reserved ball number counter 223b and / or a sub second reserved ball number counter 223c (S1210). Then, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 also included in the hold ball count command are updated in S1210, and the sub-first hold ball count counter 223b is updated. Alternatively, the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas of the first reserved information storage area 223f indicated by the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223c, or the second reserved information storage first of the second reserved information storage area 223g. It is stored in the fourth area (S1211), the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46).

Here, since the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, every time there is a starting winning prize. , S1212, the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223b and / or the sub second reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a or the second of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of the reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, due to the influence of noise and the like, the values of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b and / or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are the first reserved ball number counter 203a and / of the main control device 110. Or, even if the value deviates from the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b, the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223b and / or the sub second reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected at the time of detecting the start winning. , The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a and / or the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 can be adjusted.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute the look-ahead process by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS stored in the first hold information storage area 223f or the second hold information storage area 223g. There is. That is, when the reserved variable effect is executed, what the result of the variable effect will be (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.) is determined before the variable effect is executed. It is possible to decide the execution of various effects.

If it is determined that the reserved ball count command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1209 (S1209: No), the processing corresponding to the other commands is executed (S1212), and this command determination processing (S1111) is terminated. Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46). Here, if the other command received is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. For example, the demo command received from the main control device 110 is set as a display demo command by the processing of S1212, is temporarily stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and then outputs the command for the main processing. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the process (S1102).

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the variation effect processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this variation effect processing (S1110). This variation effect process (S1110) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 46), and various processes for executing the variation effect are executed on the drum display device 81.

In the variation effect processing (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1401). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (that is, it is off) (S1401: No), at least the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so that the fluctuation effect is produced. The process (S1110) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1401: Yes), since both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received, the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned off in order to start the fluctuation effect. (S1402) Next, it is determined whether or not the variation effect to be executed this time is related to the first special symbol (S1403). As a result of the determination, if it is a variation effect related to the first special symbol (S1403: Yes), the data included in the first hold information storage area 223f provided in the first hold information storage area 223f is transferred to the execution information storage area 223h. Shift (S1404), and further shift the data included in the first reserved information storage second to fourth areas provided in the first reserved information storage area 223f to the first reserved information storage first to third areas. (S1405), the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223b is subtracted by 1 (S1406), and the process is transferred to S1410.

That is, in this case, the variation effect of the first special symbol held is reduced by one, and the execution of the variation effect of the first special symbol reserved first in time is started. The value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 stored in each storage area 223f1 to 223f4 of the first holding information 1st area corresponding to the changed variation effect is set to the execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the execution variation effect. It is moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first hold information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first hold information storage first area. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first hold information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first hold information storage second area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first hold information storage fourth area are moved to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f4 of the first hold information storage third area.

As a result, in the execution information storage area 223h, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f of the main control device 110 are stored, and the first hold information storage first In the fourth area, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the main control device 110 are stored, respectively. become.

On the other hand, in the process of S1403, when it is determined that the effect is not the variation effect related to the first special symbol, that is, when it is determined that the effect is the variation effect related to the second special symbol (S1403: No), the second reserved information storage area. The data included in the second reserved information storage first area provided in 223 g is shifted to the execution information storage area 223h (S1407), and further, the second reserved information storage second provided in the second reserved information storage area 223 g. The data included in the 4th area is shifted to the 2nd reserved information storage 1st to 3rd areas (S1408), the value of the sub 2nd reserved ball count counter 223c is decremented by 1 (S1409), and the processing is performed to S1410. Transition.

That is, in this case, the variation effect of the second special symbol held is reduced by one, and the execution of the variation effect of the second special symbol reserved first in time is started. The value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1 stored in each storage area 223g1 to 223g4 of the second holding information 1st area corresponding to the changed variation effect is set to the execution information storage area 223h corresponding to the execution variation effect. It is moved to each storage area 223h1 to 223h4. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second hold information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second hold information storage first area. , The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second hold information storage third area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second hold information storage second area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second hold information storage 4th area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g4 of the second hold information storage third area.

As a result, in the execution information storage area 223h, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f of the main control device 110 are stored, and the second hold information storage first In the fourth area, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the main control device 110 are stored, respectively. become.

Next, in the process of S1410, the variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed from now on is acquired based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223h (S1410). After that, in order to display the variation effect on the drum display device 81, a display variation pattern command is set based on the acquired variation pattern (S1411), and the process shifts to S1412.

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 47). To. The display control device 114 starts display control of the variation effect so that the drum display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

Next, in the process of S1412, the stop type of the variation effect to be executed from now on is acquired based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223h (S1412). After that, the display stop type command is set based on the acquired stop type of the variation effect (S1413), and the process is transferred to S1414.

The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 47). To. In the display control device 114, when the variation effect executed by the display variation pattern command set by the process of S1411 is confirmed and displayed, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is set. do.

In the process of S1414, in the variation effect executed this time, the confirmation lamp lighting setting process for setting whether or not to turn on the confirmation lamp 311 and the lighting timing thereof is performed (S1414), and the process shifts to S1415. The confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414) will be described later in FIG. 49.

In the processing of S1415, in the variation effect executed this time, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412 or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the front light guide plate 410, or the first decorative symbol of the rear light guide plate 420 A light guide pattern setting process for setting whether or not to turn on the group 421 is performed (S1415), and then the variation effect process (S1110) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 46). The light guide pattern setting process (S1415) will be described later in FIG. 50.

Next, the confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414). This confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414) is executed in the variation effect process (see FIG. 48), determines whether or not a jackpot will occur in the variation effect to be executed, and if a jackpot occurs, it is determined. It is determined at which timing of the variation effect whether or not to turn on the confirmation lamp 311.

In the confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit occurs based on the fluctuation effect stored in the execution information storage area 223h (S1501). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that no big hit occurs (S1501: No), the confirmation lamp 311 is not turned on, the confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414) is terminated, and the variation effect process (see FIG. 48) is performed. return.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1501 that a big hit occurs (S1501: Yes), the execution is performed with reference to the confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f (see FIG. 35) according to the value of the confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e. The lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 in the variable effect to be performed is set (S1502), and the process shifts to S1503.

In the process of S1503, it is determined whether or not a "probability fluctuation state" occurs based on the jackpot won this time (S1503). If it is determined that a "probability fluctuation state" occurs as a result of the determination (S1503: Yes), the lighting time of the confirmation lamp 311 is long at the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 set in the process of S1502 (for example, "" 10 seconds ”) It is set to perform with a long lighting pattern (S1504), the confirmation lamp lighting setting process (S1414) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, in the process of S1503, when it is determined that the "probability fluctuation state" does not occur based on the jackpot won this time, that is, when the jackpot in which the "time reduction state" occurs is won (S1503: No). ), At the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 set in the process of S1502, it is set to perform with a short lighting pattern in which the lighting time of the confirmation lamp 311 is short (for example, "2 seconds") (S1505), and the confirmation lamp is lit. The setting process (S1414) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48).

If the lighting time of the confirmation lamp 311 set in the processing of S1504 or S1505 exceeds the fluctuation time of the variation effect being executed, for example, the execution of the long lighting pattern is started when the variation effect is confirmed. In this case, the lighting time of the confirmation lamp 311 may be configured to end when the fluctuation effect is confirmed, or the lighting timing of the confirmation lamp 311 may be advanced from the initially set timing (for example, "10 seconds" from the time of confirmation. It may be configured to start from the timing of "before"). Further, it may be configured so that the short lighting pattern may be lit even when the "probability fluctuation state" is won.

In this way, when a big hit is won in the variable effect, the player can be suggested that the big hit will be generated by the confirmation lamp 311 at various timings of the variable effect, thereby providing an unexpected game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, by changing the lighting time of the confirmation lamp 311 according to the type of the winning jackpot, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect and preferably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Next, the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this light guide pattern setting process (S1415). This light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is executed in the variation effect process (see FIG. 48), and whether or not each decorative symbol 411, 421, 413, 421 in the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 is lit is determined. In addition to executing various processes for determining, when the confirmation lamp 311 is lit and displayed, the process of changing the lighting area of the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed.

In the light guide pattern setting process (S1415), first, in the variation effect to be executed from now on, the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, or the rear light guide plate 410 in the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. It is determined whether or not the execution lottery of the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is won (S1601). This determination is made by referring to the light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e (see FIG. 34) according to the value of the light guide pattern lottery counter 223d, and whether or not the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 is lit in the variation effect to be executed. Lottery.

In the processing of S1601, the execution lottery of the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 in the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 has not been won. When it is determined (S1601: No), this light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48). On the other hand, if the execution lottery of the first decorative symbol group 421, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 in the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 is won ( S1601: Yes), then the decorative symbols 411, 421, 413, 421 of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 to be lit are determined (S1602).

As a result of the determination of S1602, when the bubble group symbol which is the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the front light guide plate 410 is selected as the lighting target (S1602: "bubble"), "reach display" is formed in the variation effect. At the same timing (that is, at the end of the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" and at the start of the variable element of "normal reach"; the same applies hereinafter), the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c are "blue". (S1603), the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48).

As a result of the determination of S1602, when the cherry blossom blizzard symbol which is the second decorative symbol group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 is selected as the lighting target (S1602: "cherry blossom"), "reach display" is formed in the variation staging. At the same timing, among the front lower LED 414c, the right end and left front front lower LED 414c are set to light in "pink" (S1604), and this light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is completed, and the variation effect processing is performed. Return to (see FIG. 48).

As a result of the determination of S1602, when the sunfish symbol, which is the third decorative symbol 412 of the front light guide plate 410, is selected as the lighting target (S1602: "sunfish"), the timing at which the "reach display" is formed in the variation staging. Among the front lower LED 414c, the front lower LED 414c other than the right end and the left end is set to be lit in "green" (S1605), the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the variation effect processing (S1415) is completed. (See FIG. 48).

As a result of the determination of S1602, when the cherry blossom blizzard symbol which is the second decorative symbol group 411 of the front light guide plate 410 and the sunfish symbol which is the third decorative symbol 412 are selected as lighting targets (S1602: "Sunfish &" "Sakura"), at the timing when "reach display" is formed in the fluctuation effect, among the front lower LED 414c, the front lower LED 414c at the right end and the left end is lit in "pink", and the front lower LED 414c other than the right end and the left end is lit. The LED 414c is set to light in "green" (S1606), the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48).

As a result of the determination of S1602, when the fish school symbol which is the first decorative symbol group 421 of the rear light guide plate 420 is selected as the lighting target (S1602: "fish school"), first, at the start time of "reach display", That is, it is determined whether or not the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on at the time of reach formation (S1607). In this determination, during the execution of the first decorative symbol group 421, the lighting timing and lighting time of the confirmation lamps 311 set in S1502 and S1504 and S1505 of the confirmation lamp lighting setting process (see FIG. 49) arrive (overlap). It is done by determining whether or not it is. As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the confirmation lamp 311 does not light during the execution of the first decorative symbol group 421 at the time of reach formation (S1607: No), at the timing when the "reach display" is formed in the variation effect. The rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are arranged in the order of the right side region → the central region → the left side region of the rear light guide plate 420, and the three LEDs 422c and 424 provided for each region are arranged from the right side. It is set to light in "red", "blue", and "green" (S1608), the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48).

On the other hand, in the process of S1607, when it is determined that the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on during the execution of the first decorative symbol group 421 at the time of reach formation (S1607: Yes), the timing at which the "reach display" is formed in the variation effect. In the state where the confirmation lamp 311 is lit, only the rear lower side LED 424 is provided in the order of the right side region → the central region → the left side region of the rear light guide plate 420, and the three LED 424s provided for each region. Is set to light in "red", "blue", and "green" from the right side, and when the confirmation lamp 311 is off, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are rearward, respectively. The right side area → center area → left side area of the side light guide plate 420, and the three LEDs 422c and 424 provided for each area are set to light in “red”, “blue”, and “green” from the right side. (S1609), the light guide pattern setting process (S1415) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 48).

As described above, during the execution of the variation effect executed by the drum display device 81, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the drum display device 81 are used in the variation effect. By executing the jackpot expectation suggestion effect, it is possible to execute a variety of effects and appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game. Further, in the drum display device 81, which is different from the liquid crystal display device that can easily perform additional notice effect, etc., the front side light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 perform a notice display on the front side thereof to additionally display the notice. Even when the drum display device 81, which is difficult to display a notice, can be used, the content of the variable effect can be enriched and the degree of attention of the game can be suitably increased. Further, during the execution of the confirmation lamp 311 which is the most important in the variable effect, the scale of the effect by the first decorative symbol group 421, which is less important for the game than the confirmation lamp 311, is reduced and executed, which is important as a game. It is configured to make the effect of the lamp 311 stand out. With this configuration, the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 and the effect of the fixed lamp 311 can be partitioned so as not to overlap or are difficult to overlap, and the effect of the fixed lamp 311 can be made more conspicuous. .. Therefore, it can be configured so as not to interfere with the production of the fixed lamp 311 which is important as a game. In addition, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 and the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 without performing complicated control, and it is possible to increase the variation of the effect.

<A: Multiple display parts are displayed by lighting one LED with a diffuser lens>
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the rear lower diffusing lens 425 (the same applies to the rear upper diffusing lens 423) has a left diffusing portion 425a and a front diffusing portion 425b. A plurality of recesses 1 formed by the right-direction diffusion portion 425c are provided at least by the width of the light emitting surface of the rear lower lens 424. Therefore, the light emitted from the rear lower side LED 424 of 1 is directed to three directions (that is, the front direction and the front direction) inside the rear light guide plate 420 due to the plurality of recesses of the rear side lower diffusing lens 425. It is diffused in three directions (three directions, a direction tilted 20 degrees to the left and a direction tilted 20 degrees to the right with respect to the front direction). Further, since the left-direction diffusion portion 425a, the front-direction diffusion portion 425b, and the right-direction diffusion portion 425c are each configured to have the same side length, the width of the optical path of the diffused light is also the same. It is composed. As a result, by lighting one LED, a plurality of first decorative symbols group 421 formed at positions corresponding to each diffused optical path can be made to emit light in the same color, and even if the number of LEDs is small, the number of LEDs is various. By executing the effect, the effect of the rear light guide plate 420 can be enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

<B: Designs are placed on the optical path, and symbols are also placed in the part where the optical paths of different colors overlap>
The first decorative symbol group 421 formed on the rear light guide plate 420 is a portion (“dark red”) in which the “red” light path and the “red” light path overlap each other, and is “red”. The part displayed only by the light path of ""("lightred"), the part where the light path of "red" and the light path of "blue" overlap ("purple"), "red" The part where the light path of "" and the light path of "green" are displayed overlapping ("yellow"), the light path of "red", the light path of "blue", and the light of "green" The part where the light path overlaps ("white"), the part where the light path of "blue" and the light path of "blue" overlap ("dark blue"), "blue" The part displayed only by the light path of "blue"("lightblue"), the part where the light path of "blue" and the light path of "green" overlap ("blue-green"), "green" The part where the light path of "" and the light path of "green" are displayed overlapping ("dark green"), the part displayed only by the light path of "green"("lightgreen"), and Each symbol of the first decorative symbol group 421 is displayed in a total of 10 kinds of display colors. Then, each symbol of the first decorative symbol group 421 is arranged so as to be arranged in each overlapping portion.

As a result, even if the lighting pattern has a small number of colors (for example, 3 colors), the light is diffused by the diffuser lenses 423 and 425 arranged above and below, and the optical paths of the diffused lights overlap. The emission colors that occur in the non-overlapping part and the overlapping part are different, and a larger number of colors than the color scheme can be displayed. Therefore, by realizing a variety of display colors even with a small number of emission colors, it is possible to further simplify the emission control of the LED and reduce the control burden on the emission control of the LED. In particular, when a plurality of types of monochromatic light emitting diodes are arranged and the above control is performed without adopting a full color LED, cost reduction can be realized by adopting a monochromatic light emitting diode whose cost is lower than that of a full color LED. The light emission control of the LED is further simplified, and the control load on the light emission control of the LED can be reduced.

Further, with respect to one symbol of the first decorative symbol group 421, the predetermined portion is arranged so as to overlap the optical path of the light of one color, and the portion other than the predetermined portion is arranged so as to overlap the optical path of the light of another color. Place in. That is, by forming one symbol of the first decorative symbol group 421 so as to fit within a range of a plurality of optical path widths, the emission color of each part is made different from one symbol, and one symbol is diversified. It can be expressed in various colors.

<C: Different LEDs are turned on in sequence for each horizontal division area, and moving display and colorful display>
Of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 arranged three each in the right side region, the central region, and the left side region of the rear light guide plate 420, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear upper LED 422c located on the far right side. The first decoration is performed by sequentially lighting the rear lower LED 424, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 located in the center, and the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 located on the left side in this order. The effect is performed as if the school of fish, which is the symbol group 421, swims from the right side to the left side.

Further, the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 are placed on the right side in conjunction with the lighting of the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a and the board surface second decorative symbol group 60b (see FIG. 3) of the base plate 60 of the game board 13. By turning on the lights in sequence from the beginning, the effect on the rear light guide plate 420 and the effect on the 13 board of the game board are integrally executed to provide a powerful effect using the entire 13 board of the game board, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be planned.

<D: When multiple effects overlap, one effect is given priority over the other effect (reduction lighting method of the fish school display area when the confirmation lamp is lit)>
When the effect by the confirmation lamp 311 is executed (at the time of execution), the scale of the effect by the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed so that the effect by the confirmation lamp 311 which is important as a game is conspicuous. .. Specifically, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed at the timing when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, the effect width in the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed. In particular, in the first decorative symbol group 421, the side on which the confirmation lamp 311 is arranged (that is, the upper side in the front view of the rear light guide plate 420) is turned off or turned on slightly to be the first decoration. The effect of the symbol group 421 and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be divided so that they do not overlap or are difficult to overlap, and the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 can be made more conspicuous. Therefore, it can be configured so as not to interfere with the production of the fixed lamp 311 which is important as a game. In addition, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 and the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 without performing complicated control, and it is possible to increase the variation of the effect.

<E: 1 light guide plate for weak and medium notices, another light guide plate for strong notices>
When a plurality of patterns of effects indicating the jackpot expectation in the variable effect are configured to be executable, the effect having a low jackpot expectation (that is, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413) is set to 1. The light guide plate (that is, the front light guide plate 410) is centrally provided, while the effect with high expectation of big hit (that is, the first decorative pattern group 421) is provided on the other light guide plate (that is, the rear light guide plate 420). By doing so, when executing an effect with a low expectation of a big hit, it is possible to suppress that the effect with a high expectation of a big hit is lit and displayed to the player due to noise, the viewing angle, etc., and execute an effect without inconsistency. be able to.

<F: 1 light guide plate has a plurality of display objects, and the optical path direction of the LED is different for each display object. 2 directions, bubble group), strong production in small direction (weak production in places where optical paths overlap)>
In the front light guide plate 410, the fourth decorative symbol group having the lowest expectation of a big hit in the portion where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal direction overlap (that is, the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion). The 413 is formed so that the fourth decorative symbol group 413 can be visually recognized only by the light in the lateral direction. In addition, the second, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the fourth decorative symbol group 413, in the portion where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal direction do not overlap (that is, the normal R-shaped portion and the upward inverted R-shaped portion). The decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 are formed so that the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 can be visually recognized only by the light in the vertical direction. Here, even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413 becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the light in the vertical direction, the light in the vertical direction is a big hit than the fourth decorative symbol group 413. It is lit when the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412, which has a high degree of expectation, is lit and displayed, and when the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412 is lit and displayed, the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412 is lit. Even when the 4 decorative symbol group 413 is lit and displayed, the discrepancy in the production is small. Therefore, by forming the fourth decorative symbol group 413 with the lowest jackpot expectation in the portion where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal direction overlap, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is generated at an unintended timing. Even when it becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to minimize the discrepancy in the production and provide the player with a comfortable game.

<G: 1 light guide plate has a plurality of display objects, and the optical path direction of the LED is different for each display object. 2 directions, bubble group), small direction is located in front of the display (main display, main drum, main liquid crystal)>
In the first embodiment, the jackpot expectation is the lowest in the portion of the front light guide plate 410 where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal direction overlap (that is, the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion). The fourth decorative symbol group 413 is formed so that the fourth decorative symbol group 413 can be visually recognized only by the light in the lateral direction. Further, in the front light guide plate 410, the jackpot expectation degree is the fourth decorative symbol group 413 in the portion where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal direction do not overlap (that is, the normal R-shaped portion and the upward inverted R-shaped portion). The second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412, which are higher than the above, are formed, and the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 can be visually recognized only by the light in the vertical direction. Further, on the back side of the portion of the front light guide plate 410 where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light do not overlap (that is, the normal R-shaped portion and the upward inverted R-shaped portion), the rear light guide plate 420 is provided. A drum display device 81 for forming the first decorative symbol group 421 and executing the variable effect of the third symbol, which is the main effect of the game, is arranged. In this way, the portion of the front light guide plate 410 where the optical path of the vertical light and the optical path of the horizontal light do not overlap (that is, the normal R-shaped portion and the upward inverted R-shaped portion) is the main effect of the game. By arranging the drum display device 81 that executes the variation effect of the three symbols and configuring the first decorative symbol group 421, which is the effect with the highest expectation of a big hit in the variation effect, to be able to display, the variation effect that is important as a game. The effect of the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the drum display device 81 can be enhanced so as not to hinder the display result and the effect of high expectation of big hit, respectively, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased. can.

<H: One light guide plate for the plane shape and the R shape, both shapes are guided from the plane shape part (not guided from the R shape part)>
In the first embodiment, when light is incident (light-guided) on the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, light is incident from the end surface (part) of any of the flat plate portions of the light guide plates 410 and 420. It is configured so that light is not incident from the R-shaped portion (that is, the normal R-shaped portion, the upward inverted R-shaped portion, or the downward inverted R-shaped portion). This is because when light is attempted to be incident from the R-shaped portion, the traveling direction of the incident light changes depending on the R-shaped portion, and there is a possibility that the desired symbol may not be properly lit or it may be difficult to light the desired pattern. Further, the LED or the like must be arranged along the shape of the end surface of the R-shaped portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Further, the R-shaped portion is formed along the outer shape of the effect member such as the drum display device 81 and the movable accessory, and when the LED substrate or the like is arranged on the side of the R-shaped portion, the design of the effect member is performed. It may limit the degree of freedom. Therefore, in each of the light guide plates 410 and 420 having the R-shaped portion, by incident light from the end face (part) of any of the flat plate portions, the above-mentioned problems can be suitably solved and the degree of freedom in designing each member can be increased. Can be done.

<I: R shape / inverted R shape, display 1 notice display up to the switching point (design display area determination part), do not place the symbol at the part where the R shape switches>
In the front light guide plate 410, each decorative symbol group 411,421,413 is arranged in the normal R-shaped portion, or the lower flat plate portion and the lower inverted R-shaped portion, but the downward inverted R-shaped portion and the regular R-shaped portion are arranged. At the switching point (region) with the shape portion, none of the decorative symbol groups 411, 421, 413 is arranged. This is arranged in the portion arranged in the normal R shape portion and the downward inverted R shape portion when the decorative symbol for displaying the light guide is arranged at the switching point (region) between the downward inverted R shape portion and the normal R shape portion. It is difficult for the light reflected (guided) inside the front light guide plate 410 to properly reach the portion, and the appearance may be unintended depending on the position of the player's line of sight. Therefore, by configuring so that neither the decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413 is arranged at the switching point (region) between the downward inverted R shape portion and the normal R shape portion, the symbol to be displayed as a light guide can be expressed. It is possible to make it appropriate and perform a production that does not cause any inconsistency.

<J: Cover for preventing abnormal lighting due to light from the front side of the strong warning light guide plate (sunfish / foam light guide plate, slit part of display area forming member)>
The light incident by the lens cut 432 is diffused by arranging the lens cut 432 between the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 in the vertical direction of the positive R-shaped portion and between the front light guide plate 410 and the confirmation lamp 311. It can be made (weakened). Therefore, light other than the light incident on the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 due to the lighting of the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c, 422c, and 424 is directed to the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. By suppressing the incident, it is possible to suppress the abnormal lighting of each decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413, 421. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an effect discrepancy such that each decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413, 421 is abnormally lit.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, since the front light guide plate 410 is arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the first decorative symbol group 421 having the highest jackpot reliability (expectation), it is incident from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The light incident on the rear light guide plate 420 can also be suppressed by the front light guide plate 410 with respect to the light. Therefore, by arranging the front light guide plate 410 as a noise cover on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the rear light guide plate 420, the light incident by the front light guide plate 410 is diffused (weakened) to some extent, thereby erroneously. It is possible to prevent the first decorative symbol group 421, which has a large effect discrepancy, from being abnormally lit when the lighting is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an effect discrepancy such that each decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413, 421 is abnormally lit.

<K: 1 light guide plate has strong and weak effects, and at least irradiation for weak areas has high anisotropy (good straightness, no diffusion, condensing lens)>
Like the rear light guide plate 420, the front light guide plate 410 in the first embodiment is made of an acrylic resin (PMMA), and when the refractive index of the acrylic resin is 1.49 to 1.53, each light condensing plate is used. The light incident from the first end surface of the lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d is emitted in a straight direction (or almost straight, on the upper side of the drawing in FIG. 20) from the second end surface. As a result, the light incident from the first end face of each condensing lens 414d, 415d, 416d is condensed without being diffusely emitted from the second end face side formed in a plurality of semicircular convex shapes. Since it can be emitted in the direction, when the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c corresponding to the decorative symbols 411, 421, 413 to be lit are lit, the other decorative symbols 411, 421, 413 are not lit, and the decoration to be lit and displayed. Only the symbols 411, 421, and 413 can be appropriately lit and displayed. In particular, when the fourth decorative symbol group 413 having the lowest jackpot reliability is to be turned on, the second decorative symbol group 411 formed on the same front light guide plate 410 and has a higher jackpot reliability than the fourth decorative symbol group 413. Alternatively, if the third decorative symbol 412 is turned on, there is a risk that the content of the effect will be inconsistent and the playability according to the game specifications cannot be realized. Therefore, at least, by configuring the condenser lenses 415d and 416d not to diffuse the light for the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a low expectation of a big hit, only the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is displayed at an appropriate timing. It is possible to prevent discrepancies in the content of the production.

<There is a strong and weak effect with the L: 1 light guide plate, and at least the irradiation for the strong region is isotropically high (diffusing lens, 3-way lens)>
For the decorative design group with high expectation of big hit, that is, the third decorative design 412 and the like, a diffuser lens used for lighting the first decorative design group 421 is adopted instead of the condenser lens. You may. The third decorative symbol 412 has a higher expectation of a big hit than at least the fourth decorative symbol group 413, and is located in front of the drum display device 81 that the player is paying attention to during the game. It is necessary to comprehensively irradiate the 3 decorative symbols 412 with light by a diffuser lens so that the player can clearly recognize the 3rd decorative symbols 412. Further, when the 4th decorative symbol group 413 is turned on, if the 3rd decorative symbol 412, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the 4th decorative symbol group 413, is turned on, an effect discrepancy occurs, but the 3rd decorative symbol When the 412 is turned on, even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a lower jackpot expectation than the third decorative symbol 412, is turned on, the player can execute the third decorative symbol 412, which has a higher jackpot expectation. Since we pay less attention to the execution of the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has a low expectation of a big hit, it is unlikely that a staging discrepancy will occur. Therefore, by adopting the condenser lenses 415d and 416d for the 4th decorative symbol group 413 with a low jackpot expectation, and by adopting a diffusion lens for the 3rd decorative symbol 412 with a high jackpot expectation, the front side is used. It is possible to enhance the effect of the light guide plate 410 and increase the degree of attention to the game.

<M: Multiple light guide plates, at least separate light guide plates with diffusion means>
When a plurality of light guide plates 410 and 420 are used to enable a plurality of patterns of an effect indicating a jackpot expectation in a variable effect, one light guide plate 410 (that is, the front light guide plate 410) has a condenser lens 414d, 415d, By utilizing 416d, a plurality of types of effects (that is, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413) can be individually executed, and other light guide plates (that is, other light guide plates) (that is, That is, by adopting the diffuser lenses 423 and 425 in the rear light guide plate 420), the effect of 1 (that is, the first decorative symbol group 421) can be executed in various expressions. With this configuration, it is possible to perform more than the number of multiple light guide plates 410 and 420, and by performing a flashy effect on the light guide plates that use the diffuser lenses 423 and 425, there are variations in the effect. Can be enriched and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410, the rear light guide plate 420, and the display area forming member 430 are provided with a plurality of R-shaped portions (that is, downward inverted R-shapes) along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. From the side (upper, lower, right or left) end face of the flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, while being configured with a shape having a portion, a normal R shape portion and an upward inverted R shape portion). It was configured to illuminate and display each decorative pattern 411, 421, 413, 421 by irradiating light.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the second front light guide plate 440, the second rear light guide plate 450, and the second display area forming member 460 are formed in a shape different from the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. Further, from the lower end surface of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a, which is the only R-shaped portion formed in the lower part of the second front light guide plate 440, the second front lower light LED 441 is used with respect to the second front light guide plate 440. And irradiate with light. Further, from the lower end surface of the second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a, which is the only R-shaped portion formed in the lower part of the second rear light guide plate 450, the second rear side guide is provided by the second rear lower side LED. It is configured to irradiate the light plate 450 with light.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the positional relationship of the drum display device 81 with respect to the schematic side sectional view of the light guide unit 400 in the second embodiment. In FIG. 55, for convenience of explanation, the second front light guide plate 440, the second rear light guide plate 450, the second display area forming member 460, and the drum display device 81 constituting the light guide unit 400 of the second embodiment. The interval is enlarged and expressed.

As shown in FIG. 55, the light guide unit 400 of the second embodiment is arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the drum display device 81, and the second display area forming member 460 and the second display area forming member 460 are arranged in order from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. 2 It is composed of a front light guide plate 440 and a second rear light guide plate 450.

Like the display area forming member 430, the second display area forming member 460 is made of a transparent resin (for example, polycarbonate), and is a drum display device 81 arranged behind the pachinko machine 10 of the light guide unit 400. It is formed in a flat plate shape that is different (irrelevant) from the outer peripheral shape. The shape is different from the shapes of the second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear light guide plate 450 that are assembled to the light guide unit 400. Further, the second display area forming member 460 has a second display region forming member 460 so that three symbols can be visually recognized on each reel LR, CR, RR (see FIG. 4) in the drum display device 81 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. 2 Central opening 461 is formed. A predetermined second lens cut 462 is provided on the peripheral edge of the second central opening 461 so that the rear side of the second lens cut 462 cannot be seen or becomes difficult to see from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. There is. Therefore, the display area and the effective line of the symbol on the drum display device 81 are clearly shown to the player by the second lens cut 462 on the periphery of the second central opening 461. Further, from the second central opening 461, the second front upper decorative symbol 442 provided on the second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear upper decorative symbol 452 provided on the second rear light guide plate 450 can be seen. It is configured to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Further, from the lower portion of the lower second lens cut 462, the second front lower decorative pattern 443 provided on the second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear side provided on the second rear light guide plate 450. The lower decorative pattern 453 is configured to be visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

Like the front light guide plate 410, the second front light guide plate 440 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, acrylic) and has a shape different from the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81, and has a shape different from the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. Continuous from the second front side lower inverted R shape portion 440a, which is a shape contrary to the shape (that is, the R shape opposite to the R shape which is the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81), and the second front side lower inverted R shape portion 440a. It is composed of a second front upper flat plate portion 440b which is formed in a similar manner and has a shape along the second display region forming member 460.

Further, the second front light guide plate 440 is a member for forming a second display region of a part of the drum display device 81 and the second rear light guide plate 450 arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the second front light guide plate 440. It is configured to be visible from the second central opening 461 of the 460.

Further, on the back surface side of the second front light guide plate 440 (that is, the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10), lens cuts having various uneven shapes corresponding to the second front upper decorative symbol 442 and the second front lower decorative symbol 443 are applied. The second front lower decorative symbol 443 formed on the back side of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a by lighting the second front lower lower LED 441 arranged below the front view of the second front light guide plate 440. Is configured to be visually displayed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the second front side upper LED (not shown) arranged on the front side of the second front side light guide plate 440 is turned on. As a result, the second front side upper decorative symbol 442 formed on the back surface side of the second front side upper flat plate portion 440b is configured to be visually displayed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It should be noted that a condenser lens for condensing the light emitted from the second front upper LED and the second front lower LED 441 and irradiating the end surface of the second front light guide plate 440 is arranged. May be good.

Here, the lens cut (concave and convex shape) forming the second front upper decorative pattern 442 directs the light incident from the lateral direction of the front view by the second front upper LED (not shown) to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It has a shape that can be reflected, and has a shape (for example, a vertical groove) that does not reflect or is difficult to reflect the light incident from the front view direction by the second front side lower LED 441 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. Further, the lens cut (concave and convex shape) forming the second front lower decorative pattern 443 reflects the light incident from the front view upward direction (vertical vertical direction) by the second front lower LED 441 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. The shape is such that the light incident from the lateral direction of the front view by the second front upper LED (not shown) is not reflected or difficult to be reflected on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a lateral groove). Has been done. With this configuration, when it is desired to appropriately light each of the decorative symbols 442 and 443 of the second front light guide plate 440, the direction of the light guided into the second front light guide plate 440 (incident direction). By configuring the decorative symbols 442 and 443 that can be lit and displayed differently, a plurality of decorative symbols 442 and 443 can be individually lit and displayed on the second front light guide plate 440 of 1. The expressive power of the light plate 440 can be improved, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Further, a second front lower decorative symbol 443 is arranged on the back surface side of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a of the second front light guide plate 440, and the second front lower decorative symbol 443 is lit and displayed. The light emitting surface of the LED 441 is arranged so as to face the lower end surface of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a. Since the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a is configured in an R shape, when the light guided in the second front light guide plate 440 is weak, the second front lower decorative symbol 443 is properly lit. It may not be done. Therefore, in order to accurately display the second front lower decorative symbol 443 arranged on the back surface side of the second front lower inverted R shape portion 440a, the end surface far from the second front lower inverted R shape portion 440a (that is, , The upper end surface of the second front upper plate portion 440b), but the end surface near the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a, that is, the second front side from the lower end surface of the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a. The lower LED 441 guides light to the second front lower decorative symbol 443. With this configuration, the second front lower decorative symbol 443 can be accurately lit and displayed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Like the rear light guide plate 420, the second rear light guide plate 450 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, acrylic) and has a shape different from the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81, and is different from the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. From the second rear side downward positive R shape portion 450a, which is a shape corresponding to the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 (that is, the R shape in the same direction as the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81), and the second rear side downward positive R shape portion 450a. It is composed of a second rear upper flat plate portion 450b which is continuously formed and has a shape along the second display region forming member 460 (second front side upper flat plate portion 440b).

Further, in the second rear light guide plate 450, a part of the drum display device 81 arranged on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 of the second rear light guide plate 450 is opened in the second center of the second display area forming member 460. It is configured to be visible from 461.

Further, on the back surface side of the second rear light guide plate 450 (that is, the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10), lenses having various uneven shapes corresponding to the second rear upper decorative symbol 452 and the second rear lower decorative symbol 453 are formed. A second rear side lower positive R-shaped portion 450a formed on the back surface side by turning on the second rear side lower side LED 451 which is cut and arranged below the front view of the second rear side light guide plate 450. 2 The rear lower decorative symbol 453 is configured to be visually displayed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is for the second rear upper side arranged on the front side of the second rear light guide plate 450. By turning on the LED (not shown), the second rear upper upper decorative pattern 452 formed on the back surface side of the second rear upper flat plate portion 450b can be visually displayed from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It is composed. A condenser lens for condensing the light emitted from the second rear upper LED and the second rear lower LED 451 and irradiating the end surface of the second rear light guide plate 450 is arranged. It may be configured.

Here, the lens cut (concave and convex shape) forming the second rear upper upper decorative pattern 452 receives light incident from the lateral direction of the front view by the second rear upper LED (not shown) in front of the pachinko machine 10. It has a shape that can be reflected to the side, and is configured to have a shape (for example, a vertical groove) that does not reflect or is difficult to reflect the light incident from the front view direction by the second rear lower side LED 451 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. ing. Further, the lens cut (concave and convex shape) forming the second rear lower lower decorative pattern 453 receives light incident from the front view upward direction (vertical vertical direction) by the second rear lower LED 451 on the front side of the pachinko machine 10. A shape that can be reflected to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a lateral groove) that does not reflect the light incident from the lateral direction of the front view by the second rear upper LED (not shown). ). With this configuration, when it is desired to appropriately light each of the decorative symbols 452 and 453 of the second rear light guide plate 450, the direction of the light guided into the second rear light guide plate 450 (incident direction). ), The decorative symbols 452 and 453 that can be lit and displayed are configured to be different, so that a plurality of decorative symbols 452 and 453 can be individually lit and displayed on the second rear light guide plate 450 of 1. The expressive power of the light guide plate 450 of 1 can be improved, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Further, a second rear lower lower decorative symbol 453 is arranged on the back surface side of the second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a of the second rear light guide plate 450, and the second rear lower decorative symbol 453 is lit and displayed. The light emitting surface of the second rear lower side lower LED 451 is arranged so as to face the lower end surface of the second rear side lower positive R-shaped portion 450a. Since the second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a is configured in an R shape, when the light guided in the second rear light guide plate 450 is weak, the second rear lower decorative symbol 453 is lit. May not be done properly. Therefore, in order to accurately display the second rear lower lower decorative symbol 453 arranged on the back surface side of the second rear lower positive R shape portion 450a, it is far from the second rear lower positive R shape portion 450a. Not the end face (that is, the upper end face of the second rear upper flat plate portion 450b), but the end face near the second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a, that is, below the second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a. Light is guided from the side end surface to the second rear lower decorative symbol 453 by the second rear lower LED 451. With such a configuration, the second rear lower portion decorative symbol 453 can be accurately lit and displayed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

Further, the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a of the second front light guide plate 440 and the second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a of the second rear light guide plate 450 are formed by bending in directions away from each other. A predetermined space is formed between the second front lower decorative symbol 443 formed on the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a and the second rear lower decorative symbol 453 formed on the rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a. Space is formed. With this configuration, even when the second front lower decorative symbol 443 and the second rear lower decorative symbol 453 are turned on at the same time, the second front lower decorative symbol 443 and the second front lower decorative symbol 443 and the second in the predetermined space are provided. (2) By forming a predetermined space between the lower rear decorative symbol 453 and the lower rear decorative symbol 453, the second lower decorative symbol 443 on the front side and the lower decorative symbol 453 on the second rear side can be recognizable and displayed on each other. 2 The front lower decorative symbol 443 and the second rear lower decorative symbol 453 can be used to create a three-dimensional effect.

Further, in order to be able to light the second front lower decorative symbol 443 in the second front light guide plate 440 (hereinafter, the same applies to the second rear light guide plate 450), the second front side lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a is on the extension. 2 By arranging the front lower side LED 441, it is not always necessary to arrange the lighting LED on the extension of the second front side upper flat plate portion 440b of the second front side light guide plate 440, so that the restriction on the arrangement of the LEDs is relaxed. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the light guide unit 400.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has the same effect as the first embodiment.

<Third Embodiment> Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment adopting the present invention will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the light from the LEDs 414c, 415c, 416c is guided (irradiated) into the front light guide plate 410 via the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, 416d with respect to the front light guide plate 410. ), Light from each LED 422c, 424 is guided (irradiated) into the rear light guide plate 420 via the diffusion lenses 423 and 425 to the rear light guide plate 420, and the light guide plates 410 and 420 of 1. The same kind of lens was used for. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the diffusion lens 473 and the condenser lenses 475b and 476b are used in combination with respect to the third light guide plate 470 formed in the shape along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. ..

Specifically, a third upper decorative symbol group 471 equivalent to (or the same as) the first decorative symbol group 421 of the first embodiment is formed on the back surface side of the third regular R-shaped portion 470c of the third light guide plate 470. At the same time, on the back surface side of the third lower flat plate portion 470a and the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b of the third light guide plate 470, the third lower portion equivalent to (or the same as) the fourth decorative symbol group 413 of the first embodiment. Form a decorative pattern group 474. Then, in order to light and display the third upper decorative symbol group 471, the light from the third upper LED 472 is configured to irradiate the third light guide plate 470 via the third upper diffuser lens 473. Further, in order to light and display the third lower decorative symbol group 474, the light from the third right LED 475a provided in the third right LED unit 475 is transmitted through the third right condenser lens 475b. While irradiating the third light guide plate 470, the light from the third left LED 476a provided in the third left LED unit 476 is irradiated to the third light guide plate 470 via the third left condensing lens 476b. Configure to do. The relationship between the third upper decorative symbol group 471 and the third lower decorative symbol group 474 in the third embodiment is the same as in the first embodiment when the third upper decorative symbol group 471 is lit and displayed. It is set as an effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than when the third lower decorative symbol group 474 is lit and displayed.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first embodiment or the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 56 shows the positional relationship between the third upper decorative symbol group 471 and the third upper LED 472, which can be lit and displayed on the third light guide plate 470 in the third embodiment, and the third lower decorative symbol group 474 and the third. Schematic showing the positional relationship of the right LED unit 475 with the third right LED 475a and the positional relationship between the third lower decorative symbol group 474 and the third left LED 476a of the third left LED unit 476. It is a front view. In FIG. 56, the third upper LED 472, the third right LED 475a and the third left LED 476a, the third upper diffuser lens 473, the third right condenser lens 465b and the third left The condenser lens 476b is schematically represented for convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIG. 56, a third upper decorative symbol group 471 is formed on the third regular R-shaped portion 470c of the third light guide plate 470 as a fish school symbol which is a symbol imitating a school of a plurality of types of fish. The concave-convex-shaped lens cut (horizontal groove) corresponding to the third upper decorative symbol group 471 is a pachinko machine that uses light incident in the vertical and diagonal directions among the light guided to the third regular R-shaped portion 470c. 10 Light emitted forward or easily emitted from another direction (for example, lateral direction) is emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the concave-convex lens cut corresponding to the third upper decorative pattern group 471. It is configured so that it is not emitted or is difficult to be emitted. Therefore, the light diffused downward or diagonally from the upper end surface of the third light guide plate 470 causes the third upper decorative symbol group 471 to emit light from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and become visible.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, a plurality of third upward LEDs 472 provided above the front view of the third light guide plate 470 are configured with a plurality of recesses on the upper end surface of the third light guide plate 470 in front view. When light is applied to the third upper diffuser lens 473, the light is diffused from each diffuser lens 473 of 1 in a plurality of directions (in the third embodiment, the left side, the center, and the right side). It is configured. Since the third upper diffusing lens 473 has the same configuration as the rear lower diffusing lens 425 in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, nine third upper LEDs 472 are provided, and one of the third upper diffuser lenses 473 is provided so as to correspond to the first third upper LED 472. Recesses are arranged. Further, in the third upward diffusing lens 473 at the rightmost end or the leftmost end of the third light guide plate 470, the right diffusing portion or the left diffusing portion is not formed, and the front diffusing portion and the left diffusing portion, or The third upward diffusing lens 473 is formed only by the front diffusing portion and the right diffusing portion. With this configuration, the light is not diffused in the direction in which the third upper decorative symbol group 471 is not arranged, and the light emitted by the third upper LED 472 is radiated to the third light guide plate 470 without waste. be able to.

Then, the light emitted from the third upper LED 472 of 1 to the lower side of the front view (lower side in the drawing) through the front diffusing portion (not shown) of the recess of 1 in the third upper diffusing lens 473 is 1. Irradiation from the adjacent third upper LED 472 to the left or right through the left-direction diffusion portion (not shown) or the right-direction diffusion diagram (not shown) of the recess of 1 in the third upper diffusion lens 473. It is configured to overlap the (diffused) light at the intersection of the respective optical paths. Further, the light emitted from the third upper LED 472 of 1 through the left-direction diffuser or the right-direction diffuser of the recess of 1 in the third upper diffuser lens 473 to the lower side of the front view is the next third. A portion where the light radiated (diffused) from the upper LED 472 to the right or left through the right or left diffusing portion of the recess of 1 in the third upper diffusing lens 473 and the respective optical paths intersect. It is configured to overlap with.

Specifically, for example, each LED of the third upper LED 472 is sequentially changed from the right side to "red", "blue", "green", "red", "blue", "green", "red", and "blue". When lit in a total of three colors of "green", "red" light is diffused in an optical path having a predetermined width from the third upper diffuser lens 473 corresponding to the rightmost LED of the third upper LED 472. From the third upper diffuser lens 473 corresponding to the second LED from the right (that is, the eighth from the left) of the third upper LED 472, "blue" light is diffused by an optical path having a predetermined width, and the third upper diffuser lens 472 is used. From the third upper diffuser lens 473 corresponding to the third LED from the right (that is, the seventh from the left) of the LED 472, "green" light is diffused by an optical path of a predetermined width, and from the right of the third upper LED 472. From the third upper diffuser lens 473 corresponding to the fourth (that is, the sixth from the left) LED, "red" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, and the fifth upper LED 472 (that is, the fifth from the right) from the right. , 5th from the left, center.) From the 3rd upper diffuser lens 473, "blue" light is diffused by an optical path of a predetermined width, and the 6th from the right (that is, the third upper diffuser LED 472). From the third upper diffuser lens 473 corresponding to the third upper LED (fourth from the left), "green" light is diffused by an optical path having a predetermined width, and the third upper LED 472 is the seventh from the right (that is, the third from the left). ), The "red" light is diffused by the optical path of the predetermined width from the third upper diffuser lens 473, and becomes the eighth LED from the right (that is, the second from the left) of the third upper LED 472. From the corresponding third upper diffuser lens 473, "blue" light is diffused in an optical path of a predetermined width, and the third upper diffuser LED 472 corresponds to the ninth (that is, the leftmost) LED from the right. From the diffuser lens 473, "green" light is diffused in an optical path having a predetermined width.

In this case, the third upper decorative symbol group 471 formed in the third regular R-shaped portion 470c of the third light guide plate 470 is at least a portion (“red”) displayed only by the light path of “red” light. The part where the "red" light path and the "blue" light path overlap ("purple"), the "red" light path and the "green" light path overlap. The displayed part ("yellow"), the part displayed only by the "blue" light path ("blue"), the "blue" light path and the "green" light path overlap. Each fish symbol in the 3rd upper decorative symbol group 471 has a total of 6 kinds of display colors, that is, the part to be displayed (“blue-green”) and the part displayed only by the light path of “green” (“green”). Each is displayed. Then, the fish symbol of 1 of the third upper decorative symbol group 471 is arranged on each optical path and in each overlapping portion.

As a result, even if the lighting pattern has a small number of colors (for example, three colors), the light is diffused by the third upper diffuser lens 473, and the optical paths of the diffused lights overlap, so that the portion does not overlap. The emission color that occurs in the overlapping part is different, and more colors than the color scheme can be displayed. Therefore, by realizing a variety of display colors even with a small number of emission colors, it is possible to further simplify the emission control of the LED and reduce the control burden on the emission control of the LED. In particular, when a plurality of types of monochromatic light emitting diodes are arranged and the above control is performed without adopting a full color LED, cost reduction can be realized by adopting a monochromatic light emitting diode whose cost is lower than that of a full color LED. The light emission control of the LED is further simplified, and the control load on the light emission control of the LED can be reduced.

Further, with respect to one fish symbol of the third upper decorative symbol group 471, the fish symbol is arranged so as to overlap the optical path of the light of one color in the predetermined portion, and the optical path of the light of another color is arranged in the portion other than the predetermined portion. Arrange them so that they overlap. That is, by forming one fish symbol of the third upper decorative symbol group 471 so as to fit within a range of a plurality of optical path widths, the emission color of each part is made different from that of one fish symbol, and the third The fish pattern of 1 of the upper decorative pattern group 471 can be expressed in various colors.

In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the rightmost side of the third upper LED 472 arranged in each of the right side region, the central region, and the left side region of the third light guide plate 470. By sequentially lighting the third upper LED 472 located in the center, the third upper LED 47 located in the center, and the third upper LED 472 located on the left side, it is as if the fish school which is the third upper decorative pattern group 471 is lit. The production is performed as if swimming from the right side to the left side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56, on the third light guide plate 470, a third lower decorative symbol group 474 as a bubble group symbol imitating a plurality of bubbles is provided with a third lower flat plate portion 470a and a third lower inverted R shape. It is formed in the entire region of the portion 470b. The third lower decorative symbol group 474 is arranged at least in the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b at a position (avoidance position) that does not overlap with the optical path of the light diffused from the above-mentioned third upper diffuser lens 473. Therefore, even when the third upper LED 472 is lit and displayed, the third lower decorative symbol group 474 is difficult to be lit.

Further, the third right LED 475a provided on the right side of the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470. When light is applied to the right end surface of the third right condenser lens 475b, the light is not diffused from the left end surface of the third right condenser lens 475b and is straight (left direction). It is configured to proceed. Further, the third left side LED 476a provided on the left side of the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470 is provided on the left side of the front view of the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470. When the left end face of the third left condenser lens 476b is irradiated with light, the light is not diffused from the right end face of the third left condenser lens 476b and is straightened as it is ( It is configured to proceed (to the right).

Further, the positions of the third right LED 475a and the third left LED 476a are such that the third right LED 475a of 1 and the third left LED 476a of 1 are paired in the left-right direction (horizontal direction), respectively. It is arranged like this.

The concave-convex-shaped lens cut (vertical groove) corresponding to the third lower decorative symbol group 474 is incident in the lateral direction among the light guided to the third lower flat plate portion 470a and the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b. The emitted light is emitted or easily emitted to the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the light incident from another direction (for example, the vertical direction or the diagonal direction) is a lens cut having an uneven shape corresponding to the third lower decorative symbol group 474. It is configured so that the light is not emitted to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 or is difficult to be emitted. Therefore, the light incident laterally from the left end surface and / or the right end surface of the third lower flat plate portion 470a of the third light guide plate 470 causes the third lower decorative symbol group 474 to emit light from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It becomes visible.

Here, as described above, in the third light guide plate 470, in the third regular R-shaped portion 470c, or in the third lower flat plate portion 470a and the third lower inverted R-shaped portion 470b, each decorative symbol group 471, 474 However, as in the case of the front light guide plate 410 of the first embodiment, at the switching point P between the third downward inverted R-shaped portion 470b and the third regular R-shaped portion 470c, any of the decorative symbols group 471 and 474 is also configured not to be arranged. This is the portion arranged in the third regular R-shaped portion 470c and the second portion when the decorative symbol for displaying the light guide is arranged at the switching point P between the third downward inverted R-shaped portion 470b and the third regular R-shaped portion 470c. 3 It is difficult for the light reflected (guided) inside the third light guide plate 470 to reach the portion arranged in the downward inverted R-shaped portion 470b properly, and it is intended depending on the position of the player's line of sight. There is a risk that it will not look like it. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, none of the decorative symbol groups 471 and 74 is arranged at the switching point P between the third downward inverted R-shaped portion 470b and the third regular R-shaped portion 470c. , It is possible to appropriately express the design to be displayed as a light guide and to perform an effect that does not cause a discrepancy.

The third light guide plate 470 in the third embodiment is made of an acrylic resin (PMMA), and when the refractive index of the acrylic resin is 1.49 to 1.53, the first of the condenser lenses 475b and 476b. The light incident from the end face is emitted in a straight direction (or almost straight. To the left or right in the drawing of FIG. 56) from the second end face. As a result, the light incident from the first end faces of the condensing lenses 475b and 476b is focused in one direction without being diffusely emitted from the second end face side formed in a plurality of semicircular convex shapes. Since it can be emitted, when it is desired to light the third lower decorative symbol group 474, when the corresponding LEDs 475a and 476a are turned on, the other decorative symbols (that is, the third upper decorative symbol group 471) are not turned on. , Only the third lower decorative symbol group 474 can be appropriately lit and displayed. In particular, since the third lower decorative symbol group 474 has a lower jackpot reliability than the third upper decorative symbol group 471, it is formed on the same light guide plate 470 when the third lower decorative symbol group 474 is to be turned on. If the third upper decorative symbol group 471, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the third lower decorative symbol group 474, is turned on, there is a risk that the production content will be inconsistent and the game playability according to the game specifications cannot be realized. Therefore, by configuring the condenser lenses 475b and 476b so as not to diffuse the light for the third lower decorative symbol group 474, which has a low jackpot expectation, only the third lower decorative symbol group 474 is displayed at an appropriate timing. It is possible to prevent discrepancies in the content of the production.

On the other hand, the light incident on the third light guide plate 470 from the third upper LED 472 via the third upper diffuser lens 473 is guided downward and diagonally downward, so that the third upper decorative symbol group It may reach the arrangement position of the third lower decorative symbol group 474 arranged below the front view from 471, and the third lower decorative symbol group 474 may be lit and displayed. However, the third lower decorative symbol group 474 is an effect having a lower expectation of a big hit than the third upper decorative symbol group 471, and if the third upper decorative symbol group 471 is turned on, the third upper decorative symbol group is lit. Even if the third lower decorative symbol group 474, which has a lower jackpot expectation than 471, lights up, the player pays attention to the execution of the third upper decorative symbol group 471, which has a higher jackpot expectation, and the jackpot expectation is low. Since we do not pay much attention to the execution of the third lower decorative pattern group 474, it is unlikely that a production discrepancy will occur. Therefore, the condenser lenses 475b and 476b are adopted for the third lower decorative symbol group 474 with a low jackpot expectation, and the diffusion lens 473 is adopted for the third upper decorative symbol group 471 with a high jackpot expectation. As a result, the effect of the third light guide plate 470 can be enhanced and the degree of attention to the game can be increased while the configuration is such that the discrepancy in the production is unlikely to occur.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment has the same effect as the first embodiment and the second embodiment.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment in which the present invention is adopted will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to third embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to third embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

In the fourth embodiment, first, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the pattern of the pseudo-stop symbol that can be adopted in the variable element of the "pseudo-variation" performed in the variation effect of the third symbol will be described. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern of a pseudo-stop symbol that can be stopped in a variable element of “pseudo-variation” in the variation effect of the third symbol in the fourth embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, as described in the first embodiment, in the drum display device 81, the symbols of the left reel LR, the middle reel CR, and the right reel RR are configured to be different from each other. .. More specifically, first, (1) in the left reel LR, the third symbol is in descending order (that is, "8" → "7" → "6" → ...) with respect to the fluctuation direction (downward). On the other hand, in the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, the third symbol is arranged in ascending order (that is, "1" → "2" → "3" → ...) with respect to the fluctuation direction (downward). ing. Further, (2) the third symbol of the "345" symbol in which a plurality of symbols are integrated is arranged in the middle reel CR which is the final stop symbol row. Further, (3) the left reel LR and the right reel RR do not have the third symbol corresponding to the "4" symbol (a part of the "345" symbol) arranged in the middle reel CR. Further, in (4) the left reel LR, the "chance" symbol is arranged at a position where it can be visually recognized next to the "1" symbol, while in the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, the "chance" symbol is "8". It is arranged in a position that can be visually recognized next to the symbol.

The configuration of (1) above is mainly a so-called single reach, which is a "reach display" on one effective line on each effective line, and a "reach" on two effective lines in the variation effect of the third symbol. This is to enrich the variation of the so-called double reach, which is "display". Temporarily, in the drum display device 81 in which three third symbols are visually recognizable in each reel LR, CR, RR, all reels LR, CR, RR are formed in the same order arrangement (for example, ascending order arrangement). In this case, the so-called single reach occurs only on the middle effective line, and the so-called double reach occurs only on the upper effective line and the lower effective line. In such a case, the variation of the "reach display" becomes obsolete, and the player may be awakened to the game. Therefore, as in the fourth embodiment, at least the symbols of the left reel LR and the right reel RR that can form the "reach display" are arranged in reverse order (that is, descending order and ascending order), so that the upper, middle, and lower stages are arranged. The so-called single reach can be generated on the effective line of the above, and the so-called double reach can be generated on the effective line falling to the right and the effective line rising to the right. With such a configuration, it is possible to enrich the variations in which "reach display" can occur and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the configuration of the above (2) may change to a jackpot result when the "345" symbol is stopped in the middle reel CR regardless of the formation of the "reach display". By configuring as such, the "345" symbol is set as a so-called chance symbol, and the "reach display" does not appear due to the difference between the stop symbol of the left reel LR and the right reel RR. Even if there is, it is configured so that the expectation for the big hit can be left until the final stop symbol row finishes stopping. More specifically, when the drive of the middle reel CR is stopped (temporarily stopped), if the above-mentioned "345" symbol is stopped, the variable element of "re-variation" that causes all reels LR, CR, and RR to fluctuate again. Configure to develop into. Since the variable element of this "re-variation" can be selected only when the lottery result of the jackpot is derived, the "345" symbol is stopped and the variable element of "re-variation" is executed in the variation effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making it possible to execute the so-called one-shot reversal effect.

Further, in the configuration of (3) above, "4" is included only in the "345" symbol arranged only in the middle reel CR, while the "4" symbol is not arranged in the left reel LR and the right reel RR. Therefore, although the "reach display" itself by the "4" symbol cannot occur, the "345" symbol of the middle reel CR is made to stand out and its peculiarity is emphasized, and the "345" symbol is stopped in the middle reel CR. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the game property of whether or not it is remarkable.

Further, in the configuration of (4) above, the number symbols of the left reel LR in which the numerical symbols (that is, "8" symbol → "7" symbol → ... → "1" symbol) are arranged in descending order are switched. Arrange the "chance" symbol (hereinafter, the "chance" symbol may be abbreviated as "C" symbol) in the part, that is, the part between the "1" symbol and the "8" symbol. At the same time, the switching part of the numerical symbols of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR in which the numerical symbols (that is, "1" symbol → "2" symbol → ... → "8" symbol) are arranged in ascending order, that is, " Arrange the "chance" symbols in the part between the "8" symbol and the "1" symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, when the "chance" symbol, which is not a numerical symbol, is stopped and displayed, the variable element of "pseudo-variation", the variable element of "re-variation", or the "special" with the highest expectation of big hit. The variable element of "reach" is configured to be performed, and the "chance" symbol is stopped and displayed so that the variable effect is continuously executed and a big hit can be expected in the variable effect. In this way, in the variable effect, in each reel LR, CR, RR that fluctuates downward, by arranging "chance" symbols having different properties from the numerical symbols in the middle of the numerical symbols arranged in descending or ascending order. , Make it easier to recognize the number symbols that fluctuate with each reel LR, CR, RR, and arrange the symbols that have different properties from the number symbols called "chance" symbols to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game. Can be planned.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the (5) fluctuation effect, when the "reach display" by the "7" symbol occurs, the jackpot result (that is, "777") that can generate the "probability fluctuation state" is generated. ") Is configured to be easy to appear. In other words, if the jackpot lottery is won, the "reach display" with the "7" symbol can be selected, while if the jackpot lottery is not won, the "reach display" with the "7" symbol is selected. Is difficult to select. With such a configuration, it is possible to amplify the player's expectation for a big hit at the stage when the "reach display" by the "7" symbol appears, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, an effect is provided in which the "reach forming symbol" is gradually changed in the variable element of the "pseudo-variation". More specifically, in the variable element of the "pseudo-variation" of the fourth embodiment, a symbol change effect is provided in which the "reach-forming symbol" changes stepwise (in ascending order) by three steps, for example, "slow-speed variation". At the end of the variable element of "", the "1" symbol is pseudo-stopped in the middle of the left reel RR, and the "1" symbol is also pseudo-stopped in the middle of the right reel RR. In a situation where "reach display" occurs on the valid line (hereinafter, the situation may be referred to as "pseudo stop 1"), when the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" is executed, the pseudo stop symbol is displayed. The "reach display" of a certain "1" symbol changes to the "reach display" of the "2" symbol, which is also a pseudo stop symbol, and temporarily stops (hereinafter, the situation may be referred to as "pseudo stop 2"). ), Then change to the "reach display" of the "3" symbol (hereinafter, the situation may be referred to as "reach formation"), and then various "reach display" is executed from the variable elements of the "normal reach". Will be done. With this configuration, whether or not the "reach display" occurs in any numerical symbol in the variable element of the "pseudo-variation", that is, the "reach display" that can generate the "probability fluctuation state" is generated. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing the production of whether or not it is possible to enrich the variation of the game. The number of steps that can be changed stepwise in the variable element of "pseudo-variation" may be any number as long as it can be executed within the variable element of "pseudo-variation", and may be two steps or less (including once). It is good, and it may be 4 or more stages.

However, in performing the fluctuation element of "pseudo fluctuation", the left reel LR, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are configured as described in (1) to (4) above, and further, the game as described in (5) above. In the pachinko machine 10 configured to perform the variation effect according to the specifications, in the above-mentioned symbol change effect executed by the variation element of the "pseudo variation", the "pseudo stop 1" at the time of the variation element of the "pseudo variation", Certain restrictions are imposed on the stop patterns of the pseudo stop symbols of "pseudo stop 2" and "reach formation".

Here, with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58, a pattern of a pseudo-stop symbol that can be executed by a variable element of "pseudo-variation" will be described. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern of a pseudo-stop symbol that can be stopped in a variable element of “pseudo-variation” in the variation effect of the third symbol in the fourth embodiment. Further, FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram showing the transition of the fluctuation elements of the “pseudo-variation” performed by the drum display device 81 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 58 (a) is a pseudo-stop 1 as a “pseudo-stop 1”. It is a schematic diagram showing the state in which the stop symbol is stopped, and FIG. 58 (b) shows the state in which the pseudo stop symbol as "pseudo stop 2" is stopped from the state of FIG. 58 (a). FIG. 58 (c) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the “reach forming symbol” is stopped from the state of FIG. 58 (b), and FIG. 58 (d) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the “reach forming symbol” is stopped. It is a schematic diagram which showed the state which "reach display" is performed from the state of (c). In FIG. 57, "●" indicates the changing middle reel CR, and the numbers on the left and right thereof indicate the stop symbols on the left reel LR and the right reel RR. Further, in FIG. 58, the configuration of the drum display device 81 and the display mode of the third symbol are omitted (schematically).

As shown in FIG. 57, first, "pseudo-stop 1" which is "pattern 1" is a "1" symbol, "pseudo-stop 2" is a "2" symbol, and "reach formation" is a "3" symbol. The fluctuation element of "variation" (that is, "1 ● 1" → "2 ● 2" → "3 ● 3") is not restricted by the configuration of (1) to (5) above, so that it can be executed. It is configured.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), in the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation", when the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" is completed, the left reel of the drum display device 81 is set as "pseudo stop 1". In the middle part of the LR and the right reel RR, the "1" symbol is pseudo-stopped, and it is as if "reach display" by the "1" symbol has occurred. Then, the variation effect proceeds in a state where the "reach display" by the "1" symbol is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, "2 seconds").

Then, from the state of FIG. 58 (a), the left reel LR and the right reel RR rotate downward, and as a "pseudo stop 2", "2" is set in the middle portion of the left reel LR and the right reel RR of the drum display device 81. The symbol is pseudo-stopped, and it is as if the "reach display" by the "1" symbol has changed to the "reach display" by the "2" symbol (see FIG. 58 (b)). Then, the variation effect proceeds in a state where the "reach display" by the "2" symbol is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, "2 seconds").

Then, from the state of FIG. 58 (b), the left reel LR and the right reel RR rotate downward, and as “reach formation”, the “3” symbol is displayed in the middle portion of the left reel LR and the right reel RR of the drum display device 81. Is stopped, and the "reach display" by the "2" symbol is changed to the "reach display" by the "3" symbol (see FIG. 58 (c)). Then, from this state, the "reach display" (for example, the variable element of the "normal reach") shown in FIG. 58 (d) is executed, and the effect of whether or not the display result of the jackpot appears in the "reach display" is produced. Is executed.

Returning to FIG. 57, the description will be continued. Next, the variable element of "pseudo-variation" in which "pseudo-stop 1" which is "pattern 2" is a "2" symbol, "pseudo-stop 2" is a "3" symbol, and "reach formation" is a "4" symbol (that is, , "2 ● 2" → "3 ● 3" → "4 ● 4") is a restriction due to the configuration of (3) above, that is, the left reel LR and the right reel RR do not include the "4" symbol. It is configured so that it cannot be executed.

Next, the variable element of "pseudo-variation" in which "pseudo-stop 1" which is "pattern 3" is a "3" symbol, "pseudo-stop 2" is a "4" symbol, and "reach formation" is a "5" symbol (that is, , "3 ● 3" → "4 ● 4" → "5 ● 5") is a limitation due to the configuration of (3) above, that is, "4" for the left reel LR and the right reel RR, as in the above "pattern 2". It is configured so that it cannot be executed because it does not contain any symbols.

Next, the variable element of "pseudo-variation" in which "pseudo-stop 1" which is "pattern 4" is a "3" symbol, "pseudo-stop 2" is a "5" symbol, and "reach formation" is a "6" symbol (that is, , "3 ● 3" → "5 ● 5" → "6 ● 6") does not include the "4" symbol, so the restrictions due to the configuration in (3) above do not affect, but "pseudo stop 1". In the "reach formation", the "reach display" (that is, the reach by the "3" symbol) does not generate the "probability fluctuation state" even though it is the "reach display" that can generate the "profit fluctuation state" (that is, the reach by the "3" symbol). That is, it has changed to (reach by "6" symbol), and it is a so-called downfall production that seems to reduce the profit that can be given, so that it can not be executed so that the player does not get excited about the game. It is configured in.

Next, the variable element of "pseudo-variation" in which "pseudo-stop 1" which is "pattern 5" is a "4" symbol, "pseudo-stop 2" is a "5" symbol, and "reach formation" is a "6" symbol (that is, , "4 ● 4" → "5 ● 5" → "6 ● 6") is the same as the above "Pattern 2" and "Pattern 3", the restrictions due to the configuration of the above (3), that is, the left reel LR and the right. Since the reel RR does not include the "4" symbol, it is configured so that it cannot be executed.

Next, the variable element of the "pseudo-variation" in which the "pseudo-stop 1" which is the "pattern 6" is the "5" symbol, the "pseudo-stop 2" is the "6" symbol, and the "reach formation" is the "7" symbol (that is, , "5 ● 5" → "6 ● 6" → "7 ● 7") are configured so that they can be executed because they are not restricted by the configurations of (1) to (5) above.

Next, the variable element of the "pseudo-variation" in which the "pseudo-stop 1" which is the "pattern 7" is the "6" symbol, the "pseudo-stop 2" is the "7" symbol, and the "reach formation" is the "8" symbol (that is, , "6 ● 6" → "7 ● 7" → "8 ● 8") is a "reach display" (that is, "7") in which a big hit is likely to occur in "pseudo stop 2" due to the restriction of (5) above. Despite the fact that it was a symbolic reach), the "reach formation" has changed to the normal "reach display" (that is, the reach by the "8" symbol), and it seems that the profit that can be granted has decreased. Since it is a downfall production, it is configured so that it cannot be executed so that the player does not get excited about the game.

Next, the variable element of the "pseudo-variation" in which the "pseudo-stop 1" which is the "pattern 8" is the "7" symbol, the "pseudo-stop 2" is the "8" symbol, and the "reach formation" is the "C" symbol (that is, , "7 ● 7" → "8 ● 8" → "C ● C") is a "reach display" (that is, "7") in which a big hit is likely to occur in "pseudo stop 1" due to the restriction of (5) above. Despite the fact that it was a reach by a symbol), it has changed to a normal "reach display" (that is, a reach by a "8" symbol) in "pseudo-stop 2", which is a so-called downfall that awakens the player. Since it is a production, it is configured so that it cannot be executed. Further, when the "C" symbol is stopped, the variable element of "re-variation" can be executed, so that the pattern is not necessarily a so-called downfall effect, but when the "C" symbol is stopped, it is not always a so-called downfall effect. Since the variable element of "pseudo-variation" is configured to be able to be executed and the variable element of "pseudo-variation" is executed again from the variable element of "pseudo-variation", the "pattern 8" can be executed. It is configured not to.

Next, the variable element of "pseudo-variation" in which "pseudo-stop 1" which is "pattern 9" is the "8" symbol, "pseudo-stop 2" is the "C" symbol, and "reach formation" is the "1" symbol (that is, , "8 ● 8" → "C ● C" → "1 ● 1") is a "reach display" (that is, a "reach display") that can generate a variable element of "re-variation" or "pseudo-variation" in "pseudo-stop 2". Despite the fact that it was a "C" symbol reach), the "reach formation" is changed to a "reach display" (that is, a reach by a "1" symbol) that does not generate a variable element of "re-variation" or "pseudo-variation". Since it is a so-called downfall effect that is changing and the profits that can be granted seem to have decreased, it is configured so that it cannot be executed so that the player does not get excited about the game.

Next, the variable element of the "pseudo-variation" in which the "pseudo-stop 1" which is the "pattern 10" is the "8" symbol, the "pseudo-stop 2" is the "1" symbol, and the "reach formation" is the "2" symbol (that is, , "8 ● 8" → "1 ● 1" → "2 ● 2") skips the "reach display" by the "C" symbol in "pseudo stop 1" to "pseudo stop 2" and "8 It is configured to change from the symbol to the "1" symbol, and is configured to be able to be executed because it is not restricted by the configurations of (1) to (5) above. In the case of this "pattern 10", since the fluctuation element of the "pseudo fluctuation" is executed by omitting (skipping) the "C" symbol, the symbol control (each reel) in the above "pattern 1" and "pattern 6" is performed. The acceleration / deceleration patterns of LR, CR, and RR, changes in the time scale of constant speed fluctuation, fine adjustment of slip return, etc.) are configured to be different.

It should be noted that, as in this "pattern 10", a pattern that skips any of the continuous symbols and executes the variable element of the "pseudo-variation" may not be executed. With such a configuration, the control pattern of each reel LR, CR, RR regarding the fluctuation element of the "pseudo fluctuation" can be simplified, and the control load related to the symbol control can be reduced.

Next, the variable element of the "pseudo-variation" in which the "pseudo-stop 1" which is the "pattern 11" is the "C" symbol, the "pseudo-stop 2" is the "1" symbol, and the "reach formation" is the "2" symbol (that is, , "C ● C" → "1 ● 1" → "2 ● 2") is a "reach display" (that is, a "reach display") that can generate a variable element of "revariation" or "pseudo-variation" in "pseudo-stop 1". Despite the fact that it was a "C" symbol reach), the "reach formation" is changed to a "reach display" (that is, a reach by a "2" symbol) that does not generate a variable element of "re-variation" or "pseudo-variation". It is changing, and it is a so-called downfall production that awakens the player, so it is configured so that it cannot be executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the variable element of "pseudo-variation", the variable element of "pseudo-variation" from "Pattern 1", "Pattern 6" and "Pattern 10". The pseudo-stop symbol in is selected and other patterns (ie, "Pattern 2", "Pattern 3", "Pattern 4", "Pattern 5", "Pattern 7", "Pattern 8", "Pattern 9" and "Pattern 9" The pattern 11 ”) is configured not to be executed by the fluctuation element of the“ pseudo-variation ”. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform variable staging while accurately maintaining various game specifications, and at the same time, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of discrepancies in staging, and the player feels a sense of discomfort and awakens. Can be suppressed and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, in the variable element of "pseudo-variation", the execution of the so-called downfall effect in which the provisionally stopped third symbol with a large profit changes to the third symbol with a small profit is suppressed, and the player can play against the game. By suppressing the awakening, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment has the same effect as the first to third embodiments.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment in which the present invention is adopted will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 70.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when a jackpot result by a predetermined numerical symbol appears in the variable effect, the so-called "full rotation" effect in which the numerical symbol changes while the jackpot result is maintained in the variable effect. The symbol control and the voice output control in the above will be described.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fourth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 59, the configurations of the left reel LR, the middle reel CR, and the right reel RR in the left reel unit 81a1, the middle reel unit 81a2, and the right reel unit 81a3 constituting the drum display device 81 will be described. Since the configurations of the left reel unit 81a1, the middle reel unit 81a2, and the right reel unit 81a3 are the same or equivalent, the left reel unit 81a1 (left reel LR) will be described as an example in FIG. 59.

The left reel unit 81a1 includes a cylindrical member 610 that is a cylindrical substrate, and a left reel LR that is wound endlessly on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical member 610. Then, the cylindrical member is interposed through a pair of seal portions (not shown) formed along both sides of the long side of the left reel LR so as to maintain the state in which the left reel LR is wound around the cylindrical member 610. The left reel LR is attached to 610.

As described above, numerical symbols and "chance" symbols as identification information are printed at equal intervals on the outer peripheral surface of the left reel LR (see FIG. 4). A mounting recess 610a is formed in the center of the cylindrical member 610, and a drive shaft of the stepping motor 600 is mounted to the mounting recess 610a via a disk-shaped connecting plate 611. As a result, the drive shaft of the stepping motor 600 rotates, so that the cylindrical member 610 is rotated around the drive shaft, and the rotation causes the number of the left reel LR that can be visually recognized from the display area forming member 430 (see FIG. 6). The symbols and "chance" symbols are configured to change.

The stepping motor 600 is fixed to the side surface of a fixing plate (not shown) arranged in an upright state in the drum display device 81 with a fixing member (not shown) such as a screw. A reel position detection sensor 620 in which the light emitting element 621 and the light receiving element 622 are held at predetermined intervals is fixed to this fixed plate.

Further, the base end portion 632 of the initial position member 630 extending in the radial direction is fixed to the connecting plate 611 integrated with the cylindrical member 610 by a fixing member (not shown) such as a screw.

The tip portion 631 of the initial position member 630 is bent at a substantially right angle from the base end portion 632, and is aligned so as to be able to pass between the light emitting element 621 and the light receiving element 622 of the reel position detection sensor 620. Then, each time the left reel LR makes one rotation, the reel position detection sensor 620 detects the passage of the tip 631 of the initial position member 630, and each time the detection is performed, a detection signal is sent to the display control device 114 (see FIG. 33). It is output. The display control device 114 can confirm and correct the angular position of the left reel LR for each rotation based on this detection signal.

The stepping motor 600 is set so that the left reel LR is rotated once by giving an excitation signal of 400 pulses, for example, and the rotation position of the stepping motor 600, that is, the left reel LR is set according to the output mode of the excitation signal. The rotation position of is driven and controlled by the display control device 114.

More specifically, the left reel LR has a plurality of symbols and regions in the long side direction (circumferential direction) (in the fifth embodiment, a total of 16 numerical symbols and "chance" symbols, and a blank region). Is drawn. Therefore, 25 pulses (= 400 ÷ 16 symbols = 16 frames) are required to switch from the symbol (region) at a predetermined position to the next region (symbol), that is, to change the symbol for one frame. Then, which symbol and region are visible from the central opening 431 (see FIG. 6) of the display region forming member 430 by the number of pulses from the time when the detection signal of the reel position detection sensor 620 is output. It is possible to recognize or control the symbol so that any symbol and region can be visually recognized from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430.

Therefore, as described above, among the symbols and regions attached to the left reel LR, the middle reel CR, and the right reel RR, the number of symbols and regions that can be visually recognized through the central opening 431 of the display region forming member 430 is the number of the symbols and regions. It is determined by the size of the symbol (region) and the length in the vertical direction of the central opening 431, and in the fifth embodiment, each reel is configured to have three reels, LR, CR, and RR. Therefore, when all the reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols and regions are visible to the player.

Next, a more detailed configuration of the stepping motor 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66.

First, the operating principle of the stepping motor 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG. 60 is a schematic diagram showing the operating principle of the stepping motor 600 according to the fifth embodiment. Further, FIG. 61 is a connection diagram showing a drive system of the stepping motor 600 according to the fifth embodiment.

The stepping motor 600 of the fifth embodiment employs a hybrid type two-phase excitation drive system stepping motor that employs a 1-2 phase excitation drive system. The stepping motor 600 is not limited to the hybrid type and 2-phase stepping motors, but employs various stepping motors such as 4-phase excitation drive type or 5-phase excitation drive type stepping motors and 1-phase excitation drive type stepping motors. You may.

As shown in FIG. 60, the hybrid type stepping motor 600 has a rotating portion 602 arranged in the center, and a first shaft portion 603, a second shaft portion 604, and a third shaft portion arranged around the rotating portion 602. It is composed of a fixing portion 601 having a 605 and a fourth shaft portion 606.

The rotating portion 602 is composed of a front rotating portion 602a magnetized on the N pole and a back rotating portion 602b magnetized on the S pole, and is provided around (outer circumference) the front rotating portion 602a. It is attached to the rotating shaft in a state of being relatively shifted by 1/2 pitch so that the teeth provided around (outer circumference) of the back side rotating portion 602b are located between the teeth. A cylindrical magnet (not shown) is attached between the front rotating portion 602a and the back rotating portion 602b.

As shown in FIG. 61, the excitation coil L1 and the excitation coil L3 are bifilar-wound around the first shaft portion 603 and the third shaft portion 605, and the winding end end of the excitation coil L1 and the winding start end of the excitation coil L3. Is connected, and a predetermined DC power supply + B (for example, 24 volts) is applied here. Similarly, the excitation coil L2 and the excitation coil L4 are bifilar wound around the second shaft portion 604 and the fourth shaft portion 606, and the winding end end of the excitation coil L2 and the winding start end of the excitation coil L4 are connected. , The above-mentioned DC power supply + B is also applied here.

Here, a phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the exciting coil L1 of the first shaft portion 603 to excite the first shaft portion 603 to the S pole and the third shaft portion 605 to the N pole is referred to as an “A phase”. .. Further, contrary to the "A phase", a phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L3 of the third shaft portion 605 to excite the first shaft portion 603 to the N pole and the third shaft portion to the S pole. Is referred to as "reverse A phase" (in FIG. 61, "-" is indicated above "A").

Similarly, a phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the exciting coil L2 of the second shaft portion 604 to excite the second shaft portion 604 to the S pole and the fourth shaft portion 606 to the N pole is referred to as a “B phase”. .. Further, contrary to the "B phase", an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L4 of the fourth shaft portion 606 to excite the second shaft portion 604 to the N pole and the fourth shaft portion 606 to the S pole. The phase is referred to as "inverted B phase" (in FIG. 61, "-" is indicated above "B").

In the fifth embodiment, in the stepping motor 600 of the 1-2 phase excitation drive system, in the case of the 1 phase excitation drive system, "A phase", "B phase", "inverse A phase" and "inverse B phase". The rotating unit 602 can be rotationally driven clockwise or counterclockwise by sequentially applying an excitation signal to the rotary unit 602.

That is, for example, when first applied (energized) to the "A phase", the protrusion of the first shaft portion 603 that became the S pole, the teeth of the front rotating portion 602a, and the third shaft portion 605 that became the N pole. The protrusion and the tooth of the back rotating portion 602b face each other by the suction force. Next, when applied (energized) to the "B phase", the protrusion of the second shaft portion 604 that became the S pole, the teeth of the front rotating portion 602a, and the protrusion of the fourth shaft portion 606 that became the N pole. And the teeth of the back rotating portion 602b face each other by the suction force. Next, when applied (energized) to the "reverse A phase", the protrusion of the first shaft portion 603 that became the N pole, the teeth of the back rotating portion 602b, and the third shaft portion 605 that became the S pole. The protrusion and the tooth of the front rotating portion 602a face each other by suction force. Next, when applied (energized) to the "reverse B phase", the protrusion of the second shaft portion 604 that became the N pole, the teeth of the back rotating portion 602b, and the fourth shaft portion 606 that became the S pole. The protrusion and the tooth of the front rotating portion 602a face each other by suction force. By exciting in this order, the rotating portion 602 rotates clockwise in FIG. 60.

Here, the excitation sequence of the stepping motor 600 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the excitation data and the excitation order pointer in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, a 1-2 phase excitation drive system in which 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation are alternately performed is adopted. In the one-phase excitation, only one set of the first to fourth shaft portions 603 to 606 is excited, and in the two-phase excitation, two adjacent sets of the first to fourth shaft portions 603 to 606 are excited. .. In this 1-2 phase excitation drive system, excitation is performed according to the following excitation sequences (excitation order) from (a) to (h).

Specifically, the 1-2 phase excitation drive method is, specifically, (a) energizing only the "A phase" (1 phase excitation), and then (b) both the "A phase" and the "B phase". (2-phase excitation), then (c) only "B-phase" (1-phase excitation), then (d) both "B-phase" and "reverse A-phase" (2) (Phase excitation), then (e) energize only the "reverse A phase" (1 phase excitation), then (f) energize both the "reverse A phase" and "reverse B phase" (2 phase excitation) Then, (g) energize only the "reverse B phase" (1 phase excitation), then (h) energize both the "reverse B phase" and "A phase" (2 phase excitation), and then (2 phase excitation). It is a drive system that returns to a).

In the fifth embodiment, since the left reel LR makes one revolution by the excitation signal of 400 pulses, the angle change based on the excitation signal of one pulse, that is, the angle change per step is 9 degrees.

The excitation signal for the stepping motor 600 is given to the motor driver 607 (see FIG. 61) as the excitation data shown in FIG. 62. This excitation data is stored in the RAM (not shown) of the display control device 114, and is periodically processed (S1102 in FIG. 46) in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113 by the MPU (not shown) of the display control device 114. Appropriate excitation data is output to the input / output port 608 of the display control device 114 by the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds, which is the same magnification interval (see S1109). The excitation phase for the stepping motor 600 is determined by this excitation data, and an excitation signal (current) is applied to the excitation phase. The timer interrupt processing interval of the display control device 114 may be configured to be performed every 1 millisecond, which is the same interval as the periodic processing in the main processing of the voice lamp control device 113.

The exciting phase at the time of initial excitation of the stepping motor 600 is configured to perform two-phase excitation. In the case of one-phase excitation, the rotational torque generated is smaller than that of two-phase excitation, so that a sufficient initial velocity may not be obtained. If a sufficient initial velocity cannot be obtained, there is a high possibility of step-out, so two-phase excitation is preferable for the initial excitation.

Further, when the stepping motor 600 is stopped, the four-phase excitation is performed immediately after the two-phase excitation is performed. When braking is performed only by two-phase excitation, there is a concern that the rotation speed will drop sharply due to the strong braking force, and the player will feel uncomfortable with the movement of each reel LR, CR, RR during braking. Will be done. On the other hand, by performing 4-phase excitation immediately after 2-phase excitation, each reel LR, CR, RR can be smoothly stopped.

When the stepping motor 600 of the fifth embodiment is used, the drive characteristics as shown in FIG. 63 or FIG. 64 are required. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of drive characteristics of the stepping motor 600 executed in a series of fluctuation effects according to the fifth embodiment. Further, FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of the drive characteristics of the stepping motor 600 executed at the time of producing the “full rotation” in the fifth embodiment.

The example shown in FIG. 63 shows the drive characteristics of the stepping motor 600 in the “non-reach (long)” effect mode, and the stepping motor 600 starts rotating after the variable effect is started, making it difficult for the player to see the design. Acceleration period Ta until a constant speed rotation is reached at a moderate high speed, a high speed constant speed period Tb that is subjected to the high speed constant speed rotation (for example, one frame change in 100 ms), and a design from the high speed constant speed rotation to the player. The first deceleration period Tc, which is decelerated to a constant speed rotation at a low speed so that the It is divided into the second deceleration period Te.

That is, the period composed of the acceleration period Ta and the high-speed constant speed period Tb coincides with the execution time of the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation (long)" in the fluctuation effect, and is set so that Ta + Tb = 10 seconds. Has been done. Further, the period composed of the first deceleration period Tc, the low speed constant speed period Td, and the second deceleration period Te is until the left reel LR is stopped during the execution time of the fluctuation element of the "low speed fluctuation" in the fluctuation effect. It coincides with the time of Tc + Td + Te ≦ 5 seconds.

In the example shown in FIG. 64, the drive characteristics of the stepping motor 600 at the time of the “full rotation” effect, which is a kind of the “revariation” effect mode, are shown. In the "full rotation" effect, the jackpot symbol changes again with the jackpot symbol (for example, the jackpot result by the "5" symbol) appearing on one of the effective lines, and each reel LR, CR, Each RR makes about one rotation, and an effect of changing to another jackpot symbol (for example, the jackpot result by the "6" symbol) is executed. Then, the re-variation and the temporary stop are executed a plurality of times, and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot result finally won in the jackpot lottery (for example, the jackpot result by the "7" symbol) is stopped.

In the example shown in FIG. 64, the stepping motor 600 starts rotating after the symbol temporarily stopped in various variable elements starts to produce "full rotation", and the symbol is constant at a high speed that makes it difficult for the player to see the symbol. The first acceleration period T1 leading to high-speed rotation, the first high-speed constant speed period T2 that is rotated at high speed, and all reels LR, CR, RR that have been rotated at high speed are stopped at the same time (so-called). The first temporary stop period T3, which is a temporary stop period from the time when the bita is stopped) to the start of rotation again, the second acceleration period T4 until the high-speed constant speed rotation is reached again, and the second high-speed rotation, which is the high-speed constant speed rotation. It is divided into a constant speed period T5.

That is, in the period composed of the first acceleration period T1 and the first high-speed constant speed period T2, the first temporary stop symbol (for example, the jackpot of the "1" symbol) that appeared before the start of the "full rotation" effect. ) Changes to the next second temporary stop symbol (for example, the jackpot of the "2" symbol), the second temporary stop symbol is shown to the player in the first temporary stop period T3, and the second acceleration period T4 and the second In the period composed of the high-speed constant speed period T5, the second temporary stop symbol is set to change to the next main stop symbol (for example, the jackpot of the "3" symbol).

In the fifth embodiment, during the production of "full rotation", the first acceleration period T1 and the first high-speed constant speed period T2 in all reels LR, CR, RR are 2 seconds (2000 milliseconds, hereinafter, milliseconds). , May be referred to as "ms"), and the first temporary stop period T3 in which the second temporary stop symbol is displayed on all reels LR, CR, RR is 0.5 seconds (500 ms). Further, the second acceleration period T4 and the second high-speed constant speed period T5 in all reels LR, CR, RR are configured to be executed in 2 seconds (2000 ms). Therefore, when the above-mentioned "full rotation" effect is executed in the variable element of "re-variation", the execution time from the first temporary stop symbol to the appearance of the main stop symbol is 4.5 seconds (4500 ms). After that, the variable element of "re-variation" is configured to end when the final stop symbol is executed for 0.5 seconds (500 ms).

Here, as described above, since the arrangement of the symbols on the left reel LR, the middle reel CR, and the right reel RR is reversed, all the reels from the first temporary stop symbol are produced during the production of "full rotation". Driving LR, CR, RR around 1 rotation (that is, about 16 symbols = around 16 frames (± 2 frames). Hereinafter, rotating all reels LR, CR, RR by 14 to 18 frames is "about". It may be referred to as "one rotation".) When changing to the second temporary stop symbol, the amount of change in the symbol in the left reel LR and the amount of change in the symbol in the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are configured to be different. Has been done.

Specifically, for example, as a result of "reach display", "full rotation" is performed in a state where the jackpot symbol of the "1" symbol is temporarily stopped as the first temporary stop symbol at the middle position of each reel LR, CR, RR. In order to stop the jackpot symbol of the "2" symbol at the middle position of each reel LR, CR, RR as the second temporary stop symbol, the left reel LR arranged in descending order is used. 16 frames for 1 rotation-2 frames = 14 frames, while it is necessary to change the design, the middle reel CR and right reel RR, which are arranged in ascending order, are 16 frames for 1 rotation + 2 frames = 18 frames. , It is necessary to change the design. That is, in the production of "full rotation", when changing from one temporary stop symbol to the next temporary stop symbol, the left reel LR is the middle reel CR and the middle reel CR and the right reel RR among the left reel LR and the middle reel CR and the right reel RR. The configuration is such that the amount of fluctuation is smaller by 4 frames than the right reel RR.

In this case, in order to simultaneously stop each reel LR, CR, RR that has fluctuated at high speed in the first acceleration period T1 or the first high-speed constant speed period T2 and change to the second temporary stop symbol, the first During the acceleration period T1 or the first high-speed constant speed period T2, it is necessary to rotate all reels LR, CR, and RR in a state of being aligned with the second temporary stop symbol. In order to align all reels LR, CR, and RR during the first acceleration period T1 and the first high-speed constant speed period T2, (1) the first temporary stop symbol (for example, the jackpot symbol of the "1" symbol) is displayed as a stop. While starting to rotate all reels LR, CR, RR at the same time, only the left reel LR changes the fluctuation pattern (acceleration pattern, high-speed constant speed time, high-speed constant speed, etc.) of the middle reel CR and right reel RR. The second temporary stop symbol (for example, the jackpot symbol of the "2" symbol) is different from the pattern (acceleration pattern, high-speed constant speed time, high-speed constant speed, etc.) after about one rotation of all reels LR, CR, RR. ) At the same time, or (2) among all reels LR, CR, RR that are stopped and displayed in the first temporary stop symbol, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR that have a large amount of change to the second temporary stop symbol. The rotation is started first, and the numerical symbol corresponding to the second temporary stop symbol of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR (for example, the "2" symbol of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR) is the second temporary stop symbol of the left reel LR. The rotation of the left reel LR is started at the timing of reaching the vicinity of the numerical symbol corresponding to (for example, the "2" symbol of the left reel LR), and all reels LR are started at least in any period of the first high-speed constant speed period T2. , CR, RR, with the second temporary stop symbols aligned and the rotation speed matched, either all reels LR, CR, RR are stopped at the same time at the end of the first high-speed constant speed period T2. Drive control pattern is conceivable.

However, in the case of the drive control pattern of (1), although the rotation start timings of all reels LR, CR, RR are synchronized, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of acceleration patterns by each reel LR, CR, RR in the first acceleration period T1. Or, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of patterns of rotation speeds of each reel LR, CR, RR during the first high-speed constant speed period T2, and it is necessary to control to adjust the execution timing of the acceleration pattern and the rotation speed. Therefore, the drive control of each reel LR, CR, RR that adjusts the acceleration pattern and the rotation speed becomes complicated. Further, since each reel LR, CR, RR has a blank region formed between the numerical symbols, each reel LR, CR, which is rotated at a constant speed for a relatively long time in the first high-speed constant speed period T2, In the RR, the rotation speed and the like are different (shifted), and the numerical symbols are not aligned. Therefore, the blank areas are lined up in the horizontal direction of the numerical symbols, so that the fluctuation is performed as if the numerical symbols are aligned. It gives a sense of incongruity and may awaken the game in the production of "full rotation".

On the other hand, in the case of the drive control pattern of (2), it is necessary to prepare a plurality of acceleration patterns by each reel LR, CR, RR in the first acceleration period T1, and the execution timing of the acceleration pattern and the rotation speed is determined. Although adjustment control is required, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of patterns of rotation speeds of the reels LR, CR, and RR during the first high-speed constant speed period T2. Therefore, although there is a sense of discomfort due to the rotation start time of the left reel LR being different from the rotation start time of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, the first high-speed constant speed period T2 of each reel LR, CR, RR is relatively early. It is possible to change all reels LR, CR, RR in a uniform state and at a constant speed. As a result, the drive control of each reel LR, CR, RR can be simplified from the drive control pattern of (1), the control load can be reduced, and the first high-speed constant speed period T2 is relatively early. In (at least the latter half), it is possible to improve the interest of the game by not giving the player a sense of discomfort and suppressing the awakening of the game. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is configured to drive and control each reel LR, CR, RR at the time of producing "full rotation" by the drive control pattern of the above (2).

Further, as described above, the stepping motor 600 is configured to transition to a constant speed rotation state after a predetermined acceleration period, but the acceleration period is after the stop of the previous fluctuation effect. Since it is the transition time to the state in which the fluctuation effect is clearly executed (that is, the high-speed constant-speed rotation in the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation"), the stepping motor 600 changes from the acceleration state to the constant-speed rotation state as soon as possible. It is desirable to make a transition. For that purpose, the excitation phase of the stepping motor 600 may be switched quickly, but doing so may cause step-out or rotational instability.

In particular, in the stepping motor 600, when the teeth of the rotating portion 602 are attracted to the protrusions of the shaft portions 603 to 606 during the initial excitation, the initial rotational shaking (micro vibration accompanied by reciprocating motion) of the rotating portion 602 is performed. ) Occurs. The rotational sway varies depending on each specification, but for example, one reciprocating sway in 30 ms may occur about 5 to 6 reciprocations. Therefore, it is necessary to set the switching mode of the excitation phase in the acceleration period while taking into consideration such initial rotational fluctuation.

Each reel LR, CR, RR in the fifth embodiment suppresses the influence of the above-mentioned initial rotational sway, and the acceleration pattern at the time of producing "full rotation" is the left reel LR, the middle reel CR, and the right reel RR. It is set to be different from. Specifically, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are started to rotate in the same normal acceleration pattern as at the start of the normal fluctuation (see S2015 in FIGS. 65 and 70), while the left reel LR is the normal acceleration. The rotation starts with a special acceleration pattern different from the pattern.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 68, each excitation pattern at the time of acceleration of each reel LR, CR, RR at the time of producing "full rotation" will be described. FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the excitation pattern of the normal acceleration processing in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 66 is an explanation for explaining an example of the excitation pattern of the special acceleration processing in the fifth embodiment. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 67 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the driving mode of each reel LR, CR, RR and the output mode of the music at the time of producing the “full rotation” in the fifth embodiment. Further, FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram showing a transition of the “full rotation” effect performed by the drum display device 81 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 68 (a) is a tentative jackpot result by the “1” symbol. Is a schematic diagram showing a state in which is stopped, and FIG. 68 (b) shows a state in which the middle reel CR and the right reel RR have started to rotate in the normal acceleration process from the state of FIG. 68 (a). FIG. 68 (c) is a schematic diagram showing that the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are rotating at high speed and constant speed from the state of FIG. 68 (b), and the left reel LR is subjected to special acceleration processing. It is a schematic diagram which showed the state which started to rotate, and FIG. It is a schematic diagram showing the state, and FIG. 68 (e) shows a state in which the left reel LR, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are rotating at high speed and constant speed as in the state of FIG. 68 (d). FIG. 68 (f) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the provisional jackpot result by the “2” symbol has stopped from the state of FIG. 68 (e). In FIG. 68, the configuration of the drum display device 81 and the display mode of the third symbol are omitted (schematically).

First, in the example of the normal acceleration processing shown in FIG. 65, the acceleration processing is the same as at the start of the fluctuation of each reel LR, CR, RR in the fluctuation effect, and the initial excitation is “acceleration order 1” (for one pulse). The state set to the two-phase excitation is maintained for 67 interrupts (that is, 67 times of timer interrupt processing = 134 ms). After that, it is switched to one-phase excitation as "acceleration sequence 2", and the state is maintained for 8 interrupts (that is, 16 ms). After that, it is switched to two-phase excitation as "acceleration sequence 3", and the state is maintained for 7 interrupts (that is, 14 ms). After that, it is set so that the switching interval of the exciting phases is gradually shortened while the excitation phases are switched alternately. As a result, 150 interrupts = 2 ms × 150 = 300 ms are set as the excitation period during the normal acceleration processing “acceleration sequence 1 to 25”, that is, the period during which 25 pulses, which is one symbol change, are output. It is possible to eliminate the above-mentioned initial rotational sway. Further, by diverting the acceleration pattern used at the start of fluctuation, the types of acceleration patterns can be reduced and the drive control of each reel LR, CR, RR can be simplified.

On the other hand, in the example of the special acceleration processing shown in FIG. 66, the state set to two-phase excitation as the initial excitation “acceleration order 1” (for one pulse) is 17 interrupts (that is, 17 times of timer interrupt processing = 34 ms). It is held over. After that, as the "acceleration order 2", it is switched to one-phase excitation as in the normal acceleration process, and the state is maintained for eight interrupts (that is, 16 ms). After that, it is switched to two-phase excitation as "acceleration sequence 3", and the state is maintained for 7 interrupts (that is, 14 ms). After that, it is set so that the switching interval of the exciting phases is gradually shortened while the excitation phases are switched alternately. As a result, 100 interrupts = 2 ms × 100 = 200 ms are set as the excitation period during the period from “acceleration order 1 to 25” of the special acceleration processing, that is, the period in which 25 pulses, which is one symbol change, is output. The above-mentioned initial rotational sway can be eliminated.

That is, the special acceleration process drives and controls the left reel LR so as to accelerate to a high-speed constant speed rotation in a period 100 ms shorter than the normal acceleration process. Therefore, in the production of "full rotation", the left reel LR can be rotated at a high speed and constant speed in a relatively short time.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, at the time of the "full rotation" effect, first, the middle reel CR and the right, which are stopped and displayed by the first temporary stop symbol (that is, the "1" symbol). The reels RR are started to rotate at the same time by the normal acceleration process (at the time of starting the rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR in FIG. 67, and see FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b)). Then, when the predetermined high speed, which is a constant speed, is reached, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high speed constant speed rotation. Next, the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR that are rotated at a high speed and constant speed corresponds to the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) in the left reel LR. At the timing of reaching the front side of the position (at the start of rotation of the left reel LR in FIG. 67 and see FIG. 68 (c)), the stop is displayed at the first temporary stop symbol (that is, the “1” symbol). The left reel LR starts rotating by special acceleration processing. Then, at the timing when the left reel LR reaches the high-speed constant speed rotation (see the constant speed states of all reels LR, CR, RR in FIG. 67, and FIGS. 68 (d) and 68 (e)), the left reel LR High-speed determination while maintaining the state in which the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) and the second temporary stop symbol of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR (that is, the "2" symbol) are aligned horizontally. Set to rotate fast. After that, at the timing when the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) reaches the effective line in the middle stage, all reels LR, CR, RR that have been rotated at high speed and constant speed are stopped simultaneously and so-called bitter. Then, the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the middle stage (the timing at which all reels LR, CR, RR are stopped in FIG. 67, and FIG. 68 ( f) See).

With this configuration, the drive control of each reel LR, CR, RR can be simplified, the control load can be reduced, and at least the latter half of the first high-speed constant speed period T2 has a numerical symbol. Since it is possible to rotate the numbers while aligning the numbers and symbols in the state where there is no blank area in the horizontal direction, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to prevent the player from being awakened to the game and to improve the interest of the game. can.

Here, in the fifth embodiment, the player's discomfort caused by the difference between the rotation start timing of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR and the rotation start timing of the left reel LR is suppressed during the production of "full rotation". By adjusting the output timing of a predetermined music in the period from one temporary stop symbol (for example, "1" symbol) to the next temporary stop symbol (for example, "2" symbol). It is configured to alleviate the above-mentioned discomfort.

Specifically, from the first temporary stop symbol (that is, the "1" symbol) to the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) during the production of "full rotation" is displayed as a stop and appears. It is configured to output a predetermined piece of music synchronized with the period during the period. Further, it is configured to match the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, RR according to the beat (rhythm) output (beaten) at equal intervals in the music.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 67, during the production of "full rotation", the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, change from the first temporary stop symbol (that is, the "1" symbol) to the first. 2 The change time of the temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) is set to 2 seconds, and the tempo of the music output during the change time is set to the beat per minute (Beats) indicating the number of beats in 1 minute. Per · Minute. Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "BPM") is 120, that is, a music having a tempo of 1 beat every 0.5 seconds, and one bar of the music is output in 4/4 time signature. It is configured as follows. Then, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR that change by 18 frames start rotating at the same time as the start of the first beat in the above 1 bar, and the left reel LR that changes by 14 frames starts the rotation at the same time as the start of the first beat in the above 1 bar. It is configured to start rotation at the timing of.

In this case, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which are displaced by 18 frames, rotate the first frame (that is, from the "1" symbol to the blank area one level above) by the normal acceleration process in which acceleration fluctuates in 300 ms. In addition, one frame of the remaining 17 frames (that is, from the blank area to the "2" symbol) is rotated at a high-speed constant speed of 100 ms, so that the first temporary stop symbol is used for a total of 2000 ms. It changes to a temporary stop symbol. That is, the rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is started so as to be synchronized with the start of the first beat (strong beat) of one bar in the music having a BPM of 120 and a quarter beat.

On the other hand, the left reel LR, which is displaced by 14 frames, rotates the first frame (that is, from the "1" symbol to the blank area one level above) by a special acceleration process of 200 ms, and the remaining 13 frames (that is, that is). , From the blank area to the "2" symbol) is performed by high-speed constant-speed rotation that rotates at 100 ms, so the first temporary stop symbol changes to the second temporary stop symbol within a total of 1500 ms. .. That is, the rotation of the left reel LR is started so as to be synchronized with the start of the second beat (weak beat) of one bar in the music having a BPM of 120 and a quarter beat.

Then, with all reels LR, CR, and RR rotating at a high speed and constant speed, the third beat (weak beat) and the fourth beat (weak beat) of one bar are output, and then at the end of the one bar. The rotation of all reels LR, CR, and RR is stopped at the same time so as to synchronize with (after the end of the 4th beat. 2000 ms after the start of rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR), and the second provisional line is on the effective line in the middle stage. The stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) is stopped and displayed.

With this configuration, the beat of the music that can be recognized by the player's hearing the deviation of the rotation start time of each reel LR, CR, RR that can be visually recognized by the player during the production of "full rotation". By combining the above, the deviation due to visual recognition is canceled (suppressed) by the harmony (synchronization) of the tempo by hearing, and the player does not feel uncomfortable in the production of the "full rotation", and the expectation of a big hit is the highest in the game. It is possible to suppress the awakening of the game in the "full rotation" production and improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70, each control process executed by the MPU (not shown) in the display control device 114 will be described. As the MPU process, a motor control process (see FIG. 69) for driving and controlling the stepping motor 600 and a reel rotation start process (see FIG. 70) executed in the motor control process are mainly executed.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a motor control process executed by the MPU in the display control device 114 of the fifth embodiment. The motor control process may be executed by a control device other than the display control device 114, for example, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 or the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

The motor control process shown in FIG. 69 is executed in the main process that is periodically executed after the predetermined start-up process in the display control device 114 is completed, and mainly controls the drive of the stepping motor 600 in the drum display device 81. Run.

In this motor control process, first, it is determined whether or not control of the stepping motor 600 corresponding to any of the reels LR, CR, RR is necessary (S2001). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the control of the stepping motor 600 corresponding to any of the reels LR, CR, RR is unnecessary (S2001: No), that is, when all the reels LR, CR, RR are stopped. If so, this motor control process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2001 that the stepping motor 600 corresponding to any of the reels LR, CR, RR needs to be controlled (S20011: Yes), the detection result and excitation of the reel position detection sensor 620 are performed. Based on the number of times data is output, a process of grasping the rotation positions of the reels LR, CR, and RR to be processed is executed (S2002).

Next, it is determined whether or not the braking start timing of the reels LR, CR, RR to be processed has arrived (S2003). If it is determined as a result of the determination that the braking start timing of the reels LR, CR, RR to be processed has arrived (S2003: Yes), the rotation of the reels LR, CR, RR to be processed is started. Therefore, the process shifts to the reel rotation process (S2004), and after the processing of the reel rotation process (S2004) is executed, the process shifts to S2005. On the other hand, if it is determined that the braking start timing of the reels LR, CR, RR to be processed has not arrived (S2003: No), the processing of S2004 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S2005.

Here, the reel rotation start processing (S2004) will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a reel rotation start process (S2004) executed by the MPU in the display control device 114 of the fifth embodiment.

In this reel rotation start processing (S2004), first, it is determined whether or not the braking start timing of each reel LR, CR, RR is the start time of the fluctuation effect (S2011). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that it is the start time of the variation effect (S2011: Yes), all reels LR, CR, and RR are started to rotate by the normal acceleration process (S2012), and this reel rotation start process (S2004). Is terminated, and the process returns to the motor control process (see FIG. 69). When it is determined that the start time of the variation effect is determined, whether it is a normal variation executed when the number of reserved balls is small or a shortened variation executed when the number of reserved balls is large is determined, and the normal variation is performed. In the case of normal acceleration processing, the rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR is started, while in the case of shortened fluctuation, the rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR is started by special acceleration processing. good.

On the other hand, in the process of S2011, when it is determined that it is not the start time of the variation effect (S20111: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the effect of "full rotation" (S2013). As a result of the determination, if it is not the time of the "full rotation" effect (S2013: No), the reel rotation start process (S2004) is terminated and the process returns to the motor control process (see FIG. 69). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the time of the "full rotation" effect (S2013: Yes), then all the reels LR, CR, and RR are temporarily stopped, and the temporary stop time has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the timing, that is, the rotation start timing of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR (S2014).

As a result of the determination of S2014, when it is determined that all reels LR, CR, RR are temporarily stopped and it is the timing when the temporary stop time has elapsed (S2014: Yes), the middle reel CR and The right reel RR starts rotating by normal acceleration processing (see FIG. 65) (S2015), and at that timing, 1 in one bar of the music (that is, BPM120 and 4/4 time signature) corresponding to the production of "full rotation". The beat is output from the voice output device 226 (S2016), the reel rotation start processing (S2004) is terminated, and the process returns to the motor control processing (see FIG. 69).

On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the determination of S2014 that all reels LR, CR, RR are temporarily stopped and the timing is not the timing at which the temporary stop time has elapsed (S2014: No), then, It is determined whether or not the left reel LR is temporarily stopped and the temporary stop time has elapsed, that is, the rotation start timing of the left reel LR (S2017).

As a result of the determination of S2017, if it is determined that the left reel LR is temporarily stopped and it is the timing when the temporary stop time has elapsed (S2017: Yes), the left reel LR is subjected to special acceleration processing (S). (See FIG. 66), rotation is started (S2018), and at that timing, the second beat in one bar of the music corresponding to the production of "full rotation" is output from the audio output device 226 (S2019), and this reel rotation start processing is performed. (S2004) is terminated, and the process returns to the motor control process (see FIG. 69). If it is determined in the process of S2017 that the left reel LR is temporarily stopped and the timing is not the timing at which the temporary stop time has elapsed (S2017: No), this reel rotation start process (S2004). ) Is terminated, and the process returns to the motor control process (see FIG. 69).

Returning to FIG. 69, the description will be continued. In the process of S2005, the reel control process is performed (S2005), and the process shifts to S2006. In this reel control process (S2005), excitation data generation process for rotation control of the stepping motor 600 is performed. Further, in order to realize the excitation pattern of the fifth embodiment, a plurality of acceleration tables (see FIGS. 65 and 66) are stored in the ROM (not shown) of the display control device 114, and the acceleration is described. In the table, at least the data of the acceleration counter and the data of the switching interval corresponding to the data of the acceleration counter on a one-to-one basis are set.

In the reel control process of S2005, a switching interval counter, an acceleration counter, and an excitation order pointer provided in the RAM (not shown) of the display control device 114 are used. The number of timer interrupts corresponding to the switching interval of the excitation phase is set in the switching interval counter. The excitation order pointer is a pointer used when determining the excitation phase for the stepping motor 600. When the 1-2 phase excitation stepping motor 600 is used, 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation are alternately performed, and the phase excitation patterns at that time are 8 patterns as shown in FIG. 62. It is specified by the value (0 to 7) of this excitation order pointer whether which excitation data at which phase excitation is acquired as output excitation data and which is temporarily stored in the RAM of the display control device 114. Will be done.

In this reel control process, it is determined whether or not each reel LR, CR, RR is braking, and if it is not braking, the condition is that the numerical information of the switching interval counter is "1" or more. The numerical information of the switching interval counter is subtracted by 1, and it is determined whether or not the numerical information after the subtraction is "0". If the numerical information is not "0", the reel control process is terminated, while if the numerical information is "0", the acceleration table is read from the ROM (not shown) of the display control device 114. In the acceleration table, the data of the switching interval corresponding to the value of the current acceleration counter is set in the switching interval counter. For example, at the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR, the reel rotation start process (see FIG. 70) is executed, so that the numerical information of the acceleration counter corresponds to the first acceleration order in the acceleration table. 25 ". In this case, the numerical information of "2" is set in the switching interval counter.

Next, the excitation order pointer update process is executed. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information of the excitation order pointer, and when the numerical information after the addition exceeds the maximum value "7" of the excitation order pointer, the numerical information is cleared to "0". After that, the excitation data table as shown in FIG. 62 is read from the ROM of the display control device 114, and the excitation data corresponding to the numerical information of the current excitation order pointer is read. Then, the read excitation data is stored in the RAM as the current excitation data for the reels LR, CR, and RR that are the targets of execution of the reel control process.

Next, the numerical information of the acceleration counter is subtracted by 1 on condition that the numerical information of the acceleration counter is "1" or more. As a result, when the next excitation phase switching is executed for the reels LR, CR, and RR that are the targets of this processing, the switching interval data corresponding to the numerical information of the acceleration counter after this subtraction is set. In this case, since the execution is performed on the condition that the numerical information of the acceleration counter is "1" or more, the state is maintained when the numerical information of the acceleration counter is already "0". Further, when the numerical information of the acceleration counter is "0", the switching interval is one interrupt. Therefore, once the numerical information of the acceleration counter becomes "0", the excitation phase is switched according to the numerical information of the excitation order pointer each time the timer interrupt process is executed once. This state is the constant speed state.

In the processing of S2006, it is determined whether or not the control of the stepping motor 600 is completed for all the rotating reels LR, CR, RR (S2006), and for all the rotating reels LR, CR, RR. When the control of the stepping motor 600 is completed (S2006: Yes), the excitation data for each rotating reel LR, CR, RR is output to the input / output port 608 (see FIG. 61) of the display control device 114 (S2007). ), This motor control process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S2006, if the control of the stepping motor 600 is not completed for all the reels LR, CR, RR that are rotating (S2006: No), the processing of S2007 is skipped and this motor is used. End the control process.

Since the output of the display control device 114 to the input / output port 608 is a data writing process to the output port (not shown) corresponding to the input / output port 608, the motor driver 607 (see FIG. 61) has the excitation data. Excitation data is supplied at the same time as writing to the input / output port 608. As a result, the stepping motor 600 immediately performs the energization process on the exciting phase designated by the excitation data, and the excitation process is performed on the rotating portion 602.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which are stopped and displayed by the first temporary stop symbol, are simultaneously subjected to the normal acceleration process at the time of the production of "full rotation". Start spinning. Then, when the predetermined high speed, which is a constant speed, is reached, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high speed constant speed rotation. Next, the second temporary stop symbol of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR that are rotated at a high speed is the second temporary stop symbol in the left reel LR, and the left reel LR that is stopped and displayed in the first temporary stop symbol is specially accelerated. Rotation starts by processing. Then, at the timing when the left reel LR reaches the high-speed constant speed rotation, the second temporary stop symbol of the left reel LR and the second temporary stop symbol of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are aligned in a horizontal row. It is set to rotate at high speed and constant speed while maintaining. After that, at the timing when the second temporary stop symbol reaches the effective line in the middle stage, all reels LR, CR, RR that have been rotated at high speed and constant speed are stopped simultaneously and so-called bitterly, and on the effective line in the middle stage. The second temporary stop symbol is stopped and displayed in. With this configuration, the drive control of each reel LR, CR, RR can be simplified, the control load can be reduced, and at least the latter half of the first high-speed constant speed period T2 has a numerical symbol. Since it is possible to rotate the numbers while aligning the numbers and symbols in the state where there is no blank area in the horizontal direction, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and to prevent the player from being awakened to the game and to improve the interest of the game. can.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which change by 18 frames during the production of "full rotation", change the change time from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol. It is set to 2 seconds, and the tempo of the music to be output during the change time is a music of BPM120 indicating the number of beats in 1 minute, and one bar of the music is output in 4/4 time signature. .. Then, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR that change by 18 frames start rotating at the same time as the start of the first beat in the above 1 bar, and the left reel LR that changes by 14 frames starts the rotation at the same time as the start of the first beat in the above 1 bar. It is configured to start rotation at the timing of. With this configuration, the beat of the music that can be recognized by the player's hearing the deviation of the rotation start time of each reel LR, CR, RR that can be visually recognized by the player during the production of "full rotation". By combining the above, the deviation due to visual recognition is canceled (suppressed) by the harmony (synchronization) of the tempo by hearing, and the player does not feel uncomfortable in the production of the "full rotation", and the expectation of a big hit is the highest in the game. It is possible to suppress the awakening of the game in the "full rotation" production and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment has the same effect as the first to fourth embodiments.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment in which the present invention is adopted will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the production of "full rotation", while changing from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol, the sound for one bar of the music is output and the one bar is output. The rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is started on the first beat, the rotation of the left reel LR is started on the second beat of the first bar, and the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, RR and the tempo of the music. Was synchronized with. In this case, by making the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR different from the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the left reel LR, the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR and the music It is configured to synchronize the timing with the tempo.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, during the production of "full rotation", the main sound (for example, loud volume, main tune, female) is changed from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol. The tonic that forms the part (soprano or alto), melody line, etc., and the auxiliary sound for the tonic (for example, volume smaller than loud volume or sub-tune (accompaniment), male part (tenor or bass), bass line, etc. ) Is output, the main sound is output when the rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is started, and the sub sound is output when the rotation of the left reel LR is started. Configure to. Then, in this case, the acceleration pattern of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR and the acceleration pattern of the left reel LR are executed in the same pattern (that is, normal acceleration processing).

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fifth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fifth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

In the sixth embodiment, with reference to FIG. 71, the drive mode and timing of each reel LR, CR, RR at the time of “full rotation” effect, and the output mode and timing of the music composed of the tonic and the sub sound will be described. do. FIG. 71 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the driving mode of each reel LR, CR, RR and the output mode of the music when the “full rotation” is produced in the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 71, at the time of producing the "full rotation" of the sixth embodiment, first, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR which are stopped and displayed by the first temporary stop symbol (that is, the "1" symbol) are displayed. The rotation starts at the same time by the normal acceleration process (at the time of starting the rotation in the middle reel CR and the right reel RR in FIG. 71). Then, when the predetermined high speed, which is a constant speed, is reached, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high speed constant speed rotation. Next, the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR that are rotated at a high speed and constant speed corresponds to the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) in the left reel LR. At the timing of reaching the front side of the position (at the start of rotation of the left reel LR in FIG. 71), the left reel LR displayed as stopped by the first temporary stop symbol (that is, the “1” symbol) is set to the middle reel CR and the middle reel LR. Similar to the right reel RR, the rotation is normally started by the acceleration process. Then, at the timing when the left reel LR reaches the high-speed constant speed rotation (the constant speed state of all reels LR, CR, RR in FIG. 71), the second temporary stop symbol of the left reel LR (that is, the “2” symbol). And the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are set to rotate at a high speed while maintaining a state of being aligned in a horizontal row. After that, at the timing when the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) reaches the effective line in the middle stage, all reels LR, CR, RR that have been rotated at high speed and constant speed are stopped simultaneously and so-called bitter. Then, the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the middle stage (the timing at which all reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped in FIG. 71).

With this configuration, the acceleration processing at the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR can be standardized to simplify the drive control, the control load can be reduced, and the first high-speed constant speed can be reduced. At least in the latter half of the period T2, the numbers can be rotated while aligning the numbers in a state where there is no blank area in the horizontal direction of the numbers, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable and the game is suppressed from being awakened. However, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, the player's discomfort caused by the difference between the rotation start timing of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR and the rotation start timing of the left reel LR is suppressed during the production of "full rotation". By adjusting the output timing of a predetermined music in the period from one temporary stop symbol (for example, "1" symbol) to the next temporary stop symbol (for example, "2" symbol). It is configured to alleviate the above-mentioned discomfort.

Specifically, from the first temporary stop symbol (that is, the "1" symbol) to the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) during the production of "full rotation" is displayed as a stop and appears. It is configured to output a predetermined piece of music synchronized with the period during the period. Further, the music is composed of a tonic and a sub sound, and is configured to match the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, RR with the output start timing of the main sound and the output start timing of the sub sound.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 71, during the production of "full rotation", the middle reel CR and the right reel RR that change by 18 frames are changed from the first temporary stop symbol (that is, the "1" symbol) to the first. 2 The change time of the temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) is set to 2 seconds, and the music output during the change time is also configured to be output for 2 seconds. Then, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR that change by 18 frames start rotating at the same time as the output of the tonic in the above music starts, and the left reel LR that changes by 14 frames starts the output of the sub sound in the above music. It is configured to start rotation at the timing.

In this case, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which are displaced by 18 frames, rotate the first frame (that is, from the "1" symbol to the blank area one level above) by the normal acceleration process in which acceleration fluctuates in 300 ms. In addition, one frame of the remaining 17 frames (that is, from the blank area to the "2" symbol) is rotated at a high-speed constant speed of 100 ms, so that the first temporary stop symbol is used for a total of 2000 ms. It changes to a temporary stop symbol. That is, the rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is started so as to be synchronized with the output of the tonic of the music for 2 seconds.

Further, the left reel LR displaced by 14 frames is subjected to a normal acceleration process of 300 ms for the first frame (that is, from the "1" symbol to the blank area one level higher) as in the case of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR. The remaining 13 frames (that is, from the blank area to the "2" symbol) are rotated at a high speed constant speed rotation of 100 ms, so that the first temporary stop symbol can be rotated in a total of 1600 ms. To the second temporary stop symbol. That is, the rotation of the left reel LR is started so as to be synchronized with the output of the sub-tone output 400 ms after the start of the music for 2 seconds.

Then, while all reels LR, CR, and RR are rotating at a high speed and constant speed, the main sound and the sub sound of the music are continuously output, and then at the end of the music (middle reel CR and right reel RR). The rotation of all reels LR, CR, and RR is stopped at the same time so as to be synchronized with (2000 ms after the start of rotation), and the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the middle stage. Reel.

By constructing in this way, a music can be composed in which the deviation of the rotation start time of each reel LR, CR, RR that can be visually recognized by the player can be recognized by the player's hearing during the production of "full rotation". By driving according to the output of each element, the deviation due to visual recognition is canceled (suppressed) by the harmony (synchronization) of the music by hearing, and the player does not feel uncomfortable in the production of the "full rotation". It is possible to suppress the awakening of the game in the "full rotation" production, which has the highest expectation of a big hit, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, by performing the acceleration processing at the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR in common in the normal acceleration processing at the time of "full rotation" production, it is not necessary to provide a special acceleration pattern such as special acceleration processing. , The drive control of each reel LR, CR, RR can be simplified, and the control load related to the symbol control can be reduced.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment has the same effect as the first to fifth embodiments.

<7th Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment in which the present invention is adopted will be described.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, during the production of "full rotation", while changing from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol, the sound for one bar of the music is output and the one bar is output. The rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is started on the first beat, the rotation of the left reel LR is started on the second beat of the first bar, and the rotation start timing of each reel LR, CR, RR and the tempo of the music. Was synchronized with. In this case, by making the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR different from the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of the left reel LR, the acceleration pattern at the start of rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR and the music It is configured to synchronize the timing with the tempo.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, three or more sounds (for example, doremi (code C)) while changing from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol during the production of "full rotation". )) The first note (eg, Domi), which is at least one note that constitutes a chord formed by synthesizing the chord, and the second note (eg, So), which is the remaining note of the chord. The first sound is output when the rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is started, and the second sound is output when the rotation of the left reel LR is started. Configure to. Then, in this case, as in the sixth embodiment, the acceleration pattern of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR and the acceleration pattern of the left reel LR are executed in the same pattern (that is, normal acceleration processing).

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to sixth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to sixth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

In the seventh embodiment, with reference to FIG. 72, the driving mode and timing of each reel LR, CR, RR at the time of "full rotation" production, and the music (sound effect) composed of the first sound and the second sound. The output mode and timing of the above will be described. FIG. 72 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the driving mode of each reel LR, CR, RR and the output mode of the music when the “full rotation” is produced in the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 72, at the time of producing the "full rotation" of the seventh embodiment, first, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR which are stopped and displayed by the first temporary stop symbol (that is, the "1" symbol) are displayed. Rotation starts at the same time by normal acceleration processing (at the time of starting rotation in the middle reel CR and the right reel RR in FIG. 72). Then, when the predetermined high speed, which is a constant speed, is reached, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are rotated while maintaining the high speed constant speed rotation. Next, the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR that are rotated at a high speed and constant speed corresponds to the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) in the left reel LR. At the timing of reaching the front side of the position (at the start of rotation of the left reel LR in FIG. 72), the left reel LR displayed as stopped by the first temporary stop symbol (that is, the “1” symbol) is set to the middle reel CR and the middle reel LR. Similar to the right reel RR, the rotation is normally started by the acceleration process. Then, at the timing when the left reel LR reaches the high-speed constant speed rotation (the constant speed state of all reels LR, CR, RR in FIG. 72), the second temporary stop symbol of the left reel LR (that is, the “2” symbol). And the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are set to rotate at a high speed while maintaining a state of being aligned in a horizontal row. After that, at the timing when the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) reaches the effective line in the middle stage, all reels LR, CR, RR that have been rotated at high speed and constant speed are stopped simultaneously and so-called bitter. Then, the second temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) is stopped and displayed on the effective line in the middle stage (the timing at which all reels LR, CR, and RR are stopped in FIG. 72).

Here, in the seventh embodiment, during the production of "full rotation", the player's discomfort caused by the difference between the rotation start timing of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR and the rotation start timing of the left reel LR is suppressed. By adjusting the output timing of a predetermined music in the period from one temporary stop symbol (for example, "1" symbol) to the next temporary stop symbol (for example, "2" symbol). It is configured to alleviate the above-mentioned discomfort.

More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 72, during the production of "full rotation", the middle reel CR and the right reel RR that change by 18 frames are changed from the first temporary stop symbol (that is, the "1" symbol) to the first. 2 The change time of the temporary stop symbol (that is, the "2" symbol) is set to 2 seconds, and the music output during the change time is also configured to be output for 2 seconds. Then, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which change by 18 frames, start rotating at the same time as the output of the first note (in the seventh embodiment, the domi among the three chords of the domiso) in the chord music. The left reel LR, which changes by 14 frames, is configured to start rotating at the timing of the output start of the second sound (in the seventh embodiment, the so among the three chords of Doremi) in the music which is the chord. ..

In this case, the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, which are displaced by 18 frames, rotate the first frame (that is, from the "1" symbol to the blank area one level above) by the normal acceleration process in which acceleration fluctuates in 300 ms. In addition, one frame of the remaining 17 frames (that is, from the blank area to the "2" symbol) is rotated at a high-speed constant speed of 100 ms, so that the first temporary stop symbol is used for a total of 2000 ms. It changes to a temporary stop symbol. That is, the rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is started so as to be synchronized with the output of the first sound of the music for 2 seconds.

Further, the left reel LR displaced by 14 frames is subjected to a normal acceleration process of 300 ms for the first frame (that is, from the "1" symbol to the blank area one level higher) as in the case of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR. The remaining 13 frames (that is, from the blank area to the "2" symbol) are rotated at a high speed constant speed rotation of 100 ms, so that the first temporary stop symbol can be rotated in a total of 1600 ms. To the second temporary stop symbol. That is, the rotation of the left reel LR is started so as to be synchronized with the output of the second sound output 400 ms after the start of the music for 2 seconds.

Then, in a state where all reels LR, CR, and RR are rotating at a high speed and constant speed, the first sound and the second sound of the music are continuously output to form a chord, and then the end of the music. The rotation of all reels LR, CR, and RR is stopped at the same time so as to be synchronized with the time (2000 ms after the start of rotation of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR), and the second temporary stop symbol (that is, that is, on the effective line in the middle stage). "2" symbol) is stopped and displayed.

With this configuration, a chord that can be recognized as a harmony by the player's hearing can be recognized as a harmony between the rotation start times of the reels LR, CR, and RR that can be visually recognized by the player during the production of "full rotation". By driving in accordance with the output of the first and second sounds that make up the above, the deviation due to the visual recognition is canceled (suppressed) by the harmony of the music by the auditory sense, and the player in the production of the "full rotation". It is possible to improve the interest of the game by suppressing the awakening of the game in the "full rotation" production, which has the highest expectation of a big hit in the game.

In the seventh embodiment, when the reels LR, CR, and RR from the second temporary stop symbol to the main stop symbol are rotated, the reels LR, CR, and RR from the first temporary stop symbol to the second temporary stop symbol are rotated. It may be configured to output a chord (for example, a resiso (chord G)) that does not cause a sense of discomfort in combination with a chord (for example, Doremi (chord C)) that was output at the time of rotation. By configuring in this way, the design control and the voice output control at the time of the "full rotation" production are executed as an integrated and harmonious production, and the player is given a sense of discomfort in the "full rotation" production. However, it is possible to suppress the awakening of the game in the "full rotation" production, which has the highest expectation of a big hit in the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the three chords of the domiso are output in accordance with the rotation of each reel LR, CR, and RR at the time of "full rotation" production, but instead of this, another Three chords (major triad, short triad, augmented triad, diminished triad) and four chords (long seven chords) (Major Seventh), Chords of Short Seven (Minor Sevens), Chords of Short Three Chords (Minor Major Sevens), Chords of Reduced Five Short Sevens (Half Diminished), Chords of Reduced Seven (Diminished) -Seventh), Masushichi chord (Ocmented Major Seventh)), Five chords (genus nine chords (nine), genus seven short nine chords (major nines)) are configured to be output. May be good.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment has the same effect as the first to sixth embodiments.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, each embodiment may be added to the embodiment or exchanged with a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment by adding a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another embodiment to the embodiment or exchanging the parts or a plurality of parts thereof. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Further, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are made of an acrylic material (acrylic resin, refractive index of about 1.49 to 1.53). On the other hand, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are made of polycarbonate (polycarbonate resin, refractive index about 1.59) or optical plastic (polymethyl methacrylate resin, refractive index about 1.491 to 1.57). , Nylon (nylon-based resin, refractive index of about 1.53), or polyester (polycarbonate-based resin, refractive index of about 1.60) may be used. In this case, the shapes of the rear upper diffusing lens 423 and the rear lower diffusing lens 425 (that is, the left diffusing portion 425a, the front diffusing portion 425b, and the right diffusing portion 425c) are changed according to the refractive index of each resin. It may be configured to be appropriately changed, and configured to reliably irradiate (diffuse) light to the first decorative symbol group 421.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment, the recess of 1 in the rear upper diffusing lens 423 and the rear lower diffusing lens 425 is formed on three sides of the left diffusing portion 425a, the front diffusing portion 425b, and the right diffusing portion 425c. It was configured to diffuse light in three directions, leftward, frontal, and right, with respect to the light irradiation direction of each LED 422c, 424. On the other hand, one recess in the rear upper diffusing lens 423 and the rear lower diffusing lens 425 is composed of two sides or four or more sides, and the light diffusing direction is set to two directions or four. It may be configured to be more than the direction.

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment, the LEDs of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 in the rear light guide plate 420 are paired in the vertical direction (positions overlapping in the vertical vertical direction). It was installed in. Further, the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c 1 of the light guide plate 410 are provided so as to be paired in the left-right direction (positions overlapping in the horizontal left-right direction). On the other hand, the position where the 1 LED of the rear upper LED 422c and the rear lower LED 424 or the 1 LED of the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c do not overlap in the vertical vertical direction or the horizontal horizontal direction. It may be configured to be staggered. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 from having a blank area that is not irradiated with light, and to decorate the entire surface of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. The symbols 411, 421, 413, 421 can be surely displayed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

<Modification example 4>
In the first embodiment, the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the posterior lower diffuser lens 425 are formed on the upper and lower end surfaces of the rear light guide plate 420 by the width of the light emitting surface of one of the LEDs 422c and 424, respectively. It was configured as follows. On the other hand, the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the posterior lower diffuser lens 425 may be configured on the entire upper and lower end surfaces of the rear light guide plate 420. With this configuration, the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the rear lower diffuser lens 425 can be formed without considering the positions of the LEDs 422c and 424, and the production efficiency of the rear light guide plate 420 can be improved. At the same time, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in design regarding the arrangement of the LEDs 422c and 424.

<Modification 5>
In the first embodiment, each side of the left-direction diffuser portion 425a, the front-direction diffuser portion 425b, and the right-direction diffuser portion 425c constituting the recess of 1 of the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the rear lower diffuser lens 425. It was configured so that the lengths would be even. On the other hand, the length of each side of the left-direction diffusion portion 425a, the front-direction diffusion portion 425b, and the right-direction diffusion portion 425c may be different. In particular, when the sizes of the decorative symbols to be displayed on the rear light guide plate 420 are different, the length of each side may be formed according to the size of the display target. Specifically, for example, when there is a first display target in which the size of the display target is a predetermined size and a second display target in which the size of the display target is twice the size of the first display target, the second display target The length of the side corresponding to the optical path toward the first display target is configured to be twice the length of the side corresponding to the optical path toward the first display target. In this way, by forming the length of each side of the diffuser lens so as to correspond to the size of the display target, each display target can be appropriately lit.

<Modification 6>
In the first embodiment, the light guide unit 400 is composed of a front light guide plate 410 and a rear light guide plate 420 having a shape along the outer periphery of the drum display device 81 having a cylindrical outer shape. On the other hand, the light guide unit 400 is composed of a light guide plate along the outer peripheral shape of the cylindrical drum display device 81 and a light guide plate having a shape unrelated to the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81 (for example, a flat plate shape). You may. Further, the light guide unit 400 may be configured by a plurality of light guide plates having a shape (for example, a flat plate shape) unrelated to the outer peripheral shape of the cylindrical drum display device 81. Further, when a display unit such as a liquid crystal display device performs a variation effect of the third symbol on a flat display device instead of the drum display device 81, a light guide plate (for example, a light guide plate along the outer shape of the flat liquid crystal display device) is used. The light guide unit 400 may be composed of a light guide plate having a shape unrelated to the outer shape of the liquid crystal display device (for example, a shape having an R-shaped portion in part). Further, when the display unit of the liquid crystal display device or the like performs the variation effect of the third symbol on the flat display device instead of the drum display device 81, the shape is irrelevant to the outer shape of the flat liquid crystal display device (for example,). The light guide unit 400 may be configured by a plurality of light guide plates (a shape having an R-shaped portion in part).

<Modification 7>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 is configured to be capable of displaying three types of decorative symbols (that is, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413), and the rear guide plate is guided. One type of decorative pattern (that is, the first decorative pattern group 421) can be displayed on the light plate 420, and the two light guide plates 410 and 420 can perform four types of effects that are larger than the number of light guide plates 410 and 420. Was configured in. On the other hand, a plurality of types (for example, four or more types) of effects larger than the number of the light guide plates may be configured to be feasible by using three or more light guide plates.

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are both configured to have a regular R-shaped portion along the outer peripheral shape of the drum display device 81. On the other hand, the light guide plate on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is formed in a shape having a positive R shape, while the light guide plate on the back side is formed in a shape portion having an inverted R shape portion that is opposite (paired) to the regular R shape. It may be configured to form. In this case, a predetermined effect device (for example, a movable accessory or a liquid crystal display device) is provided in the space between the light guide plate having a positive R shape on the front side and the light guide plate having an inverted R shape on the back side. May be good. With this configuration, the light guide plate on the front side and the light guide plate on the back side provide an integrated and three-dimensional and powerful effect, thereby enhancing the effect of each light guide plate and attracting attention to the game. Can be enhanced.

<Modification 9>
In the first embodiment, when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, the vertical width of the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed. On the other hand, the execution mode of the first decorative symbol group 421 at the time of execution of the confirmation lamp 311 may be configured to be reduced in the lateral direction and executed. Further, when displaying the first decorative symbol group 421 when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a and the board surface second decorative symbol group 60b may not be executed. With this configuration, the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 and the effect of the fixed lamp 311 can be partitioned so as not to overlap or are difficult to overlap, and the effect of the fixed lamp 311 can be made more conspicuous. .. Therefore, it can be configured so as not to interfere with the production of the fixed lamp 311 which is important as a game. In addition, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 and the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 without performing complicated control, and it is possible to increase the variation of the effect.

<Modification 10>
In the first embodiment, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, the fish school symbol on the upper part of the first decorative symbol group 421 is not lit. On the other hand, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, the display color of the first decorative symbol group 421 on the confirmation lamp 311 side is changed to the display color of the confirmation lamp 311 (for example, "red"). It may be configured to run in a display color that is distinctly different from (eg, "blue"). With this configuration, the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 and the effect of the fixed lamp 311 can be partitioned so as not to overlap or are difficult to overlap, and the effect of the fixed lamp 311 can be made more conspicuous. .. Therefore, it can be configured so as not to interfere with the production of the fixed lamp 311 which is important as a game. In addition, it becomes easy to simultaneously execute the effect of the confirmation lamp 311 and the effect of the first decorative symbol group 421 without performing complicated control, and it is possible to increase the variation of the effect.

<Modification 11>
In the first embodiment, the effect of the front light guide plate 410 and the effect of the rear light guide plate 420 are separately executed so as not to overlap. On the other hand, by simultaneously performing the effect of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420, various effects are executed, the effect of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 is enhanced, and the game is started. It is possible to increase the degree of attention of.

<Modification 12>
In the first embodiment, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, the effect scale of the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced. On the other hand, when the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, or the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is executed when the confirmation lamp 311 is executed, or the variation effect performed by the drum display device 81 is executed. In this case, the second decorative symbol group 411, the third decorative symbol 412, the fourth decorative symbol group 413, or the effect scale of the variable effect may be reduced and executed. Examples of the reduction of the effect scale include a case of reducing the effect width or the effect range, a case of reducing the effect color or the effect brightness, and a case of reducing the effect time.

<Modification 13>
In the first embodiment, the drum display device 81 is used to execute whether or not to draw a big hit by the variation effect of the third symbol. On the other hand, whether or not a ball wins a prize in a predetermined winning opening provided in a lottery device with a croon, or whether a big hit lottery is performed by executing a variable effect on a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, or a rotary belt display device. It may be configured to perform a lottery as to whether or not a jackpot is awarded.

<Modification 14>
In the first embodiment, when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed when the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on, the effect width of the first decorative symbol group 421 is reduced and executed. On the other hand, when a movable accessory that can suggest the game result in the variable effect is provided in advance and the range of motion of the movable accessory overlaps with the effect portion of the first decorative symbol group 421, the range of motion of the movable accessory It may be configured to reduce the effect width of the first decorative symbol group 421 so as not to overlap with. Further, the range of motion of the movable accessory may be reduced so as not to overlap with the effect width of the first decorative symbol group 421. In this case, it is configured to give priority to the effect having a higher expectation of a big hit for the variable effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it possible to distinguish a plurality of effects so that they do not overlap or are difficult to overlap, and it is possible to make the effects with high expectation of big hits stand out. Therefore, it can be configured so as not to interfere with an important effect as a game.

<Modification 15>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 is configured to allow light to be incident from the lateral end faces of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 and the downward inverted R-shaped portion, and the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is lit. In addition to being possible, the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 were configured to be lit by allowing light to be incident from the downward end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410. On the other hand, any decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413 may be configured to allow light to be incident from the lateral end face, and each decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413 may be configured to be lit. Specifically, the fourth decorative symbol group 413 can be lit by allowing light to enter from the lateral end faces of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 and the downward inverted R-shaped portion, and the front light guide plate. The second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 may be configured to be lit by allowing light to enter from the lateral end surface of the regular R-shaped portion of the 410.

In this case, regarding the lighting of the 4th decorative symbol group 413 with a low jackpot expectation, if a condenser lens is adopted and the 4th decorative symbol group 413 is to be lit, the decorative symbol group 411 other than the 4th decorative symbol group 413 is lit. , 412 is configured not to be lit, while the second decorative symbol is used to light the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412, which have a higher expectation of jackpot than the fourth decorative symbol group 413. When it is desired to light the group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412, the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 may be configured to be clearly lit. Even if the fourth decorative symbol group 413 is lit and displayed when the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412 is lit and displayed, the discrepancy in the effect is small. Therefore, when the second decorative symbol group 411 or the third decorative symbol 412 is turned on, the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has the lowest expectation of a big hit, becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. However, it is possible to minimize the discrepancy in the production and provide the player with a comfortable game.

The arrangement positions of the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412, which are formed so as to correspond to the positions where the drum display device 81 showing the result of the variation effect of the third symbol is arranged, are the variation effects. It is also a part where movable accessories and the like that perform the effect on the above are stored and arranged. In this case, the LED substrate for lighting the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 must be arranged so as to avoid the arrangement position and the movable range of the movable accessory, and the movable accessory or the LED must be arranged. There is a risk that the degree of freedom in board design will be reduced. Therefore, an LED board for lighting the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 formed so as to correspond to the position where the drum display device 81 showing the result of the variation effect of the third symbol is arranged is provided. By forming the movable accessory or a portion that does not interfere with the movable range (for example, the upper side or the lower side of the front light guide plate 410), the degree of freedom in designing the movable accessory or the LED substrate can be increased. ..

<Modification 16>
In the first embodiment, the LEDs 422c and 424 are turned on in the rear light guide plate 420 as if the first decorative symbol group 421 is moved and displayed from the right side to the left side in the front view. On the other hand, the LEDs 422c and 424 may be lit as if the first decorative symbol group 421 is moved and displayed from below or above to above or below. In this case, the LEDs 422c and 424 are arranged in the left-right direction of the rear light guide plate 420, and the LEDs 422c and 424 arranged in the left-right direction are sequentially lit in multiple directions from any direction to make the first decoration. You may perform an effect as if the symbol group 421 is moved and displayed upward or downward from below or above.

<Modification 17>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 employs condenser lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d so that each decorative symbol group 411, 421, 413 can be lit, and the rear light guide plate 420 has a diffusion lens. By adopting 423 and 425, the first decorative symbol group 421 was configured to be lit. On the other hand, in one light guide plate, a condenser lens and a diffusion lens may be adopted so that each decorative symbol can be lit. Specifically, for example, a low-reliability decorative design with a low jackpot expectation is placed at a position where it can be visually recognized by lighting a condenser lens, and a high-reliability decorative symbol with a high jackpot expectation is placed by lighting a diffuser lens. Arrange so that it can be seen. In this case, when the low-reliability decorative symbol is lit, the high-reliability decorative symbol is configured so as not to be lit by the light condensing by the condensing lens, while the high-reliability decorative symbol is lit. Is configured so that the low-reliability decorative symbol can be turned on by the diffusion of light by the diffuser lens. Even if the low-reliability decorative symbol is lit and displayed when the high-reliability decorative symbol is lit, the discrepancy in the production is small. Therefore, even if the low-reliability decorative symbol, which has the lowest expectation of a big hit when the high-reliability decorative symbol is turned on, becomes visible from the front side of the pachinko machine 10, the discrepancy in the production is minimized. It is possible to limit the number to the limit and provide the player with a comfortable game.

<Modification 18>
In the first embodiment, the fourth decorative symbol group 413, which has the lowest expectation of jackpot, and the second decorative symbol group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412, which have higher expectation of jackpot than the fourth decorative symbol group, are introduced to the front side. The first decorative symbol group 421, which is formed collectively on the light plate 410 and has a higher expectation of a big hit than the fourth decorative symbol group 413, the second decorative symbol group 411, and the third decorative symbol 412, is on the rear side different from the front light guide plate 410. It was formed on the light guide plate 420. On the other hand, only the fourth decorative symbol group 413 having the lowest jackpot expectation is formed on the front light guide plate 410, and the first decorative symbol group 421 and the second decorative symbol having a higher jackpot expectation than the fourth decorative symbol group 413 are formed. The group 411 and the third decorative symbol 412 may be formed on the rear light guide plate 420.

<Modification 19>
In the first embodiment, each decorative symbol 411,421,413 is placed so that none of the decorative symbols 411,421,413 is located at the portion where the downward inverted R-shaped portion and the normal R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 are switched. It was forming. On the other hand, a portion where the upper flat plate portion and the upper inverted R shape portion are switched, a portion where the upper inverted R shape portion and the normal R shape portion are switched, a portion where the normal R shape portion and the lower inverted R shape portion are switched, or , One of the decorative symbols 411, 421, 413, 421 may be located at the portion where the lower inverted R-shaped portion and the lower flat plate portion are switched.

<Modification 20>
In the first embodiment, the light is configured to be incident from the upper flat plate portion or the lower flat plate portion of each of the light guide plates 410 and 420. On the other hand, it may be configured so that light is incident from the end face of any R-shaped portion.

<Modification 21>
In the first embodiment, when the variation effect of the third symbol in the drum display device 81 is performed, the symbol arrangement of the left reel LR is arranged in descending order, and the symbol arrangement of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is arranged in ascending order. rice field. Further, the middle reel CR is arranged with "4" symbols that are not arranged on the left reel LR and the right reel RR. Therefore, since there is no jackpot symbol including the "4" symbol as the jackpot forming symbol, the reach forming symbol including the "4" symbol cannot be generated even in the "reach display". Therefore, in the production of "pseudo-variation" or the like, when the reach forming symbol is stepped up, for example, when the number of the reach forming symbol is increased in ascending order, the step-up effect including "4" cannot be performed. Specifically, as a three-step step-up effect, even if you can produce "1" → "2" → "3" or "5" → "6" → "7", "2" → "3" → "4" or "3" → "4" → "5" cannot be produced. Therefore, when the step-up effect of the reach forming symbol is performed by "pseudo-variation" or the like, the step-up effect is performed from the symbol that does not include "4". With such a configuration, it is possible to perform a production without a sense of incongruity without causing a production discrepancy.

<Modification 22>
In the first embodiment, when the variation effect of the third symbol in the drum display device 81 is performed, the symbol arrangement of the left reel LR is arranged in descending order, and the symbol arrangement of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR is arranged in ascending order. rice field. For this reason, when performing a so-called full rotation effect in which the symbols of all reels LR, CR, and RR are aligned and varied in the variable effect, the symbols of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR, both of which are in ascending order, are aligned. When the symbols of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR that you want to start rotation and temporarily stop during the full rotation are aligned with the symbols of the left reel LR, the symbols of the left reel LR and the middle reel CR and the right reel RR Start the rotation so that the symbols are aligned. Then, the symbols aligned above are temporarily stopped on one of the effective lines (for example, the middle line), and the symbols are repeated a plurality of times to execute the full rotation effect. In this case, the music (sound effect) is output according to the timing of the temporary stop, and the music (sound effect) is output at the start and during the rotation of each reel LR, CR, RR. You can perform powerful productions that are rhythmic and have a good tempo.

<Modification 23>
In the first embodiment, the game board 13 is provided with the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a and the board surface second decorative symbol group 60b imitating the fish school pattern, and the rear light guide plate 420 is provided with the first decoration having the same form as the fish school pattern. A symbol group 421 was provided, and the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420 were configured to perform an integrated effect. In this case, the fish symbol is completed by the first decorative symbol group 60a or the second decorative symbol group 60b on the board surface 13 of the game board 13 and the first decorative symbol group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420. May be configured to be arranged. Specifically, for example, in the first decorative pattern group 60a on the board surface, a pattern in which a part of the fish is interrupted is arranged, and the remaining pattern portion of the fish is arranged on the rear light guide plate 420, and is viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, one fish pattern is formed. With this configuration, the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420 can continuously perform an integrated effect in the left-right direction, and the boundary between the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420 can be executed. It is possible to suitably suppress the unnaturalness caused by the discontinuity of the fish pattern of 1 in the portion. In consideration of the height difference between the board surface position of the game board 13 and the rear light guide plate 420 (height in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10), the size of each divided fish pattern is formed, and the pachinko machine 10 is formed. It is preferable to configure the fish pattern 1 so that it can be recognized without discomfort (so as not to be unnatural) when viewed from the front direction of.

<Modification 24>
In the first embodiment, the decorative pattern or the like is not arranged on the display area forming member 430, and the effective line in the drum display device 81 is clarified. On the other hand, a decorative symbol may be arranged on the display area forming member 430 so that the light guide unit 400 or the game board 13 can perform an integrated effect. Specifically, for example, the display area forming member 430 also forms a fish school decorative symbol having the same shape as the fish school symbols of the first decorative symbol group 421, the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a, and the board surface second decorative symbol group 60b. The game board 13, the rear light guide plate 420, and the display area forming member 430 may be configured to perform an integrated effect. In this case, for example, a pattern in which a part of the fish is interrupted is arranged on the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a, the rear light guide plate 420, or the rear light guide plate 420, and the display area forming member 430 is arranged on the remaining pattern portion of the fish. Then, the fish pattern of 1 is formed when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, the game board 13 or the rear light guide plate 420 and the display area forming member 430 can continuously perform an integrated effect in the left-right direction.

<Modification 25>
In the first embodiment, the lens cut 432 of the display area forming member 430 is formed of a plurality of rib shapes. On the other hand, the lens cut 432 is configured so that light from the outside is unlikely to be incident on the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 by light diffusion processing (for example, grain processing) that forms fine irregularities. You may.

<Modification 26>
In the first embodiment, the light emitted from the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c is collected by the condenser lenses 414d, 415d, and 416d to provide directivity to the front direction of the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c. It was configured to irradiate the light having the light and incident the light on the front light guide plate 410. On the other hand, a light emitting means having a directivity different from the above configuration may be used so that the light is incident on the front light guide plate 410. Specifically, for example, a lens that absorbs light other than the front direction and irradiates only the light in the front direction in the front direction of each of the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c may be used.

<Modification 27>
In the first embodiment, the leftward diffusing portion 425a, the frontal diffusing portion 425b, and the rightward diffusing portion 425c of the rear upper diffusing lens 423 and the rear lower diffusing lens 425 are configured in the same shape, and each diffusing portion is formed. It was configured to diffuse the light at the same angle with respect to the light radiated to the lenses 423 and 425. On the other hand, the rear upper diffusing lens 423 and the rear lower diffusing lens 425 are formed so that the shapes of the diffusing portions 425a and the like are different, and the rear upper diffusing lens 423 and the rear lower diffusing lens 425 are formed. The angle of the diffused light may be different from that of the lens. With this configuration, light is guided from various directions to the inside of the rear light guide plate 420, and light is comprehensively guided to the inside of the rear light guide plate 420, and all the first decorations are made. The symbol group 421 can be appropriately lit. Further, by making the angle of the traveling direction of the light diffused by the rear upper diffusing lens 423 different from the angle of the traveling direction of the light diffused by the rear lower diffusing lens 425, the first decorative symbol group It is possible to give randomness to the lighting (light emission) display of the 421, and it is possible to suppress the light emission display of the first decorative symbol group 421 from becoming monotonous.

<Modification 28>
In the first embodiment, in the rear lower diffusing lens 425, the left diffusing portion 425a, the front diffusing portion 425b, and the right diffusing portion 425c are commonly configured in all the recesses of the rear light guide plate 420. The rear lower diffusing lens 425 at the rightmost end or the leftmost end is also configured to have a right diffusing portion 425c or a left diffusing portion 425a. On the other hand, in the rear lower diffusing lens 425 at the rightmost end or the leftmost end of the rear light guide plate 420, the right diffusing portion 425c or the left diffusing portion 425a is not formed, and the front diffusing portion 425b and the left. The rear diffusing portion 425a, or the front diffusing portion 425b and the right diffusing portion 425c may be configured to form the rear lower diffusing lens 425. With this configuration, the light is not diffused in the direction in which the first decorative symbol group 421 is not arranged, and the light emitted by each LED 424 can be radiated to the rear light guide plate 420 without waste.

<Modification 29>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 notify the jackpot expectation suggestion in the fluctuation effect, and the confirmation lamp 311 informs the jackpot occurrence suggestion in the fluctuation effect, and each suggestion is made by a different display device. Was configured to run. On the other hand, one display device, for example, one light guide plate, a drum display device 81, or a liquid crystal display device may be configured to execute the jackpot expectation suggestion and the jackpot generation suggestion. In this case, when the execution timings of the jackpot occurrence suggestion and the jackpot expectation suggestion are combined, the execution area of the execution jackpot expectation suggestion is set as in the case where the confirmation lamp 311 is turned on when the first decorative symbol group 421 is executed. It is preferable to reduce the size and execute the jackpot occurrence suggestion.

<Modification 30>
In the first embodiment, the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420 are arranged on the front side of the drum display device 81 that executes the variation effect of the third symbol, and the variation effect is performed by the light guide plates 410 and 420, respectively. It was configured to perform a notice effect. On the other hand, one or a plurality of movable accessories such as a shutter accessory may be arranged on the front side of the drum display device 81, and the movable accessory may be configured to perform a warning effect in the variable effect.

<Modification 31>
In the first embodiment, the display area forming member 430 is arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the drum display device 81, and the area of the drum display device 81 visible from the central opening 431 of the display area forming member 430 is an effective line. It was configured as. On the other hand, the display area forming member 430 may be configured to be driveable, the display area of the drum display device 81 visible from the central opening 431 may be variably configured, and the number of effective lines may be changed. ..

<Modification 32>
In the first embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is provided below the front view of the game board 13 (lower side of the front view of the first starting port 64a), and the variable winning device 65 can be opened and closed only at the time of a big hit. Was provided, and only the function as a winning device for a game ball was installed. On the other hand, the variable winning device 65 has a first special symbol lamp that can variably display the execution status of the variable effect of the first special symbol in response to the variable effect of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol. The second special symbol lamp that is variably displayed according to the fluctuation effect, the first hold number lamp corresponding to the hold number of the first special symbol, the second hold number lamp corresponding to the hold number of the second special symbol, and the game ball A so-called fourth symbol display such as a launch mode notification lamp (so-called right-handed notification lamp) that suggests a launch mode to the player, an error notification lamp that notifies the player that a normal game has not been executed in the pachinko machine 10, and the like. Functions such as a device and a game status suggestion device may be added. With this configuration, the game status can be grasped only by the variable winning device 65, so that even if the drum display device 81, various notification lamps, or the like fails, the variable winning device 65 can be used. The notification function makes it possible to accurately suggest the game situation to the player. Further, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, and the second starting port 64b are arranged on the right side of the front view of the gaming board 13, and the gaming state advantageous to the player (that is, the “probability fluctuation state” or the “time shortening state””. ), In the case of a pachinko machine that allows a player to perform a so-called right-handed game, the above-mentioned game is performed by adding functions such as a so-called fourth symbol display device and a game status suggestion device to the variable winning device 65. By confirming the variable winning device 65 in the state, it is possible to simply suggest the game content (result) to the player.

<Modification 33>
In the first embodiment, the rear upper diffusing lens 423 and the rear lower diffusing lens 425 provided on the rear light guide plate 420 are formed in the same shape. On the other hand, the shape of the rear upper diffusing lens 423 and the shape of the rear lower diffusing lens 425 may be different from each other. Specifically, for example, the angle of the light path diffused by the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the angle of the light path diffused by the rear lower diffuser lens 425 are different from each other. It constitutes the shape of the diffuser lens 423 for the upper side and the diffuser lens 425 for the lower rear side. With this configuration, randomness is created in the overlapping portion of the optical path of the light diffused from the rear upper diffuser lens 423 and the optical path of the light diffused from the rear lower diffuser lens 425, which is unexpected. It is possible to realize a lighting display of a certain decorative pattern and perform various effects.

<Modification 34>
In the first embodiment, the optical path widths of the light emitted from the left-direction diffusing portion 425a, the front-direction diffusing portion 425b, and the right-direction diffusing portion 425c forming the recess of 1 of the rear lower diffusing lens 425 are the same. As described above, the side lengths of the left-direction diffusion portion 425a, the front-direction diffusion portion 425b, and the right-direction diffusion portion 425c were formed. On the other hand, the optical path widths of the light emitted from the left-direction diffusion portion 425a, the front-direction diffusion portion 425b, and the right-direction diffusion portion 425c may be different from each other. Specifically, for example, the side lengths of the left-direction diffusion portion 425a, the front-direction diffusion portion 425b, and the right-direction diffusion portion 425c are the same (for example, all 50 μm), and the light emitted from the front-direction diffusion portion 425b. The width of the optical path of the light may be different from the width of the optical path of the light emitted from the left-direction diffuser portion 425a and the right-direction diffuser portion 425c. With this configuration, randomness is created in the optical path of the light diffused from each of the diffusing portions 425a to 425c, and it is possible to realize an unexpected lighting display of a decorative pattern, and it is possible to execute various effects.

<Modification 35>
In the first embodiment, the front right LED 415c and the front left LED 416c corresponding to the fourth decorative symbol group 413 in the front light guide plate 410 are arranged so that the fourth decorative symbol group 413 can be lit and displayed. It was composed. On the other hand, the LED corresponding to the 4th decorative symbol group 413 (for example, the front right LED 415c) is arranged only on one side (for example, to the right), and the 4th decorative symbol group 413 is lit and displayed. It may be configured as. With such a configuration, the installation cost of the LED can be reduced.

<Modification 36>
In the first embodiment, the condenser lenses 414d, which collect the light emitted from the LEDs 414c, 415c, and 416c, so that the decorative symbols 411, 421, 413 in the front light guide plate 410 can be lit and displayed. 415d and 416d were arranged. On the other hand, at least one or more condenser lenses 414d, 415d, 416d of each condenser lens 414d, 415d, 416d are not arranged, and depending on the part, the light emitted from each LED 414c, 415c, 416c is collected by the condenser lens. It may be configured to directly irradiate the front light guide plate 410 without using the above. In particular, for an LED corresponding to a portion where it is not necessary to collect light from each LED 414c, 415c, 416c (for example, a decorative symbol in which different decorative symbols are not adjacent to each other (that is, a fourth decorative symbol group 413)). Is configured so that the condenser lens is not arranged. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate a condenser lens in a portion where a discrepancy in staging is unlikely to occur, reduce the number of parts of the light guide unit 400, and reduce the manufacturing cost.

<Modification 37>
In the first embodiment, in the rear light guide plate 420, diffusion lenses 423 and 425 are formed on the upper end surface of the rear upper flat plate portion and the lower end surface of the rear lower flat plate portion, respectively, and each diffusion lens 423 is formed. , The first decorative symbol group 421 can be lit and displayed by the light diffused from 425. On the other hand, the diffuser lens 425 is formed only on one of the end faces (for example, the lower end face of the rear lower flat plate portion), and diffuses on the other end face (for example, the upper end face of the rear upper flat plate portion). The first decorative symbol group 421 may be lit only by the diffusion lens 425 formed on one of the end faces without forming a lens. With such a configuration, the number of parts of the light guide unit 400 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

<Modification 38>
In the second embodiment, in the light guide plates 440 and 450 of 2, the second front light guide plate 440 having the second front lower inverted R shape portion 440a, which is the only R shape portion in the second front light guide plate 440, and the second The light guide unit 400 was formed by the second rear light guide plate 450 having the second rear lower positive R shape portion 450a, which is the only R shape portion in the rear light guide plate 450. On the other hand, as the light guide unit 400, the front light guide plate located on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 has a regular R shape portion (that is, the same direction as the outer peripheral shape on the front side of the drum display device 81) as the only R shape portion. The front light guide plate having the R shape) and the rear light guide plate located on the back side of the front light guide plate have an inverted R shape portion (that is, an outer peripheral shape on the front side of the drum display device 81) as the only R shape portion. It may be configured to provide a rear light guide plate having an inverted R-shaped portion). With this configuration, a predetermined space can be formed between the upper flat plate portion of the front light guide plate and the rear light guide plate. Therefore, for example, an effect by another effect device (for example, an effect by another effect device) can be formed in the predetermined space. By configuring the movable accessory (such as haunting) to be feasible, it is possible to perform various effects by the light guide unit 400 and other effect devices, and to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the second embodiment, the light guide plates 440 and 450 having the only R-shaped portions formed on the lower side of the drum display device 81 are provided. On the other hand, a light guide plate having a unique R-shaped portion may be provided on the upper side, the left side, or the right side of the drum display device 81.

<Modification 39>
In the second embodiment, the light guide plates 440 and 450 of 2 are configured to have R-shaped portions, respectively. On the other hand, the R-shaped portion is formed only on one of the light guide plates 440 and 450, and the R-shaped portion is not formed on the other light guide plates 450 and 440, that is, the light guide plate is composed of only the flat plate portion. May be good. Further, it may be configured to execute various effects by using only one light guide plate having one R-shaped portion.

<Modification 40>
In the second embodiment, the second front lower decorative symbol 443 (second posterior lower decorative symbol 453) provided on the second front lower inverted R-shaped portion 440a (second rear lower positive R-shaped portion 450a) is provided. The second front lower side lower LED 441 (second rear side lower side LED 451) is arranged at the lower position of the second front side lower reverse R shape part 440a (second rear side lower positive R shape part 450a) so that the light can be turned on. rice field. On the other hand, the second front upper decorative symbol 442 (second rear upper decorative symbol 452) may be configured to be lit by the second front lower lower LED 441 (second rear lower LED 451). With such a configuration, restrictions on the arrangement of LEDs in the light guide unit 400 can be relaxed, and the degree of freedom in designing the light guide unit 400 can be improved.

<Modification 41>
In the first embodiment, the two light guide plates 410 and 420 are provided, one light guide plate 410 is irradiated with light via the condenser lenses 414d, 415d and 416d, and the other light guide plate 420 is diffused. It was configured to irradiate light through the lenses 423 and 425. Further, in the third embodiment, the light guide plate 470 of 1 is provided, and the light guide plate 470 is irradiated with light via the condenser lenses 475b and 476b, and the light is irradiated through the diffusion lens 473. It was composed. On the other hand, when two light guide plates are provided, only one condenser lens, a plurality of condenser lenses, and one condenser lens are provided for one light guide plate according to the type or mode of the decorative symbol to be lit. The light is irradiated with only the diffuser lens, a combination of a plurality of diffuser lenses, a condenser lens and a diffuser lens, or neither a condenser lens nor a diffuser lens, and one condenser lens is used with respect to the other light guide plate. Only, a plurality of condenser lenses, one diffuser lens, a plurality of diffuser lenses, a combination of a condenser lens and a diffuser lens, or neither a condenser lens nor a diffuser lens may be configured to irradiate light. .. Further, when 1 light guide plate is provided, only 1 condenser lens, a plurality of condenser lenses, and 1 diffusion lens are provided for the light guide plate according to the type or mode of the decorative pattern to be lit. Only a plurality of diffusing lenses, a combination of a condensing lens and a diffusing lens, or neither a condensing lens nor a diffusing lens may be configured to irradiate light. With such a configuration, a desired lighting display can be performed on the decorative symbol on the light guide plate by appropriately adopting a condenser lens or a diffuser lens according to the type or mode of the decorative symbol to be lit. , The effect of the light guide plate can be enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

<Modification 41>
In the fourth embodiment, the "chance" symbols are arranged in each reel LR, CR, and RR, and a game of whether or not the "chance" is stopped is created. On the other hand, the "chance" symbols may not be arranged on each reel LR, CR, RR, and the symbol arrangement may be configured only by the numerical symbols. With this configuration, the acceleration / deceleration pattern and constant speed required to skip the "chance" symbol when the "chance" symbol is arranged at the time of the variable element of "pseudo fluctuation" and full rotation. It is possible to simplify the symbol control such as changing the fluctuation time scale and fine-tuning the slip return, and standardize the acceleration / deceleration pattern, fluctuation time and slip return variation of each reel LR, CR, RR. This makes it possible to reduce the control load of the symbol control of each reel LR, CR, RR.

<Modification 42>
In the fourth embodiment, the symbol control including the pseudo stop symbol in the fluctuation element of the “pseudo fluctuation” has been described. On the other hand, the symbol control of the pseudo-stop symbol may be configured to be adopted in the re-lottery effect or the full rotation effect in which the jackpot symbol changes during the variable effect. With such a configuration, the pattern of the symbol control in the re-lottery effect and the pattern of the symbol control in the "full rotation" effect can be simplified, and the control burden related to the symbol control can be reduced.

<Modification 43>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the symbol control and the voice output control in the "full rotation" effect have been described. On the other hand, the above-mentioned symbol control and voice output control are used for other variable elements in the variation effect, for example, a variable element of "pseudo-variation", a variable element of "re-variation", or any "reach display". It may be configured to be adopted in a part of the production. With this configuration, by interlocking the symbol control and voice output control in the variable effect, the discomfort based on the symbol control is canceled (suppressed) by the harmony of the music by hearing, and the player in the variable effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by suppressing the awakening of the game without giving a sense of discomfort.

<Modification 44>
In the first embodiment, in each reel LR, CR, RR, a big hit is not given only by aligning the reels, and a "chance" symbol, which is a symbol that develops into any "reach display", is arranged. On the other hand, in each reel LR, CR, RR, the "chance" symbols that do not directly give a jackpot are not arranged, and the symbol arrangement is composed only of the numerical symbols that can directly give a jackpot when they are aligned. You may. With this configuration, it is possible to control the symbol without considering the "chance" symbol when performing the so-called symbol step-up effect during the "pseudo-variation" fluctuation element or the "full rotation" effect. As a result, by simplifying the symbol control, the control load related to the symbol control can be reduced.

<Modification 45>
In the fourth embodiment, the "345" symbol, which is not arranged on the other reels LR and RR, is arranged on the middle reel CR. On the other hand, the middle reel CR may also have the same symbol arrangement as the other reels LR and RR, and may be configured by an arrangement that does not include a special symbol such as the "345" symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to perform symbol control without considering the "345" symbol when performing a so-called symbol step-up effect during a "pseudo-variation" variation element or a "full rotation" effect. As a result, by simplifying the symbol control, the control load related to the symbol control can be reduced.

<Modification 46>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the output and the non-output of the music are repeated for each temporary stop at the time of "full rotation" production. On the other hand, a predetermined music may be continuously output during the "full rotation" effect, and other music may be output in accordance with each temporary stop and rotation start.

<Modification 47>
In the first embodiment, the light emitted by each LED 414c or the like is incident from any end of the front light guide plate 410 and the rear light guide plate 420. On the other hand, for example, by providing a predetermined recess in the flat plate portion or R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420 and irradiating the recess with light, the front light guide plate 410 or the rear side is provided. The light may be irradiated toward the inside of the light guide plate 420, and the light may be guided to the front light guide plate 410 or the rear light guide plate 420. With such a configuration, the degree of freedom in design such as the arrangement of each LED 414c can be improved.

<Modification 48>
In the upper first embodiment, each reel LR, CR, RR is rotationally driven by a drum display device 81 having each reel LR, CR, RR as a display means (effecting means). It was configured to execute the variation effect of the third symbol attached to the RR. On the other hand, the belt members are rotationally driven by a rotary belt type reel mechanism composed of a plurality of belt members wound around a plurality of pulleys in a loop and having a plurality of third symbols printed on the reels. , The variation effect of the third symbol attached to each belt member may be executed.

<Modification 49>
In the first embodiment, the LEDs 422c and 424 are turned on and displayed in order from the right end of the front view to the left side of the front view on the rear light guide plate 420, so that the first decorative symbol group 421 is displayed from the right side of the front view to the left side of the front view. It was configured to perform an effect as if it were moving. On the other hand, the LEDs 422c and 424 are lit and displayed in order from the right end of the rear light guide plate 420 to the left side of the front view, and the LEDs 422c and 424 are turned on in order from the left end of the front view of the rear light guide plate 420 to the right side of the front view. It may be displayed and an effect as if the first decorative symbol group 421 moves from both ends of the rear light guide plate 420 toward the center may be performed.

<Modification 50>
In the first embodiment, when the execution of a plurality of effects overlaps, that is, when the lighting display of the first decorative symbol group 421 on the rear light guide plate 420 and the lighting display by the confirmation lamp 311 can be performed at the same time. In order to clearly execute the effect by the confirmation lamp 311 which is highly important for the game (suggesting that the jackpot base degree is high), the effect area of the first decorative symbol group 421 was configured to be reduced. On the other hand, when the execution of a plurality of effects overlaps, a predetermined priority order (for example, high or low degree of expectation of the effect, size or smallness of the effect execution area, early order of the effect) 1 based on slowness or slowness, length or shortness of staging time, large or small amount of suggestive information (information transmitted to the player), front side or rear side in the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10. It may be configured to preferentially execute the effect of (reducing other effects). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player accurately recognize the effect to be prioritized based on a predetermined rule set in advance.

<Modification 51>
In the first embodiment, the light emitted from each LED 414c or the like is condensed by each condensing lens 414d or the like, and the light whose directivity is enhanced by the condensing lens 414d or the like is substantially in front of each LED 414c or the like. It was configured to irradiate toward the front light guide plate 410 in the lateral direction. On the other hand, the light emitted from each LED 414c or the like is configured to have higher directivity than the case where the light is irradiated (diffused) only by the LED 414c or the like and to irradiate the light toward the front light guide plate 410. May be good. Specifically, for example, light from each LED 414c or the like is condensed by using a condenser lens capable of diffusing light in the front direction of each LED 414c or the like and an oblique direction (for example, about ± 15 degrees) in the front direction. It may be configured to slightly diffuse and irradiate the front light guide plate 410.

<Modification 52>
In the first embodiment, the light emitted from each LED 424 or the like is diffused by each diffusing lens 425 or the like, and the light whose diffusivity is enhanced by the diffusing lens 425 or the like is emitted from each LED 424 or the like in the front direction and the front surface thereof. It was configured to guide light in three directions: a left direction inclined by about 20 degrees to the left from the direction, and a right direction inclined by about 20 degrees to the right from the front direction. On the other hand, even if the light emitted from each LED 424 or the like is configured to have higher diffusivity than the case where the light is irradiated (diffused) only by the LED 424 or the like and to guide the inside of the rear light guide plate 420. good. Specifically, for example, there are three directions: the front direction of each LED 424, the left direction tilted within about 15 degrees to the left from the front direction, and the right direction tilted within about 15 degrees to the right from the front direction. A diffuser lens capable of diffusing light may be used to diffuse the light from each LED 424 or the like and irradiate the rear light guide plate 420.

<Modification 53>
In the fourth embodiment, the variable element of "pseudo-variation" is not executed in the pattern including the "4" symbol included in the "345" symbol arranged only in the middle reel CR. That is, directly the non-common "4" symbol such as "2" → "3" → "4", "3" → "4" → "5", "4" → "5" → "6" It is configured not to execute the pattern that includes the target, and skips the non-common "4" symbols such as "2" → "3" → "5" and "3" → "5" → "6" ( (Omitted), it was configured not to execute the variable element of "pseudo-variation" in the pattern that indirectly includes the "4" symbol. On the other hand, although the variable element of "pseudo-variation" in the pattern directly including the non-common "4" symbol is not executed, "2" → "3" → "5" or "3" → "5" A pattern that indirectly includes a non-common "4" symbol such as "6" may be configured to be executed as a pattern of a variable element of "pseudo-variation". In this case, the pattern that does not include the "4" symbol is stored in advance, and the amount of change (variation amount) of the symbol is different from the pattern that changes in the order (for example, "1" → "2" → "3"). Therefore, although it is necessary to control the symbols differently from the symbols in the normal order, it is possible to increase the variation of the variable elements of the "pseudo-variation" and improve the interest of the game.

In each of the above embodiments, the probability setting value can be changed in 6 stages of "1" to "6", and the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed, but the probability setting value can be changed. The stage is not limited to 6 stages, and may be changed to any stage.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the jackpot probability is changed by changing the probability setting value has been described, but the winning probability of a normal symbol or the winning probability of a small hit may be changed.

In addition, when it is determined in the startup process that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, a specific probability setting value (for example, "1") is set from the range of "1" to "6". It may be forcibly set as a value. If it is determined that the probability set value is not within the normal range during the game (for example, in the timer interrupt process), it is better not to forcibly set the probability set value to a specific probability set value. This is to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage due to the sudden change in the jackpot probability during the game.

In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM determination value. In this case, before determining whether the RAM determination value is normal (S107 in FIG. 20), it is determined whether the probability set value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, it is forced. The setting change process is executed to have the hall related persons change the probability setting value, or the hall related persons are urged to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, and the probability setting value is normal. A specific probability setting value within the range may be forcibly set.

In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be included from the calculation of the RAM determination value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 503 or by turning on the setting change switch. As described above, this may be done with the setting key 501. Specifically, the setting key 501 can be rotated from the on state to the setting change position provided in the direction opposite to the off side, and when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, the setting key 501 is automatically turned on. It is configured by encouraging the setting key 501 to return. Then, each time the setting key 501 is rotated from the on state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. This also makes it possible to easily change the probability set value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is determined by turning off the setting key 501 or by turning on the RAM erase switch 503. Although the case has been described, this may be performed by operating a switch provided separately, for example, a setting confirmation switch. This setting confirmation switch is, for example, a switch for confirming the probability setting value by being operated during the "setting change mode", and is provided so as to project from the main board through the hole provided in the board box 100. Even if the board box 100 is not opened, it may be operated by a person related to the hall or the like. Also with this, the probability set value can be easily determined.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode" or the "setting confirmation mode" when the power is turned on, the start-up mode is set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Was. On the other hand, at least the opening of the inner frame 12 is an essential condition, and the start-up mode may be set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Further, the hall may be configured to be able to select whether or not the opening of the inner frame 12 is a condition for changing the setting or confirming the setting.

In each of the above embodiments, the RAM erasing switch 503 is mounted on the main control device 110. On the other hand, the RAM erasing switch 503 may be configured to be mounted on the power supply device 115 or the payout control device 111.

In each of the above embodiments, the jackpot probability and the like can be changed by the setting key 501. On the other hand, the number of prize balls (for example, change from 3 to 5) to be paid out when one prize is won by the setting key 501, and the drive of a movable accessory that assists the prize in the prize opening. Time (change from 3 seconds to 5 seconds), drive width (for example, change from 20 mm to 30 mm), or member that affects the flow mode of the ball (for example, a stage or crune where the ball can roll) It is possible to change the settings related to the degree of advantage to the player, such as the tilt mode (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees) and the tilt mode of the pachinko machine 10 itself (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees). It may be configured.

In each of the above embodiments, the key hole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, the direction of the key hole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the lateral direction (left direction or right direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the diagonal direction of the pachinko machine 10, or the front side of the pachinko machine 10. You may.

In the above embodiment, the big hit random values, the small hit random values, and the lost random values are set as continuous values, and the range determination (for example, "0" or more) is made as to whether or not the big hit is a big hit or whether or not the small hit is a small hit. (Whether it is "49" or less) is possible, and the control load of the main control device 110 is reduced. On the other hand, each random number value to which the game value is given (that is, a big hit random value and a small hit random value) may be configured to be distributed (dissipated) instead of being continuously arranged. Specifically, for example, in the case of the jackpot random number counter C1 updated from "0 to 999", the jackpot random number value is set to "7,341,555,777,831" and the small hit random number value is set to "77,175". , 223, 315, 415, 526, 634, 717, 845 ".

Here, if a value that becomes a jackpot random number value (for example, in the low probability state and the high probability state, if it is "0 to 50", the jackpot) exists continuously regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value is the same. The value may be predicted from the outside, and there is a high possibility that a jackpot will be illegally assigned. Therefore, by configuring as in the above-mentioned modification, it is possible to make it difficult to predict each random value to which the game value is given from the outside, enhance the effect of suppressing fraud, and improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the above-mentioned modification, the jackpot random number value for the low-probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high-probability state defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a are not duplicated. The jackpot random number value may be set. With this configuration, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot can be changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state). Can be made difficult to predict, so that the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type random number C2 are updated by software processing such as timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 23) (so-called soft random number). On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like may be updated by a random number generation IC whose update cycle is faster than the soft random number (so-called hard random number). With such a configuration, it is difficult to grasp the random number value being updated from the outside, and the security performance can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number value is configured to increase evenly as the set value increases. On the other hand, it may be configured to increase the jackpot random number value (or small hit random number value) at an uneven or predetermined rate each time the set value increases. Specifically, for example, the jackpot random number value is increased by "2" for the set values "1" to "3", while the jackpot random number value is increased to "5" for the set values "4" to "6". Increase in increments. With such a configuration, the game value that can be given by the setting difference is greatly changed, and it is possible to provide a game with intonation (sharpness) due to the setting difference, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the corresponding combination in the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to change for each set value. On the other hand, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 or the jackpot type counter (not shown) that determines the content of the jackpot is changed for each set value, and the selection ratio of the jackpot type or the jackpot type is changed. It may be configured so that a setting difference occurs due to the change.

In the above embodiment, the time saving counter common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is used to count the number of times each special symbol is executed in the "time reduction state". On the other hand, using the special figure 2 time saving counter that counts only the number of fluctuation effects of the second special symbol and the total time saving counter that counts the total number of fluctuation effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, " The number of times the dynamic display of each special symbol is executed in the "time reduction state" may be counted, and the end condition of the "time reduction state" may be determined, or only the number of fluctuation effects of the first special symbol may be determined. A special figure 1 time reduction counter may be provided to count the number of times, and the "time reduction state" may be terminated depending on the number of times the first special symbol is executed, and the end condition of the "time reduction state" may be determined. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the dynamic display of the first special symbol. On the other hand, each special symbol may be executed in the order in which the dynamic display is acquired (the order in which it is held), or the dynamic display of the first special symbol may be changed to the dynamic display of the second special symbol. It may be configured to execute with higher priority.

In the above embodiment, the random number value to which the game value is given (that is, the jackpot random number value) is changed according to the setting change, and the changed amount is compensated from the random number value which does not give the game value (that is, the lost random number value). It was configured as follows. On the other hand, when the random number value to which the game value is given (for example, the jackpot random value) is changed due to the setting change, the changed amount is used as the random value to give another game value (for example, the small hit random value). ) May be compensated. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a difference in the game value that can be given for each setting, provide a game with intonation (sharpness) for each setting, and improve the interest of the game.

In the second embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number value is defined (set) so as to be a sequence of "big hit random number value range", "small hit random number value range", and "missing random number value range". )Was. On the other hand, in the jackpot random number table 202a, "the range of the jackpot random number value", "the range of the small hit random number value", "the range of the jackpot random number value (hereinafter referred to as" the range of the re-big hit random number value ")", " Each random number value may be defined (set) so as to be in the order of "range of lost random number values". Here, as the "range of the re-big hit random value", the increase in the big hit random value due to the setting change is configured to correspond. With this configuration, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increase in the jackpot random number value) is adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the lost random number value), and as the setting is changed. The range of random numbers that do not change (that is, big hit random values and small hit random values that do not change even if the settings are changed) can be fixed. As a result, for example, in the hit / fail judgment control program, the basic hit / fail judgment of the fixed random number value is standardized for all the set values, and the increase in the jackpot random number value due to the setting change is additionally added according to the set value. It is possible to make a judgment, facilitate the design of the control program, and reduce the development man-hours.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number value is defined (set) so as to be a sequence of "big hit random number value range", "small hit random number value range", and "missing random number value range". Was there. On the other hand, each random number value may be defined (set) in descending order (or small order) of the number of random number values.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number value is defined (set) so as to be in the order of "range of jackpot random number value", "range of small hit random number value", and "range of lost random number value". Was there. On the other hand, the "range of jackpot random number values" that is increased due to the setting change is specified (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a so as to be adjacent (adjacent) to the "range of lost random number values" that is decreased due to the setting change. ) May be configured. Specifically, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number value is defined (set) so as to be in the order of "range of small hit random number value", "range of jackpot random number value", and "range of lost random number value". .. With this configuration, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increase in the jackpot random number value) is adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the lost random number value), and as the setting is changed. The range of random values that do not change (that is, small hit random values) can be fixed. As a result, for example, in the control program for determining whether or not a small hit is successful, the determination of the small hit random value is standardized for all the set values, and the increase in the large hit random value due to the setting change is additionally determined according to the set value. It is possible to facilitate the design of the control program and reduce the development man-hours.

In the above embodiment, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is improved (up 10 times). On the other hand, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the small hit probability of the special symbol may be improved. Further, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", the degree of increase in the jackpot probability of the special symbol may be set to 10 times or less (for example, 2 times). Furthermore, when shifting from the "normal game state" to the "probability fluctuation state", even if both the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are set to be improved (for example, the jackpot probability is 5 times and the small hit probability is also 5 times). good.

In the second embodiment, the probability of winning the small hit game in the second special symbol is higher than the probability of winning the small hit game in the first special symbol. On the other hand, the winning probability of the small hit game in the first special symbol may be configured to be higher than the winning probability of the small hit game in the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used. The winning probabilities of the small hit games in the above may be configured equally.

In the above embodiment, when the player enters the "probability fluctuation state", the so-called loop type game specification is configured to maintain the "probability fluctuation state" until the next big hit occurs. On the other hand, after the end of the jackpot, no matter which jackpot is won, a game in which a "probability fluctuation state" (so-called ST type) is given with the execution of a predetermined number of dynamic displays as the end condition after the end of the jackpot. It may be configured by specifications. With such a configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and contribute to the improvement of the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, in all the set values, the jackpot probability is evenly increased (all increased by 10 times) when the special symbol changes from the low probability state to the high probability state. On the other hand, the increase rate of the jackpot probability is changed for each set value (for example, the set value "1" is 5 times, the set value "2" is 6 times, ... The set value "6" is 10 times, etc.). It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol, and the phenomenon itself of winning the jackpot game earlier in the high probability state is a setting suggestion. Therefore, in a high-probability state, the playability of how quickly the jackpot is won is born, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the setting difference is configured in the jackpot probability in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state of the special symbol. On the other hand, it is configured to eliminate the setting difference of the jackpot probability in one of the states (low probability state or the high probability state) and to provide the setting difference in the jackpot probability in the other state (high probability state or the low probability state). You may.

In the second embodiment, the jackpot random number value is increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number value is compensated from the lost random number value. On the other hand, the jackpot random number value may be increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number value may be compensated from the small hit random number and the lost random number value. With this configuration, it is possible to compensate for the change in the number of jackpot random numbers due to setting changes from each of the small hit random numbers and the lost random numbers, and the changes in the jackpot random numbers are fixed. It is not necessary to supplement from the predetermined random value of 1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to secure the number of the predetermined random number values from the predetermined random number value of 1 by the change of the jackpot random number value, there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specification, and the degree of freedom in designing the game specification is increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the first embodiment, when the jackpot round selected as the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect" does not exist, the "setting suggestion effect" is configured to be performed at another timing (ending effect). On the other hand, if the jackpot round selected as the execution timing of the "setting suggestion effect" does not exist, the "setting suggestion effect" may be executed in another round existing in the jackpot. In this case, if it is selected to execute the "setting suggestion effect" other than the round that matches the probability setting value, but the round does not exist, the round that matches the probability setting value is excluded. In addition, it may be configured to perform "setting suggestion effect" in other rounds.

In the above embodiment, a "setting suggestion effect" is provided as an effect suggesting a probability setting value that can be set in a plurality of stages, and the "setting suggestion effect" is configured to suggest to the player based on the probability set value and the lottery result. Was. On the other hand, a plurality of stages of events that may occur in the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to suggest to the player based on the lottery result. For example, any of the gaming states (stages) of the pachinko machine 10 provided in a plurality of stages (for example, "normal gaming state", "latent probability fluctuation state", "probability fluctuation state", and "time reduction state"). It may suggest which state (step) of the multi-step production, or it may be configured to suggest which state of the multi-step jackpot expectation. You may.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to give a display instruction to the display control device 114. The command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, a voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command for instructing the output of each voice and lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the voice lamp control device. Further, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the case where the variation start flag is always set to ON when the stop type command is received has been described, but the variation pattern command is received. When the stop type command is received after the above, the fluctuation start flag may be set to on. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a strange variation effect when the variation pattern command is not received and the stop type command is received.

Further, the fluctuation start flag may be set to be on at the timing when the fluctuation pattern command is received. In this case, in the variation display process (S910) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, a display for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command based on the fact that the variation start flag is turned on. The variation pattern command may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, the display control device 114 can cause the drum display device 81 to execute the variation effect based on the display variation pattern command without waiting for the voice lamp control device 113 to receive the stop type command. .. In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing when the stop type command is received. It may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop symbol of the variation effect executed by the drum display device 81 based on the display stop type command.

In the above embodiment, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by the drum display device 81 on which the variable effect is performed, or the fourth symbol display device different from the drum display device 81 is provided and executed by the drum display device 81. The continuous advance notice effect may be executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variable effect. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with an accessory that operates according to various effects, and the accessory may be operated in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect to execute the continuous advance notice effect. Further, the continuous notice effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the voice output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the lighting unit of the pachinko machine 10 may be executed. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

More specifically, as the fourth symbol display device, the first special symbol lamp that variably displays in response to the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special that variably displays in response to the variation effect of the second special symbol. A symbol lamp, a first hold number lamp corresponding to the first special symbol, and a second hold number lamp corresponding to the second special symbol are provided, and a first hold number lamp is provided according to a prize in the first starting port 64a. Lighting control (for example, increase / decrease display according to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is performed, and lighting control of the second reserved number lamp (for example, of the second special symbol) is performed according to the winning of the second starting port 64b. (Increase / decrease display according to the number of reserved balls) is performed, and the lighting control of the first special symbol lamp (for example, the first special) is performed along with (to correspond to) the execution of the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. (Blinking display of the symbol lamp) is performed, and the lighting control of the second special symbol lamp (for example, of the second special symbol lamp) is performed along with the execution of the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol (to correspond). Blinking display). In this way, by notifying the type of the special symbol being executed in the fourth symbol display device, it is possible to suggest the execution mode of the variation effect to the player.

As a result, each time the drum display device 81 (and the special symbol display device 37) performs a variation effect, the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, the accessory is operated in a predetermined mode, and the like. The sound is output from the sound output device 226, or the illumination units 29 to 33 are lit or blinking, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation of a big hit. Further, the player usually pays close attention to the drum display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed and continues the game, but the display of the symbol by the fourth symbol display device different from the drum display device 81 and the accessory. The continuous warning effect is performed by the operation, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the lighting units 29 to 33, so that it is easy for the player to perform an unusual effect. Can be recognized. In addition, the continuous notice effect can be easily continuously performed by simple control such as symbol display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33. It is possible to make a notice production.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the lighting units 29 to 33, the continuous notice effect is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113, so that the start winning is performed. The pachinko machine 10 continuously performs the hit / fail determination and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation in the main control device 110, causes the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous warning effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the variation effect. When performing a notice effect, each control device can be assigned to each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be suppressed to a low level.

It should be noted that the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the drum display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation in a predetermined mode of the accessory, the audio output from the audio output device 226, Further, a continuous advance notice effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the lighting or blinking of the lighting units 29 to 33 and controlling each of them in conjunction with each other. This makes it possible to execute a wider variety of continuous notice effects. Further, a method of executing the continuous notice effect (display by the drum display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, or , A combination of these), a plurality of continuous notice effect modes selected according to the game state (10R probability variation jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 10R normal jackpot, off) after the end of the continuous advance notice effect may be prepared. ..

Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, an image for the continuous advance notice effect different from the variable effect effect may be displayed on the drum display device 81, or the continuous advance notice effect is displayed when the variable effect effect is completed. As the stop symbol, a so-called "chance eye", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, may be displayed. In this case, when the command determination process (S1602 in FIG. 27 (c)) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 determines that the continuous advance notice command is received, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on and the stop symbol determination flag is turned on. , Other stop symbol discrimination flags may be set to off. In the command judgment processing, after the stop identification command processing, the processing corresponding to the continuous warning command is executed in the other command processing, so the chance eye is stopped instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the display stop identification command. It is set as a symbol. Therefore, the chance eye can be confirmed and displayed when the fluctuation is stopped. Then, if the drum display device 81 continuously displays the chance eyes as a stop symbol for each variation effect, the player can have a feeling of expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained.

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 sets the number of reserved balls added by "1" to the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. The case where the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in connection with the start winning prize are included as they are and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described for the hold ball number command to be notified to. The type of the counter included in the ball count command may be a part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include the values of other counters. Further, when the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning, the information indicating the value of each of these counters is included in the hold ball number command and notified. Instead, a command other than the reserved ball count command may include information indicating the values of each counter and notify the voice lamp control device 113 of these values. As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or another information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113. As another command, when the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning is notified to the voice lamp control device 113, the value of each counter to be notified is changed to the variable effect corresponding to any number of holdings. Information indicating whether this is the case may be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 is included in the command in any of the look-ahead information 1st to 4th areas corresponding to the hold counts based on the information regarding the hold count included in the command. The value of the counter can be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the hold ball number command may be stored in the RAM 223. , When a hold ball number command (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, whether it is a big hit or not, a big hit type in the case of a big hit, and a loss based on the value of each counter indicated by the command. Part or all of the deviation type, etc. in the case of It may be stored in RAM 223.

Further, for example, the variation effect based on the start prize for the second starting port 64b may be given priority over the variation effect based on the start prize for the first start port 64a. Alternatively, the variable effect based on the start winning to the first starting port 64a may be given priority over the variable effect based on the starting winning to the second starting port 64b. As a result, it is possible to draw more attention to the player at the starting port where the variable effect is preferentially performed.

In the above embodiment, a case where a first start port 64a, a second start port 64b, and two start ports are arranged on the game board 13 as start ports for starting a big hit lottery when a ball is entered will be described. However, the number is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of starting ports may be one or may be three or more. When there are two or more starting ports, a corresponding holding ball count counter is prepared in the RAM 203 for each starting opening, and each starting opening is reserved as a result of winning a prize in the corresponding starting opening. You may want to count the number. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be held may be set for each starting port in accordance with the starting winning prize to the corresponding starting opening.

Further, when there are two or more starting ports, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in order to notify that the holding has been performed due to the winning of the starting opening is eventually included. It may include information indicating whether the hold was made by winning a prize at the starting port of. Further, the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started may also include information indicating which start port holds the fluctuation effect. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each start port, and when a hold ball number command is received, a hold ball number counter for the start port indicated by the hold ball number command is provided. When the number of reserved balls is set in, and the fluctuation pattern command is received, the number of reserved balls can be counted for each starting port by decrementing the number of reserved balls counter for the starting port indicated by the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, when a plurality of starting openings are arranged on the game board 13, the counter value acquired in connection with the winning of each starting opening (starting winning) may be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired by the main control device 110 in connection with the start winning is the command acquired in connection with the start winning in any of the starting ports. Information indicating the existence may be included. Further, the variation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the variation is started may also include information indicating which start port the variation effect is associated with the start winning. .. Further, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, a look-ahead information storage area is prepared for each start port, and each counter value transmitted from the main control device 110 in association with the start winning to the corresponding start port is supported. It may be stored in the look-ahead information storage area. As a result, each time a variation pattern command is received, shift processing can be performed on the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the start port that has detected the start winning that triggered the execution of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. can. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the pending fluctuation effect can be held in the voice lamp control device 113 for each start port. Therefore, if the probability of winning a jackpot, the probability of sorting a jackpot type, the probability of sorting a missed type, etc. differ depending on the starting slot that won the starting prize, whether or not each variation effect will be a jackpot in the look-ahead processing. It is possible to correctly determine the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, the loss type in the case of a miss, etc. based on which starting port the starting prize is awarded. Further, when the variation effect based on the start prize to the start port 1 is performed in preference to the variation effect based on the start prize to the other start port, the variation based on the start prize to the start port 1 is performed. The look-ahead process can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the effect, and the number of hold times of the variable effect that is the most recent big hit can be correctly determined.

Further, when a plurality of start ports are provided, the voice lamp control device 113 continuously gives notice when the value of each counter acquired based on the start winning to the start port is received from the main control device 110 by a command. When the start of the effect is decided, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed over all the variable effects (holding balls) held at that time regardless of the start opening where the start prize is given. In addition, in a pachinko machine that is provided with a plurality of starting ports and preferentially executes a variable effect for winning a prize at one starting port over a variable effect for winning a prize at another starting port, the variation effect is given priority. The start of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined only from the pre-reading result of the counter value acquired for the winning of the starting port where the variable effect is executed. As a result, it is not determined whether or not the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the starting port having a low priority, and the continuous advance notice effect is not started for this variable effect. If the continuous advance notice effect is started for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the low-priority start port, and the variable effect is constantly suspended at the high-priority start port, the continuous advance notice effect is quite finished. There is a risk of not doing so. On the other hand, in this modification, it is not determined whether or not the continuous advance notice effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning of the starting port having a low priority, and the continuous advance notice effect is applied to this variable effect. Is not started, so it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In the above embodiment, the winning and passing through the through gate 67 to the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, for winning a prize in the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the maximum number of reserved balls may be set separately depending on the starting port, and the maximum number of reserved balls at each starting port is "4." It may be any number other than. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls at each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, but may be different values. Further, the number of reserved balls for variable display based on the winning of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b is set by a numerical value in a part of the drum display device 81, or the area divided into four is reserved. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) by a few minutes, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the special symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured to do so.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the vertical rotation reel drive by the drum display device 81, but the horizontal rotation reel drive by the drum display device 81. Alternatively, the symbol as identification information may be moved and displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction, a horizontal direction, or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol, or a wide variety of motion display or change display is performed separately from the symbol. It also includes the staging display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Group A: Multiple display parts are displayed by lighting one LED with a diffuser lens>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. For example, when a winner is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit that can change a pattern or the like that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine, and a directing means such as a light emitting unit that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the effect of the effect during the game by changing the display mode of the effect means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game by increasing the effect of the above-mentioned staging means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the group A has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming.

It is provided with an effect means (for example, a light guide unit 400) that performs a predetermined effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses.
The staging means
A light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit) having a light emitting unit (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light,
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, the light guide means (for example, the rear side) that makes the predetermined information about the game (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) visible from the front side of the game machine. Light guide plate 420) and
A game machine A0 comprising: a diffusing means (for example, a rear lower diffusing lens 425) that diffuses light from the light emitting means from the width of the light emitting portion.

According to the game machine A0, a predetermined effect is performed as the game progresses by the effect means. Further, when the light emitting means provided in the staging means has a light emitting unit that emits light, and the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the light emitting means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information regarding the game. Can be seen from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, the light from the light emitting means is diffused by the diffusing means from the width of the light emitting portion. As a result, predetermined information having a range larger than the width of the light emitting portion of the light emitting means can be accurately visually recognized, and the effect of the effect of the effect means having the light guide means is enhanced to increase the attention to the game. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine A0
The predetermined part is
A predetermined end of the light guide means, which is
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guide means.

According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined portion is a predetermined end portion of the light guide means, and the diffusion means is integrally formed at the predetermined end portion of the light guide means. This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the staging means by integrally forming the light guiding means and the diffusing means in the staging means and reducing the number of parts.

In the gaming machine A0 or A1
The diffusion means is
At least, a first-direction irradiation unit (for example, a left-direction diffusion unit 425a) that irradiates light from the light emitting means in a predetermined first direction (for example, a left direction) and a second direction (for example, a second direction different from the first direction). For example, it includes a second-direction irradiation unit (for example, a front-direction diffusion unit 425b) for irradiating in the front direction (for example, a recess of 1 of the rear lower diffusing lens 425) having a multi-direction irradiation means (for example, a concave portion of the rear lower diffusing lens 425). A game machine A2 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A0 or A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the multi-directional irradiation means provided in the diffusion means is provided with at least a first-direction irradiation unit that irradiates the light from the light-emitting means in the first direction and a second-direction irradiation unit that irradiates the light in the second direction. Be done. As a result, predetermined information arranged in a plurality of directions can be accurately visualized, and by enhancing the staging effect of the staging means having the light guiding means, the degree of attention to the game can be increased. effective.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A2
The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the first direction and the second direction do not intersect with each other.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines A0 to A2, the following effects are played. That is, it is configured so that the first direction and the second direction do not intersect. As a result, at least the light emitted from the light emitting portion is diffused in two directions by the diffusing means, so that the predetermined information having a range larger than the width of the light emitting portion of the light emitting means or a plurality of provided at different positions. There is an effect that the predetermined symbol of the above can be accurately visualized, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased by enhancing the effect of the effect means having the light guide means.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3
The diffusion means is
The gaming machine A4, characterized in that the plurality of the plurality of direction irradiation means are provided at the predetermined end portion.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A2 or A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at a predetermined end, the diffusion means is provided with a plurality of multi-directional irradiation means. As a result, the light can be bundled and diffused in the first direction and the second direction by each of the plurality of direction irradiation means, so that the predetermined information arranged in the first direction and the predetermined information arranged in the second direction can be diffused. There is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by increasing the effect of the effect of the effect means having the light guide means.

In the gaming machine A4
The diffusion means is
A gaming machine A5, characterized in that a plurality of the plurality of direction irradiation means are continuously formed at the predetermined end portion.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at a predetermined end, a plurality of multi-directional irradiation means are continuously formed in the diffusion means. As a result, regardless of where the light emitting portion of the light emitting means is arranged on the predetermined end side, the light emitting unit in the light guide means is provided by the multidirectional irradiation means continuously provided at the predetermined end. The light from the light can be continuously diffused to make the predetermined information visible. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in design regarding the arrangement of the light emitting portion of the light emitting means can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A5
The multi-directional irradiation means
A third-direction irradiation unit (for example, a right-direction diffusion unit 425c) that irradiates light from the light emitting means in a third direction (for example, a right direction) different from the first direction and the second direction is provided. A game machine A6 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines A2 to A5, the following effects are played. That is, the light from the light emitting means is irradiated in a third direction different from the first direction and the second direction by the third direction irradiation unit provided in the multi-direction irradiation means. As a result, predetermined information arranged in at least three directions can be accurately visualized, and by enhancing the staging effect of the staging means having the light guide means, the degree of attention to the game can be increased. effective.

In the gaming machine A6
The third direction is
A gaming machine A7 characterized in that it does not intersect the first direction and the second direction.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the third direction is configured so as not to intersect the first direction and the second walking. As a result, at least the light emitted from the light emitting unit is diffused in three directions by the diffusing means, so that predetermined information having a range larger than the width of the light emitting unit of the light emitting means can be accurately visually recognized. By enhancing the effect of the effect means having the light guide means, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A7
The diffusion means is
The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that it is formed at least at two ends of the light guide means (for example, an upper end portion and a lower side end portion of the rear light guide plate 420).

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines A0 to A7, the following effects are played. That is, at least the diffusion means are formed at the two ends of the light guide means. As a result, the light can be comprehensively diffused to the light guide means by diffusing the light from each of the plurality of ends. Therefore, it is possible to accurately visualize the predetermined information provided in the light guide means, and by enhancing the effect of the effect means having the light guide means, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game. There is.

In the gaming machine A8
The diffusion means is
A predetermined first end of the light guide means (for example, the lower end of the rear light guide plate 420) and a second end paired with the first end (for example, above the rear light guide plate 420). A gaming machine A9 characterized in that it is formed at each of the side ends).

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the diffusion means is formed at a predetermined first end portion of the light guide means and at the second end portion paired with the first end portion, respectively. Thereby, by diffusing the light from the end portion of 1 and the end portion paired with the end portion, the light can be comprehensively diffused to the light guide means. Therefore, it is possible to accurately visualize the predetermined information provided in the light guide means, and by enhancing the effect of the effect means having the light guide means, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game. There is.

<Group B: Designs are placed on the optical path, and symbols are also placed in the part where the optical paths of different colors overlap>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. For example, when a winner is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit that can change a pattern or the like that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine, and a directing means such as a light emitting unit that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the effect of the effect during the game by changing the display mode of the effect means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game by increasing the effect of the above-mentioned staging means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the group B has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming.

It is provided with an effect means (for example, a light guide unit 400) that performs a predetermined effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses.
The staging means
A first light emitting unit that emits light (for example, one LED of the rear lower side LED 424) and a second light emitting unit (for example, another LED of the rear side lower side LED 424) that is different from the first light emitting unit. Light emitting means (for example, lower LED unit) and
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, the light guide means (for example, the rear side) that makes the predetermined information about the game (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) visible from the front side of the game machine. With a light guide plate 420)
The predetermined information is
At least, the gaming machine B0 is formed at a position overlapping with the optical path of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit or the optical path of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit.

According to the game machine B0, a predetermined effect is performed as the game progresses by the effect means. Further, the light emitting means provided in the staging means is provided with a first light emitting unit that emits light and a second light emitting unit that is different from the first light emitting unit. Then, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the light guide means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information regarding the game can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, at least, predetermined information is formed at a position overlapping the optical path of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit or the optical path of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit. As a result, predetermined information can be accurately visualized by the light emitted from the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit of the light emitting means, and the effect of the effect means having the light guide means can be enhanced. It has the effect of increasing the degree of attention to.

It is provided with an effect means (for example, a light guide unit 400) that performs a predetermined effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses.
The staging means
A first light emitting unit that emits light (for example, the LED of 1 of the rear lower LED 424 or the front diffusing unit 425b of the rear lower diffusing lens 425) and a second light emitting unit different from the first light emitting unit. With a light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit 414) having (for example, another LED of the rear lower LED 424 or a left diffusing portion 425a or a right diffusing portion 425c of the rear lower diffusing lens 425). ,
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, the predetermined information regarding the game (for example, a plurality of fish symbols of the first decorative symbol group 421 or the first decorative symbol group 421) is used as the predetermined effect. The fish symbol of 1) is provided with a light guide means (for example, a rear light guide plate 420) that makes it visible from the front side of the gaming machine.
The predetermined information is
The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that it is formed at at least at a position overlapping the optical path of light emitted from the first light emitting unit or the optical path of light emitted from the second light emitting unit.

According to the game machine B1, a predetermined effect is performed as the game progresses by the effect means. Further, the light emitting means provided in the staging means has a first light emitting unit that emits light and a second light emitting unit that is different from the first light emitting unit, and the light emitted from the light emitting means to the light guide means. Is incident from a predetermined portion, the predetermined information regarding the game can be visually recognized from the front side of the game machine. Then, the predetermined information is formed at at least at a position overlapping with the optical path of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit or the optical path of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit. As a result, predetermined information can be accurately visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine by either the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit, so that the effect of the effect means having the light guide means can be enhanced and the game can be played. It has the effect of increasing the degree of attention to.

In the gaming machine B1
The predetermined information is
The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that it is formed in a size within the range of the optical path width of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit or the optical path width of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit.

According to the gaming machine B2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1. That is, the predetermined information is formed with a size within the range of the optical path width of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit or the optical path width of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit. As a result, predetermined information can be accurately visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine by the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit, so that the effect of the effect means having the light guide means is enhanced and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It has the effect of being able to increase.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2
The predetermined information is
The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that it is formed in a size within the range of the optical path width formed by the optical path of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit and the optical path of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined information is formed with a size within the range of the optical path width formed by the optical path of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit and the optical path of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit. As a result, predetermined information can be accurately visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine by the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit, so that the effect of the staging means having the light guiding means is enhanced and attention is paid to the game. It has the effect of increasing the degree.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3
The predetermined information is
The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that an optical path of light emitted from the first light emitting unit and an optical path of light emitted from the second light emitting unit are formed at overlapping positions.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are played. That is, the predetermined information is formed at a position where the optical path of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit and the optical path of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit overlap. As a result, predetermined information can be accurately visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine by the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit, so that the effect of the staging means having the light guiding means is enhanced and attention is paid to the game. It has the effect of increasing the degree.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4
The light emitting means
When the first light emitting unit emits light of a predetermined first light emitting color (for example, "red"), the second light emitting unit emits a second light emitting color (for example, "blue") different from the first light emitting color. The gaming machine B5, which is provided with a different color light emitting means for emitting the light of the above.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are played. That is, when the different color light emitting means provided in the light emitting means emits light of a predetermined first light emitting color from the first light emitting unit, the second light emitting unit emits light of a second light emitting color different from the first light emitting color. It is configured as follows. As a result, predetermined information can be emitted in various display colors, the effect of the effect means having the light guide means can be enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine B5
The predetermined information is
It is composed of a predetermined first predetermined portion and a second predetermined portion different from the first predetermined portion.
The different color light emitting means
The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the first predetermined portion is irradiated with the light emitted from the first light emitting unit and the second predetermined portion is irradiated with the light emitted from the second light emitting unit. ..

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined information is composed of a predetermined first predetermined portion and a second predetermined portion different from the first predetermined portion. Then, the different color light emitting means irradiates the first predetermined portion with the light emitted from the first light emitting unit and the second predetermined portion with the light emitted from the second light emitting unit. As a result, the predetermined information can be emitted in different colors, and the predetermined information can be emitted in various display colors. Therefore, the effect of the effect means having the light guide means is enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. Has the effect of being able to

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B6
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a diffusing means (for example, a rear diffusing lens 425) for diffusing light from the light emitting means from the width of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit. B7.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B1 to B6, the following effects are played. That is, the light from the light emitting means is diffused by the diffusing means from the width of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit. As a result, predetermined information having a range larger than the width of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit of the light emitting means can be accurately visually recognized, and the effect of the effect means having the light guide means can be enhanced. It has the effect of increasing the degree of attention to.

In the gaming machine B7
The predetermined part is
A predetermined end of the light guide means,
The diffusion means is
The gaming machine B8, which is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guide means.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined portion is a predetermined end portion of the light guide means, and the diffusion means is integrally formed at the predetermined end portion of the light guide means. This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the staging means by integrally forming the light guiding means and the diffusing means in the staging means and reducing the number of parts.

<Group C: Different LEDs are turned on sequentially for each section area in a predetermined direction, and movement display and colorful display>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. For example, when a winner is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit that can change a pattern or the like that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine, and a directing means such as a light emitting unit that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the effect of the effect during the game by changing the display mode of the effect means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game by increasing the effect of the above-mentioned staging means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the group C has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming.

It is provided with an effect means (for example, a light guide unit 400) that performs a predetermined effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses.
The staging means
A first light emitting unit that emits light (for example, the right end LED of the rear lower side LED 424) and a second light emitting unit (for example, the right end of the rear side lower side LED 424) arranged in a predetermined direction from the first light emitting unit. One LED on the left side of the LED) and a third light emitting unit (two LEDs on the left side of the rightmost LED of the rear lower LED 424) arranged further on the predetermined direction side from the second light emitting unit. Light emitting means (for example, lower LED unit) and
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, the light guiding means (for example, the rear side) that makes the predetermined information about the game (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) visible from the front side of the game machine. With a light guide plate 420)
A gaming machine C0 comprising sequentially lighting means (for example, a voice lamp control device 113) for sequentially lighting the light emitting means from a predetermined direction side.

According to the game machine C0, a predetermined effect is performed as the game progresses by the effect means. Further, the light emitting means provided in the staging means includes a first light emitting unit that emits light, a second light emitting unit arranged on a predetermined direction side from the first light emitting unit, and a further predetermined direction from the second light emitting unit. A third light emitting unit arranged on the side is provided. Then, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the light guide means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information regarding the game can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the light emitting means is sequentially turned on from the predetermined direction side by the sequential lighting means. As a result, predetermined information provided in the light guide means can be sequentially visually recognized from the predetermined direction side, and by enhancing the effect of the effect means having the light guide means, the degree of attention to the game can be increased. It has the effect of being able to do it.

A staging means (for example, a light guide unit 400 or a light guide unit 400 and a game board 13) for performing a predetermined effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses is provided.
The staging means
At least, a first light emitting unit that emits light (for example, a rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the right region of the rear light guide plate 420, or a board surface first decorative symbol group 60a) and a predetermined direction from the first light emitting unit. A light emitting means having a second light emitting unit (for example, a rear lower LED 424 corresponding to the central region of the rear light guide plate 420 or a rear light guide plate 420) arranged on the side (for example, left in front view). (For example, the lower LED unit 414 or the game board 13) and
When light is emitted from the light emitting means (at least the second light emitting unit), predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) can be visually recognized from the front side of the game machine (for example, the light emitting means (for example). With a rear light guide plate 420),
Sequential light emitting means that sequentially emits light from the first light emitting unit to the predetermined direction side (for example, lighting control of the first decorative symbol group 421 by the voice lamp control device 113, or a second light emitting means by the voice lamp control device 113. 1 Decorative symbol group 421, lighting control of the board surface first decorative symbol group 60a and the board surface second decorative symbol group 60b), the gaming machine C1.

According to the game machine C1, a predetermined effect is performed as the game progresses by the effect means. Further, the light emitting means provided in the staging means is provided with a first light emitting unit that emits light and a second light emitting unit arranged on a predetermined direction side from the first light emitting unit. Then, when light is emitted from the light emitting means to the light guide means, predetermined information about the game can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the light emitting means sequentially emits light from the first light emitting unit toward a predetermined direction by the sequential light emitting means. As a result, predetermined information provided in the staging means can be sequentially visually recognized from the arrangement position of the first light emitting unit toward the predetermined direction side, and by enhancing the staging effect of the staging means having the light guide means, the game can be played. It has the effect of increasing the degree of attention to.

In the gaming machine C1
By the sequential light emitting means (for example, the voice lamp control device 113), the light emitting means sequentially emitted from the first light emitting unit to the predetermined direction side by the sequential light emitting means is sequentially turned off from the first light emitting unit to the predetermined direction side. The gaming machine C2, which is characterized by having (turn-off control).

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are played. That is, the light emitting means sequentially emitted from the first light emitting unit to the predetermined direction side by the sequentially light emitting means is sequentially turned off from the first light emitting means to the predetermined direction side. As a result, the predetermined information provided in the staging means is sequentially visible from the arrangement position of the first light emitting unit to the predetermined direction side, and then the predetermined information is sequentially invisible or difficult to be visually recognized from the first light emitting unit to the predetermined direction side. By setting this, it is possible to perform a powerful effect as if the predetermined information moves from the arrangement position of the first light emitting unit to the predetermined direction side. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by increasing the effect of the effect of the effect means.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2
The sequential light emitting means
The gaming machine C3 is provided with a light emitting color inheriting means for emitting light in the light emitting color emitted by the first light emitting unit when the second light emitting unit emits light.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines C1 or C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second light emitting unit is made to emit light by the light emitting color inheriting means provided in the sequentially light emitting means, the light is emitted in the light emitting color emitted by the first light emitting unit. As a result, it is possible to perform a powerful effect as if the predetermined information that was visible in the predetermined emission color moves from the arrangement position of the first light emitting unit to the predetermined direction side. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by increasing the effect of the effect of the effect means.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3
The sequential light emitting means
The gaming machine C4 is provided with at least a different color light emitting means for making the light emitting color of the first light emitting unit different from that of the second light emitting unit.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are played. That is, the different color light emitting means provided in the sequentially light emitting means is configured so that at least the light emitting colors of the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit are different. As a result, it is possible to perform a colorful effect as if the predetermined information that can be visually recognized in a plurality of colors moves from the arrangement position of the first light emitting unit to the predetermined direction side. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by increasing the effect of the effect of the effect means.

In the gaming machine C4
The different color light emitting means
After a predetermined first light emitting color (for example, "red") is emitted from the first light emitting unit, the second light emitting unit emits light in the first light emitting color, and the first light emitting unit emits light in the first light emitting unit. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that it emits light in a second emission color (for example, "blue") different from the emission color.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are played. That is, after a predetermined first light emitting color is emitted from the first light emitting unit by the different color light emitting means, the second light emitting unit emits light in the first light emitting color, and the first light emitting unit is different from the first light emitting color. It emits light in the second emission color. As a result, it is possible to perform a colorful effect as if the predetermined information that can be visually recognized in a plurality of colors moves from the arrangement position of the first light emitting unit to the predetermined direction side. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by increasing the effect of the effect of the effect means.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5
The staging means
At least, a predetermined first staging means (for example, a board surface first decorative symbol group 60a) provided on a game area forming member (for example, a game board 13) on which a game ball can flow down, and
A second staging means (eg, for example) provided on the front side of the gaming machine of the display means (for example, the drum display device 81) which is on the predetermined direction side of the first staging means and can execute dynamic display of the identification information. With a rear light guide plate 420),
The sequential light emitting means
The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that it emits light to the first effect means and then emits light to the second effect means.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C1 to C5, the following effects are played. That is, as the staging means, at least a predetermined first staging means is provided on the game area forming member on which the game ball can flow down, and the identification information is dynamically displayed on the predetermined direction side of the first staging means. A second staging means is provided on the front side of the gaming machine as a possible display means. Then, the light emitting means sequentially emits light to the first staging means, and then emits light to the second staging means. As a result, an integrated effect is executed by the first effect means in the game area forming member and the second effect means provided on the front side of the game machine of the display means for dynamically displaying the identification information. There is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by configuring the dynamic display of the identification information and the predetermined effect by the predetermined information to be feasible and enhancing the effect of the effect of the effect means.

In the gaming machine C6
As the predetermined information, the gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the same type of symbol is visually displayed by the first effect means and the second effect means.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as predetermined information, the same type of symbol is visually displayed by the first staging means and the second staging means. As a result, by executing a series of integrated effects by the first effect means and the second effect means, a powerful effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect of the effect is enhanced, so that the degree of attention to the game is increased. It has the effect of being able to increase.

In the gaming machine C7
As the predetermined information, the gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the first effect means and the second effect means form a symbol of 1.

According to the gaming machine C8, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C7. That is, as predetermined information, one symbol is formed by the first staging means and the second staging means. As a result, when performing an effect that straddles the first effect means and the second effect means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort, and by executing a series of integrated effects, a powerful effect can be executed. , There is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by increasing the effect of the effect of the effect means.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C8
The light guide means is
The gaming machine C9 is characterized in that when the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined end portion, the predetermined information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C1 to C8, the following effects are played. That is, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined end portion, the predetermined information provided in the light guide means can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, there is an effect that the effect of the effect means having the light guide means can be enhanced and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C9
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a diffusing means (for example, a rear diffusing lens 425) for diffusing light from the light emitting means from the width of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit. C10.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C1 to C9, the following effects are played. That is, the light from the light emitting means is diffused by the diffusing means from the width of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit. As a result, predetermined information having a range larger than the width of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit of the light emitting means can be accurately visually recognized, and the effect of the effect means having the light guide means can be enhanced. It has the effect of increasing the degree of attention to.

In the gaming machine C9 or C10
The diffusion means is
The gaming machine C11, which is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guide means.

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9 or C10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the diffusion means is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guide means. This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the staging means by integrally forming the light guiding means and the diffusing means in the staging means and reducing the number of parts.

<Group D: When multiple effects overlap, one effect is given priority over the other>

Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. For example, when a winner is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit that can change a pattern or the like that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine, and a directing means such as a light emitting unit that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the effect of the effect during the game by changing the display mode of the effect means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-126296)).

The invention of the D group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to the game.

A first effect means (for example, a light guide unit 400) that performs a first effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses.
It is provided with a second effect means (for example, the confirmation lamp 311) that performs a second effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the confirmation lamp 311) that is more important for the game than the first effect as the game progresses.
The first staging means is
A light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit) having a light emitting unit (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light,
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, the light guiding means (for example, the rear side) that makes the predetermined information about the game (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) visible from the front side of the game machine. With a light guide plate 420)
When the second effect is executed by the second effect means and the first effect is executed by the first effect means, the second effect is preferentially executed over the first effect. The gaming machine D0 is characterized by comprising a staging priority means (for example, turning off the rear upper LED 422c).

According to the gaming machine D0, the first staging is performed by the first staging means as the game progresses. In addition, the second staging means performs a second staging that is more important for the game than the first staging as the game progresses. When the light emitting means provided in the first staging means has a light emitting unit that emits light, and the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the light emitting means from a predetermined portion, the game is related to the game. Predetermined information can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine. Here, when the second effect is executed by the second effect means and the first effect is executed by the first effect means, the second effect has priority over the first effect by the second effect priority means. Will be executed. As a result, even when the first effect and the second effect overlap, the second effect, which is more important for the game than the first effect, is preferentially executed, and the second effect is made more conspicuous than the first effect. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the production content of the second effect, which is important as a game, can be clearly executed, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

A first effect means (for example, a light guide unit 400) that performs a first effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses.
A second effect means (for example, the confirmation lamp 311) that performs a second effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the confirmation lamp 311) different from the first effect as the game progresses.
When the second effect can be executed by the second effect means and the first effect can be executed by the first effect means, the first effect reduction to be executed by reducing the effect scale of the first effect. The gaming machine D1 comprising means (for example, turning off the rear upper LED 422c).

According to the gaming machine D1, the first staging means performs the first staging as the game progresses. In addition, the second staging means performs a second staging different from the first staging as the game progresses. Here, when the second effect can be executed by the second effect means and the first effect can be executed by the first effect means, the effect scale of the first effect is reduced and executed by the first effect reduction means. Will be done. As a result, even when the first effect and the second effect are executed in parallel, the second effect can be relatively conspicuous by reducing the effect scale of the first effect. Therefore, at least, there is an effect that the effect content of the second effect can be clearly executed, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In addition, "execution by reducing the scale of the effect" means, for example, when the execution area of the effect is reduced, or when the size or amount of the symbols appearing as the effect is reduced or reduced, the degree of attention (big hit expectation). ) Is replaced with a production with a low degree of attention, the emission brightness of the production is lowered (transparency is increased), the volume of the production is lowered, or another production is given priority (front side). This is an example of a case where it becomes relatively difficult to see.

In the game machine D1
The second production is
The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that it is an effect having a higher degree of expectation to be given a predetermined game value than the first effect.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are played. That is, the second effect is set as an effect with a higher degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given than the first effect. This will result in
Even when the first effect and the second effect are executed in parallel, the scale of the first effect, which is less expected to be given a predetermined game value than the second effect, is reduced, and the relative second effect is achieved. By giving priority to the two effects, the second effect can be made to stand out. Therefore, there is an effect that the production content of the second effect, which is important as a game, can be clearly executed, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2
A first effect lottery means (for example, a light guide plate lighting pattern table 222e and a light guide pattern lottery counter 223d) for drawing whether or not to execute the first effect, and
A second effect lottery means (for example, a confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 222f and a confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 223e) for drawing whether or not to execute the second effect.
When the second effect is executed based on the lottery result of the second effect lottery means, the first effect of determining whether or not to execute the first effect based on the lottery result of the first effect lottery means. A discriminating means (for example, a light guide pattern setting process (S1415)) is provided.
The first effect reducing means is
The gaming machine D3, characterized in that the scale of the first effect is reduced when it is determined by the first effect determining means that the first effect is to be executed.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 or D2, the following effects are played. That is, the first effect lottery means draws a lottery as to whether or not to execute the first effect, and the second effect lottery means draws a lottery whether or not to execute the second effect. Further, when the second effect is executed based on the lottery result of the second effect lottery means, whether or not the first effect is executed based on the lottery result of the first effect lottery means by the first effect determination means. It is determined. Then, when it is determined by the first effect determining means that the first effect is to be executed, the effect scale of the first effect is reduced by the first effect reducing means. As a result, even if the first effect and the second effect, in which the execution lottery is performed separately, can be executed in parallel, the effect of the first effect depends on whether or not the first effect is executed. By reducing the scale, the second effect can be relatively conspicuous. Therefore, at least, there is an effect that the effect content of the second effect can be clearly executed, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3
The first production is
The gaming machine D4, which can be executed in a wider area than the effect area of the second effect.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are played. That is, the first effect can be executed in a wider area than the effect area of the second effect. That is, even when the second effect and the first effect having a wider effect area than the second effect are executed in parallel, the first effect is reduced by reducing the effect scale of the first effect to be executed. The second effect can be made more conspicuous because the scale of the effect is reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect content of the second effect can be clearly executed, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4
The first staging means is
A light emitting means including a first light emitting unit (for example, rear lower side LED 424) that emits light and a second light emitting unit (for example, rear side upper LED 422c) that emits light.
As the first effect, an irradiated means (for example, a rear light guide plate) that makes it easy to visually recognize predetermined information about a game when light is irradiated from at least one of the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit. 420), and
The first effect reducing means is
When the second effect can be executed by the second effect means and the first effect can be executed by the first effect means, either the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit can be used. The gaming machine D5 is provided with an irradiation reducing means for reducing or stopping the irradiation of light to reduce the visible range of the predetermined information.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are played. That is, as the first staging means, light is emitted from the first light emitting unit provided in the light emitting means, and light is emitted from the second light emitting unit also provided in the light emitting means. Further, as the first effect, when light is irradiated from at least one of the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit, the irradiated means is configured to easily visually recognize the predetermined information regarding the game. Here, when the second effect can be executed by the second effect means and the first effect can be executed by the first effect means, the irradiation reducing means provided in the first effect reducing means causes the first light emitting unit. Alternatively, the irradiation of light from either one of the second light emitting units is reduced or stopped, and the visible range of predetermined information is reduced. As a result, even when the first effect and the second effect are executed in parallel, the irradiation of light from either the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit used for the first effect is reduced or By stopping and reducing the visible range of predetermined information as the first effect, the second effect can be relatively conspicuous. Therefore, at least, there is an effect that the effect content of the second effect can be clearly executed, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In addition, "reducing or stopping the irradiation of light" means, for example, when the light emitting region is reduced, when the light emission brightness is reduced, when the light emission is stopped or interrupted, or when the light emission time is used. The case of reducing the amount of light, or the case of intermittently emitting light is exemplified.

In the gaming machine D5
The irradiation reducing means is
The gaming machine D6, characterized in that the irradiation of light from the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit corresponding to the predetermined information on the second effect means side is reduced or stopped.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are played. That is, the irradiation reducing means reduces or stops the irradiation of light from the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit corresponding to the predetermined information on the second staging means side. As a result, by reducing the visible range of the predetermined information on the second effect means side among the predetermined information, the first effect executed at least in the vicinity of the second effect is made inconspicuous, and the second effect is relatively conspicuous. Can be made. Therefore, at least, there is an effect that the effect content of the second effect can be clearly executed, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine D5 or D6
The irradiated means is
It is a light guide means (for example, a rear light guide plate 420) that makes the predetermined information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when light is emitted from the light emitting means.
A diffusion means (for example, a rear lower diffusing lens 425) for diffusing light from the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit from the width of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit is provided. A gaming machine D7 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5 or D6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when light is emitted from the light emitting means by the light guide means as the irradiated means, the predetermined information can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine. Then, the light from the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit is diffused from the width of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit by the diffusing means. As a result, predetermined information having a range larger than the width of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit of the light emitting means can be accurately visually recognized, and the effect of the effect means having the light guide means can be enhanced. It has the effect of increasing the degree of attention to.

In the gaming machine D7
The predetermined part is
A predetermined end of the light guide means,
The diffusion means is
The gaming machine D8, which is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the light guide means.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined portion is a predetermined end portion of the light guide means, and the diffusion means is integrally formed at the predetermined end portion of the light guide means. This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the staging means by integrally forming the light guiding means and the diffusing means in the staging means and reducing the number of parts.

<Group E: 1 light guide plate for weak notice / medium notice, separate light guide plate for strong notice display>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. For example, when a winner is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit that can change a pattern or the like that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine, and a directing means such as a light emitting unit that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the effect of the effect during the game by changing the display mode of the effect means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game by increasing the effect of the above-mentioned staging means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the group E has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming.

Acquisition means (for example, reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied.
A determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means, and
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determination means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means, the first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting the expectation degree to which the predetermined game value is given to the player, and the first suggestion information. The predetermined game value is given from the second suggestion information (for example, the third decorative symbol 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation that the predetermined game value is given is high, or from the second suggestion information. The suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU221) that draws the execution of any of the third suggestion information (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) that can suggest to the player that the expectation is high.
Based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, a first staging means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information, and
The gaming machine E0 is provided with a second effect means (for example, a rear light guide plate 420) capable of executing the third suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means.

According to the gaming machine E0, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. Here, based on the determination result by the determination means by the suggestion information lottery means, the predetermined game value is obtained from the first suggestion information and the first suggestion information that can suggest the expected degree to which the predetermined game value is given to the player. The second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation to be given is high, or the third suggestion that can suggest to the player that the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given is higher than the second suggestion information. Execution of any of the information is drawn. Then, the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information is executably configured by the first staging means based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, and the second staging is also based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means. By means, the third suggestion information is configured to be feasible. As a result, a third suggestion effect that can suggest to the player that the expectation that a predetermined game value is given is higher than the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is obtained, and the predetermined game value is obtained from the third suggestion information. By executing by an effect means different from the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect that can suggest that the degree of expectation to be given is low, there is a large discrepancy in the effect when the effect is mistakenly executed due to noise or malfunction. 3 It is possible to prevent the suggestion information from being executed abnormally. As a result, there is an effect that the occurrence of the staging discrepancy can be suppressed, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

An acquisition means (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means, and
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determination means.
A suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU221) is provided, which draws a lottery for execution of a suggestion based on suggestive information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a player is given a predetermined game value based on the determination result by the determination means.
The suggested information is at least
The predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting a predetermined degree of expectation to which the predetermined game value is given to the player, and the first suggestion information. The second suggestion information (for example, the third decorative symbol 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation is high, and the game that the expectation that the predetermined game value is given is higher than the second suggestion information. It has a third suggestion information (for example, a first decorative symbol group 421) that can be suggested to a person.
Based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, a first staging means (for example, a front light guide plate 410 and each LED 414c, etc.) capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information, and
A game characterized by comprising a second effect means (for example, a rear light guide plate 420 and each LED 424) capable of executing the third suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means. Machine E1.

According to the gaming machine E1, special information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. Further, the suggestion information lottery means draws a lottery for the execution of the suggestion by the suggestion information that can suggest the expected degree to which a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. Here, as the suggestion information, at least, the first suggestion information that can suggest a predetermined expectation degree to which a predetermined game value is given to the player, and the expectation degree that a predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information. The second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that it is high and the third suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the expectation that a predetermined game value is given is higher than the second suggestion information are provided. Then, the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information is executably configured by the first staging means based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, and the second staging is also based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means. By means, the third suggestion information is configured to be feasible. As a result, a third suggestion effect that can suggest to the player that the expectation that a predetermined game value is given is higher than the first suggestion information and the second suggestion information is obtained, and the predetermined game value is obtained from the third suggestion information. By executing by an effect means different from the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect that can suggest that the degree of expectation to be given is low, there is a large discrepancy in the effect when the effect is mistakenly executed due to noise or malfunction. 3 It is possible to prevent the suggestion information from being executed abnormally. As a result, there is an effect that the occurrence of the staging discrepancy can be suppressed, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine E1
The first staging means is
A first light emitting unit (for example, front right LED 415c or front left LED 416c) that irradiates light toward a predetermined first direction (for example, front left direction or front left right direction).
A second light emitting unit (for example, front lower side LED 414c) that irradiates light in a second direction (for example, a front view upward direction) different from the first direction.
When the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is incident from a predetermined first portion, the first suggestion information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting unit is said to be visible. A first light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that makes the second suggestion information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the light is incident from a second portion different from the first portion.
The first light guide means is
The light emitted toward the first direction is easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted toward the second direction is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine or is difficult to emit. A portion (for example, a vertical groove forming each bubble pattern of the fourth decorative pattern group 413) and
The light emitted toward the second direction is easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted toward the first direction is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, or is difficult to emit the second emission. A gaming machine E2 comprising a portion (for example, a sunfish symbol of a third decorative symbol 412 or a horizontal groove forming each cherry blossom symbol group of the second decorative symbol group 411).

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a second light emitting unit provided in the first staging means irradiates light in a predetermined first direction, and a second light emitting unit provided in the first staging means is different from the first direction. Light is emitted in the direction. Further, when the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is incident on the first light guide means from a predetermined first portion, the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the second light emitting unit becomes visible. When the light emitted from the pachinko machine is incident from a second portion different from the first portion, the second suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, the light emitted toward the first direction is easily emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine by the first emission unit provided in the first light guide means, and is emitted toward the second direction. It is configured so that the light does not emit to the front side of the gaming machine or is hard to be emitted. Further, the light emitted in the second direction is easily emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine by the second emission unit provided in the first light guide means, and is emitted toward the first direction. It is configured so that the light does not emit to the front side of the gaming machine or is hard to be emitted. That is, in the first staging means, the first suggestion information is visible depending on the light from the first direction, the second suggestion information is invisible or difficult, and the second suggestion information is visually recognized by the light from the second direction. By making the first suggestion information invisible or difficult while making it possible, a plurality of suggestive information can be expressed even in the first staging means of 1. As a result, even when a plurality of suggestion information is provided in the first staging means, each suggestion information can be distinguished and visually recognized by controlling the light emission of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit, respectively. It is possible, and there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by enhancing the effect of the first effect by making it possible to express a plurality of suggestive information in the first effect means.

In the gaming machine E2
The first staging means is at least
Directivity improving means for enhancing the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit (for example, front lower side condensing lens 414d, front side right condensing lens 415d, or front side left condensing lens 416c). ), The gaming machine E3 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E1 or E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the directivity improving means provided in the first staging means at least enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit. As a result, even when a plurality of suggestion information is provided in the first staging means, only the suggestion information of the irradiation target can be accurately visually recognized. Therefore, there is a case where the second suggestion effect that can suggest to the player that the expectation that a predetermined game value is given is higher than the first suggestion information is executed by the same first effect means as the first suggestion information. Also, by controlling the light emission of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit, each suggestive information can be distinguished and made visible. As a result, there is an effect that desired suggestion information can be accurately visualized, and by accurately suggesting information about the game to the player, the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3
The second staging means is
A third light emitting unit that emits light (for example, a rear lower LED 424) and
A second light guide means (for example, a rear light guide plate) that makes only the third suggestive information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when the light emitted from the third light emitting unit is incident from a predetermined third portion. 420) and
The gaming machine E4 is provided with a diffusing means (for example, a rear lower diffusing lens 425) that diffuses light from the third light emitting unit from the width of the third light emitting unit.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are played. That is, as the second staging means, when light is emitted from the third light emitting unit and the light emitted from the third light emitting unit is incident from a predetermined third portion, the third suggestive information is provided by the second light guide means. Is visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, the light from the third light emitting unit is diffused from the width of the third light emitting unit by the diffusing means. As a result, in the second light guide means provided with only the suggestion information of 1, the light emitted from the third light emitting unit is diffused from the width of the third light emitting unit, so that the arrangement of the third light emitting unit is obtained. Can also irradiate a wide range of light. As a result, for example, even when the third suggestion information is largely provided in the second light guide means, the third suggestion information can be accurately visualized, and the staging means having the light guide means can be produced. By increasing the effect, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine E4
The diffusion means is
The gaming machine E5, characterized in that it is integrally formed with the third portion of the second light guide means.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is integrally formed at the third portion of the second light guide means. As a result, in the second staging means, the second light guide means and the diffusing means are integrally formed to reduce the number of parts, so that the degree of freedom in designing the second staging means can be increased. There is.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5
The first staging means and the second staging means are
The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that it is arranged overlapping with respect to the front direction of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines E1 to E5, the following effects are played. That is, the first effect means and the second effect means are arranged overlapping with respect to the front direction of the gaming machine. As a result, there is an effect that the attention to the game can be increased by enhancing the effect of the effect means by making a plurality of suggestive information visible in one effect area.

In the gaming machine E6
The first staging means is
The gaming machine E7 is arranged on the front side with respect to the front direction of the gaming machine from the second staging means.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first staging means is arranged on the front side of the second staging means with respect to the front direction of the gaming machine. That is, the first suggestion information and the second suggestion, which are less expected to be given a predetermined game value than the third suggestion information, to the front side of the gaming machine of the second staging means in which the third suggestion information is visible. A first staging means is arranged so that the information can be visually recognized. Thereby, for example, even when the light from the indoor lighting of the game hall is irradiated from the front side of the gaming machine, the amount of light arriving at the second staging means by the first staging means can be reduced. There is an effect that erroneous lighting of the third suggestion information, which is more affected by the staging discrepancy than other suggestion information, can be suppressed.

<Group F: 1 light guide plate has multiple display objects, and the optical path direction of the LED is different for each display object. Within 1 light guide plate, a small-directional system area (one-way, sunfish, cherry blossom) and a multi-directional system area (2 directions, bubble group), strong production in small direction (weak production in places where optical paths overlap)>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. For example, when a winner is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit that can change a pattern or the like that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine, and a directing means such as a light emitting unit that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the effect of the effect during the game by changing the display mode of the effect means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game by increasing the effect of the above-mentioned staging means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the F group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied.
A determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means, and
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determination means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means, at least the first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) that can suggest to the player the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given, or the first. Suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU221) for drawing the execution of the second suggestion information (for example, the third decorative symbol 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation that the predetermined game value is given is higher than the suggestion information. )When,
A staging means (for example, a light guide unit 400) capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means is provided.
The staging means
A first light emitting means (for example, front right LED 415c and front left LED 416c) that irradiates light in a predetermined first direction (for example, left-right direction).
A second light emitting means (for example, front lower side LED 414c) that irradiates light in a second direction (for example, upward direction) different from the first direction, and
The first suggestion information when the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined first portion (for example, the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 and the left-right end face of the downward inverted R-shaped portion). Is visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting means is from a second portion (for example, the lower end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410) different from the first portion. A light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that makes the second suggestion information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when incident is provided.
At least, the second suggestion information is
The gaming machine F0 is provided in the staging means at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410).

According to the gaming machine F0, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. Here, based on the determination result by the determination means by the suggestion information lottery means, at least the first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the expectation degree to which the predetermined game value is given, or the first suggestion information is predetermined. The execution of the second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the expectation that the game value of the above is given is high is drawn. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information is executably configured by the staging means. Here, the first light emitting means provided in the staging means irradiates the light in a predetermined first direction, and the second light emitting means also provided in the staging means emits light in a second direction different from the first direction. Be irradiated. Then, in the light guide means, when the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from the predetermined first portion, the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine and is emitted from the second light emitting means. When the emitted light is incident from a second portion different from the first portion, the second suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, in the staging means, the second suggestion information is provided at least at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap. That is, a second suggestion effect that can suggest to the player that the expectation that a predetermined game value is given is higher than the first suggestion information is provided at a position where the lights of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second suggestion information, which has a large effect discrepancy, from being abnormally executed when it is erroneously executed due to noise or malfunction. As a result, there is an effect that the occurrence of the staging discrepancy can be suppressed, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

An acquisition means (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means, and
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determination means.
A suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU221) that draws a lottery for execution of a suggestion by suggestive information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the judgment result by the determination means.
A staging means (for example, a light guide unit 400) capable of executing a suggestion based on the suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means is provided.
The suggested information is at least
The predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting a predetermined degree of expectation to which the predetermined game value is given to the player, and the first suggestion information. The staging means has a second suggestion information (for example, a third decorative symbol 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation is high.
A first light emitting unit (for example, front right LED 415c and front left LED 416c) that irradiates light in a predetermined first direction (for example, left-right direction).
A second light emitting unit (for example, front lower side LED 414c) that irradiates light in a second direction (for example, upward direction) different from the first direction, and
The first suggestion information when the light emitted from the first light emitting portion is incident from a predetermined first portion (for example, the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 and the left-right end surface of the downward inverted R-shaped portion). Is visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting portion is different from the first portion (for example, the lower end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410). A light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that makes the second suggestion information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when incident is provided.
The second suggestion information is
In the light guide means, the light path is provided at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect (for example, a regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410). The gaming machine F1 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine F1, special information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. Further, the suggestion information lottery means draws a lottery for the execution of the suggestion by the suggestion information that can suggest the expected degree to which a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the suggestion information is configured to be executable by the staging means. Here, as the suggestion information, at least, the first suggestion information that can suggest a predetermined expectation degree to which a predetermined game value is given to the player, and the expectation degree that a predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information. Second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that it is high is provided. Then, the first light emitting unit provided in the staging means irradiates the light in a predetermined first direction, and the second light emitting unit also provided in the staging means irradiates the light in the second direction different from the first direction. Will be done. Further, when the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is incident from a predetermined first portion by the light guide means provided in the staging means, the first suggestion information is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine. When the light emitted from the second light emitting unit is incident from a second portion different from the first portion, the second suggestion information is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the second suggestion information is provided at a position in the light guide means where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect. That is, the second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the expectation that a predetermined game value is given is higher than the first suggestion information is irradiated from at least one of the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit. It is formed in a position that can be seen only by the light that is emitted. As a result, even when light is erroneously emitted from the first light emitting unit due to noise or a malfunction, it is possible to prevent the second suggestion information, which has a large staging discrepancy, from becoming visible. As a result, there is an effect that the occurrence of the staging discrepancy can be suppressed, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the game machine F1
The staging means is at least
It is characterized by comprising a directivity improving means (for example, a front right condensing lens 415d or a front left condensing lens 416d) for enhancing the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit. Game machine F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are played. That is, at least the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is enhanced by the directivity improving means provided in the staging means. As a result, when a plurality of suggestion information is provided in the staging means, the staging means can at least suggest to the player that the expectation that a predetermined game value is given is lower than that of the second suggestion information. Even in the case of execution, the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is accurately irradiated to the position where the first suggestion information is provided, and the position where the second suggestion information is provided is not reached or is difficult to reach. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second suggestion information from becoming visible due to the light emitted from the first light emitting unit. As a result, there is an effect that the occurrence of the staging discrepancy can be suppressed, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2
The first suggestion information is
In the light guide means, a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect (for example, the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the downward inverted R shape). The gaming machine F3 characterized by being provided in the section).

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 or F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first suggestion information is provided at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect in the light guide means. That is, the first suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the expectation that a predetermined game value is given is lower than the second suggestion information is the light emitted from both the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit. It is formed on the optical path of. Here, even if the light for the second suggestion information makes the first suggestion information visible, the light for the second suggestion information is given a predetermined game value from the first suggestion information. The second suggestion information with high expectation is made visible, and even when the first suggestion information becomes visible when the second suggestion information becomes visible, the discrepancy in the production is small. .. As a result, the second degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value is given to the portion where the optical path of the light in the second direction for the second suggestion information and the optical path of the light in the first direction corresponding to the first suggestion information intersect. By providing the first suggestion information lower than the suggestion information, even if the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine at an unintended timing, the discrepancy in the production is minimized. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with a comfortable game.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3
The staging means
The gaming machine F4 is provided with a second directivity improving means (for example, a front side downward condensing lens 414d) that enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are played. That is, the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit is enhanced by the second directivity improving means provided in the staging means. As a result, when a plurality of suggestion information is provided in the staging means, the staging means executes a second suggestion effect that can suggest to the player that the expectation that a predetermined game value is given is higher than that of the first suggestion information. Even in this case, the light emitted from the second light emitting unit is accurately irradiated to the position where the second suggestion information is provided so that the second suggestion information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. It has the effect of being able to accurately suggest information to the player and increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3
The staging means
The gaming machine F5 is provided with a diffusing means (for example, a third upward diffusing lens 473) that diffuses the light emitted from the second light emitting unit from the width of the second light emitting unit.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are played. That is, the light emitted from the second light emitting unit is diffused from the width of the second light emitting unit by the diffusing means provided in the staging means. Here, even if the first suggestion information becomes visible by the light for the second suggestion information emitted from the second light emitting portion via the diffusion means, the light for the second suggestion information is still visible. The second suggestion information, which has a higher expectation of being given a predetermined game value than the first suggestion information, is made visible, and when the second suggestion information becomes visible, the first suggestion information becomes visible. Even if it is, the discrepancy in the production is small. As a result, the light from the second light emitting unit is diffused, and the diffused light is comprehensively irradiated to the second suggestion information, so that the second suggestion information can be clearly recognized. Even if the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the game machine at an unintended timing, it is possible to minimize the discrepancy in the production and provide the player with a comfortable game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F5
The light guide means is
The light emitted toward the first direction is easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted toward the second direction is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine or is difficult to emit. A portion (for example, a vertical groove forming each bubble pattern of the fourth decorative pattern group 413) and
The light emitted toward the second direction is easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted toward the first direction is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, or is difficult to emit the second emission. A gaming machine F6 comprising a portion (for example, a sunfish symbol of a third decorative symbol 412 or a horizontal groove forming each cherry blossom symbol group of the second decorative symbol group 411).

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines F1 to F5, the following effects are played. That is, the light emitted toward the first direction is easily emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine by the first emitting unit provided in the light guide means, and the light emitted toward the second direction is emitted. It is configured so that it does not emit light to the front side of the gaming machine or is difficult to emit. Further, the light emitted toward the second direction is easily emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine by the second emitting portion provided in the light guide means, and the light emitted toward the first direction is emitted. It is configured so that it does not emit light to the front side of the gaming machine or is difficult to emit. That is, in the staging means, the first suggestion information is made visible by the light from the first direction, the second suggestion information is made invisible or difficult, and the second suggestion information is visible by the light from the second direction. At the same time, by making the first suggestion information invisible or difficult, a plurality of suggestion information can be expressed even in one staging means. As a result, even when a plurality of suggestion information is provided in the staging means, each suggestion information can be distinguished and visually recognized by controlling the light emission of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit, respectively. By making it possible to express a plurality of suggestive information in the staging means and enhancing the staging effect of the staging means, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

<Group G: 1 light guide plate has multiple display objects, and the optical path direction of the LED is different for each display object. Within 1 light guide plate, a small-directional system area (one-way, sunfish, cherry blossom) and a multi-directional system area (2 directions, bubble group), minor direction is located in front of the display (main display, main drum, main liquid crystal)>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. For example, when a winner is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit that can change a pattern or the like that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine, and a directing means such as a light emitting unit that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the effect of the effect during the game by changing the display mode of the effect means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game by increasing the effect of the above-mentioned staging means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the G group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming.

Acquisition means (for example, reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied.
A determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A dynamic execution means (for example, a display control device 114) that dynamically displays identification information in a display means (for example, a drum display device 81) based on a determination result by the determination means.
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means, at least the first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) that can suggest to the player the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given, or the first. Suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU221) for drawing the execution of the second suggestion information (for example, the third decorative symbol 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation that the predetermined game value is given is higher than the suggestion information. )When,
Based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the staging means (for example, the front light guide plate 410) capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information is provided.
The staging means
A first light emitting means (for example, front right LED 415c and front left LED 416c) that irradiates light in a predetermined first direction (for example, left-right direction).
A second light emitting means (for example, front lower side LED 414c) that irradiates light in a second direction (for example, upward direction) different from the first direction, and
The first suggestion information when the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined first portion (for example, the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 and the left-right end face of the downward inverted R-shaped portion). Is visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting means is from a second portion (for example, the lower end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410) different from the first portion. A light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that makes the second suggestion information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when incident is provided.
The display means is
In the staging means, the gaming machine G0 is provided on the rear side of the front view at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap (for example, the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410). ..

According to the gaming machine G0, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in the display means. Further, when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, the player is given a predetermined game value. Here, based on the determination result by the determination means by the suggestion information lottery means, at least the first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the expectation degree to which the predetermined game value is given, or the first suggestion information is predetermined. The execution of the second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the expectation that the game value of the above is given is high is drawn. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information is executably configured by the staging means. Here, the first light emitting means provided in the staging means irradiates the light in a predetermined first direction, and the second light emitting means also provided in the staging means emits light in a second direction different from the first direction. Be irradiated. Then, in the light guide means, when the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from the predetermined first portion, the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine and is emitted from the second light emitting means. When the emitted light is incident from a second portion different from the first portion, the second suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, in the staging means, at least the display means is provided on the back side of the front view at a position where the first direction and the second direction do not overlap. That is, the display means for displaying the display result of the dynamic display is provided at a position where the lights of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap. As a result, even if the first light emitting means or the second light emitting means accidentally emits light due to noise or a malfunction, the first suggestion due to the malfunction is made at the position where the display means showing the result of the game is arranged. The probability that the information or the second suggestion information will be executed can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to accurately suggest information about the game to the player, and there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

An acquisition means (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A display means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined effect related to the game based on the determination result by the determination means is provided.
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determination means.
A suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU221) that draws a lottery for execution of a suggestion by suggestive information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the judgment result by the determination means.
A staging means (for example, a light guide unit 400) capable of executing the suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means is provided.
The suggested information is at least
The predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting a predetermined degree of expectation to which the predetermined game value is given to the player, and the first suggestion information. The staging means has a second suggestion information (for example, a third decorative symbol 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation is high.
A first light emitting unit (for example, front right LED 415c and front left LED 416c) that irradiates light in a predetermined first direction (for example, left-right direction).
A second light emitting unit (for example, front lower side LED 414c) that irradiates light in a second direction (for example, upward direction) different from the first direction, and
The first suggestion information when the light emitted from the first light emitting portion is incident from a predetermined first portion (for example, the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 and the left-right end surface of the downward inverted R-shaped portion). Is visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting portion is different from the first portion (for example, the lower end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410). A light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that makes the second suggestion information visible from the front side of the gaming machine when incident is provided.
The display means is
In the light guide means, a gaming machine at a position where the optical path of light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of light emitted in the second direction do not intersect (for example, the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410). A gaming machine G1 characterized in that it is arranged on the back side of a front view.

According to the gaming machine G1, special information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, based on the determination result by the determination means, the display means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined effect related to the game. Then, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. Here, based on the determination result by the determination means, the suggestion information lottery means draws a lottery for the execution of the suggestion by the suggestion information that can suggest the expected degree to which the predetermined game value is given to the player, and the suggestion information lottery means. Based on the lottery result of, the suggestion information is configured to be executable by the staging means. Then, as the suggestion information, at least, the first suggestion information capable of suggesting a predetermined expectation degree to which the predetermined game value is given to the player and the expectation degree to which the predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information are obtained. Second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that it is high is provided. Here, the first light emitting unit provided in the staging means irradiates light in a predetermined first direction, and the second staging means also provided in the staging means emits light in a second direction different from the first direction. Be irradiated. Then, when the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is incident from the predetermined first portion by the light guide means provided in the staging means, the first suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the first is visible. 2 When the light emitted from the light emitting unit is incident from a second portion different from the first portion, the second suggestion information is visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the display means is arranged on the rear side of the front view of the gaming machine at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect in the light guide means. .. As a result, by arranging a display means capable of executing a predetermined effect related to the game on the back side of the game machine at a position where the optical path of the light in the first direction and the optical path of the light in the second direction do not intersect in the effect means, the display means is displayed. By configuring the predetermined information related to the game executed by the means so as not to interfere with the effect, and by configuring the predetermined information to be visible in the effect means, the effect of the display means and the effect means can be enhanced, respectively, to the game. It has the effect of increasing attention.

In the gaming machine G1
A dynamic execution means (for example, a display control device 114) that dynamically displays identification information in a predetermined display area of the display means based on a determination result by the determination means.
With the game value giving means (for example, variable winning device 65) that can give the game value to the player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means. , With
Equipped with
The display area is
In the light guide means, a gaming machine at a position where the optical path of light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of light emitted in the second direction do not intersect (for example, the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410). A gaming machine G2 characterized in that it is arranged on the back side of a front view.

According to the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1. That is,
Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in the predetermined display area of the display means, and the predetermined display result in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means. When is displayed, the game value can be given to the player by the game value giving means. The display area of the display means is arranged on the rear side of the front view of the gaming machine at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect in the light guide means. Will be done. As a result, the identification information indicating whether or not to give the game value is dynamically displayed on the back side of the gaming machine at a position where the optical path of the light in the first direction and the optical path of the light in the second direction do not intersect in the staging means. By arranging the display means to be performed, the dynamic display executed by the display means is configured so as not to interfere with the effect, and predetermined information indicating the degree of expectation that the game value is given in the effect means can be visually recognized. By doing so, there is an effect that the effect of the display means and the effect of the effect can be enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2
The staging means is at least
It is characterized by comprising a directivity improving means (for example, a front right condensing lens 415d or a front left condensing lens 416d) for enhancing the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit. Game machine G3.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 or G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is enhanced by the directivity improving means provided in the staging means. As a result, when a plurality of suggestion information is provided in the staging means, the staging means can at least suggest to the player that the expectation that a predetermined game value is given is lower than that of the second suggestion information. Even in the case of execution, the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is accurately irradiated to the position where the first suggestion information is provided, and the position where the second suggestion information is provided is not reached or is difficult to reach. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second suggestion information from becoming visible due to the light emitted from the first light emitting unit. As a result, there is an effect that the occurrence of the staging discrepancy can be suppressed, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3
The first suggestion information is
In the light guide means, a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect (for example, the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the downward inverted R shape). The gaming machine G4 characterized by being provided in the section).

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines G1 to G3, the following effects are played. That is, the first suggestion information is provided at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect in the light guide means. That is, the first suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the expectation that a predetermined game value is given is lower than the second suggestion information is the light emitted from both the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit. It is formed on the optical path of. Here, even if the light for the second suggestion information makes the first suggestion information visible, the light for the second suggestion information is given a predetermined game value from the first suggestion information. The second suggestion information with high expectation is made visible, and even when the first suggestion information becomes visible when the second suggestion information becomes visible, the discrepancy in the production is small. .. As a result, the second degree of expectation that a predetermined gaming value is given to the portion where the optical path of the light in the second direction for the second suggestion information and the optical path of the light in the first direction corresponding to the first suggestion information intersect. By providing the first suggestion information lower than the suggestion information, even if the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine at an unintended timing, the discrepancy in the production is minimized. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with a comfortable game.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4
The second suggestion information is
In the light guide means, the position is such that the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect (for example, the regular R-shaped portion of the front light guide plate 410). , The gaming machine G5, characterized in that the display means is provided on the front side of the gaming machine when viewed from the front.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are played. That is, the second suggestion information is at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction do not intersect in the light guide means, and the front view of the gaming machine of the display means. It is provided on the front side. As a result, a display means capable of executing a predetermined effect related to the game and a predetermined game in the portion on the back side of the game machine at a position where the optical path of the light in the first direction and the optical path of the light in the second direction do not intersect in the effect means. By making it possible to execute both the suggestion information indicating the degree of expectation to which the value is given, the predetermined effect and the suggestion information can be visually recognized within the same field of view, and the effect of the display means and the effect means can be obtained. It has the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5
The staging means
The gaming machine G6 is provided with a second directivity improving means (for example, a front side downward condensing lens 414d) that enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines G1 to G5, the following effects are played. That is, the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit is enhanced by the second directivity improving means provided in the staging means. As a result, when a plurality of suggestion information is provided in the staging means, the staging means executes a second suggestion effect that can suggest to the player that the expectation that a predetermined game value is given is higher than that of the first suggestion information. Even in this case, the light emitted from the second light emitting unit is accurately irradiated to the position where the second suggestion information is provided so that the second suggestion information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. It has the effect of being able to accurately suggest information to the player and increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G6
The light guide means is
The light emitted toward the first direction is easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted toward the second direction is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine or is difficult to emit. A portion (for example, a vertical groove forming each bubble pattern of the fourth decorative pattern group 413) and
The light emitted toward the second direction is easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted toward the first direction is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, or is difficult to emit the second emission. A gaming machine G7 comprising a portion (for example, a manbow symbol of the third decorative symbol 412 or a horizontal groove forming each cherry blossom symbol group of the second decorative symbol group 411).

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines G1 to G6, the following effects are played. That is, the light emitted toward the first direction is easily emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine by the first emitting unit provided in the light guide means, and the light emitted toward the second direction is emitted. It is configured so that it does not emit light to the front side of the gaming machine or is difficult to emit. Further, the light emitted toward the second direction is easily emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine by the second emitting portion provided in the light guide means, and the light emitted toward the first direction is emitted. It is configured so that it does not emit light to the front side of the gaming machine or is difficult to emit. That is, in the staging means, the first suggestion information is made visible by the light from the first direction, the second suggestion information is made invisible or difficult, and the second suggestion information is visible by the light from the second direction. At the same time, by making the first suggestion information invisible or difficult, a plurality of suggestion information can be expressed even in one staging means. As a result, even when a plurality of suggestion information is provided in the staging means, each suggestion information can be distinguished and visually recognized by controlling the light emission of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit, respectively. By making it possible to express a plurality of suggestive information in the staging means and enhancing the staging effect of the staging means, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

<Group H: 1 light guide plate for flat shape and R shape, both shapes are guided from the flat shape part (not guided from the R shape part)>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. For example, when a winner is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit that can change a pattern or the like that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine, and a directing means such as a light emitting unit that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the effect of the effect during the game by changing the display mode of the effect means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game by increasing the effect of the above-mentioned staging means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the H group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming.

It is provided with an effect means (for example, a light guide unit 400) that performs a predetermined effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses.
The staging means
A light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit) having a light emitting unit (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light,
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, the light guiding means (for example, the rear side) that makes the predetermined information about the game (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) visible from the front side of the game machine. With a light guide plate 420)
The light guide means is
At least a predetermined flat plate shape portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion) and
A bent shape portion bent in a predetermined direction from the flat plate shape portion (for example, an upward inverted R shape portion, a normal R shape portion, or a downward inverted R shape portion) is provided.
The light emitting means
The gaming machine H0, characterized in that it is arranged at a position corresponding to the predetermined portion in the flat plate-shaped portion.

According to the game machine H0, a predetermined effect is performed as the game progresses by the effect means. Further, when the light emitting means provided in the staging means has a light emitting unit that emits light, and the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the light emitting means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information regarding the game. Can be seen from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion and a bent-shaped portion bent in a predetermined direction from the predetermined flat plate-shaped portion are provided in the light guide means, and the light emitting means is arranged at a position corresponding to a predetermined portion in the flat plate-shaped portion. Will be done. As a result, light can be incident on the light guide means from a predetermined portion of the flat plate-shaped portion of the light guide means to make the predetermined information visible, and the degree of freedom in designing the light emitting means is improved. It has the effect of being able to accurately suggest information about the game to the player and increasing the degree of attention to the game.

A first effect means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of executing a first effect related to a game (for example, a variable effect of a third symbol), and
A second effect means (for example, a light guide unit 400) capable of performing a second effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) related to the first effect is provided.
The second staging means is
A light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit 414) having a light emitting unit (for example, a front lower side LED 414c) that emits light, and a light emitting unit (for example, a lower LED unit 414).
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, the light guiding means (for example, the front side guide) that makes the predetermined information about the game (for example, the second decorative symbol group 411) visible from the front side of the game machine. With a light plate 410)
The light guide means is
At least a predetermined flat plate shape portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion) and
A front side portion (for example, an upward inverted R-shaped portion, a normal R-shaped portion, or a downward inverted R-shaped portion) that is continuously formed from the flat plate-shaped portion and is located on the front side of the gaming machine from the first staging means. Equipped with
The light emitting means
A gaming machine H1 characterized in that it is arranged at a position corresponding to the predetermined portion in the flat plate-shaped portion.

According to the gaming machine H1, the first effect means configures the first effect related to the game to be executable, and the second effect means configures the second effect related to the first effect to be executable. Further, the light emitting means provided in the second staging means is provided with a light emitting unit that emits light, and the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion by the light guiding means also provided in the second staging means. When this is done, predetermined information about the game is configured to be visible from the front side of the game machine. Here, the light guide means is provided with at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion and a front side portion that is continuously formed from the flat plate-shaped portion and is located on the front side of the gaming machine from the first staging means. Then, the light emitting means is arranged at a position corresponding to a predetermined portion in the flat plate-shaped portion. That is, the light is configured to be incident on the light guide means not from the portion corresponding to the front side portion existing on the front side of the first staging means, but from a predetermined portion in the flat plate-shaped portion. This is because when light is attempted to be incident on the light guide means from the front side portion, the traveling direction of the incident light changes depending on the front side portion, and it is difficult or impossible to express predetermined information in a desired manner. There is a risk. In addition, the light emitting portion or the like must be arranged (correspondingly) along the shape of the front side portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Further, the front side portion is located on the front side of the gaming machine of the first staging means, and when the light emitting portion or the like is arranged so as to correspond to the front side portion, the design of the second staging means (light guide means) is provided. It may limit the degree of freedom. Therefore, in the second staging means having the front side portion, by incident light from the portion of the flat plate shape portion which is not the front side portion, the above-mentioned problems are suitably solved and the degree of freedom in designing the second staging means is increased. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine H1
The front side is
The gaming machine H2, which is an outer shape-related portion related to the outer shape of the first staging means.

According to the gaming machine H2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1. That is, the front side portion is formed as an outer shape-related portion related to the outer shape of the first staging means. This is because when light is attempted to enter the light guide means from the outer shape-related portion, the traveling direction of the incident light changes depending on the outer shape-related portion, and predetermined information cannot be expressed in a desired manner. It may be difficult to do. In addition, the light emitting portion or the like must be arranged (correspondingly) along the shape of the outer shape-related portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Further, the outer shape-related portion is located on the front side of the gaming machine of the first staging means, and when the light emitting portion or the like is arranged so as to correspond to the outer shape-related portion, the second staging means (light guide means). There is a risk of limiting the degree of freedom in designing. As a result, in the second staging means having an outer shape-related portion related to the outer shape of the first staging means, the above problem is suitably solved by incident light from a portion of the flat plate shape portion that is not the outer shape-related portion. However, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the second staging means can be increased.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2
The first staging means is
The gaming machine H3 is provided with a display means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of dynamically displaying identification information based on a determination result by the determination means.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines H1 or H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means provided in the first staging means is configured to enable dynamic display of the identification information based on the determination result by the determination means. As a result, when the outer shape-related portion of the second effect means for executing the second effect related to the dynamic display of the identification information is formed in a shape related to the outer shape of the display means capable of executing the dynamic display. In addition, in the second staging means having an outer shape-related portion, by incident light from the portion of the flat plate-shaped portion, the above-mentioned problems can be suitably solved and the degree of freedom in designing the second staging means can be increased. effective.

In the gaming machine H3
The display means is
A reel (for example, a left reel LR) in which a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each are arranged on a peripheral surface, and
A cylindrical rotating body (for example, the left reel unit 81a1) that can rotate around a rotating shaft that is concentric with the reel.
The gaming machine H4 comprising: a driving means capable of rotationally driving the rotating body.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as a display means, a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified by each are arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel, and a cylindrical rotating body is configured to be rotatable around a rotating shaft concentric with the reel. , The rotating body is configured to be rotatable by the driving means. That is, since the display means is formed in a cylindrical shape around the rotation axis in order to rotate the reel, the outer shape-related portion of the second staging means also has a shape related to the cylindrical shape (for example, a bent shape). ). In this case, when light is attempted to enter the light guide means from the cylindrical outer shape-related portion, the traveling direction of the incident light changes depending on the outer shape-related portion, and predetermined information is provided in a desired manner. It may not be possible to express or it may be difficult to express. Therefore, in the second staging means having a cylindrical outer shape-related portion, the above-mentioned problems are suitably solved by incident light from the portion of the flat plate-shaped portion, and the degree of freedom in designing the second staging means is increased. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H4,
An acquisition means (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means is provided.
A gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determination means.
The outer shape-related part is
As the second effect, the first suggestion information (for example, the second decorative symbol group) as the predetermined information that can suggest the degree of expectation that the player is given a predetermined game value based on the determination result by the determination means. The gaming machine H5, which is configured to be capable of executing 411).

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines H1 to H4, the following effects are played. That is, the acquisition means acquires the special information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. Here, in the outer shape-related portion, as the second effect, the first suggestion information as predetermined information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the player is executed based on the judgment result by the determination means. Possible to be configured. As a result, while performing the first effect in the first effect means, as a second effect indicating the degree of expectation that the game value is given in the outer shape-related portion of the second effect means related to the outer shape of the first effect means. By constructing the first suggestion information of the above in an executable manner, there is an effect that the effect of each of the first effect means and the second effect means can be enhanced, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine H5
The flat plate shape portion
As the second effect, the second suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) that can suggest that the expectation that the player is given a predetermined game value is higher than the first suggestion information can be executed. A gaming machine H6 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the flat plate-shaped portion, as the second effect, the second suggestion information that can suggest that the expectation that the player is given a predetermined game value is higher than the first suggestion information is executably configured. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by enhancing the effect of the effect by making it possible to express a plurality of suggestive information in the second effect means.

<Group I: R shape / inverted R shape, display 1 notice display up to the switching point (design display area determination part), do not place the symbol at the part where the R shape switches>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. For example, when a winner is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit that can change a pattern or the like that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine, and a directing means such as a light emitting unit that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the effect of the effect during the game by changing the display mode of the effect means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game by increasing the effect of the above-mentioned staging means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group I has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to gaming.

It is provided with an effect means (for example, a light guide unit 400) that performs a predetermined effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses.
The staging means
A light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit) having a light emitting unit (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light,
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, the light guiding means (for example, the rear side) that makes the predetermined information about the game (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) visible from the front side of the game machine. With a light guide plate 420)
The light guide means is
At least a predetermined flat plate shape portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion) and
A first bent shape portion bent in a predetermined direction from the flat plate shape portion (for example, an upward inverted R shape portion or a downward inverted R shape portion),
A second bent shape portion (for example, a regular R shape portion) bent in the opposite direction of the predetermined direction from the first bent shape portion is provided.
The predetermined information is
The gaming machine I0 is provided at a position avoiding a switching portion between the first bent shape portion and the second bent shape portion.

According to the game machine I0, a predetermined effect is performed as the game progresses by the effect means. Further, when the light emitting means provided in the staging means has a light emitting unit that emits light, and the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the light emitting means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information regarding the game. Can be seen from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, the light guide means has at least a predetermined flat plate shape portion, a first bent shape portion bent in a predetermined direction from the flat plate shape portion, and a second bent shape portion bent in the opposite direction in a predetermined direction from the first bent shape portion. A bent shape portion is provided, and predetermined information is provided at a position avoiding a switching portion between the first bent shape portion and the second bent shape portion. As a result, by not arranging predetermined information at the switching portion between the first bent shape portion and the second bent shape portion where the reflection of the light emitted into the light guide means can change irregularly, the predetermined information is not arranged from the front side of the gaming machine. It is possible to prevent the predetermined information from appearing unintentionally. As a result, it is possible to appropriately express the predetermined information, perform an effect that does not cause a discrepancy, and accurately suggest information about the game to the player, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game. There is.

It is provided with an effect means (for example, a light guide unit 400) that performs a predetermined effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses.
The staging means
A light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit) having a light emitting unit (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light,
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, the light guiding means (for example, the rear side) that makes the predetermined information about the game (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) visible from the front side of the game machine. With a light guide plate 420)
The light guide means is
At least a predetermined flat plate shape portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion) and
A first bent-shaped portion (for example, an upward inverted R-shaped portion or a downward inverted R-shaped portion) that is continuously formed from the flat plate-shaped portion and bent in a predetermined direction (for example, the front side of the gaming machine).
A second bent shape portion (for example, a regular R shape portion) that is continuously formed from the first bent shape portion and is bent in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction (for example, the rear side of the gaming machine) is provided.
The light guide means is
The gaming machine I1 is characterized in that the predetermined information is arranged at a position avoiding a switching portion (for example, a switching point P) between the first bending shape portion and the second bending shape portion.

According to the game machine I1, a predetermined effect is performed as the game progresses by the effect means. Further, when the light emitting means provided in the staging means has a light emitting unit that emits light, and the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the light emitting means from a predetermined portion, predetermined information regarding the game. Can be seen from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, the light guide means has at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion, a first bent-shaped portion that is continuously formed from the flat plate-shaped portion and bent in a predetermined direction, and a first bent-shaped portion that is continuously formed from the first bent-shaped portion. A second bent shape portion that is formed and bent in the opposite direction of a predetermined direction is provided. Here, the predetermined information is arranged at a position avoiding the switching portion between the first bent shape portion and the second bent shape portion in the light guide means. This is because the reflection angles of the light that guides the inside of the light guide means are not uniform on any surface of the light guide means at the switching portion between the first bent shape portion and the second bent shape portion, and the light collides. Even if the predetermined information is arranged in the switching portion, the predetermined information is not properly expressed and the predetermined information cannot be visually recognized from the front side of the game machine at an appropriate timing. There is a risk. Further, while the predetermined information is configured to be visible only by light from a specified direction, if the predetermined information is arranged in the switching portion, it is not normally visible. There is a possibility that the predetermined information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine by the irradiation of the light of the above, and there is a possibility that the content of the production may be inconsistent because the predetermined information can be visually recognized at an unintended timing. Therefore, predetermined information is not arranged at the switching portion between the first bending shape portion and the second bending shape portion where the reflection of the light irradiated in the light guide means can change irregularly, and the position avoiding the switching portion. By arranging the predetermined information in the game machine, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from appearing unintentionally from the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to appropriately express the predetermined information, perform an effect that does not cause a discrepancy, and accurately suggest information about the game to the player, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the game. There is.

In the gaming machine I1
The light guide means is
The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the first predetermined information as the predetermined information is arranged across the flat plate shape portion and the first bent shape portion.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first predetermined information as predetermined information is arranged across the flat plate-shaped portion and the first bent-shaped portion in the light guide means. The light that guides the inside of the flat plate-shaped portion of the light guide means tends to have a uniform reflection angle, and even in the first bent-shaped portion that is continuously formed from the light, the light that is guided from the flat plate-shaped portion is to some extent. The light is evenly guided. As a result, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased by appropriately expressing the predetermined information and accurately suggesting the information about the game to the player.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2
The light guide means is
A second predetermined information (for example, a second decorative symbol group 411) different from the first predetermined information is arranged in the second bent shape portion.
The second predetermined information is
The gaming machine I3, characterized in that it is arranged so as not to straddle the first bent shape portion.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I1 or I2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the light guide means, the second predetermined information different from the first predetermined information is arranged in the second bent shape portion, and the second predetermined information is arranged so as not to straddle the first bent shape portion. The light that guides the inside of the second bent shape portion of the light guiding means tends to have a stable reflection angle, while the light that is guided from the continuously formed first bent shape portion through the switching portion is described above. As described above, the reflection angles are not uniform, and the amount of colliding light tends to be sparse (coarse). Therefore, by appropriately expressing the second predetermined information arranged within the range of the second bent shape portion where the reflection angle of the guided light is stable, and accurately suggesting the information about the game to the player. It has the effect of increasing the attention to the game.

In the game machine I3
A predetermined information lottery means (for example, MPU221), which draws a lottery for execution of a suggestion based on the predetermined information based on a determination result by the determination means, is provided.
The light guide means is
Based on the lottery result of the predetermined information lottery means, the suggestion based on the predetermined information can be executed.
The predetermined information is
The second predetermined information is configured to be able to suggest to the player that the second predetermined information is more expected to be given the predetermined game value than the first predetermined information.
The light emitting means
A first light emitting unit (for example, front right LED 415c and front left LED 416c) that irradiates light in a predetermined first direction (for example, left-right direction).
A second light emitting unit (for example, front lower side LED 414c) that irradiates light in a second direction (for example, upward direction) different from the first direction is provided.
The light guide means is
When the light emitted from the first light emitting portion is incident from a predetermined first portion (for example, the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410 and the left-right end face of the downward inverted R-shaped portion), the first predetermined information. Is visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted from the second light emitting portion is different from the first portion (for example, the lower end surface of the flat plate portion below the front light guide plate 410). When incident, the second predetermined information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine.
The staging means is at least
It is characterized by comprising a directivity improving means (for example, a front right condensing lens 415d or a front left condensing lens 416d) for enhancing the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit. Game machine I4.

According to the gaming machine I4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I3. That is, the predetermined information lottery means draws a lottery for executing the suggestion based on the predetermined information based on the determination result by the determination means. Then, based on the lottery result of the predetermined information lottery means, the light guide means is configured to be able to execute the suggestion by the predetermined information. Further, it is possible to suggest to the player that the second predetermined information has a higher expectation that the predetermined game value is given than the first predetermined information. Here, the first light emitting unit provided in the light emitting means irradiates light in a predetermined first direction, and the second light emitting unit also provided in the light emitting means emits light in a second direction different from the first direction. Be irradiated. Further, in the light guide means, when the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is incident from the predetermined first portion, the first predetermined information is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine and is emitted from the second light emitting unit. When the light to be emitted is incident from a second portion different from the first portion, the second predetermined information is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Then, at least the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is enhanced by the directivity improving means provided in the staging means. As a result, when a plurality of predetermined information is provided in the light guide means, at least the suggestion by the first predetermined information that can suggest to the player that the expectation that the predetermined game value is given is lower than the second predetermined information is given. Even when the light is executed by the light guide means, the light emitted from the first light emitting unit is accurately irradiated to the position where the first predetermined information is provided, and the position where the second predetermined information is provided is not reached. By making it difficult, it is possible to prevent the second predetermined information from becoming visible due to the light emitted from the first light emitting unit. As a result, there is an effect that the occurrence of the staging discrepancy can be suppressed, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In any of the gaming machines I2 to I4
The first predetermined information is
In the light guide means, a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect (for example, the lower flat plate portion of the front light guide plate 410 and the downward inverted R shape). The gaming machine I5 characterized by being provided in the section).

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines I2 to I4, the following effects are played. That is, the first predetermined information is provided at a position where the optical path of the light emitted in the first direction and the optical path of the light emitted in the second direction intersect in the light guide means. That is, the first predetermined information that can suggest to the player that the expectation that the predetermined game value is given is lower than the second predetermined information is the light emitted from both the first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit. It is formed on the optical path of. Here, even if the first predetermined information becomes visible by the light for the second predetermined information, the light for the second predetermined information is given a predetermined game value from the first predetermined information. The second predetermined information with high expectation is made visible, and even when the first predetermined information becomes visible when the second predetermined information becomes visible, the discrepancy in the production is small. .. As a result, the second degree of expectation is that a predetermined gaming value is given to the portion where the optical path of the light in the second direction with respect to the second predetermined information and the optical path of the light in the first direction corresponding to the first predetermined information intersect. By providing the first predetermined information lower than the predetermined information, even if the first predetermined information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine at an unintended timing, the discrepancy in the production is minimized. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a player with a comfortable game.

In the gaming machine I4 or I5
The staging means
The gaming machine I6 is provided with a second directivity improving means (for example, a front side downward condensing lens 414d) that enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I4 or I5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting unit is enhanced by the second directivity improving means provided in the staging means. As a result, when a plurality of predetermined information is provided in the staging means, the staging means executes the second predetermined effect that can suggest to the player that the expectation that the predetermined game value is given is higher than that of the first predetermined information. Even in this case, the light emitted from the second light emitting unit is accurately irradiated to the position where the second predetermined information is provided so that the second predetermined information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. It has the effect of being able to accurately suggest information to the player and increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines I4 to I6
The light guide means is
The light emitted toward the first direction is easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted toward the second direction is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine or is difficult to emit. A portion (for example, a vertical groove forming each bubble pattern of the fourth decorative pattern group 413) and
The light emitted toward the second direction is easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, and the light emitted toward the first direction is not emitted to the front side of the gaming machine, or is difficult to emit the second emission. A gaming machine I7 comprising a portion (for example, a sunfish symbol of a third decorative symbol 412 or a horizontal groove forming each cherry blossom symbol group of the second decorative symbol group 411).

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines I4 to I6, the following effects are played. That is, the light emitted toward the first direction is easily emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine by the first emitting unit provided in the light guide means, and the light emitted toward the second direction is emitted. It is configured so that it does not emit light to the front side of the gaming machine or is difficult to emit. Further, the light emitted toward the second direction is easily emitted or easily emitted to the front side of the gaming machine by the second emitting portion provided in the light guide means, and the light emitted toward the first direction is emitted. It is configured so that it does not emit light to the front side of the gaming machine or is difficult to emit. That is, in the staging means, the first predetermined information is made visible by the light from the first direction, the second predetermined information is invisible or difficult, and the second predetermined information is visible by the light from the second direction. At the same time, by making the first predetermined information invisible or difficult, a plurality of predetermined information can be expressed even in one staging means. As a result, even when a plurality of predetermined information is provided in the staging means, the predetermined information can be distinguished and visually recognized by controlling the light emission of the first light emitting unit or the second light emitting unit, respectively. By making it possible to express a plurality of predetermined information in the staging means and enhancing the staging effect of the staging means, there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

<Group J: Cover for preventing abnormal lighting due to light from the front side of the strong warning light guide plate (sunfish / foam light guide plate, slit part of display area forming member)>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. For example, when a winner is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit that can change a pattern or the like that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine, and a directing means such as a light emitting unit that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the effect of the effect during the game by changing the display mode of the effect means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game by increasing the effect of the above-mentioned staging means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the J group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming.

A first effect means (for example, a light guide unit 400) that performs a first effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses.
It is provided with a second effect means (for example, a confirmation lamp unit 310) that performs a second effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the confirmation lamp 311) different from the first effect as the game progresses.
The first staging means is
A first light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit 414) having a first light emitting unit (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light,
When the light emitted from the light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, the light guiding means (for example, the rear side) that makes the predetermined information about the game (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) visible from the front side of the game machine. With a light guide plate 420)
The second staging means is
A second light emitting means (for example, a confirmation lamp 311) having a second light emitting unit (for example, an LED for lighting the confirmation lamp 311) for emitting light is provided.
A game characterized in that a cover portion (for example, a lens cut 432) for reducing light from the second light emitting means with respect to the light guiding means is provided between the predetermined information and the second light emitting means. Machine J0.

According to the gaming machine J0, the first staging is performed by the first staging means as the game progresses. In addition, the second staging means performs a second staging different from the first staging as the game progresses. Then, the first light emitting means provided in the first staging means has a first light emitting unit that emits light, and the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident on the light guide means from a predetermined portion. In this case, predetermined information about the game can be visually recognized from the front of the game machine. Further, the second light emitting means provided in the second staging means has a second light emitting unit that emits light. Here, the light from the second light emitting means with respect to the light guiding means is reduced by the cover portion provided between the predetermined information and the second light emitting means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the predetermined information due to the light from the second light emitting means irradiating the predetermined information, and by suppressing the occurrence of the staging discrepancy due to the abnormal expression, the information about the game is accurately provided to the player. It has the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In a gaming machine provided with a first effect means (for example, a light guide unit 400) capable of performing a first effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the first decorative symbol group 421) as the game progresses.
The first staging means is
A first light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit 414) having a first light emitting unit (for example, a rear lower LED 424) that emits light,
When the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined portion, the first light guide means (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. For example, a rear light guide plate 420) is provided.
The gaming machine J1 is characterized in that the light guide means includes a cover portion (for example, a lens cut 432) that reduces the amount of light with respect to a position where the predetermined information is arranged.

According to the gaming machine J1, the first staging means makes it possible to execute the first staging as the game progresses. Further, when the first light emitting means provided in the first staging means is provided with a first light emitting unit that emits light and is incident from a predetermined portion of the light emitted from the first light emitting means, the first light emitting means is used. The first light guide means provided in the staging means makes it possible to visually recognize predetermined information about the game from the front side of the game machine. Here, the cover portion reduces the light for the position where the predetermined information is arranged in the first light guide means. As a result, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the predetermined information due to the light from other than the first light emitting means irradiating the predetermined information, and by suppressing the occurrence of the staging discrepancy due to the abnormal expression, the information about the game is given to the player. It has the effect of accurately suggesting and increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In the game machine J1
The second effect is provided with a second effect means (for example, the confirmation lamp unit 310) capable of performing a second effect (for example, lighting or non-lighting of the confirmation lamp 311) different from the first effect as the game progresses. The means is
A second light emitting means (for example, a confirmation lamp 311) having a second light emitting unit (for example, an LED for lighting the confirmation lamp 311) for emitting light is provided.
The cover portion is
A gaming machine J2, characterized in that it is disposed between the second light emitting means and the predetermined information.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine J1, the following effects are played. That is, the second staging means is configured to be able to execute a second staging different from the first staging as the game progresses. Further, the second light emitting means provided in the second staging means is provided with a second light emitting unit that emits light. Then, the cover portion is arranged between the second light emitting means and the predetermined information. As a result, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the predetermined information due to the light from the second light emitting means irradiating the predetermined information in the state where the first light emitting means is not emitting light, and the occurrence of the staging discrepancy due to the abnormal expression is generated. By suppressing it, it is possible to accurately suggest information about the game to the player and increase the degree of attention to the game.

In the game machine J2
The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that the second light emitting means emits light stronger than the light emitting brightness of the first light emitting means when the second effect is executed.

According to the gaming machine J3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J2. That is, when the second effect is executed, the second light emitting means emits light stronger than the light emitting brightness of the first light emitting means. That is, there is a possibility that predetermined information in the first staging means may be affected when the second light emitting means emits light. Therefore, in a state where the first light emitting means is not emitting light, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the predetermined information due to the light from the second light emitting means irradiating the predetermined information, and the occurrence of the staging discrepancy due to the abnormal expression is generated. By suppressing it, it is possible to accurately suggest information about the game to the player and increase the degree of attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J3
The cover portion is
A gaming machine J4 characterized in that it is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine from the first staging means.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines J1 to J3, the following effects are played. That is, the cover portion is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine from the first staging means. As a result, the light from the front side of the gaming machine, which is emitted by the lighting of the gaming hall or the production by other gaming machines, is reduced by the cover portion, so that the light from other than the first light emitting means is irradiated to the predetermined information. It is possible to suppress the malfunction of the predetermined information due to this, and by suppressing the occurrence of the staging discrepancy due to the abnormal expression, it is possible to accurately suggest the information about the game to the player and increase the attention to the game. effective.

In any of the gaming machines J1 to J4
A third light emitting means (for example, a lower LED unit 414) having a third light emitting unit (for example, a front lower side LED 414c) that emits light, and a third light emitting unit (for example, a lower LED unit 414).
When the light emitted from the third light emitting means is incident from a predetermined second portion, the second predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the second decorative symbol group 411) can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. A light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) is provided.
The gaming machine J5, wherein the cover portion is the second light guide means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines J1 to J4, the following effects are played. That is, when the third light emitting means is provided with a third light emitting unit that emits light and the light emitted from the third light emitting means is incident from a predetermined second portion, the second light guide means is used for the game. The second predetermined information regarding the above is configured to be visible from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the second light guide means is used as the cover portion. As a result, the second light guide means, which is configured so that the second predetermined information can be visually recognized, is configured to be able to reduce the light to the position where the predetermined information is arranged in the first light guide means as the cover portion. As a result, the second light guide means provided with the second predetermined information can suppress the malfunction of the predetermined information due to the light from other than the first light emitting means irradiating the predetermined information, and a plurality of effects can be produced. It has the effect of accurately suggesting information about the game to the player and increasing the degree of attention to the game by suppressing the occurrence of the staging discrepancy due to the abnormal expression while executing.

<K group: 1 light guide plate with strong and weak effects, at least irradiation for weak areas has high anisotropy (good straightness, no diffusion, condenser lens)>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. For example, when a winner is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit that can change a pattern or the like that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine, and a directing means such as a light emitting unit that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the effect of the effect during the game by changing the display mode of the effect means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game by increasing the effect of the above-mentioned staging means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the K group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming.

Acquisition means (for example, reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied.
A determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means, and
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determination means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means, at least the first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) that can suggest to the player the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given, or the first. Suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU221) for drawing the execution of the second suggestion information (for example, the third decorative symbol 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation that the predetermined game value is given is higher than the suggestion information. )When,
A staging means (for example, a light guide unit 400) capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means is provided.
The staging means
A first light emitting means (for example, front right LED 415c or front left LED 416c) capable of irradiating the first suggestion information with light.
A second light emitting means (for example, front lower side LED 414c) capable of irradiating the second suggestion information with light, and
When the first light emitting means emits light, the first suggestion information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the second suggestion information is transmitted from the front side of the gaming machine. A light guide means that makes it visible (for example, a front light guide plate 410) and
At least, it is provided with a condensing means (for example, a front right condensing lens 415d or a front left condensing lens 416d) that condenses the light by the first light emitting means and irradiates the first suggestion information. A game machine K0 characterized by being

According to the gaming machine K0, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. Here, based on the determination result by the determination means by the suggestion information lottery means, at least the first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the expectation degree to which the predetermined game value is given, or the first suggestion information is predetermined. The execution of the second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the expectation that the game value of the above is given is high is drawn. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information is executably configured by the staging means. Here, the first light emitting means provided in the staging means is configured to irradiate the first suggestion information with light, and the second light emitting means also provided in the staging means is provided for the second suggestive information. It is configured so that light can be irradiated. Then, when the first light emitting means emits light by the light guide means, the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the second suggestion information is on the front side of the gaming machine. It becomes visible from. Here, at least the light from the first light emitting means is collected by the light collecting means and irradiated to the first suggestion information. As a result, when the first suggestion information provided in the light guide means is made visible by the light emitted by the first light emitting means, the light collected by the first light emitting means is collected by the light collecting means and the same light guide is used. It is possible to irradiate only the first suggestion information without irradiating the second suggestion information provided in the means with light. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of the second suggestion information when the first suggestion information is visible, and by suppressing the occurrence of the staging discrepancy due to the abnormal expression, the information about the game is accurately suggested to the player. It has the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game.

An acquisition means (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means, and
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determination means.
A suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU221) that draws a lottery for execution of a suggestion by suggestive information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the judgment result by the determination means.
A staging means (for example, a light guide unit 400) capable of executing a suggestion based on the suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means is provided.
The suggested information is at least
The predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting a predetermined degree of expectation to which the predetermined game value is given to the player, and the first suggestion information. The staging means has a second suggestion information (for example, a third decorative symbol 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation is high.
A first light emitting means (for example, front right LED 415c or front left LED 416c) capable of irradiating the first suggestion information with light.
A second light emitting means (for example, front lower side LED 414c) capable of irradiating the second suggestion information with light, and
When the first light emitting means emits light, the first suggestion information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the second suggestion information is transmitted from the front side of the gaming machine. A light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that makes it visible is provided.
The gaming machine K1 is characterized in that the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means is higher than the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine K1, special information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. Here, based on the determination result by the determination means, the suggestion information lottery means draws a lottery for the execution of the suggestion by the suggestion information that can suggest the expected degree to which the predetermined game value is given to the player, and the suggestion information lottery means. Based on the lottery result of, the suggestion by the staging means is configured to be feasible. Then, as the suggestion information, at least, the first suggestion information capable of suggesting a predetermined expectation degree to which the predetermined game value is given to the player and the expectation degree to which the predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information are obtained. Second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that it is high is provided. Here, the first light emitting means provided in the staging means irradiates the first suggestive information with light, and the second light emitting means also provided in the staging means irradiates the second suggestive information with light. Will be done. Then, when the first light emitting means emits light, the first suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine by the light guiding means provided in the staging means, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the second light emitting means is second. Suggested information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means is configured to be higher than the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting means. When the first suggestion information, which is less expected to be given a predetermined game value than the second suggestion information, is made visible, it is provided in the same light guide means and a predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information. If the second suggestion information suggesting that the degree of expectation is high becomes visible, there is a risk that the content of the production will be inconsistent and the playability according to the game specifications cannot be realized. Therefore, at least, the directivity of the light with respect to the first suggestion information having a low expectation to be given a predetermined game value is increased, and the light is irradiated toward the first suggestion information without being diffused. 1 There is an effect that only the suggestion information can be displayed at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to prevent the inconsistency of the production contents from occurring.

In the game machine K1
At least, the first directivity improving means (for example, the front right condensing lens 415d or the front left condensing) that enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means and irradiates the first suggestion information. A gaming machine K2 characterized by having a lens 416d).

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means is enhanced by the first directivity improving means, and the first suggestive information is irradiated. When the first suggestion information, which is less expected to be given a predetermined game value than the second suggestion information, is made visible, it is provided in the same light guide means and a predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information. If the second suggestion information suggesting that the degree of expectation is high becomes visible, there is a risk that the content of the production will be inconsistent and the playability according to the game specifications cannot be realized. Therefore, at least, the light for the first suggestion information having a low expectation to be given a predetermined game value is enhanced by the first directivity improving means and is irradiated toward the first suggestion information without being diffused. By doing so, it is possible to display only the first suggestion information at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to prevent the inconsistency of the production contents from occurring.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2
It is characterized by being provided with a second directivity improving means (for example, a front side downward condensing lens 414d) that enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting means and irradiates the second suggestive information. Game machine K3 to play.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines K1 or K2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second directivity improving means enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the second light emitting means and irradiates the second suggestive information. As a result, in the light guide means provided with the suggestion information of 2, the light for each suggestion information is configured so as not to be diffused by each condensing means, so that each suggestion information can be displayed at an appropriate timing. This has the effect of making it difficult for discrepancies in the content of the production to occur.

In the gaming machines K1 to K3
A second effect means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined effect related to the game is provided.
The light guide means is
At least a predetermined flat plate shape portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion) and
A front side portion (for example, an upward inverted R-shaped portion, a normal R-shaped portion, or a downward inverted R-shaped portion) that is continuously formed from the flat plate-shaped portion and is located on the front side of the gaming machine from the second staging means. Equipped with
The first light emitting means is
Arranged at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion in the flat plate-shaped portion,
The second light emitting means is
The gaming machine K4 is characterized in that it is arranged at a position corresponding to a second portion different from the first portion in the flat plate-shaped portion.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined effect related to the game can be executed by the second effect means. Further, the light guide means is provided with at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion and a front side portion continuously formed from the flat plate-shaped portion and located on the front side of the gaming machine from the second staging means. Then, the first light emitting means is arranged at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion in the flat plate-shaped portion, and the second light emitting means is arranged at a position corresponding to a second portion different from the first portion in the flat plate-shaped portion. Will be set up. That is, it is configured so that light is incident on the light guide means not from the front side portion but from each portion in the flat plate-shaped portion. This is because when light is attempted to be incident on the light guide means from the front side portion located on the front side of the gaming machine from the second staging means, the incident light changes its traveling direction depending on the front side portion. It may not be possible or difficult to express the predetermined information in a desired manner. Further, the light emitting means or the like must be arranged (correspondingly) along the shape of the front side portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Therefore, in the light guide means having the front side portion, by incident light from each portion of the flat plate-shaped portion, the above-mentioned problems can be suitably solved and the degree of freedom in designing the light guide means can be increased. effective.

In the gaming machine K4
The front side is
The gaming machine K5, which is an outer shape-related portion related to the outer shape of the second staging means.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the front side portion is formed as an outer shape-related portion related to the outer shape of the second staging means. This is because when light is attempted to enter the light guide means from the outer shape-related portion, the traveling direction of the incident light changes depending on the outer shape-related portion, and the suggestive information cannot be expressed in a desired manner. It may be difficult to do. In addition, the light emitting portion or the like must be arranged (correspondingly) along the shape of the outer shape-related portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Further, the outer shape-related portion is configured to have a shape that follows the outer shape of the second staging means, and when the light emitting portion or the like is arranged so as to correspond to the outer shape-related portion, the first staging means (light guide). There is a risk of limiting the degree of freedom in designing the means). As a result, in the first staging means having an outer shape-related portion related to the outer shape of the second staging means, the above problem is suitably solved by incident light from a portion of the flat plate shape portion that is not the outer shape-related portion. However, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the first staging means can be increased.

<L group: 1 light guide plate with strong and weak effects, at least irradiation for strong regions is isotropic high (diffusing lens, 3-way lens)>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. For example, when a winner is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit that can change a pattern or the like that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine, and a directing means such as a light emitting unit that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the effect of the effect during the game by changing the display mode of the effect means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game by increasing the effect of the above-mentioned staging means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the L group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied.
A determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means, and
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determination means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means, at least the first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) that can suggest to the player the degree of expectation that the predetermined game value is given, or the first. Suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU221) for drawing the execution of the second suggestion information (for example, the third decorative symbol 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation that the predetermined game value is given is higher than the suggestion information. )When,
A staging means (for example, a light guide unit 400) capable of executing the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means is provided.
The staging means
A first light emitting means (for example, front right LED 415c or front left LED 416c) capable of irradiating the first suggestion information with light.
A second light emitting means (for example, front lower side LED 414c) capable of irradiating the second suggestion information with light, and
When the first light emitting means emits light, the first suggestion information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the second suggestion information is transmitted from the front side of the gaming machine. A light guide means that makes it visible (for example, a front light guide plate 410) and
At least, it is provided with a diffusing means (for example, a rear upper diffusing lens 423 or a rear lower diffusing lens 425) that diffuses the light from the second light emitting means and irradiates the second suggestive information. The featured gaming machine L0.

According to the gaming machine L0, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. Here, based on the determination result by the determination means by the suggestion information lottery means, at least the first suggestion information capable of suggesting to the player the expectation degree to which the predetermined game value is given, or the first suggestion information is predetermined. The execution of the second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that the expectation that the game value of the above is given is high is drawn. Then, based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means, the first suggestion information or the second suggestion information is executably configured by the staging means. Here, the first light emitting means provided in the staging means is configured to irradiate the first suggestion information with light, and the second light emitting means also provided in the staging means is provided for the second suggestive information. It is configured so that light can be irradiated. Then, when the first light emitting means emits light by the light guide means, the first suggestion information becomes visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the second suggestion information is on the front side of the gaming machine. It becomes visible from. Here, at least the light from the second light emitting means is diffused by the diffusing means to irradiate the second suggestive information. As a result, by irradiating the second suggestion information, which is important for the game, with light to make it clearly visible, it is possible to accurately suggest the information about the game to the player, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It has the effect of being able to do it.

An acquisition means (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means, and
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player based on a determination result by the determination means.
A suggestion information lottery means (for example, MPU221) that draws a lottery for execution of suggestion information that can suggest the degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means.
A staging means (for example, a light guide unit 400) capable of executing a suggestion based on the suggestion information based on the lottery result of the suggestion information lottery means is provided.
The suggested information is at least
The predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) capable of suggesting a predetermined degree of expectation to which the predetermined game value is given to the player, and the first suggestion information. The staging means has a second suggestion information (for example, a third decorative symbol 412) that can suggest to the player that the expectation is high.
A first light emitting means (for example, front right LED 415c or front left LED 416c) capable of irradiating the first suggestion information with light.
A second light emitting means (for example, front lower side LED 414c) capable of irradiating the second suggestion information with light, and
When the first light emitting means emits light, the first suggestion information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the second suggestion information is transmitted from the front side of the gaming machine. A light guide means that makes it visible (for example, a front light guide plate 410) and
The gaming machine L1 is provided with at least a diffusing means (for example, a third upward diffusing lens 473) that diffuses the light from the second light emitting means and irradiates the second suggestive information.

According to the gaming machine L1, special information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, a predetermined game value is given to the player based on the determination result by the determination means. Here, based on the determination result by the determination means, the suggestion information lottery means draws a lottery for the execution of the suggestion by the suggestion information that can suggest the expected degree to which the predetermined game value is given to the player, and the suggestion information lottery means. Based on the lottery result of, the suggestion information is configured to be executable by the staging means. Then, as the suggestion information, at least, the first suggestion information capable of suggesting a predetermined expectation degree to which the predetermined game value is given to the player and the expectation degree to which the predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information are obtained. Second suggestion information that can suggest to the player that it is high is provided. Here, the first light emitting means provided in the staging means irradiates the first suggestive information with light, and the second light emitting means also provided in the staging means irradiates the second suggestive information with light. Will be done. Then, when the first light emitting means emits light, the first suggestion information is made visible from the front side of the gaming machine by the light guiding means provided in the staging means, and when the second light emitting means emits light, the second light emitting means is second. Suggested information can be visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine. Here, at least the light from the second light emitting means is diffused by the diffusing means to irradiate the second suggestive information. Since the second suggestion information is an effect with a higher expectation that a predetermined game value is given at least than the first suggestion information, the second suggestion information is comprehensively irradiated with light by a diffusing means, and the second suggestion information is said. 2 It is necessary to make the player clearly recognize the suggestive information. Further, when the first suggestion information is made visible, if the second suggestion information, which is more expected to be given a predetermined game value than the first suggestion information, is made visible, a staging discrepancy will occur. , When the second suggestion information is made visible, even if the first suggestion information, which is less expected to be given a predetermined game value than the second suggestion information, becomes visible, the player is predetermined. Since the focus is on the execution of the second suggestion information, which is highly expected to be given the game value, and not so much on the execution of the first suggestion information, which is low in the expectation to be given the predetermined game value. Inconsistency is unlikely to occur. Therefore, by adopting the diffusion means for the second suggestion information having a high expectation that a predetermined game value is given, the effect of the light guide means can be enhanced and the degree of attention to the game can be increased. effective.

In the gaming machine L1
The directivity improving means (for example, the third right condensing lens 475b and the third left condensing lens 476b) that enhance the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means and irradiate the first suggestive information. ), The gaming machine L2 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine L1, the following effects are played. That is, the directivity improving means enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means and irradiates the first suggestion information. When the first suggestion information, which is less expected to be given a predetermined game value than the second suggestion information, is made visible, it is provided in the same light guide means and a predetermined game value is given from the first suggestion information. If the second suggestion information suggesting that the degree of expectation is high becomes visible, there is a risk that the content of the production will be inconsistent and the playability according to the game specifications cannot be realized. Therefore, at least, the light for the first suggestion information having a low expectation to be given a predetermined game value is not diffused by the directivity improving means, but is irradiated toward the first suggestion information. 1 There is an effect that only the suggestion information can be displayed at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to prevent the inconsistency of the production contents from occurring.

In the gaming machine L1 or L2
A second effect means (for example, a drum display device 81) capable of executing a predetermined effect related to the game is provided.
The light guide means is
At least a predetermined flat plate shape portion (for example, an upper flat plate portion or a lower flat plate portion) and
A front side portion (for example, an upward inverted R-shaped portion, a normal R-shaped portion, or a downward inverted R-shaped portion) that is continuously formed from the flat plate-shaped portion and is located on the front side of the gaming machine from the second staging means. Equipped with
The first light emitting means is
Arranged at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion in the flat plate-shaped portion,
The second light emitting means is
The gaming machine L3 is characterized in that it is arranged at a position corresponding to a second portion different from the first portion in the flat plate-shaped portion.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines L1 or L2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined effect related to the game can be executed by the second effect means. Further, the light guide means is provided with at least a predetermined flat plate-shaped portion and a front side portion continuously formed from the flat plate-shaped portion and located on the front side of the gaming machine from the second staging means. Then, the first light emitting means is arranged at a position corresponding to a predetermined first portion in the flat plate-shaped portion, and the second light emitting means is arranged at a position corresponding to a second portion different from the first portion in the flat plate-shaped portion. Will be set up. That is, it is configured so that light is incident on the light guide means not from the front side portion but from each portion in the flat plate-shaped portion. This is because when light is attempted to enter the light guide means from the front side portion located on the front side of the gaming machine from the second staging means, the incident light changes its traveling direction depending on the front side portion. It may not be possible or difficult to express the predetermined information in a desired manner. Further, the light emitting means or the like must be arranged (correspondingly) along the shape of the front side portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Therefore, in the light guide means having the front side portion, by incident light from each portion of the flat plate-shaped portion, the above-mentioned problems can be suitably solved and the degree of freedom in designing the light guide means can be increased. effective.

In the gaming machine L3
The front side is
The gaming machine L4, which is an outer shape-related portion related to the outer shape of the second staging means.

According to the gaming machine L4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L3. That is, the front side portion is formed as an outer shape-related portion related to the outer shape of the second staging means. This is because when light is attempted to enter the light guide means from the outer shape-related portion, the traveling direction of the incident light changes depending on the outer shape-related portion, and the suggestive information cannot be expressed in a desired manner. It may be difficult to do. In addition, the light emitting portion or the like must be arranged (correspondingly) along the shape of the outer shape-related portion, which may reduce the degree of freedom in design. Further, the outer shape-related portion is configured to have a shape that follows the outer shape of the second staging means, and when the light emitting portion or the like is arranged so as to correspond to the outer shape-related portion, the first staging means (light guide). There is a risk of limiting the degree of freedom in designing the means). As a result, in the first staging means having an outer shape-related portion related to the outer shape of the second staging means, the above problem is suitably solved by incident light from a portion of the flat plate shape portion that is not the outer shape-related portion. However, there is an effect that the degree of freedom in designing the first staging means can be increased.

<Group M: Multiple light guide plates, at least separate light guide plates with diffusion means>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. For example, when a winner is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit that can change a pattern or the like that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine, and a directing means such as a light emitting unit that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the effect of the effect during the game by changing the display mode of the effect means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game by increasing the effect of the above-mentioned staging means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the M group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming.

A first effect means (for example, a rear upper LED unit 422) that performs a first effect as the game progresses, and
A second staging means (for example, front right LED unit 415) that performs a second staging different from the first staging as the game progresses is provided.
The first staging means is
A first light emitting means for emitting light (for example, rear upper LED 422c) and
When the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined first portion, the first predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) is visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine as the first effect. It is provided with a first light guide means (for example, a rear light guide plate 420) that enables it.
The second staging means is
A second light emitting means that emits light (for example, front right LED 415c) and
When the light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident from a predetermined second portion, the second predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the fourth decorative symbol group 413) is visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine as the second effect. A second light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that enables the provision of a second light guide means is provided.
It is characterized by having at least a diffusing means (for example, a rear upper diffusing lens 423 or a rear lower diffusing lens 425) that diffuses the light from the second light emitting means and irradiates the second predetermined information. The gaming machine M0.

According to the gaming machine M0, the first staging means performs the first staging as the game progresses, and the second staging means performs the second staging different from the first staging as the game progresses. Here, when light is emitted by the first light emitting means provided in the first staging means, and the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident on the first light emitting means from a predetermined first portion in the first light guide means. As the first effect, the first predetermined information regarding the game can be visually recognized from the front side of the game machine. Further, when light is emitted by the second light emitting means provided in the second staging means, and the light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident on the second light emitting means from a predetermined second portion, the second light emitting means is second. 2 As an effect, the second predetermined information regarding the game can be visually recognized from the front side of the game machine. Here, at least the light from the second light emitting means is diffused by the diffusing means to irradiate the second predetermined information. This has the effect that the second effect regarding the second predetermined information can be performed flashily by the irradiation of the light diffused by the diffusing means, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

A first effect means (for example, front right LED unit 415) capable of executing the first effect as the game progresses, and
A second effect means (for example, a rear upper LED unit 422) capable of executing a second effect different from the first effect as the game progresses is provided.
The first staging means is
A first light emitting means for emitting light (for example, front right LED 415c) and
When the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident from a predetermined first portion, the first predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the second decorative symbol group 411) is visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine as the first effect. It is provided with a first light guide means (for example, a front light guide plate 410) that enables it.
The second staging means is
A second light emitting means that emits light (for example, a rear upper LED 422c) and
When the light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident from a predetermined second portion, the second predetermined information regarding the game (for example, the first decorative symbol group 421) is visually recognized from the front side of the gaming machine as the second effect. A second light guide means (for example, a rear light guide plate 420) that enables the provision of a second light guide means is provided.
The gaming machine M1 is provided with at least a diffusing means (for example, a rear side upper diffusing lens 423) that diffuses light from the second light emitting means and irradiates the second predetermined information.

According to the gaming machine M1, the first staging means enables the first staging to be executed as the game progresses, and the second staging means produces a second staging that is different from the first staging as the game progresses. Configured to be viable. Here, when light is emitted by the first light emitting means provided in the first staging means, and the light emitted from the first light emitting means is incident on the first light emitting means from a predetermined first portion in the first light guide means. As the first effect, the first predetermined information regarding the game can be visually recognized from the front side of the game machine. Further, when light is emitted by the second light emitting means provided in the second staging means, and the light emitted from the second light emitting means is incident on the second light emitting means from a predetermined second portion, the second light emitting means is second. 2 As an effect, the second predetermined information regarding the game can be visually recognized from the front side of the game machine. Here, at least the light from the second light emitting means is diffused by the diffusing means to irradiate the second predetermined information. As a result, the second effect regarding the second predetermined information can be performed flashily by the irradiation of the light diffused by the diffusion means, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine M1
The second production is
The gaming machine M2 is characterized in that it is an effect with a higher degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given from the first effect.

According to the gaming machine M2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1. That is, the second effect is set as an effect with a higher degree of expectation that a predetermined game value is given than the first effect. As a result, by adopting the diffusion means for the second suggestion information having a high expectation that a predetermined game value is given, the effect of the light guide means can be enhanced and the degree of attention to the game can be increased. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine M1 or M2
The predetermined part is
It is a predetermined end of the second light guide means, and is
The diffusion means is
The gaming machine M3 is integrally formed at a predetermined end of the second light guide means.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines M1 or M2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined portion is a predetermined end portion of the second light guide means, and the diffusion means is integrally formed at the predetermined end portion of the second light guide means. As a result, in the second staging means, the second light guide means and the diffusing means are integrally formed to reduce the number of parts, so that the degree of freedom in designing the second staging means can be increased. There is.

In any of the gaming machines M1 to M3
As the first production,
A predetermined first predetermined effect (for example, a fourth decorative symbol group 413) and
A first specific effect (for example, a second decorative symbol group 411), which is highly expected to be given a predetermined game value from the first predetermined effect, is provided.
The first staging means is
It is characterized by comprising a directivity improving means (for example, a front right condensing lens 415d or a front left condensing lens 416d) for enhancing the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means. Game machine M4.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines M1 to M3, the following effects are played. That is, as the first effect, a predetermined first predetermined effect and a first specific effect having a higher expectation of being given a predetermined game value than the first predetermined effect are provided. Then, the directivity improving means provided in the first staging means enhances the directivity of the light emitted from the first light emitting means. As a result, when a plurality of first effects can be executed in the first effect means, the light emitted from the first light emitting means is accurately irradiated to the position where the desired first effect is provided, and the other first effect is provided. (1) By making it difficult or difficult to reach the position where the effect is provided, it is possible to prevent the undesired first effect from becoming visible due to the light emitted from the first light emitting means. As a result, there is an effect that the occurrence of the staging discrepancy can be suppressed, information about the game can be accurately suggested to the player, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

<N group: Pseudo-stop symbol display control corresponding to the symbol arrangement>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. For example, when a winner is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit that can change a pattern or the like that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine, and a directing means such as a light emitting unit that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the effect of the effect during the game by changing the display mode of the effect means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game by increasing the effect of the above-mentioned staging means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the N group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to the game.

Acquisition means (for example, reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied.
A determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A dynamic execution means (for example, a display control device 114) that dynamically displays identification information in a display means (for example, a drum display device 81) based on a determination result by the determination means.
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means.
The display means is
Three rotating members (for example, left reel LR, middle reel CR, and right reel RR) in which a plurality of types of the identification information are arranged, and
Rotational driving means (for example, a motor) for rotationally driving each of the rotating members, and
A drive control means for controlling the rotation drive means (for example, the MPU of the display control device 114) is provided.
The rotating member is
A common rotating member (for example, left reel LR and right reel RR) composed only of the identification information common to the rotating member, and
A non-common rotating member (for example, a middle reel CR) containing non-common identification information not included in the common rotating member is provided.
The drive control means
A step changing means (for example, a reach forming symbol, "5") for stepwise changing the pre-stage identification information forming a combination of the identification information in the previous stage of the predetermined display result (for example, "reach display"). → "6" → "7"), with
The step change means
A game characterized in that when the previous stage identification information is changed stepwise, the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as not to include the non-common identification information included in the non-common rotating member. Machine N0.

According to the gaming machine N0, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in the display means. Further, when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, the player is given a predetermined game value. Here, the display means is provided with three rotary members in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged, the rotary members are rotationally driven by the rotary drive means, and the rotary drive means is driven by the drive control means. Be controlled. Then, as the rotating means, the common rotating member is composed of only the identification information common to the rotating member, and the non-common rotating member is configured to include the non-common identification information not included in the common rotating member. Will be done. Here, the pre-stage identification information forming the combination of the pre-stage identification information of the predetermined display result is changed stepwise by the step change means provided in the drive control means. Then, when the previous stage identification information is changed stepwise by the step change means, the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so that the non-common identification information included in the non-common rotating member is not included. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to perform a production without a sense of incongruity without causing a production discrepancy, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

<Na group: Reach formation symbols based on non-common identification information are excluded>
An acquisition means (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A dynamic execution means (for example, a display control device 114) that dynamically displays identification information in an effect means (for example, a drum display device 81) based on a determination result by the determination means.
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means.
The staging means
At least two or more rotating means (for example, left reel LR, middle reel CR and right reel RR) in which a plurality of types of the identification information are arranged, and
A rotation driving means (for example, a stepping motor 600) for rotating each of the rotating means, and
A drive control means for controlling the rotation drive means (for example, the MPU of the display control device 114) is provided.
The rotating means
A common rotating means (for example, left reel LR and right reel RR) in which common identification information which is common identification information is arranged, and
A non-common rotation means (for example, a middle reel CR) in which the common identification information and the non-common identification information not included in the arrangement of the common rotation means are arranged is provided.
The drive control means
A step changing means (for example, a reach forming symbol, "1") that changes the pre-stage identification information stepwise to form a combination of the identification information in the pre-stage of the predetermined display result (for example, "reach display"). → "2" → "3"), with
The step change means
A game characterized in that when the previous stage identification information is changed stepwise, the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as not to include the non-common identification information included in the non-common rotation means. Machine Na1.

According to the gaming machine Na1, special information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in the staging means, and the predetermined display result is displayed in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means. When issued, the player is given a predetermined game value. Here, the staging means is provided with at least two or more rotating means in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged, and the rotating means are rotated by the rotation driving means and rotated by the drive control means. The dynamic drive means is controlled. Further, in the rotating means, a common rotating means in which common identification information which is a common identification method is arranged, and a non-common identification information not included in the arrangement of the common identification information and the common rotating means are arranged. A non-common rotating means is provided. Then, the pre-stage identification information that forms a combination of the pre-stage identification information of the predetermined display result is expressed by the pre-stage appearance means provided in the drive control means, and the step change that is also provided in the drive control means. By means, the previous stage information is changed step by step. Here, when the previous stage identification information is changed stepwise by the step change means, the combination of the previous stage information is changed so as not to include the non-common identification information included in the non-common rotation means. As a result, when the previous stage identification information is changed step by step, the previous stage identification information by the non-common identification information that cannot exist other than the non-common rotation means is not displayed, so that a discrepancy in the production occurs. This has the effect of suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable and awakening, and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine Na1, at least the common rotating means is
The identification information is arranged so as to form a predetermined order (for example, ascending or descending order of numbers).
The step change means
The gaming machine Na2, characterized in that the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as to correspond to the predetermined order.

According to the gaming machine Na2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Na1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least, the identification information is arranged in the common rotating means so as to form a predetermined order. Then, the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as to correspond to the predetermined order by the stage changing means. As a result, when the previous stage identification information is changed stepwise so as to correspond to a predetermined order, the previous stage identification information by the non-common identification information that cannot exist other than the non-common rotation means is not displayed. It has the effect of suppressing the occurrence of discrepancies in the production, suppressing the player from feeling uncomfortable and awakening, and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine Na1 or Na2
The dynamic execution means is
Even if any of the identification information appears in the common rotation means, when the non-common identification information appears in the non-common rotation means, the dynamic display is continued dynamically. A gaming machine Na3 characterized by being provided with a means of continuation.

According to the gaming machine Na3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Na1 or Na2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, regardless of which identification information appears in the common rotation means, when the non-common identification information appears in the non-common rotation means, the dynamic continuation provided in the dynamic execution means is provided. By means, the dynamic display is continued. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that the dynamic display is continued depending on whether or not the non-common identification information appears, to pay attention to the rotation mode of the non-common rotation means, and to improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine Na3
The dynamic display means
With the predetermined first production,
The second effect, in which the predetermined display result is more likely to appear than the first effect, can be executed.
The dynamic continuation means
The gaming machine Na4, characterized in that the second effect is executed when the non-common identification information appears in the non-common rotating means.

According to the gaming machine Na4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Na3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined first effect and a second effect in which a predetermined display result is more likely to appear than the first effect are executably configured by the dynamic display means, and the non-common identification information in the non-common rotating means. When appears, the second effect is executed by the dynamic continuation means. This creates a playability in which a second effect is executed in which a predetermined display result is easily displayed depending on whether or not the non-common identification information appears, and the non-common identification information is identified in the rotation of the non-common rotating means. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to whether or not the information appears.

In any of the gaming machines Na1 to Na4,
The dynamic execution means is
In the dynamic display, a plurality of the identification information can be displayed in the rotating means of 1, and the common rotating means of 2 can be stopped earlier than the non-common rotating means. death,
The common rotating means is
The arrangement order of the common identification information in the common rotation means 1 (for example, descending order) and the arrangement order of the common identification information in the other common rotation means (for example, ascending order) are arranged in reverse order. The gaming machine Na5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine Na5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Na1 to Na4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic execution means is configured so that a plurality of identification information can appear in one rotation means in the dynamic display, and the two common rotation means stop earlier than the non-common rotation means. In the common rotation means, the arrangement order of the common identification information in one common rotation means and the arrangement order of the common identification information in the other common rotation means are arranged in the reverse order. There is. As a result, it is possible to generate a plurality of previous stage identification information in the common rotating means that can be stopped first, and it is possible to increase the variation of the appearance position of the previous stage identification information of 1, which is a hobby of the game. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In any of the gaming machines Na1 to Na5
The non-common rotating means is
At least, the gaming machine Na6 is characterized in that the identification information is arranged in the same arrangement order (for example, ascending order) as the arrangement order (for example, ascending order) of the identification information in the common rotating means 1.

According to the gaming machine Na6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Na1 to Na5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the non-common rotation means, the identification information is arranged in the same arrangement order as the arrangement order of the identification information in at least one common rotation means. As a result, the appearance order of the identification information in the common rotation means 1 and the non-common rotation means can be made common, and the player can easily recognize the appearance order of the identification information. effective.

In any of the gaming machines Na2 to Na6
The non-common identification information is
The gaming machine Na7, which is arranged in the middle of the predetermined order in the non-common rotating means.

According to the gaming machine Na7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Na2 to Na6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the non-common identification information is arranged in the middle of a predetermined order in the non-common rotating means. As a result, regarding the appearance of non-common identification information that is not included in the common rotation means, unexpectedness is created in the predetermined arrangement of the identification information in the non-common rotation means, the variation of the game is enriched, and the interest of the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to plan.

<Nb group: Excluding reach formation symbols based on identification information that has a large profit that can be given to the player>
An acquisition means (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A dynamic execution means (for example, a display control device 114) that dynamically displays identification information in an effect means (for example, a drum display device 81) based on a determination result by the determination means.
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means.
The staging means
At least two or more rotating means (for example, left reel LR, middle reel CR and right reel RR) in which a plurality of types of the identification information are arranged, and
A rotation driving means (for example, a stepping motor 600) for rotating each of the rotating means, and
A drive control means for controlling the rotation drive means (for example, the MPU of the display control device 114) is provided.
The drive control means
A pre-stage identification means for displaying the pre-stage identification information forming a combination of the identification information in the previous stage of the predetermined display result (for example, “reach display”), and
It is provided with a step change means (for example, the reach forming symbol is changed from "1" → "2" → "3") to change the previous step information step by step.
The identification information is
The first identification information (for example, the "2" symbol) that can give a predetermined first profit to the player when it appears as the predetermined display result, and
A second identification information (for example, a "7" symbol) that can give a second profit larger than the first profit to the player when it appears as the predetermined display result is provided.
The step change means
The gaming machine Nb1 is characterized in that the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as not to include the previous stage identification information based on the second identification information while the previous stage identification information is being changed stepwise.

According to the gaming machine Nb1, special information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in the staging means, and the predetermined display result is displayed in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means. When issued, the player is given a predetermined game value. Here, the staging means is provided with at least two or more rotating means in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged, and the rotating means are rotated by the rotation driving means and rotated by the drive control means. The dynamic drive means is controlled. Further, the pre-stage identification information provided in the drive control means reveals the pre-stage identification information forming a combination of the pre-stage identification information of the predetermined display result, and the step change also provided in the drive control means. By means, the previous stage information is changed step by step. Here, the first identification information that can give a predetermined first profit to the player when the identification information appears as a predetermined display result, and the game when the identification information appears as a predetermined display result. A second identification information that can give a second profit larger than the first profit to the person is provided. Then, the combination of the previous stage information is changed so as not to include the previous stage information by the second identification information while the previous stage identification information is changed stepwise by the stage change means. As a result, when the previous stage identification information is changed stepwise, the second identification information that can give a greater benefit to the player than the first identification information can be changed stepwise, and the intermediate stage of the previous stage identification information that can be changed stepwise. By not making it appear, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the arousal of the game due to the player feeling that the profit that can be granted has decreased, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine Nb1, the rotating means is
The identification information is arranged so as to form a predetermined order (for example, ascending or descending order of numbers).
The step change means
The gaming machine Nb2, characterized in that the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as to correspond to the predetermined order.

According to the gaming machine Nb2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Nb1. That is, the identification information is arranged in the rotating means so as to form a predetermined order. Then, the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as to correspond to the predetermined order by the stage changing means. As a result, when the previous stage identification information is changed stepwise so as to correspond to a predetermined order, the second identification information that can give a greater benefit to the player than the first identification information can be changed stepwise. By not displaying the intermediate stage of the stage identification information, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the arousal of the game due to the player feeling that the profit that can be given to the player has decreased, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine Nb1 or Nb2
The rotating means
Alternate arrangement means for alternately arranging the first identification information and the second identification information (for example, the portion of "1" → "2" → "3" or "5" → "6" → "7" → The gaming machine Nb3 characterized by having (the part of "8").

According to the gaming machine Nb3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Nb1 or Nb2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the alternating arrangement means of the rotating means, the first identification information and the second identification information are arranged alternately. As a result, the first identification information and the second identification information appear alternately in the dynamic display, and the first identification information is changed stepwise while increasing the variation of the game. This is because the player feels that the profit that can be given to the player has decreased by not showing the intermediate stage of the pre-stage identification information that can be changed step by step in the second identification information that can give a larger profit to the player. It has the effect of suppressing the arousal of the game and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines Nb1 to Nb3
The step change means
At least, after the predetermined first pre-stage identification information, which is the pre-stage identification information, is displayed, the first pre-stage identification information can be rotated to form a part of the predetermined display result. The stage identification information is configured to be visible,
The step change means
The gaming machine Nb4, characterized in that the pre-stage identification information based on the second identification information is not displayed as the first pre-stage identification information.

According to the gaming machine Nb4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Nb1 to Nb3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, after at least the predetermined first pre-stage identification information, which is the pre-stage information, is displayed by the stage changing means, the first pre-stage identification information is rotated to form a part of the predetermined display result. The second pre-stage identification information to be obtained is configured to be able to appear. Then, the stage changing means is configured so that the pre-stage identification information by the second identification information does not appear as the first pre-stage identification information. As a result, when the previous stage identification information is changed stepwise, the second identification information that can give a greater benefit to the player than the first identification information can be changed stepwise, and the intermediate stage of the previous stage identification information that can be changed stepwise. By not making it appear, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the arousal of the game due to the player feeling that the profit that can be granted has decreased, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine Nb4
The step change means
The gaming machine Nb5 is characterized in that the pre-stage identification information based on the second pre-stage identification information can be displayed as the second pre-stage identification information.

According to the gaming machine Nb5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Nb4. That is, the stage changing means is configured to be able to display the pre-stage identification information by the second identification information as the second pre-stage identification information. When the second identification information can appear as the pre-stage identification information constituting a part of the predetermined display result, the pre-stage identification information by the second identification information, which has a large profit that can be given to the player, is displayed. While enriching the variation of the game, it has the effect of suppressing the arousal of the game and improving the interest of the game without thinking that the profit that the player can be granted has decreased.

In any of the gaming machines Nb1 to Nb5
The dynamic execution means is
When it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined display result does not appear, the previous stage identification information based on the second identification information is configured to be difficult to appear.
The gaming machine Nb6 is configured so that when the determination means determines that the predetermined display result appears, the previous stage identification information based on the second identification information can be easily displayed.

According to the gaming machine Nb6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Nb1 to Nb5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined display result does not appear by the dynamic execution means, the previous stage identification information by the second identification information is configured so as to be difficult to appear, and the predetermined display result is determined by the determination means. When it is determined that the display result of is displayed, the previous stage identification information based on the second identification information is easily displayed. This makes it possible to suggest the degree of expectation for a predetermined display result at the stage when the previous stage identification information appears, and when the previous stage identification information is changed step by step while increasing the variation of the game, the first step. It is said that the profit that can be given to the player is reduced by not showing the intermediate stage of the previous stage identification information that can be changed stepwise in the second identification information that can give the player a larger profit than the identification information. It has the effect of suppressing the arousal of the game by feeling and improving the interest of the game.

<Nc group: Excluding reach formation symbols based on identification information that triggers development production>
An acquisition means (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A dynamic execution means (for example, a display control device 114) that dynamically displays identification information in an effect means (for example, a drum display device 81) based on a determination result by the determination means.
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means.
The staging means
At least two or more rotating means (for example, left reel LR, middle reel CR and right reel RR) in which a plurality of types of the identification information are arranged, and
A rotation driving means (for example, a stepping motor 600) for rotating each of the rotating means, and
A drive control means for controlling the rotation drive means (for example, the MPU of the display control device 114) is provided.
The drive control means
A pre-stage identification means for displaying the pre-stage identification information forming a combination of the identification information in the previous stage of the predetermined display result (for example, “reach display”), and
A step change means (for example, the reach forming symbol is changed from "1" → "2" → "3"), which changes the previous step information step by step, is provided.
The identification information is
It is provided with development identification information (for example, a "chance" symbol) that can be pre-stage information by the pre-stage appearance means when it appears in the plurality of rotation means.
The step change means
The gaming machine Nc1 is characterized in that the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as not to include the previous stage identification information based on the development identification information while the previous stage identification information is being changed stepwise.

According to the gaming machine Nc1, special information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in the staging means, and the predetermined display result is displayed in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means. When issued, the player is given a predetermined game value. Here, the staging means is provided with at least two or more rotating means in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged, and the rotating means are rotated by the rotation driving means and rotated by the drive control means. The dynamic drive means is controlled. Further, the pre-stage identification information provided in the drive control means reveals the pre-stage identification information forming a combination of the pre-stage identification information of the predetermined display result, and the step change also provided in the drive control means. By means, the previous stage information is changed step by step. Here, when the identification information appears by a plurality of rotating means, the development identification information that can become the previous stage information by the previous stage appearance means is provided. Then, the combination of the previous stage information is changed so as not to include the previous stage information by the development identification information while the previous stage identification information is changed step by step by the stage change means. As a result, when the previous stage identification information is changed stepwise, the development identification information which is only a part of the previous stage identification information does not appear in the middle stage of the previous stage identification information which can be changed stepwise. Even though the previous stage identification information has appeared, it is possible to suppress the arousal of the game due to the appearance of the development identification information making the progress of the production unclear, and to improve the interest of the game. effective.

In the gaming machine Nc1, the rotating means is
The identification information is arranged so as to form a predetermined order (for example, ascending or descending order of numbers).
The step change means
The gaming machine Nc2, characterized in that the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as to correspond to the predetermined order.

According to the gaming machine Nc2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Nc1. That is, the identification information is arranged in the rotating means so as to form a predetermined order. Then, the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed so as to correspond to the predetermined order by the stage changing means. As a result, when the previous stage identification information is changed stepwise so as to correspond to a predetermined order, the development identification information which is only a part of the previous stage identification information can be changed stepwise in the middle stage of the previous stage identification information. By not making the appearance of the game, the development identification information appears, but the progress of the production becomes unclear due to the appearance of the development identification information. It has the effect of being able to plan.

In the gaming machine Nc1 or Nc2
The step change means
At least, after the predetermined first pre-stage identification information, which is the pre-stage identification information, is displayed, the first pre-stage identification information can be rotated to form a part of the predetermined display result. The stage identification information is configured to be visible,
The step change means
The gaming machine Nc3, characterized in that the pre-stage identification information based on the development identification information is not displayed as the first pre-stage identification information.

According to the gaming machine Nc3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Nc1 or Nc2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, after at least the predetermined first pre-stage identification information, which is the pre-stage information, is displayed by the stage changing means, the first pre-stage identification information is rotated to form a part of the predetermined display result. The second pre-stage identification information to be obtained is configured to be able to appear. Then, the stage change means is configured so that the pre-stage identification information by the development identification information does not appear as the first pre-stage identification information. As a result, when the previous stage identification information is changed stepwise, the development identification information which is only a part of the previous stage identification information does not appear in the middle stage of the previous stage identification information which can be changed stepwise. Even though the stage identification information has appeared, the development identification information has the effect of suppressing the arousal of the game due to the obscure progress of the production due to the appearance, and improving the interest of the game. There is.

In the gaming machine Nc3
The step change means
The gaming machine Nc4, characterized in that the stage identification information based on the development identification information is not displayed as the second stage identification information.

According to the gaming machine Nc4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Nc3. That is, the stage change means is configured so that the pre-stage identification information based on the development identification information does not appear as the second pre-stage identification information. As a result, when the pre-stage identification information is changed step-by-step, the development identification information that is only a part of the pre-stage identification information can be changed step-by-step to the second pre-stage identification that is the final stage of the pre-stage identification information. By not making the information appear, even though the stage identification information has appeared, the development identification information appears, which makes the progress of the production unclear, which suppresses the arousal of the game and improves the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to plan.

In any of the gaming machines Nc1 to Nc4
The step change means
The gaming machine Nc5 is characterized in that when the previous stage identification information is changed stepwise, the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed stepwise by omitting the development identification information.

According to the gaming machine Nc5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Nc1 to Nc4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the previous stage identification information is changed stepwise by the step change means, the combination of the previous stage identification information is changed stepwise by omitting the development identification information. As a result, when the previous stage identification information is changed stepwise, the development identification information that is only a part of the previous stage identification information is omitted from the previous stage identification information that can be changed stepwise, and the previous stage identification information is changed. As a result, even though the previous stage identification information has appeared, it is possible to suppress the arousal of the game due to the appearance of the development identification information making the progress of the production unclear, and to improve the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In any of the gaming machines Nc1 to Nc5
The dynamic display means
With the predetermined first production,
The second effect, in which the predetermined display result is more likely to appear than the first effect, can be executed.
The dynamic execution means is
The gaming machine Nc6, characterized in that the second effect is executed when the development identification information appears in all the rotating means.

According to the gaming machine Nc6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines Nc1 to Nc5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display means executably configures a predetermined first effect and a second effect in which a predetermined display result is more likely to appear than the first effect, and the development identification information is provided in all the rotating means. When it appears, the second effect is executed by the dynamic execution means. This creates a playability in which a second effect is executed in which a predetermined display result is easily displayed depending on whether or not the development identification information appears in all the rotating means, and the development is developed in all the rotating means. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to whether or not the identification information appears.

In the gaming machine Nc6
The dynamic execution means is
The gaming machine Nc7 is characterized in that it does not develop into the second effect when the development identification information appears as the pre-stage identification information.

According to the gaming machine Nc7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Nc6. That is, when the development identification information appears as the previous stage identification information by the dynamic execution means, it is configured so as not to develop into the second effect. That is, unless the development identification information appears in all the rotating means, the second effect is not developed. This creates a playability in which a second effect is executed in which a predetermined display result is easily displayed depending on whether or not the development identification information appears in all the rotating means, and the development is developed in all the rotating means. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to whether or not the identification information appears.

<Group O: Delay synchronization control of the left symbol row at full rotation and scale adjustment with sound>
Conventionally, a lottery such as a win is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. For example, when a winner is won, a game in which a predetermined game medium is paid out to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. There is a machine.

This gaming machine is provided with a display unit that can change a pattern or the like that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine, and a directing means such as a light emitting unit that can change a single color or a light emitting color. It is configured to enhance the effect of the effect during the game by changing the display mode of the effect means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-126296)).

For such a gaming machine, in order to improve the interest of the game, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game by increasing the effect of the above-mentioned staging means, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the O group has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to the gaming.

Acquisition means (for example, reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring lottery information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied.
A determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A dynamic execution means (for example, a display control device 114) that dynamically displays identification information in a display means (for example, a drum display device 81) based on a determination result by the determination means.
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means.
The display means is
Three rotating members (for example, left reel LR, middle reel CR, and right reel RR) in which a plurality of types of the identification information are arranged, and
Rotational driving means (for example, a motor) for rotationally driving each of the rotating members, and
A drive control means for controlling the rotation drive means (for example, the MPU of the display control device 114) is provided.
The drive control means
At least, in a state where the identification information of the two rotating members is aligned, the two member synchronous driving means (for example, the symbols of the middle reel CR and the right reel RR are aligned and synchronized) for driving the rotating members while synchronizing them are synchronized. Fluctuation) and
The rotating member is synchronized with the identification information of the rotating member that is rotationally driven while being synchronized by the two member synchronous driving means and the identification information of the remaining one rotating member. It is equipped with a three-member synchronous drive means (for example, synchronous fluctuation by aligning the symbols of each reel LR, CR, RR).
It is characterized by being provided with a music synchronization means (for example, music output at the time of temporary stop at full rotation) that outputs music in accordance with the rotation drive of the rotation member that is synchronously driven by the three member synchronization drive means. Game machine O0 to play.

According to the gaming machine O0, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in the display means. Further, when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means, the player is given a predetermined game value. Here, the display means is provided with three rotary members in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged, the rotary members are rotationally driven by the rotary drive means, and the rotary drive means is driven by the drive control means. Be controlled. Then, in the drive control means, the rotating members are driven while being synchronized by the two-member synchronous drive means with at least the identification information of the two rotating members aligned, and the two-member synchronous drive means is used to synchronize the two members. The rotating member is driven in synchronization with the identification information of the rotating member that is rotationally driven while being synchronized by the driving means and the identification information of the remaining one rotating member. Here, the music is output by the music synchronization means in accordance with the rotational drive of the rotating members that are synchronously driven by the three member synchronous drive means. As a result, it is possible to execute a powerful production that is rhythmic and has a good tempo, and there is an effect that the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

An acquisition means (for example, the reserved ball execution area 203f) for acquiring special information (for example, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) that makes a determination based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A dynamic execution means (for example, a display control device 114) that dynamically displays identification information in an effect means (for example, a drum display device 81) based on a determination result by the determination means.
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player when a predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means.
The staging means
At least two or more rotating means (for example, left reel LR, middle reel CR and right reel RR) in which a plurality of types of the identification information are arranged, and
A rotation driving means (for example, a stepping motor 600) for rotating each of the rotating means, and
A drive control means for controlling the rotation drive means (for example, the MPU of the display control device 114) is provided.
The drive control means
A first rotating means for rotating at least one of the rotating means (for example, rotating the middle reel CR and the right reel RR).
A second rotating means (for example, rotating the left reel LR) for rotating the other rotating means after the rotating means of 1 is rotated by the first rotating means is provided.
Music output means for outputting music so as to correspond to the rotation of the rotation means rotated by the first rotation means and the second rotation means (for example, music output at the time of temporary stop at full rotation). The gaming machine O1 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine O1, special information is acquired by the acquisition means when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination is made by the determination means based on the special information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic execution means dynamically displays the identification information in the staging means, and the predetermined display result appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic execution means. If so, the player is given a predetermined game value. Here, the staging means is provided with at least two or more rotating means in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged, the rotating means are rotated by the rotation driving means, and the rotation driving is driven by the drive control means. Means are controlled. Further, at least one rotating means is rotated by the first rotating means provided in the drive control means, and one by the first rotating means by the second rotating means also provided in the drive control means. After the rotating means is rotated, the other rotating means are rotated. Here, the music output means outputs the music so as to correspond to the rotation of the rotation means rotated by the first rotation means and the second rotation means. As a result, the music is output so as to correspond to the rotation of the rotating means to be rotated, and the effect of unity between the rotated rotating means and the output music is performed, so that different timings are obtained. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a sense of discomfort due to the rotation of the rotating means rotated by the above, and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

In the gaming machine O1
The first rotating means includes at least two means synchronous rotating means (for example, a middle reel CR and a right reel RR) that rotate while synchronizing the predetermined first identification information in the two rotating means. Synchronous fluctuation with the same pattern), with
The second rotating means is
The three-means synchronous rotation in which the first identification information rotated while being synchronized by the two-means synchronous rotation means and the first identification information in the other rotating means are synchronized and rotated in the same state. It is equipped with a moving means (for example, synchronous fluctuation by aligning the symbols of each reel LR, CR, RR).
The music output means is
Music synchronization means (for example, at the time of full rotation) that outputs music so as to correspond to the start of rotation of the rotation means that is synchronously rotated by the two means synchronous rotation means and the three means synchronous rotation means. The gaming machine O2 is characterized by having (music output) at the time of temporary stop.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine O1, the following effects are played. That is, the two means synchronous rotation means provided in the first rotation means are rotated while synchronizing at least the predetermined first identification information in the two rotation means. Further, the first identification information rotated while being synchronized by the two means synchronous rotation means by the three means synchronous rotation means provided in the second rotation means, and the first identification information in the other rotation means. It is rotated while synchronizing with the same state. Then, the music is output by the music synchronization means provided in the music output means so as to correspond to the start of rotation of the rotation means that is synchronously rotated by the two-means synchronous rotation means and the three-means synchronous rotation means. Will be done. As a result, the music is output so as to correspond to the rotation of the rotating means that is rotated in synchronization with each other, and the effect of unity between the rotating means that is rotated in synchronization and the output music is executed. By doing so, there is an effect that the sense of incongruity that may occur due to the rotation of the rotating means that is rotated at different timings can be suppressed, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2
The first rotating means is
The gaming machine O3, characterized in that at least one of the rotating means is rotated from a state in which all the rotating means are not rotated.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines O1 or O2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least one rotating means is rotated by the first rotating means from the state in which all the rotating means are not rotated. As a result, the music is output so as to correspond to the start of rotation of the rotating means of 1, and the music is output so as to correspond to the rotation of the rotating means to be rotated, respectively. By performing an effect with a sense of unity between the moving means and the output music, it is possible to suppress the discomfort that may occur due to the rotation of the rotating means that is rotated at different timings, and to increase the degree of attention to the game. , Has the effect.

In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3
The music output means is
A game characterized in that a predetermined predetermined music is continuously output from the start of rotation of the rotating means by the first rotating means to the timing at which the rotation of all the rotating means is stopped. Machine O4.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines O1 to O3, the following effects are played. That is, the music output means continuously outputs a predetermined predetermined music from the start of rotation of the rotation means by the first rotation means to the timing at which the rotation of all the rotation means is stopped. As a result, the predetermined music is output so as to correspond to the start of rotation of the rotation means of 1, and the output of the predetermined music is continued until the timing when the rotation of all the rotation means is stopped. It is possible to create a sense of unity between the rotation of the music and the output of the music. As a result, the sense of unity has the effect of suppressing the sense of discomfort that may occur due to the rotation of the rotating means that is rotated at different timings, and increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In the gaming machine O4
The music output means is
The first sound constituting the predetermined musical piece is output at the timing when the rotating means is started to rotate by the first rotating means.
The gaming machine O5, which is a sound constituting the predetermined musical piece at the timing when the rotating means is started to rotate by the second rotating means, and is characterized by outputting a second sound different from the first sound. ..

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines O1 to O4, the following effects are played. That is, the music output means outputs the first sound constituting the predetermined music at the timing when the rotation means is started by the first rotation means, and the rotation means is started by the second rotation means. A second sound, which is a sound constituting a predetermined music at a certain timing and is different from the first sound, is output. As a result, the first sound constituting the predetermined music is output so as to correspond to the start of rotation of one rotating means, and the predetermined music is configured to correspond to the start of rotation of the other rotating means. By outputting two sounds, it is possible to create a sense of unity by completing the music so as to correspond to the rotation of the rotating means. As a result, the sense of unity has the effect of suppressing the sense of discomfort that may occur due to the rotation of the rotating means that is rotated at different timings, and increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In the gaming machine O5
The music output means is
To output the first sound and the second sound in accordance with a beat (for example, the first beat and the second beat in one bar) at a predetermined tempo (for example, a quarter beat of BPM120). The featured game machine O6.

According to the gaming machine O6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the music output means outputs the first sound and the second sound in accordance with the time signature at a predetermined tempo. As a result, the first sound constituting the predetermined music is output in accordance with the time signature at the predetermined tempo so as to correspond to the start of rotation of one rotating means, and the rotation of the other rotating means corresponds to the start. By outputting the second sound that composes the predetermined music according to the beat at the predetermined tempo, the music of the predetermined tempo is completed so as to correspond to the rotation of the rotating means, thereby creating a sense of unity of the music. be able to. As a result, the sense of unity has the effect of suppressing the sense of discomfort that may occur due to the rotation of the rotating means that is rotated at different timings, and increasing the degree of attention to the game.

In any of the gaming machines O5
The music output means is
A gaming machine O7 characterized in that a special sound (for example, a chord) that produces a predetermined harmony between the first sound and the second sound is formed.

According to the gaming machine O7, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O5. That is, the music output means forms a special sound that produces a predetermined harmony between the first sound and the second sound. As a result, the first sound constituting the special sound is output so as to correspond to the start of rotation of one rotating means, and the special sound is configured to correspond to the start of rotation of the other rotating means. It is possible to create a sense of unity by outputting two sounds and completing a special sound having a predetermined harmony so as to correspond to the rotation of the rotating means. As a result, the sense of unity has the effect of suppressing the sense of discomfort that may occur due to the rotation of the rotating means that is rotated at different timings, and increasing the degree of attention to the game.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines A0 to A9, any one of the gaming machines B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machine B0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machine C0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machine D0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machine E0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machine F0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machine G0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machine H0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machine I0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machine J0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, K0, L0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machine K0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, L0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machine L0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, M0, N0, O0. The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machine M0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, N0, O0. The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machine N0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, O0. The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machine O0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0, C0, D0, E0, F0, G0, H0, I0, J0, K0, L0, M0, N0. The configuration limited to 1 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines A0 to A9, the gaming machines B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines B0 to B8, the gaming machines A0 to A9, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines C0 to C11, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines D0 to D8, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines E0 to E7, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines F0 to F6, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines G0 to G7, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, H0 to H6, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines H0 to H6, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, I0 to A configuration limited to any one of I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines I0 to I7, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H6, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines J0 to J5, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H6, I0 to I7, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines K0 to K5, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines L0 to L4, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines M0 to M4, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, A configuration limited to any one of F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, and O0 to O7 may be applied. ..

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines O0 to O7, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to A configuration limited to any one of H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, and Nc1 to Nc7 may be applied. ..

It should be noted that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine A0.

It should be noted that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine B0.

It should be noted that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines C1 to C11 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine C0.

It should be noted that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine D0.

It should be noted that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines E1 to E7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine E0.

It should be noted that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines F1 to F6 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine F0.

It should be noted that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines G1 to G7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine G0.

It should be noted that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine H0.

It should be noted that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines I1 to I7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine I0.

It should be noted that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines J1 to J5 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine J0.

It should be noted that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine K0.

It should be noted that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines L1 to L4 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine L0.

It should be noted that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine M0.

It should be noted that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines Na1 to Na7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine N0.

It should be noted that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines Nb1 to Nb6 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine N0.

It should be noted that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines Nc1 to Nc7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine N0.

It should be noted that the configuration limited to any one of the gaming machines O1 to O7 may be applied to the configuration of the gaming machine O0.

In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any of M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area at the operating port. The identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the prize is won (or passed through the operating port). Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A0 to A9, B0 to B8, C0 to C11, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F6, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I7, J0 to J5, K0 to K5, L0 to L4, In any of M0 to M4, N0, Na1 to Na7, Nb1 to Nb6, Nc1 to Nc7, and O0 to O7, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine Z3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
60a Board surface first decorative symbol group 60b Board surface second decorative symbol group 81 Drum display device (part of display means, part of effect means, part of second effect means)
110 Main control device 113 Audio lamp control device (part of sequential lighting means, part of music output means, part of music synchronization means)
114 Display control device (part of dynamic execution means, part of drive control means, part of previous stage appearance means, part of stage change means)
201 MPU (part of judgment means)
203f Hold ball execution area (part of acquisition means)
221 MPU (part of suggestion information lottery means)
222e Light guide plate lighting pattern table 222f Confirmation lamp lighting pattern table 223d Light guide pattern lottery counter 223e Confirmation lamp timing lottery counter 310 Confirmation lamp unit (part of the second effect means)
311 Confirmation lamp (part of the second staging means, part of the second light emitting means)
400 Light guide unit (part of directing means, part of first directing means)
410 Front light guide plate (part of the first staging means, part of the second light guide means)
411 2nd decorative design group 412 3rd decorative design (part of 2nd suggestion information)
413 4th decorative pattern group (part of 1st suggestion information, 2nd predetermined information)
414 Lower LED unit (part of light emitting means, part of first light emitting means)
414c Front lower LED (part of the second light emitting means)
414d Front lower condensing lens 415 Front right LED unit (part of the second staging means)
415c Front right LED (part of the first light emitting means, part of the second light emitting means)
415d Front right condensing lens (part of condensing means)
416c Front left LED (part of the first light emitting means)
416d Front left condensing lens (part of condensing means)
420 Rear light guide plate (part of light guide means, part of second staging means, part of first light guide means)
421 1st decorative symbol group (part of predetermined information, part of 3rd suggestion information, part of 1st predetermined information)
422 Rear upper LED unit (part of the first staging means)
422c Rear upper LED (part of the first light emitting means)
423 Rear upper diffusing lens (part of diffusing means, part of multi-directional irradiation means)
424 Rear lower LED (part of light emitting part, part of first light emitting part, part of second light emitting part, part of third light emitting part)
425 Rear lower diffusing lens (part of diffusing means, part of multi-directional irradiation means)
425a Left direction diffuser (part of first direction irradiation part)
425b Front direction diffuser (part of second direction irradiation part)
425c Right direction diffuser (part of third direction irradiation part)
430 Display area forming member 431 Central opening 432 Lens cut (part of cover)
C1 jackpot random number counter (part of special information)
CR middle reel (part of rotating means, part of common rotating means, part of second rotating means, part of three means synchronous rotating means)
LR left reel (part of rotating means, part of non-common rotating means, part of first rotating means, part of two means synchronous rotating means)
RR right reel (part of rotating means, part of common rotating means, part of first rotating means, part of two means synchronous rotating means)
600 Stepping motor (part of rotary drive means)

Claims (1)

As the game progresses, the first effect means for performing the first effect by the light emitted from at least a predetermined direction, and the first effect means.
A second effect means provided on the predetermined direction side of the first effect means, which is different from the first effect as the game progresses, and which performs a second effect of emitting light.
When the second effect is started by the second effect during the execution of the first effect by the first effect means, the effect of the first effect is performed during a predetermined period during the execution of the second effect. The first staging reduction means to reduce the range and execute
A gaming machine comprising: a reduction canceling means for canceling the reduction of the effect range of the first effect by the first effect reducing means after the end of the predetermined period.

Images